TfC-Cgy Capilano College 1981-82 Calendar capilano college Table of Contents Why Capilano College? 1 C a l e n d a r for 1981-82 2 Admission 3 Registration 4 C h a n g i n g Registration Status 5 Fees 6 G e n e r a l C o u r s e Information 7 C a m p u s Services 1° Financial A i d s & A w a r d s 1 5 1 9 Academic Studies/University Transfer Programs Career/Vocational Programs 57 General Awards 124 Transfer G u i d e 1 H o w to Get T h e r e 140 29 Parking & Campus Map 141 Index 142 College Board & Administration 144 • • • » capilano — college Lynnmour Campus & Administrative O f f i c e s 2055 P u r c e l l W a y North Vancouver, B . C . VJ7 3H5 T e l e p h o n e (604) 986-1911 Squamish Learning Centre 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e a n d 37827 S e c o n d A v e n u e P . O . B o x 1531, S q u a m i s h , B . C . V O N 3 G 0 T e l e p h o n e (604) 892-5322 Sechelt Learning Centre 1360 Inlet A v e n u e P . O . B o x 1609, S e c h e l t , B . C . VON 3 A 0 T e l e p h o n e (604) 885-9310 Downtown Education Centre 549 H o w e Street V a n c o u v e r , B . C . V 6 C 2L6 T e l e p h o n e (604) 682-0301 P u b l i s h e d by: Information S e r v i c e s Design: Lynn Zimmerman Photographs: Media Production Centre T y p e s e t t i n g & Layout: P r o f e s s i o n a l G r a p h i c s & T r a n s l a t i o n Ltd. Why Come to Capilano College? Before you make any decision about coming to Capilano College, we hope you wiil give consideration to both our strengths and our shortcomings. This is not a college for all people, but we have a great deal to offer to many. Ours is not a typical college student body. While we have almost 2,500 full-time students, mostly recent high school graduates who are similar to students at any other college or university, we also have even more students who may be part-time, older, or working as well as attending college, whose interests are not those of conventional college students — except that they, too, want the best possible education. We welcome all who have a mature desire to learn, and we extend a special welcome to part-time and women students and wish to assure you that you should not be intimidated by the prospect of returning to school — you will have plenty of company. We believe that it is our blend of full-time and part-time younger and older, women and men that gives Capilano a special character and a special strength Capilano's programs are very diverse, but all have a common objective of high quality. Two-year Career Programs are rigorous, but offer excellent career opportunities for graduates. Our Academic Studies Program offers a full set of first and second year courses equivalent to those provided at university and most courses are transferable to B.C. universities; students seeking a solid general education will be challenged by Academic Studies. These courses may be taken for credit, or on an audit (credit free) basis without the pressures of assignments and exams. We offer as well a number of Vocational Programs of less than a year's duration which provide graduates with employable skills. The Basic Education programs train adults who have not completed secondary school with the skills necessary to begin post-secondary programs. Through Community Education we offer a variety of courses and activities which do not carry credit for a college diploma, but which meet a whole range of interests in the community Our programs for Business and Industry offer training opportunities which assist corporations and community agencies in improving their performance. Capilano's style is distinctive. We have no large classes, and we attempt to give each student individual attention. Tutorials, workshops, and other methods of small-group instruction are favoured. Laboratories are well-equipped and small. Above all, we have a staff constantly working to assist students in difficulty. Capilano also has its shortcomings Many of our buildings are quite unspectacular, and some are less than satisfactory. Although we have a Housing Service, we do not have residence facilities; we have no on-campus theatre, and therefore use community facilities; and our recreational facilities are inadequate. The core of the college is the Lynnmour Campus in North Vancouver — a lovely forested site, but not the easiest of access. Some students find the college too large for their tastes (a student body of 4.000 can be impersonal), but others find it too small; those who are self-starters tend to find it just right. Capilano also has Learning Centres in Sechelt and Squamish and offers courses in many other locations in Howe Sound, on the Sunshine Coast and in North & West Vancouver. You do not need to commute from campus to campus — it is Capilano's desire to reach out from our main campus when there is a sufficient demand for our services. In the final analysis, Capilano is a serious place for serious students of different ages, backgrounds, interests and goals. Capilano is also a friendly place because our people- are helpful to one another And Capilano people have a sense of humour which allows them to accept the less attractive features of the coflege while capitalizing on its real strengths. Welcome. Programs are, of course, no better than the people who develop and run them. Capilano is very proud of its instructional staff — dynamic, highly specialized, committed to quality instruction and service. In addition to excellent instruction, we provide a number of services accessible to all students who need support of different kinds — a first-rate Library and Media Centre, a Women's Resource Centre, Learning Assistance, Counselling, Placement and Financial Aid, among others. 1 Calendar for 1981-82 JULY s F T s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ] M 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 M T w LU s M T w T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 AUGUST s FEBRUARY 2 3 4 5 6 7 IT] 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 SEPTEMBER MARCH T w T F LH s w T F s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 M F O R 1981-1982 1981 F A L L TERM T s M T w T F S 1 s M T w T July 13-August 14: Mail Registration (for North S h o r e , H o w e S o u n d a n d Sechelt Students). September 1: C o u r s e C h a n g e D a y . 1:00 - 3:00 p.m. (for students w h o registered by mail, but need to alter their c o u r s e registration). September 1: In-Person Registration. 3:00 - 9:00 p.m. (Faculty Advisors Present.) September 2: In-Person Registration. 2:00 - 9:00 p.m. (Faculty A d v i s o r s Present.) s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ]15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 M CALENDAR JANUARY F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 m 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 September 7: L a b o u r d a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . September 8: In-Person Registration. 2:00 - 9:00 p.m. (Faculty A d v i s o r s Present). September 9: C l a s s e s C o m m e n c e for all D i v i s i o n s . October 5: Last d a y to A D D a c o u r s e , or c h a n g e status from AUDIT T O CREDIT. October 8: Deferred fees due. Last d a y to receive 80% refund of tuition fees. October 12: T h a n k s g i v i n g D a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . November 9: Last d a y to W I T H D R A W from a c o u r s e , or c h a n g e status from C R E D I T T O A U D I T , or c h a n g e sections. November 11: R e m e m b r a n c e Day. C o l l e g e C l o s e d . November 16-December 10: Mail Registration for S p r i n g Term (for North Shore, Howe S o u n d a n d Sechelt Students). December 14-18: E x a m i n a t i o n P e r i o d for A c a d e m i c Division. December 18: Last d a y of c l a s s e s for all D i v i s i o n s . December 25: C h r i s t m a s D a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . OCTOBER s F T s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ( j j 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1? 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29. 30 31 M T December 26: C o l l e g e C l o s e d . APRIL w s M T w T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8|~9~|l0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 221 23 |24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1982 S P R I N G TERM January 1: N e w Years D a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . January 5: First day of instruction for V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s . January 5: C o u r s e C h a n g e Day. 1:00 - 3:00 p.m. (For students who have registered by mail, but need to alter their c o u r s e registrations.) January 6: In-Person Registration. 2:00 - 9.00 p.m. (Faculty A d v i s o r s Present.) NOVEMBER MAY M T w T F s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lORTi 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 s s M T w January 7: In-Person Registration. 2:00 - 9:00 p.m. T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 January 11: C l a s s e s c o m m e n c e for C a r e e r a n d A c a d e m i c Divisions. February 8: Last day to A D D a c o u r s e , or c h a n g e status from AUDIT T O CREDIT. February 11: Deferred fees d u e . Last d a y to receive 8 0 % refund of tuition fees. February 18-19: Mid-term break. N o c l a s s e s s c h e d u l e d . March 8: Last d a y to W I T H D R A W from a c o u r s e or c h a n g e DECEMBER s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13l M l 15| 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 s 2 M T w T from C R E D I T T O A U D I T , or c h a n g e s e c t i o n s . JUNE F s M T w T F S 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 6 April 9: G o o d Friday. C o l l e g e C l o s e d . April 12: Easter M o n d a y . C o l l e g e C l o s e d . April 19-28: E x a m i n a t i o n P e r i o d for A c a d e m i c D i v i s i o n . April 28: Last day of c l a s s e s for all Divisions. 1982 S U M M E R TERM April: S u m m e r Term Mail Registration begins o n a c o n t i n u o u s basis a n d c o u n s e l l i n g services are available. Admission Who is Eligible for Admission? A n y p e r s o n w h o is 18 or older a n d w h o is a C a n a d i a n citizen or L a n d e d Immigrant is eligible for a d m i s s i o n . P e r s o n s under 18 years of age are also eligible if they are in at least o n e of the following categories: i. T h e y have a B . C . S e c o n d a r y S c h o o l graduation certificate or equivalent educational record: ii. They are s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l students attending a s c h o o l in the College Region and have the written recommendation of their s c h o o l principal: iii. P e r s o n s at least 16 years of age w h o c a n satisfy a C o l l e g e counsellor that they possess an interest in, and an aptitude for, a vocation for w h i c h the C o l l e g e provides instruction, may be eligible to enter the related C o l l e g e V o c a t i o n a l program. Admission of Persons from Other Countries P e r s o n s from other countries will be eligible for a d m i s s i o n if: i. T h e y c a n present d o c u m e n t a t i o n that they are L a n d e d Immigrants in C a n a d a . ii. T h e y have been s p o n s o r e d through an intergovernmental agreement. iii. T h e y have w o n an a c a d e m i c c o m p e t i t i o n for a place in an educational institution in British C o l u m b i a . 3. O n c e your a p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n has been p r o c e s s e d , y o u will receive a "Permit to R e g i s t e r " from the Registrar's Office by mail (see page 4 for Registration procedure). Admission to Howe Sound and Sechelt Courses E a c h term C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers a n u m b e r of c o u r s e s in H o w e S o u n d and the S u n s h i n e C o a s t . S t u d e n t s w h o wish to be admitted to these c o u r s e s s h o u l d contact the S q u a m i s h C e n t r e (38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e , 892-5322) or the S e c h e l t C e n t r e (1360 Inlet A v e n u e , 885-9310) for details of c o u r s e offerings. A d m i s s i o n p r o c e d u r e s are as outlined above. Student Number - Identification Card W h e n a student is first admitted to the C o l l e g e s/he is a s s i g n e d a permanent student number. T h i s n u m b e r controls the Student's R e c o r d , Statement of G r a d e s a n d C o l l e g e Identification C a r d . T h e student is requested to familiarize him/herself with this number. T o use the Library S e r v i c e s of the C o l l e g e , to sign out audio-visual materials or to vote in Student S o c i e t y elections, a student must have a C o l l e g e Identification C a r d . T h e s e cards will be available from the Registrar's Office two weeks after the b e g i n n i n g of classes. If this c a r d is not received within two weeks, students s h o u l d contact the Registrar's Office. If the card is lost, a duplicate may be obtained from the Registrar's Office at the cost of $2.00. When to Apply for Admission A p p l i c a t i o n for a d m i s s i o n to the c o l l e g e may be made at any time during the year, i n c l u d i n g Registration periods, (see page 5) Language Requirement A p p l i c a n t s are required to be functional in the E n g l i s h language. T h e C o l l e g e reserves the right to assess the c o m petence of applicants in the E n g l i s h language before granting admission. How to Apply for Courses or Programs On the Lynnmour Campus 1. O b t a i n an "Application for A d r n i s s i o n " form from the Registrar's Office. If y o u n e e d a s s i s t a n c e in c o m p l e t i n g your Application for A d m i s s i o n , you may arrange a meeting with the C o l l e g e A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r or a C o u n s e l l o r by c a l l i n g the C o u n s e l l i n g office at 986-1911, local 298. P e r s o n s w i s h i n g to enter a C A R E E R P R O G R A M must have an interview with the C a r e e r C o o r d i n a t o r before being admitted. Individuals will not be refused a d m i s s i o n to the C o l l e g e but they may not be admitted to particular C a r e e r programs. P e r s o n s wishing to enter full-time or part-time programs of studies are advised to c o n s u l t with a c o u n s e l l o r a n d / o r instructor before a p p l y i n g to the C o l l e g e . 2. C o m p l e t e the application form a n d bring or mail it to the Registrar's Office. Include with y o u r application form any former e d u c a t i o n records w h i c h are required, s u c h as B . C . S e c o n d a r y S c h o o l G r a d u a t i o n certificate. 3 Registration O n c e y o u have received a "Permit to Register", y o u may select y o u r c o u r s e s a n d register. P a y m e n t of fees is required at the time of registration. When to Register T h e Mail Registration period is from J u l y 13 to A u g u s t 14 for the Fall Term and N o v e m b e r 16 to D e c e m b e r 10 for the Spring Term. Returning students and college region residents are the only o n e s w h o m a y register in this period. T h e In-Person Registration period is A u g u s t 31 to S e p t e m b e r 2 for Fall T e r m and J a n u a r y 5 to J a n u a r y 7 for S p r i n g Term. All new students with a "Permit to R e g i s t e r " and r e t u r n i n g s t u d e n t s w h o d i d not r e g i s t e r d u r i n g mail registration may register at these times. " R e s i d e n t s " a n d "returning students" are d e f i n e d as: Resident: A person w h o has lived in the official C o l l e g e region (North V a n c o u v e r , W e s t V a n c o u v e r , H o w e S o u n d , or S u n s h i n e Coast) for at least four m o n t h s as of the first day of the term for w h i c h a p p l i c a t i o n is made. R e t u r n i n g Student: A n y student w h o has registered for. a n d has attended, credit c l a s s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . R e t u r n i n g students w h o have been a c a d e m i c a l l y d i s q u a l i f i e d in the previous semester s h o u l d c o n s u l t a c o u n s e l l o r about eligibility. How to Register T h e registration p r o c e s s differs d e p e n d i n g on p r o g r a m and l o c a t i o n : 1. For Academic Programs and Courses at Lynnmour a. O b t a i n R e g i s t r a t i o n f o r m s a n d t i m e t a b l e s f r o m the Registrar's Office. T i m e t a b l e s giving the times of c o u r s e offerings, room n u m b e r s a n d instructors are available a p p r o x i m a t e l y seven weeks prior to e a c h term. b. Those students who wish to enrol in English and Humanities in the a c a d e m i c division must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h Placement Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students w h o have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h Placement Test must take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S c r e e n i n g Examination before registering for any of these c o u r s e s . S c h e d u l e s of English S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s will be posted in the Registration area, Student Info C e n t r e and the H u m a n i t i e s Division. c. Return the c o m p l e t e d form either during Mail or In-Person registration. 2. For Career Programs and Courses a. Obtain registration forms and timetables from the Registrar's Office b. A d m i s s i o n s c r e e n i n g begins at least four months before Fall registration and two months before S p r i n g registration. T h e r e is limited s p a c e in most C a r e e r programs so a d m i s s i o n is limited to places available. Admitted students wishing to register s h o u l d c h e c k actual a d v a n c e registration times with the appropriate p r o g r a m coordinator. A d v a n c e registration for C a r e e r students c a n be in C a r e e r courses only; registration for A c a d e m i c courses ("electives" to C a r e e r students) c a n only take place during regular registration for the A c a d e m i c c o u r s e s . c. S u b m i t r e g i s t r a t i o n a p p l i c a t i o n s to the a p p r o p r i a t e program c o o r d i n a t o r for approval. For new students this will normally involve an interview a n d c o u n s e l l i n g . d. Registration c a n often be c o m p l e t e d prior to the normal mail registration period, however registrants w h o have been a c c e p t e d before mail registration, but w h o have not c o m p l e t e d their advance registration (by fee payment), . 4 must submit their approved registration forms (with fees) to the Registrar's Office either d u r i n g Mail or In-Person registration. 3. For Vocational Programs and Courses a. O b t a i n r e g i s t r a t i o n Registrar's Office. forms and timetables from the b. Register through the pertinent p r o g r a m c o o r d i n a t o r at any time before the b e g i n n i n g of the p r o g r a m . 4. For Credit Free Courses and Activities 5. S e e P a g e 6 of the c a l e n d a r . For Courses in Howe Sound and the Sunshine Coast a. O b t a i n registration forms a n d timetables from either the S q u a m i s h or S e c h e l t C e n t r e s . b. T h o s e students who wish to enrol in English and Humanities in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t English P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students w h o have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t P l a c e m e n t Test must take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n before registering for any of these c o u r s e s . S c h e d u l e s of English S c r e e n i n g E x a m s will be available through the S q u a m i s h L e a r n i n g C e n t r e , 892-5322, the Sechelt Learning Centre, 885-3814 or the C o l l e g e Registrar, 986-1911. local 213. c. Return the c o m p l e t e d registration form with attached to the appropriate centre. 6. For courses on more than one campus payment a. O b t a i n r e g i s t r a t i o n f o r m s a n d t i m e t a b l e s f r o m the Registrar's Office on the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s or from the S q u a m i s h or S e c h e l t C e n t r e . b. T h o s e students who wish to enrol in English and Humanities in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students w h o have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t Placement Test must take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n before registering for any of these c o u r s e s S c h e d u l e s of the E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m s will be available through the S q u a m i s h L e a r n i n g Centre, 892-5322, the S e c h e l t L e a r n i n g C e n t r e , 885-9310 or the C o l l e g e Registrar, 9 8 6 1 9 1 1 , local 213 T c. Return the c o m p l e t e d registration form with payment attached to the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s , either by mail or in person. Course Overload A c o u r s e overload is a registration for more than 16 credit hours of a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s or more than the full requirements specified for a C a r e e r P r o g r a m . Students may register at their d i s c r e t i o n for a c o u r s e overload up to a total of 21 credit h o u r s so long as they have d i s c u s s e d their need for/wish for an o v e r l o a d with a c o u n s e l lor. S c i e n c e students however, are a u t o m a t i c a l l y allowed to register for more than 16 credit hours, so long as the total credit hours d o e s not e x c e e d 21 credit h o u r s a n d d o e s not arise from registration in more than five c o u r s e s . Students may not register for a c o u r s e o v e r l o a d until after In-Person Registration. Downtown Education Centre For the c o n v e n i e n c e of North S h o r e residents w h o work in d o w n t o w n V a n c o u v e r , C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e has c o u r s e s and training s e s s i o n s on the seventh floor of the D o w n t o w n E d u c a t i o n C e n t r e at 549 H o w e Street. T h e T r a i n i n g for B u s i n e s s a n d Industry department is in this l o c a t i o n a n d c l a s s e s are held in the Centre t h r o u g h that d e p a r t m e n t a n d C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n . For further information on T . F . B . I , or the D o w n t o w n C e n t r e call 682-0301. Changing Registration Status Limitations of S p a c e C h a n g e of Name a n d / o r A d d r e s s The C o l l e g e cannot guarantee that s p a c e s will be available in all c o u r s e s or programs. Limitations of space, equipment and budget are likely to restrict the student's range of c h o i c e . The C o l l e g e , therefore, reserves the right to c a n c e l p r o g r a m s or limit registration in c o u r s e s . It is the responsibility of the student to inform the Registrar's Office of any c h a n g e s in h i s / h e r name, address, or p h o n e n u m b e r Withdrawing from a C o u r s e or C h a n g i n g Credit to Audit Status C o u r s e Verification Students may withdraw from a c o u r s e or c h a n g e from credit to audit status after the late registration period but before the final date to withdraw from a c o u r s e . T h i s must be d o n e on a C o u r s e C h a n g e F o r m s i g n e d by the instructor involved and submitted to the Registrar's Office. F o l l o w i n g the last day to add a c o u r s e the Registrar's Office will issue C o u r s e Verification forms to each student. It is the student's responsibility to c h e c k h i s / h e r list of c o u r s e s . If a student believes that there is an error in h i s / h e registration, s / h e must correct the errors with a C o u r s e C h a n g e F o r m before the final withdrawal date. Failure to correct the error may result in an " F " grade on the student's transcript (or no credit being granted for work done). r R e q u e s t s after the final date to withdraw from a c o u r s e require the a p p r o v a l of the Instructor, C o o r d i n a t o r and Registrar. A p p r o v a l will not normally be granted unless the r e c o r d s of the C o l l e g e are incorrect as the result of an error by the C o l l e g e , or the student is s i m p l y requesting a c h a n g e from one s e c t i o n to another of the same c o u r s e , or is transferring to a lower level c o u r s e at the request of the instructor, or the student is unable to meet the d e a d l i n e d date b e c a u s e of illness or e m e r g e n c y c i r c u m s t a n c e s . ' N o t e : A p p r o v a l for late a d d s a n d / o r late d r o p s will not be granted simply b e c a u s e the student was unaware of, or n e g l e c t e d to c o m p l y with, the C o l l e g e ' s registration policies and p r o c e d u r e s . A d d i n g or C h a n g i n g a C o u r s e A student may enrol in a c o u r s e , c h a n g e s e c t i o n s , or c h a n g e from audit to credit status (see page 5) after the late registration period but before the final date to a d d a c o u r s e . This must be d o n e on a C o u r s e C h a n g e F o r m , be s i g n e d by the instructors involved a n d submitted to the Registrar's Office. The addition of a c o u r s e or c h a n g e from audit to credit status after the final date to add a c o u r s e may only be d o n e in exceptional c i r c u m s t a n c e s and with the approval of the Instructor, C o o r d i n a t o r a n d Registrar. R e q u e s t s for s u c h c h a n g e s after the final date to a d d a c o u r s e s h o u l d be directed first to the Registrar Registration Schedule F O R From Right to Register A student w h o has not maintained a satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied permission to register in that p r o g r a m in a subsequent term. A C A D E M I C / C A R E E R F A L L 81 S T U D E N T S S P R I N G 82 Mail Registration J u l y 13 - A u g u s t 14 N o v e m b e r 16 - D e c e m b e r 10 C o u r s e C h a n g e Day (for students who have registered by mail, but need to alter their c o u r s e registration) September 1 1:00 p.m. - 3:00 p m January 5 1:00 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. In-Person Registration (Faculty A d v i s o r s present. C h i l d m i n d i n g Available.) September 1 3:00 p.m. - 9:00 p.m. January 5 S U M M E R 82 A p r i l 1 - 29 3:00 p.m. - 9:00 p.m. September 2 2:00 p.m. - 9:00 p.m. January 6 September 8 2:00 p.m. - 9:00 p.m. 2:00 p.m. - 9:00 p.m. Classes Commence (All Divisions) S e p t e m b e r 10 January 7 J a n u ap.m. r y 11- 9:00 p.m. 2:00 Dependent upon course. Final Date to A D D a course, or c h a n g e from Audit to Credit Status, or c h a n g e sections. 'Instructors signature required* October 5 February 8 Dependent upon course, Final Date to W I T H D R A W from a c o u r s e , or c h a n g e f r o m C r e d i t to A u d i t Status. "Instructors signature required* November 9 • March 8 Dependent upon course, 5 Financial Information Fees P a y m e n t of fees is required at the time of registration. Fee Schedule 1. Credit Courses and Programs a. Effective May 1. 1981, tuition fees are $12.00 per credit hour to a m a x i m u m of $144.00 per term. Registrants for c o u r s e s with less than three (3) credits in a term are subject to a m i n i m u m term fee of $36.00; the m i n i m u m term fee of $36.00 may not be required for designated parts of s p e c i f i c programs. b Effective J a n u a r y 1. 1982. tuition fees are $13.00 per credit hour to a m a x i m u m of $156.00 per term. Registrants for c o u r s e s with less than three (3) credits in a term are subject to a m i n i m u m fee of $39.00; the m i n i m u m term fee of $39.00 may not be required for designated parts of specific programs. c. No additional tuition fee for laboratory c o u r s e s is levied by the college. H o w e v e r , students will incur additional costs in c o u r s e s and programs w h i c h require supplies, materials, manuals, b o o k s , field trips, etc d. T h e Student Activity Fee a s s e s s e d by the Student S o c i e t y is $1.00 per credit h o u r to a m a x i m u m of $15.00 per term for Fall and S p r i n g t e r m s a n d $.50 per c r e d i t / h o u r d u r i n g the S u m m e r term. F e e - p a y i n g v o c a t i o n a l students e n r o l e a d u r i n g any term will be assessed the respective Student Activity Fee. (This fee is optional for c o u r s e s in H o w e S o u n d and on the S u n s h i n e C o a s t ) . NOTE: Fees are subject to c h a n g e by the B o a r d of the College 2. c. Student S o c i e t y activity fees may be refunded, subject to B o a r d P o l i c y N o . 18, u p o n written a p p l i c a t i o n to the Student S o c i e t y office; s u c h a p p l i c a t i o n to b e r e c e i v e d within two weeVs of the end of Late R e g i s t r a t i o n . Credit Free Activities S e e C r e d i t Free Activities, p a g e 6 Conditions of Registration a. A l l c h e q u e s and m o n e y orders are to be made payable to " C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e " and a c c o m p a n i e d by a c o m p l e t e d Registration F o r m . Scale: a. S t u d e n t s w h o withdraw before the first day of c l a s s e s will receive an 80% refund of tuition fees, a n d 100% of lab fees. Student S o c i e t y activity fees will not be r e f u n d e d , e x c e p t as per item 3, a b o v e . b. If a student withdraws within one month of the date c l a s s e s c o m m e n c e . 8 0 % of both tuition a n d lab fees will be refunded. Student Society activity fees will not be refunded, except as per item 3, above. See " W i t h d r a w i n g from a C o u r s e " page 5. c. F r o m the date f o l l o w i n g the last d a y s p e c i f i e d in (b) until the end of the term, no refund will be granted. Deadline: Fall Term Last day to receive a refund of 80% of tuition fees is O c t o b e r 8, 1981. Spring Term Last day to receive a refund of 80% of tuition fees is F e b r u a r y 11, 1982. Non-Registration R e t u r n i n g students with debts to the C o l l e g e (e.g. lost materials; lost equipment; tuition fees not paid) will be refused registration until s u c h debts are e r a s e d . De-Registration T h e C o l l e g e may de-register students w h o pay tuition fees with N.S.F. c h e q u e s or w h o fail to pay deferred fees w h e n due. b. U n d e r p a i d registrations will be returned u n p r o c e s s e d (This may c a u s e unavoidable delays and requested c o u r s e s may not be available. Please c h e c k y o u r fee c a l c u l a t i o n carefully.) Fees Policy - Credit Free C o u r s e s and c. A c h a r g e of $5.00 will be levied for c o s t s of handling c h e q u e s returned by the bank for non-sufficient funds. Information about C r e d i t Free c o u r s e s a n d s e r v i c e s is generally p r o d u c e d in separate b r o c h u r e s . d. P o s t - d a t e d c h e q u e s or separate c h e q u e s for tuition fees a n d Student S o c i e t y activity fees will not be a c c e p t e d Tuition fees c h a r g e d for Credit Free c o u r s e s a n d services shall be based on the principle of recovering the c o s t of direct instructional e x p e n s e s (instruction, a d v e r t i s i n g , facilities, instructor s u p p l i e s , but not d e v e l o p m e n t c o s t s ) . e. S t u d e n t s w h o s e fees are to be paid by a g e n c i e s , other than G o v e r n m e n t S c h o l a r s h i p s , are required to present a letter to this effect at registration. f. T h e student's c o p y of the Registration Form is the only tax receipt i s s u e d by the C o l l e g e Special Fee Waivers for Senior Citizens A n y person 60 years of age or over is entitled to free tuition, and is not required to pay student activity fees. A p p l i c a n t s for this s p e c i a l senior citizen fee waiver need only p r o d u c e appropriate identification s u c h as the C o u r t e s y C a r d for senior citizens or P h a r m a c a r e c a r d . Deferred Fees All fees are due and payable in full at the time of registration. Students enrolling for i 2 or more credit hours w h o a r e unable to pay their fees in full may apply in p e r s o n to the Financial A i d office before Registration to defer up to o n e half of their tuition and lab fees for a m a x i m u m period of one month. Fee Refunds Conditions: a. A c o m p l e t e refund of fees will be made w h e n c o u r s e s or programs are c a n c e l l e d by the C o l l e g e . b. R e f u n d s may a l s o be granted to a student on the basis of a c o m p l e t e or partial official withdrawal (see scale below). Services T u i t i o n fees shall be e s t a b l i s h e d from time to time a n d printed as part of Credit Free p r o g r a m i n f o r m a t i o n . L a b fees shall be c h a r g e d to recover c o s t s of c o n s u m a b l e supplies Tuition and lab fees c h a r g e d for C r e d i t Free c o u r s e s and services shall be the s a m e regardless of the l o c a t i o n within the c o l l e g e region where the c o u r s e or s e r v i c e is p r o v i d e d . Additional fees may be levied for c o u r s e s and services offered outside the c o l l e g e region. A n y person 60 years or over is entitled to free tuition T h e C o l l e g e reserves the right to c a n c e l any c o u r s e for w h i c h registration does not reach the required m i n i m u m , a n d to withdraw, postpone, or c o m b i n e c l a s s e s , or to c h a n g e instructors. Fees c h a r g e d for c o u r s e s that are later c a n c e l l e d by the C o l l e g e will be refunded in full. A p p l i c a t i o n s for withdrawals and refunds will not be a c c e p t e d after the s e c o n d s e s s i o n of a c o u r s e , a n d c a n n o t be c o n s i d e r e d for a w o r k s h o p of less than one week's duration. A l l refunds are subject to a 20% administration c h a r g e . Fees already paid for s u p p l i e s a n d materials (lab fees) are not refundable u p o n withdrawal from c o u r s e Fees paid for a c o u r s e or service are not transferable to another c o u r s e or services to be offered d u r i n g a different term. General Course Information T h e Instructional Year Attendance T h e Instructional year is divided into two four-month terms, Fall and S p r i n g , and an equivalent S u m m e r S e s s i o n of two months (May and J u n e ) . A student is e x p e c t e d to attend all c l a s s e s in w h i c h s / h e . is registered, s i n c e evaluation of progress in any c o u r s e is cumulative, based on class a s s i g n m e n t s , participation and examinations. C o u r s e Credits A student e x p e c t i n g to be absent from c l a s s e s b e c a u s e of p r o l o n g e d illness is advised to notify his/her instruetor as s o o n as p o s s i b l e and to arrange to make up m i s s e d instruction. T h e instructor may require that a m e d i c a l certificate be presented to re-instate the student. A student will receive credit only for the c o u r s e s in w h i c h s/he is officially registered a c c o r d i n g to the records in the Registrar's Office. A credit hour normally represents o n e hour per week of c l a s s r o o m work per term. M o s t c o u r s e s offered are three credit hours c o u r s e s . A s s u c h , they normally require three class hours per week and may, in addition, require laboratories, seminars and tutorials. A n additional and optional fourth hour of instruction will be offered in e a c h three credit hour c o u r s e . T h i s extra e d u c a tional opportunity may take the form of a w o r k s h o p , seminar, field-trip or similar activity, at the discretion of e a c h instructor and as c i r c u m s t a n c e s allow. Fourth hour activities are not a factor in determining final grades. A t t e n d a n c e is on a voluntary basis. Credit Status A student may attend all c l a s s e s , seminars, labs etc. of the c o u r s e a n d pays the n o r m a l tuition fee. S / h e is required to submit a s s i g n m e n t s and sit e x a m i n a t i o n s . See: A t t e n d a n c e . If illness prevents a student from writing a final examination or assignment, s / h e may be a s s i g n e d a grade or granted a deferral at the discretion of his/her instructor. In s u c h cases, a medical certificate must be submitted within o n e week of the date of the examination or due date of the assignment. Faculty m e m b e r s are authorized to d i s m i s s from a class a student w h o is disruptive to the learning p r o c e s s . Visitors A person may attend a class session as a visitor for a limited period of time, provided s/he has permission from the instructor in advance. T h i s privilege does not extend to s c i e n c e and language labs or c o u r s e s requiring the use of machinery or materials. A visitor is not registered, d o e s not sit e x a m i n a tions, d o e s not receive credit and attends not more than three weeks during the term. Academic Policies Audit Status G r a d i n g System A student may attend all meetings of a credit class without receiving credit. T h e audit student attends all classes, s e m i nars, labs etc. of the class and pays the normal tuition fee. S / h e is not required to sit e x a m i n a t i o n s or submit a s s i g n ments. T h e status of audit will be d e n i e d by an instructor if the student has not met the attendance requirements for that class. This denial may be a p p e a l e d through the grade appeal process. Audit students will be a c c e p t e d on a s p a c e available basis. Capilano grading. C o l l e g e u s e s the Letter G r a d e Point V a l u e Credit Free Status A student is registered for a credit-free c o u r s e or activity w h o has paid the appropriate fee. C o u r s e Challenge P r o c e d u r e T h e C o l l e g e has a p o l i c y w h i c h allows registered C o l l e g e students to request e x a m i n a t i o n for achievement in certain c o u r s e s . B y this p r o c e d u r e , a student may receive credit for a course. Interested students s h o u l d c o n s u l t a c o u n s e l l o r for current information on this c h a l l e n g e procedure. T h e r e are certain c o u r s e s w h i c h may not be c h a l l e n g e d . A student c h a l l e n g i n g a c o u r s e will be required to pay the normal tuition fee for that c o u r s e . C o u r s e s c h a l l e n g e d s u c c e s s f u l l y will be indicated on the student's transcript. Note: Credit for c o u r s e s s u c c e s s f u l l y c h a l l e n g e d will apply towards a Certificate or D i p l o m a from C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , however, s o m e other institutions may not grant credit for c o u r s e s c h a l l e n g e d . A+ A A- " 4'/ 4 3% categories First Class 3 Second Class 3y 3 c+ c c- 2% 2 2% of Classification 3 B+ B B- D CR F NC 1 W NA AUD following Pass 1% 1 0 0 - Pass Credit G r a n t e d * Fail No Credit Granted* $ Incomplete* Withdrawn* J Not A t t e n d i n g " t Audit' * not c a l c u l a t e d in G r a d e Point A v e r a g e t not s h o w n on transcript Repeating a C o u r s e C o u r s e s may be repeated for the p u r p o s e of improving grades Credit will be granted for the d u p l i c a t e c o u r s e receiving the higher grade. G r a d e Point Average G r a d e Point A v e r a g e s are reported on e a c h Permanent Student R e c o r d . T h e G . P . A . is the s u m ot the grade point hours earned in the term, divided by the n u m b e r of credit h o u r s a p p l i c a b l e to the G r a d e Point c o m p u t a t i o n . Interpretation of Grades "I" grades are given at the e n d of a term w h e n , in the judgement of the instructor, the student w o u l d have a reasonable expectation of p a s s i n g the c o u r s e but has not c o m p l e t e d the work required. A n "I" grade is only a w a r d e d where the instructor a n d student have arranged for the work to be c o m p l e t e d by a s p e c i f i e d date, w h i c h is noted in the c l a s s list with grades. A student granted an "I" grade must complete the necessary a s s i g n m e n t s on the date specified by the instructor o n the grade sheet or s/he will automatically receive a predetermined grade w h i c h reflects the i n c o m p l e t e d work. U p o n the c o m p l e t i o n of the required a s s i g n m e n t s by the specified time, the instructor will record the final grade based on the c o m p l e t e d work. Students are c a u t i o n e d that other institutions may include "I" grades in C P A . c a l c u l a t i o n . All " F " grades are recorded on the student's transcript. T h e s e grades are a s s i g n e d a value of zero in the calculation of a student's C u l m u l a t i v e G r a d e Point Average. If the student wishes to pursue the a p p e a l , the " F i n a l G r a d e A p p e a l " form is c o m p l e t e d a n d submitted to the Secretary of the A p p e a l s C o m m i t t e e with a fee of five dollars for e a c h c o u r s e to be a p p e a l e d . A p p e a l s are c o n s i d e r e d by an A p p e a l s C o m m i t t e e c h a i r e d by one of the c o l l e g e D e a n s . T h e C o m m i t t e e c o n s i s t s of representatives from faculty, students, a n d a counsellor. D u r i n g the A p p e a l p r o c e s s all term grades, i n c l u d i n g the final examination mark, are taken into c o n s i d e r a t i o n . In all c a s e s the student is informed in writing of the C o m m i t t e e ' s d e c i s i o n . S h o u l d the mark be c h a n g e d , the five dollar fee is refunded. O n l y those appeals that follow the a b o v e p r o c e s s will be considered. Diploma and Certificate Requirements Students w h o c o m p l e t e the p r o g r a m s fill out a " R e q u e s t for D i p l o m a or C e r t i f i c a t e " form at the Registrar's Office o n e month before the e n d of the term in w h i c h the p r o g r a m is to be c o m p l e t e d . S t u d e n t s w h o c o m p l e t e c o u r s e s (credit or credit free) which are not part of a program may also apply to the Registrar's office for a Certificate. T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a , a student must have: 1. For an A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s D i p l o m a S t u d e n t s are c a u t i o n e d that other institutions may not grant transfer credit for c o u r s e s c o m p l e t e d with a " D " grade. a. C o m p l e t e d 60 credit hours, of w h i c h at least 30 must be c o m p l e t e d at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Registering as an audit student d o e s not guarantee that a student will receive audit status. B a s e d on the attendance and participation requirements of the instructor, an instructor will c o n f i r m or deny the "audit" status of a student in their c o u r s e A denial ruling is open to appeal by the student. b A c o u r s e may be repeated for the p u r p o s e of improving a grade. T h e grade for e a c h attempt will be r e c o r d e d with the higher grade used in the c o m p u t a t i o n of the G r a d e Point Average. Students are cautioned that other institutions may include both grades in the G . P . A c o m p u t a t i o n . Official Transcript/Statement of Grades A statement of grades is either mailed or distributed from the Registrar's Office Official transcripts are issued only at the request of the student T h e student must c o m p l e t e a Transcript O r d e r F o r m a n d pay $1 00 per c o p y in order to obtain a c o p y Appeal of Final Grades If a student w i s h e s to appeal a final grade s/he must contact the c o u n s e l l o r not later than two weeks after receipt of grades or C h a n g e of G r a d e Notification. T h e c o u n s e l l o r will d i s c u s s the grade and appeal procedure with the student a n d attempt to arrange a meeting with the instructor. T h e c o u n s e l l o r will provide the student with a " F i n a l G r a d e A p p e a l " form 8 Obtain a 2 00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. c. O b t a i n at least 45 credit hours from the following subject areas, i n c l u d i n g at least 6 credit hours in E n g l i s h (100 level or higher), at least 6 credit hours from subjects listed in A below, a n d at least 15 credit hours from 200 level c o u r s e s . A B Biology Chemistry Geography Geology Mathematics Physics Anthropology Art English Fine Arts French German History Music Philosophy Physics Political S c i e n c e Psychology Religious Studies Sociology Spanish Theatre Women's Studies 2. For a C a r e e r S t u d i e s D i p l o m a (by a. C o m p l e t e d the program program) requirements. b. O b t a i n e d a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better 3. For a G e n e r a l S t u d i e s D i p l o m a a. C o m p l e t e d 60 credit hours at least 30 of w h i c h must be c o m p l e t e d at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . b. Obtain a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. T o be eligible for a Certificate, a student must have successfully c o m p l e t e d the requirements of a c o u r s e or program of studies of less than four terms in duration. Plagiarism P l a g i a r i s m is the presentation of another person's words or ideas without a c k n o w l e d g i n g their s o u r c e — as if they were o n e ' s o w n . S t u d e n t s in doubt about the need for a c k n o w l e d g e m e n t s h o u l d take care to avoid unintentional plagiarism by learning proper scholarly procedures. A d o c u ment e x p l a i n i n g these p r o c e d u r e s is available from the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e . Intentional plagiarism is not only dishonest, but a rejection of the principles of s c h o l a r ship. A plagiarized college assignment, therefore, will ordinarily receive no credit At the instructor's discretion, the plagiarist may receive an F for the paper or for the c o u r s e . There is a $10 fee for d i p l o m a replacement. Student Records Scholastic Awards Dean's List S p e c i a l recognition will be a c c o r d e d students w h o c o m plete a full program of studies at the C o l l e g e with a 3.50 or higher grade point average d u r i n g a term. Students with "I" grades are not eligible for the D e a n ' s list. Governor-General's Silver Medal T h i s award is presented to a D i p l o m a G r a d u a t e with the best cumulative grade point average, a n d w h o has attained this grade point average on a m i n i m u m of 15 credit hours per term during attendance at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Lieutenant Governor's Medal A w a r d e d for a c a d e m i c e x c e l l e n c e a n d c o n t r i b u t i o n to the college and community to a graduate in a Vocational or Career program of less than two years duration. Merit List S p e c i a l recognition will be a c c o r d e d part-time students with a 3.50 cumulative grade point average or higher w h o have successfully completed a m i n i m u m of 30 semester hours at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Principal's Citizenship Award T h i s award is given in recognition of the student w h o has made the greatest c o n t r i b u t i o n s to C o l l e g e life. Principal's Awards T h i s award is presented to o n e D i p l o m a G r a d u a t e with the best grade point average in A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s , a n d to o n e D i p l o m a G r a d u a t e with the best grade point average in a Career Program. All official student r e c o r d s are kept in the Registrar's Office The information on file for a student is always available to that student for e x a m i n a t i o n . N o information on file is divulged to any a g e n c y or p e r s o n other than the student without the student's p e r m i s s i o n except for institutional research projects a p p r o v e d by the C o l l e g e . T h e p r o c e s s for approval of s u c h projects is established by the C o l l e g e and the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S t u d e n t S o c i e t y . S t u d e n t s are c a u t i o n e d that student loan a p p l i c a t i o n s a n d other similar a p p l i c a t i o n s have s u c h c o n s e n t written in the d o c u m e n t . Limit of Responsibility T h e C o l l e g e a c c e p t s no responsibility for the c a n c e l l a t i o n or d i s c o n t i n u a t i o n of any c o u r s e or program or class of instruction that may be n e c e s s a r y as a result of an Act of G o d , fire, labour problems, lack of funds, or other similar causes. T h e C o l l e g e a c c e p t s no responsibility for any injury, loss or e x p e n s e s u s t a i n e d , arising out of or in any way c o n n e c t e d with a student's participation in any c o u r s e or p r o g r a m . O p e n Learning Institute T h e O p e n L e a r n i n g Institute offers credit a n d credit free university c o u r s e s by c o r r e s p o n d e n c e It was e s t a b l i s h e d by the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n to provide learning opportunities to students u n a b l e b e c a u s e of time constraints or l o c a t i o n to attend existing c o l l e g e s or universities. F o r information on c o u r s e offerings a n d transfer credit contact the institute at 7671 Alderbridge Way, R i c h m o n d , B . C . V6X 1Z9, Tel: 270-4131. C o u r s e Description C o d e Academic Difficulties S t u d e n t s w h o are e x p e r i e n c i n g difficulties in their c o u r s e work during a term may be referred by an instructor to a Counsellor. T h e student is e n c o u r a g e d to consult with his/her instructor and C o u n s e l l o r to evolve a satisfactory plan w h i c h will remedy these difficulties. O n the right h a n d side of e a c h c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n there is a series of c o d e letters a n d n u m b e r s , for e x a m p l e : E n g l i s h 100 L a n g u a g e S k i l l s (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e first letter(s) indicate the term in w h i c h the class will be offered. E x a m p l e : F - F a l l , S - S p r i n g , S U - S u m m e r . T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is to be offered in the Fall a n d S p r i n g terms. T h e first n u m b e r indicates the n u m b e r of credit hours granted for the c o u r s e a n d the n u m b e r of hours taught per week, the s e c o n d n u m b e r d e n o t e s the n u m b e r of lab a n d l a n g u a g e c o n v e r s a t i o n a l h o u r s per week, a n d the third n u m b e r d e n o t e s t h e n u m b e r of seminar/tutorial/4th instructional hours per week. T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is offered three h o u r s a week for three credit h o u r s with no lab time a n d o n e hour per week of 4th instructional hour. Services Student Society and Student Activities Every student registered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e w h o has paid a student activity fee is a m e m b e r of the Student S o c i e t y . T h e Student S o c i e t y was established in order to represent the interests of all students at the C o l l e g e in a n u m b e r of capacities. It is i n c o r p o r a t e d under the S o c i e t i e s A c t of B . C . T h e r e are ten elected positions in the S o c i e t y f o r w h i c h any interested student of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is eligible. E l e c t i o n s are held in M a r c h for the f o l l o w i n g year's representatives. T h e elected body of the Student S o c i e t y is responsible for e n s u r i n g that students are represented o n all d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g c o m m i t t e e s of the C o l l e g e . T h e y are also responsible for maintaining active m e m b e r s h i p within the B . C . Student Federation and the National U n i o n of Students. T h e S o c i e t y provides services to students that are not under the jurisdiction of the C o l l e g e administration, s u c h as the organization of films, s o c i a l s , c o u r s e unions, c l u b s and general information services. T h e Student S o c i e t y Executive holds weekly meetings w h i c h the student body is w e l c o m e to attend. For further information students may call 986-1911, local 347 or go to the office in A114. Student Newspaper T h e student newspaper of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is the C a p i l a n o C o u r i e r , a b i - w e e k l y p u b l i c a t i o n f u n d e d by the S t u d e n t Society and run by an independent staff of student volunteers. T h e C o u r i e r is a member of C a n a d i a n University Press, a c o operative news o r g a n i z a t i o n of more than 60 c o l l e g e and university papers from a c r o s s C a n a d a . A s the C o u r i e r is written, typeset and laid out on c a m p u s , there are always positions o p e n in the areas of news and feature writing, reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, typesetting a n d advertising. All interested students are w e l c o m e to join. S p e c i a l parking permits c a n be arranged t h r o u g h the M a i n t e n a n c e department (local 309). T h e M e d i a C e n t r e will give e d u c a t i o n a l support and w o u l d like a d v a n c e notice s o that they c a n prepare the necessary materials and e q u i p m e n t (local 242). Several instructors have taken s p e c i a l training to assist h a n d i c a p p e d students with their particular n e e d s in class room a n d lab settings — for more information contact the Learning A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e (local 356). Parking P a r k i n g is available to all students on the north a n d s o u t h parking lots only. F o r exact l o c a t i o n s , c o n s u l t the P a r k i n g a n d C a m p u s m a p s , page 142. T h e following parking regulations, w h i c h have been d e s i g n e d to meet the District Fire M a r s h a l ' s instructions, are in effect: a. N o restrictions apply to O p e n P a r k i n g areas o n the N o r t h and South Campuses. b. N o parking is permitted in a Fire Z o n e . c. V e h i c l e s m a y park in a L o a d i n g Z o n e for up to 15 minutes while l o a d i n g or u n l o a d i n g . V e h i c l e s p a r k e d in e x c e s s of this time period are subject to the C o l l e g e towing p o l i c y (see F below). d. R e s e r v e d P a r k i n g may be made available to s e l e c t e d d e p a r t m e n t s and to h a n d i c a p p e d p e r s o n s requiring a vehicle to be parked near s p e c i f i c work areas. In s u c h cases, a permit must be s e c u r e d f r o m the Facilities Department a l l o w i n g e x t e n d e d p a r k i n g privileges. e All traffic and parking s i g n s must be o b s e r v e d . f V e h i c l e s parking in u n a u t h o r i z e d areas will be towed away at the owner's e x p e n s e by Tritow S y s t e m s Ltd., — storage yard 300 S e y m o u r B l v d . , N o r t h V a n c o u v e r . — T e l e p h o n e : 685-8181. T h e C o u r i e r e n c o u r a g e s input from the entire c o l l e g e c o m m u n i t y . C l a s s i f i e d ads (which are free to students, Staff a n d faculty), letters to the editor, and other contributions c a n be submitted to N F 2 0 9 or through local 200. F o o d and Beverage Service Info Centre North C a m p u s T h e p u r p o s e of the Information C e n t r e is to centralize and facilitate information relevant to students. L o c a t e d a c r o s s from the reception desk in the lobby of B u i l d i n g " B " , the C e n t r e deals with both internal a n d external information, i n c l u d i n g h o u s i n g and jobs. It c a n be r e a c h e d at local 277. T h e main cafeteria is located in B u i l d i n g N E offering full hot meal service d u r i n g the Fall a n d S p r i n g term from a p p r o x i m a t e l y 8:00 a.m. (0800 hrs ) t h r o u g h 8:30 p.m. (2030 hrs.) daily except Fridays w h e n it c l o s e s at 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs.) Lost and South Campus Found Students may a d d r e s s inquiries about lost or found items to the Info C e n t r e , located in the l o b b y of building " B " , S o u t h C a m p u s , l o c a l 277. Bus Passes B . C . H y d r o E d u c a t i o n a l bus passes are available to full time students (those registered in three or more courses) through the Student S o c i e t y . T h e passes are issued on a monthly basis and c a n be p u r c h a s e d at the Student S o c i e t y office, A114, d u r i n g office hours. The satellite cafeteria is located in Building B — Cafetheatre — o f f e r i n g limited hot f o o d s a n d s n a c k i t e m s f r o m a p p r o x i m a t e l y 8:30 a.m. (0830 hrs.) t h r o u g h 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs.) a n d 6:30 p.m. (1830 hrs.) t h r o u g h 9:00 p.m. (2100 hrs.) M o n d a y t h r o u g h T h u r s d a y ; Friday 8:30 a.m. (0830 hrs.) through 3:30 p.m. (1530 hrs.). Vending Machine V e n d i n g service offering limited f o o d , beverage and c o n f e c t i o n e r y items is available in .the S o u t h C a m p u s (Cafetheatre) and North C a m p u s foyer a r e a . B u i l d i n g N E . Services for H a n d i c a p p e d Students Individual arrangements can be made to assist handicapped applicants to register by c a l l i n g the Registrar's Office in A d v a n c e (986-1911, local 213). C o u n s e l l i n g services are also available — contact J o a n n e M a h or David J o n e s (local 298). 10 U s e of Cafeterias Limited dining s p a c e (seating a n d c i r c u l a t i o n ) d o e s not allow for the use of either cafeteria for s p e c i a l f u n c t i o n s during the period the food service is in o p e r a t i o n . Bookstore Career Development Resource Centre T h e B o o k s t o r e , located in B u i l d i n g N E . North C a m p u s , otters required a n d r e c o m m e n d e d texts. T h e C o l l e g e assists students in c o n s i d e r i n g career options and selecting a career by providing in-depth information on a wide variety of career options. T h e C a r e e r Development R e s o u r c e C e n t r e houses a c o l l e c t i o n of vocational literature, pamphlets and reference w o r k s available for use in the C e n t r e in room N F 1 0 2 . S t u d e n t s wishing to utilize the materials s h o u l d contact the Receptionist at the reception station, lower floor, north end of N F b u i l d i n g . A postage stamp selling m a c h i n e is located in the Bookstore. C a n a d a Post boxes are located on both North a n d South c a m p u s e s "Down South" " D o w n S o u t h " is the tiny boutique in the S o u t h C a m p u s Tower run by the s e c o n d year m e r c h a n d i s i n g students of the Retail F a s h i o n department. This small shop serves as a laboratory for the merchandising students to practise the skills learned in the program, and also as an outlet for all c a m p u s artists, artisans and craftspeople, w h o may sell items on a c o n s i g n m e n t basis. O p e r a t e d as a unique gift s h o p , the store is o p e n from N o v e m b e r to A p r i l , daily from 11:30 to 1:00 p.m. Athletics C a p i l a n o is a full m e m b e r of the T o t e m C o n f e r e n c e , w h i c h is the governing body for all inter-college athletics in British C o l u m b i a . P r o v i n c i a l c h a m p i o n s are d e t e r m i n e d annually with winners a d v a n c i n g to a Western C a n a d a final in most sports, a n d national finals in s o m e . T h i s affords our C o l l e g e ' s highly s k i l l e d student athletes the opportunity to meet with a n d c o m p e t e against the best C o l l e g e athletes in C a n a d a Intercollegiately, C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c o m p e t e s in R u g b y . Soccer, Basketball, Volleyball, Badminton and Curling. COUNSELLING Faculty B a g s h a w , R , B . C o m m . (Brit. C o l ) , M.A ( C o l o r a d o ) . M . E d . (Brit. Col.) F o r s y t h , Ian. B . E d . (Brit. C o l . ) H o w a r d , P., B.A. (Brit. Col.) T e a c h i n g Cert. ( S a s k ) , M . E d . (Memorial) J o n e s , D., B.A., M.A. (Dalhousie) M a h . J . G . , B.A., B.S.W. (Brit. C o l ) , M . S . W . (Toronto) P e n n , M . H . , B.A. (Alta.), M . A . (Brit. Col.) S c h m i d t , L.L., B . E d . , M . E d . , P h . D . (Alta.) Siegrist, B . G . , M . B . A . ( S i m o n Fraser) General Information At present, g y m n a s i u m - b a s e d B l u e s teams operate out of what was formerly D e l b r o o k H i g h S c h o o l ' s G y m n a s i u m . T h e facility has been completely renovated and u p g r a d e d to meet C o l l e g e standards. T h e services of trained c o u n s e l l o r s are available to all" students of the C o l l e g e R e g i o n . C o u n s e l l o r s assist students in the e d u c a t i o n a l p l a n n i n g a n d provide g u i d a n c e in the solution of a c a d e m i c a n d personal p r o b l e m s . T h e C o l l e g e counselling objective is to help students achieve self-direction in d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g and p l a n n i n g . E a c h year, our many e x c e p t i o n a l athletes, w o r k i n g with the e x p e r i e n c e d B l u e s c o a c h i n g staff, have c o m b i n e d to p r o d u c e several T o t e m C o n f e r e n c e and Western C a n a d i a n (4-West) c h a m p i o n s h i p teams. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is p r o u d of the a c c o m p l i s h m e n t s of its student athletes and of its growing reputation for athletic e x c e l l e n c e . If y o u are e x p e r i e n c i n g difficulty of any kind with w h i c h y o u c o u l d use a s s i s t a n c e y o u are e n c o u r a g e d to contact C o u n s e l l i n g Department p e r s o n n e l T h e r e is a reception desk located on the lower floor, north end of N F b u i l d i n g . Opportunities to take part in intramural activity are also provided by the C o l l e g e . Activities offered vary from year to year with expressed interests, but usually include s u c h activities as b a d m i n t o n , volleyball, basketball, s o c c e r , tennis, touch football, and P h y s i c a l Fitness The Athletic Department annually sponsors several programs directed toward both the student b o d y and the c o m m u n i t y at large, i n c l u d i n g P r e - S k i Fitness, B e g i n n e r and Intermediate Tennis, a n d the B . C . C o a c h i n g Certification Program. Fitness Centre T h e Fitness C e n t r e is located in the west corner of the S o u t h Parking lot. T h e facility c o n t a i n s shower, locker rooms, saunas, an equipment room and an e x e r c i s e area, c o m p l e t e with weight training and fitness testing facilities. S c h e d u l e d fitness sessions are intermingled with large b l o c k s of open facility time. T h e Fitness C e n t r e ' s professional staff will provide personal consultation a n d testing services relative to health, physical fitness, a n d weight control, o n an appointment basis. T h e Fitness C e n t r e is yours; make g o o d use of it. For those living in the P e m b e r t o n - H o w e S o u n d R e g i o n , a C o l l e g e C o u n s e l l o r is a v a i l a b l e f r o m M o n d a y t h r o u g h T h u r s d a y at the S q u a m i s h C e n t r e , 38038 C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e . A n evening appointment may also be arranged by c a l l i n g the C e n t r e , 892-5322, in a d v a n c e for those w h o are unable to make an appointment during the day. S u n s h i n e C o a s t R e g i o n residents s h o u l d call the Sechelt C e n t r e 885-9310 for information a n d appointment with counsellors. T h e C o l l e g e A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r visits all s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l s in the C o l l e g e R e g i o n e a c h S p r i n g to speak to student g r o u p s about opportunities offered by C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . S c h o o l students planning to enter the C o l l e g e may take advantage of early a d m i s s i o n interviews at their s c h o o l by c o n t a c t i n g their s c h o o l C o u n s e l l o r for the appropriate dates. C o u n s e l l i n g offers credit free G r o u p P r o g r a m s , without c h a r g e , as a service to students a n d the c o m m u n i t y . T h e goals of these programs are to provide people with an opportunity to e x p a n d self-awareness, personal a n d career o p t i o n s . T h e p r o g r a m s c o m b i n e e l e m e n t s of p e r s o n a l development a n d skills a c q u i s i t i o n 11 In the past, p r o g r a m s have been offered in the following areas: Developing a Career V a l u e s a n d Lifestyles Transactional Analysis Sexuality Self-Discovery Mature Women's Discussion G r o u p C r i s i s Intervention C o p i n g with Stress D e v e l o p i n g P e r s o n a l Potential E x a m Anxiety D e p e n d i n g on interest and d e m a n d , these, or related programs, may be offered in the future. Please inquire at the C o u n s e l l i n g R e c e p t i o n desk for program information. S o m e programs may have limited enrolment. Testing Services T h e C o l l e g e is an approved testing centre for the government-sponsored High School Equivalency (GED) E x a m i n a t i o n s T h e s e e x a m s are written at least four times per year a n d are o p e n to all individuals over 19 years of age. Information a n d a p p l i c a t i o n forms are available from the C o u n s e l l i n g Department. Placement Centre SERVICES First A i d a n d Health S e r v i c e s are l o c a t e d in R o o m N D 1 0 2 on the North C a m p u s T h e C o m m u n i t y H e a l t h N u r s e is available to provide the f o l l o w i n g services to students a n d employees. 1. First A i d — p h o n e local 271. If no a n s w e r contact the College switchboard " O " . 2. Health C o u n s e l l i n g — to both individuals a n d g r o u p s in preventive health care as well as e m e r g e n c y care. S o m e areas of c o u n s e l l i n g involve: nutrition, weight c o n t r o l , c o m m u n i c a b l e diseases, i m m u n i z a t i o n , c o n c e p t i o n c o n trol, short and long term illness a n d pre a n d post natal care. 3. P h y s i c a l Health C a r e — involves vision c h e c k , hearing tests, b l o o d p r e s s u r e c h e c k , weight (skin caliper test), p r e g n a n c y tests (slide test). 4. H e a l t h H a z a r d A p p r a i s a l — provides a c o m p u t e r printout to portray the b a l a n c e between y o u r health history and habits a n d y o u r potential life e x p e c t a n c y . If interested p h o n e L o c a l 271 or visit the Health S e r v i c e s . 5. P a m p h l e t s a n d T e a c h i n g A i d s on various topics s u c h as nutrition, heart, s m o k i n g , pregnancy, diseases, respiratory illness, c a n c e r , venereal diseases, a n d c o n c e p t i o n control. 6. R e g u l a r meetings of the Health a n d Safety C o m m i t t e e are held at w h i c h time any c o m p l a i n t s or s u g g e s t i o n s 12 7. A n Accident/Injury R e p o r t i n g form (F167) is available from the C o l l e g e N u r s e and Student Info-Centre. 8. First A i d Kits are available at central l o c a t i o n s on c a m p u s . Referrals to outside a g e n c i e s , individuals, c a n be made through your Health Services. LIBRARY/MEDIA SERVICES Faculty B i g g i n s , P., B.A. (Hon.) ( M a n c h e s t e r ) , A L A . ( C o l l e g e T e c h Manchester), B.L.S., M L S . (Toronto), M.A. ( S i m o n Fraser) C a r t e r , S . , B.A., C e r t , of E d ( L o u i s i a n a ) , M . of L i b . (Washington) C o m p t o n - S m i t h , C , D i p . of E d . ( B i r m i n g h a m ) , B . A . (Waterloo), M . L . S . (Toronto) M o d e n e s i . C , J o u r n a l i s t i c S t u d i e s (Peru), B.A., M . L . S . (Brit. Col.) Price, C , B . S . M u s . (Danbury State), M.A. ( C o l u m b i a ) , M.S. (Oregon) Vetsch. J . , B.A. (Carroll C o l l e g e ) , A . M . L . S . (Mich.) General Information T h e Placement Centre aids students w h o desire assistance in locating part-time or temporary e m p l o y m e n t . T h e Centre also w o r k s c l o s e l y with the C a r e e r Division to assist in the career placement of c o l l e g e graduates. Students who wish to take advantage of this service s h o u l d register at the P l a c e ment Centre Office in the N F b u i l d i n g . F I R S T AID A N D H E A L T H re: h a z a r d o u s , unsafe, or health injuries items c a n be submitted, in writing, to the H e a l t h a n d Safety C o m m i t t e e via the Student Representatives. The M e d i a C e n t r e ' s main a i m s are to s u p p o r t the c o u r s e s offered by the C o l l e g e in a wide range of a c a d e m i c , career a n d vocational areas and to t e a c h students s e l f - s u f f i c i e n c y in library use. T h r o u g h s u p p l y i n g b o o k s , films, m a g a z i n e s , A V equipment a n d slides, a n d t e a c h i n g users h o w to find information and make the best use of these materials, the M e d i a C e n t r e is an integral part of the instructional p r o c e s s of the c o l l e g e . E q u i p m e n t and facilities are available in the M e d i a P r o d u c t i o n C e n t r e for film, tape, a n d g r a p h i c p r o d u c t i o n . For students at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , whatever their c h o i c e of c o u r s e , the M e d i a C e n t r e is an essential r e s o u r c e . T h e skills in research w h i c h c a n be learned there will be valuable whatever career is pursued. If the library cannot immediately satisfy the n e e d , other r e s o u r c e s in the L o w e r M a i n l a n d are a c c e s s i b l e through the network of p u b l i c , c o l l e g e a n d university libraries. Library/Media Services - Sechelt A small c o l l e c t i o n is being d e v e l o p e d for the L e a r n i n g C e n t r e on Inlet A v e n u e . A c c e s s to the book a n d m e d i a c o l l e c tion at L y n n m o u r is provided through use of the m i c r o f i c h e catalogue. This service is available to students a n d c o m m u n i t y members alike Library/Media Services - S q u a m i s h A small c i r c u l a t i n g a n d reference c o l l e c t i o n is held in the L e a r n i n g C e n t r e on C l e v e l a n d A v e n u e . T h e c o l l e c t i o n s u p ports the services and the c o u r s e s offered at S q u a m i s h and is available for use by students a n d m e m b e r s of the c o m munity. Materials not held in the C e n t r e c a n be o b t a i n e d from the L y n n m o u r c a m p u s . LEARNING ASSISTANCE CENTRE Faculty B r e n n a n , E.. M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) Foster, M , B E d . (Alberta), G r a d Dip. R e a d i n g (Alberta) Hamilton, C . F . , Divisional Assistant Hill. B , B . C . , T e a c h i n g Cert. S q u a m i s h / L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e M c K e o w n , T., B.A. (Brit. C o l . ) , M.A. (York), E n g l i s h / L e a r n i n g Assistance R e n e s . L., B . A . , M . A . ( T o r o n t o ) ; T . E . S . L . C e r t i f i c a t e (George Brown College, Toronto) E.S.L./Learning Assistance Toor, B.T., B.A., ( S F U ) . S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n (Brit. C o l ) , E.S.L./Learning Assistance Van N o r m a n , D.L., B.A (Brit. C o l . ) , M.A. (Simon Fraser), Learning A s s i s t a n c e Verner, R.H., B . S c . (Brit. C o l ) , M . S c . ( E . W . S . C . ) . B . C . T e a c h i n g Cert M a t h e m a t i c s / L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e Wright, D., B . S c . (Idaho), M . S c . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) , P h D (Arizona State), L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e participate in small g r o u p w o r k s h o p s . T i m e s and dates for these w o r k s h o p s are p u b l i s h e d in the L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e Centre Brochure. For more information a n d / o r w o r k s h o p a p p l i c a t i o n forms, visit the C e n t r e at 37827 2 n d A v e n u e or call 892-5322. Learning Assistance - Sechelt L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e is a l s o available at the new L e a r n i n g C e n t r e at 1360 Inlet A v e n u e in Sechelt A n y o n e having trouble with reading, studying, m e m o r y or any of the writing skills, may benefit from an interview with Learning A s s i s t a n c e personnel. C o n s u l t a t i o n s are available on a d r o p - i n basis. Students may make use of s p e e d reading equipment, selfp r o g r a m m e d reading labs or taped materials on specific skills w h i c h is available for use any time the C e n t r e is o p e n A p p o i n t m e n t s for L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e may be made at 885-9310 WOMEN'S RESOURCE CENTRE General Information Faculty T h e L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m has a r e s o u r c e centre for those w h o seek to increase their learning efficiency. E a c h term the P r o g r a m staff offers small g r o u p w o r k s h o p s on T h i n k i n g with Clarity, T i m e M a n a g e m e n t a n d G o a l Setting, C o m m u n i c a t i o n Skills, S t u d y Skills, R e a d i n g Improvement, V o c a b u l a r y Development, C o n c e p t u a l B l o c k b u s t i n g , Writing the C o l l e g e Essay a n d S p e l l i n g Improvement T i m e s a n d dates for the W o r k s h o p s are p u b l i s h e d in the L e a r n i n g Assistance Brochure. Trew, M., B.A. ( K a n s a s State), M.A. (Central M i s s o u r i State), P h . D . ( M i c h i g a n State) A a r o n s , R , B.A. (Toronto), P h D (Michigan), M.S.W. (Toronto) T h e L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e , l o c a t e d o n the S o u t h C a m p u s in A110, has materials on a wide variety of learning a n d teaching practices. In addition, students have a c c e s s t h r o u g h the C e n t r e to a u d i o v i s u a l p r o g r a m s , e l e c t r i c t y p e w r i t e r s , c a s s e t t e recorders and reading equipment. Tutorials c a n be arranged in most c o l l e g e subjects. Tutorials c a n also be arranged for students having difficulty with, for e x a m p l e , spelling, study skills, a n d E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e . Students with learning disabilities s h o u l d enquire about A s s e s s m e n t a n d Individual Development tutorials. The L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e will also c o n d u c t s p e c i a l w o r k s h o p s at the request of faculty or c o m m u n i t y g r o u p s providing sufficient notice is given. For more information, call 986-1911, local 356, or drop by the Learning A s s i s t a n c e Centre, A110, S o u t h C a m p u s . Learning Assistance - Squamish T h e L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m provides a resource base for those w h o seek to increase their learning efficiency T h e Learning A s s i s t a n c e Centre h o u s e s materials on a wide variety of learning a n d teaching practices. F o r e x a m p l e , information on note-taking, time m a n a g e m e n t , a n d e x a m writing is available in h a n d o u t form. In a d d i t i o n , students are w e l c o m e to use the library materials a n d a u d i o v i s u a l programs. Electric typewriters, cassette recorders and reading equipment are available for use in the centre. Students with learning difficulties are invited to talk over their c o n c e r n s with L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e Faculty during d r o p in hours. C o l l e g e and c o m m u n i t y m e m b e r s may also wish to T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e s p o n s o r s a variety of programs that are of interest to both w o m e n of our community and those registered at the C o l l e g e . T h e s e activities are p u b l i c i z e d t h r o u g h b r o c h u r e s that are available through the C e n t r e located in the A - B u i l d i n g . In a d d i t i o n , the faculty are c o m m i t t e d to r e s p o n d i n g to the e x p r e s s e d needs of w o m e n , a n d will work with any g r o u p interested in c u s t o m d e s i g n i n g an activity or w o r k s h o p w h i c h is in k e e p i n g with the goals of the C o l l e g e . W o m e n ' s Resource Centre - Lynnmour T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e provides a variety of p r o g r a m s available to students, staff, faculty a n d other m e m b e r s of the c o m m u n i t y T h e s e i n c l u d e credit-free c o u r s e s , a C o m m u n i t y R e s o u r c e File for the N o r t h S h o r e , library m a t e r i a l s , c u s t o m - d e s i g n e d c r e d i t - f r e e c o u r s e s , o n - c a m p u s w o r k s h o p s , life p l a n n i n g , career d e v e l o p m e n t a n d , with the C o u n s e l l i n g D i v i s i o n , d r o p - i n c o u n s e l l i n g a n d testing. In a d d i t i o n to these activities, the W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e offers a l o u n g e area where p e r s o n s may meet with others or sit a n d read. For further information, contact M a r s h a T r e w or Rita J o h n s o n , W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e , 986-1911, local 350, or d r o p in. Women's Resource Centre - Squamish T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e C e n t r e is a service provided by C a p i l a n o College for the benefit for S q u a m i s h and surrounding areas. It is our p u r p o s e to be r e s p o n s i v e to the interests and needs of c o m m u n i t y groups. W e invite y o u r ideas a n d y o u r participation in the Centre. P l e a s e m a k e this y o u r centre. T h e W o m e n ' s R e s o u r c e is, first a n d foremost, a centre d e s i g n e d to meet the s p e c i a l i z e d n e e d s of w o m e n in the c o m m u n i t y T o this e n d , a variety of p r o g r a m s will be offered on topics of s p e c i a l interest to w o m e n . T h e s e will i n c l u d e 13 films, speakers, w o r k s h o p s , a n d non-credit c o u r s e s directed to w o m e n w h o may be at h o m e with c h i l d r e n , students of the c o l l e g e , or out in the labour force. T h e r e is a library c o n t a i n i n g publications by and for w o m e n o n s u c h subjects as parenting skills, c a r e e r p l a n n i n g , p s y c h o l o g y of w o m e n , w o m e n ' s rights, health a n d nutrition, a n d many others. For further information call 892-5322 or visit the C e n t r e at 38038 C l e v e l a n d Ave., S q u a m i s h . CREDIT-FREE EDUCATION T h e C o l l e g e offers a variety of credit free c o u r s e s a n d activities in addition to those used to satisfy the requirements of a credit d i p l o m a or certificate. There are no prerequisites for admission to these c o u r s e s and, other than the o c c a s i o n a l informal assignment, there is no evaluation or g r a d i n g . Credit Free c o u r s e s are not listed in this c a l e n d a r — they are advertised in newspapers, by direct mail and by seasonal b r o c h u r e s d i s t r i b u t e d t h r o u g h o u t the c o l l e g e r e g i o n . P r o g r a m s cover a wide variety of activities, i n c l u d i n g : Credit Free Short Courses and Workshops H o m e L a n d s c a p e D e s i g n , V o c a b u l a r y E x p a n s i o n , Adult C l a s s P i a n o and C o n v e r s a t i o n a l F r e n c h are all e x a m p l e s of c o u r s e s in the Creative a n d Liberal Arts and R e c r e a t i o n offered for personal enrichment a n d enjoyment. Programs With Other Community Agencies D e s i g n e d to help m a k e the c o m m u n i t y a better place to live by helping people solve c o m m u n i t y p r o b l e m s , these 14 p r o g r a m s deal with family life e d u c a t i o n , volunteer s k i l l s training, training for p e r s o n n e l in c o m m u n i t y a g e n c i e s a n d community action. Public Meetings and Seminars T h e C o l l e g e will assist in o r g a n i z i n g presentations o n subjects of current c o m m u n i t y c o n c e r n a n d interest. F i l m series, c o n c e r t s and other cultural events c a n be p r e s e n t e d a n d non-profit g r o u p s are invited to use C o l l e g e facilities when available for s p e c i a l meetings or events. Public and Private Use of College Facilities C a p i l a n o c a n provide program d e s i g n a n d administrative services as well as facilities for c o n f e r e n c e s c o n c e r n e d with s h a r i n g information on b u s i n e s s , t e c h n o l o g i c a l or s o c i a l issues. Credit free activities are an attempt to r e s p o n d to e d u c a tional needs b e y o n d those met by p o s t - s e c o n d a r y credit c o u r s e s of our A c a d e m i c a n d C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l p r o g r a m s , and we w e l c o m e y o u r s u g g e s t i o n s for new c o u r s e s a n d activities For information, call 986-1911, local 321. For further information on credit free c o u r s e s or registration phone: 986-1911 local 321 for L o w e r M a i n l a n d 892-5322 for S q u a m i s h a n d H o w e S o u n d 885-9310 for S e c h e l t a n d the S u n s h i n e C o a s t Financial Aid and Awards The Financial A i d Office, located in NF102 (North C a m p u s ) may be contacted for information a n d a s s i s t a n c e regarding the C a n a d a Student L o a n a n d B C . Student A s s i s t a n c e Program, bursaries, s c h o l a r s h i p s a n d loans. Students w h o need financial aid s h o u l d get c o p i e s of the Financial A i d brochure w h i c h lists s o u r c e s administered by the C o l l e g e . A p p l i c a t i o n s for aid administered here c a n be obtained at the Office where there is an A d v i s o r available to d i s c u s s financial assistance and provide c o u n s e l l i n g . A more detailed and c o m p r e h e n s i v e list of financial aid s o u r c e s is provided in the back of the c a l e n d a r T h e Financial A i d office also s p o n s o r s w o r k s h o p s on personal money management a n d distributes a free brochure called Student M o n e y M a n a g e m e n t . CAPILANO C O L L E G E FOUNDATION T h e C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e F o u n d a t i o n is an independent volunteer c o m m u n i t y organization, e s t a b l i s h e d under the Societies Act to e n c o u r a g e c o m m u n i t y interest in the c o l l e g e , to raise and administer d o n a t i o n s primarily to a i d worthy students who require financial a s s i s t a n c e M e m b e r s h i p in the F o u n d a t i o n is o p e n to all contributors. C o n t r i b u t i o n s s h o u l d be sent to T h e Treasurer, C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e F o u n d a t i o n , c / o O ' N e i l l . G o l d s t o n e & C o . . 152 West 15th Street, N o r t h V a n c o u v e r . B . C The current F o u n d a t i o n are: Executive Committee members of the President V i c e President Past President Treasurer Secretary Daryl C o l l i e r Stuart M c K e n z i e Michael Carmichael L e o V. O ' N e i l l Bill M c P h e e Dirk S m i t F.H.B. C h a r l e s w o r t h P. J o n e s Mrs. Pat M u g r i d g e P. Watts P. P a l f f y - M u h o r a y Connie Gibbs D o n Eilers H u g h P.F. A d d i s o n Mrs M Comba-Ramsay F. Millerd T.J. MacDonald G . Forst P. G a l l a g h e r M.H. Taylor THE BRITISH COLUMBIA STUDENT FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE P R O G R A M / C A N A D A STUDENT LOAN AND B.C. GRANT Subject to revision of the 1981/82 e d u c a t i o n a l year, the program is as follows: 1. P r o g r a m T h e p u r p o s e of the British C o l u m b i a S t u d e n t A s s i s t a n c e Program is to assist students w h o s e resources are insufficient to provide for the cost of full-time studies at the post-secondary level of education. F u n d s are therefore granted only when the financial resources available to students from parents, summer work or other s o u r c e s are insufficient to meet their estimated educational costs. T h e funds awarded will normally be d i s b u r s e d through a c o m b i n a t i o n of funds drawn from the provincial grant fund and the federal C a n a d a Student L o a n plan. A detailed booklet d e s c r i b i n g the program in full is available at the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office. 2. Eligibility F u n d s will be provided to eligible students undertaking a m i n i m u m of 9 credits per semester. T h e a m o u n t of a s s i s t a n c e awarded will be based on a s s e s s e d need as determined by the provincial authority. 3. C a n a d a Student L o a n Students s h o u l d note the "Summary of O b l i g a t i o n s " o n the reverse side of the loan certificate prior to negotiating a loan. Interest on your loan is paid by the Federal G o v e r n m e n t as long as y o u are registered as a full-time student and for 6 months thereafter Y o u s h o u l d d i s c u s s the interest rates with your bank, since rates vary from year to year. Students w h o have received C a n a d a Student L o a n s previously, but who do not negotiate one for their immediate period of studies, s h o u l d submit a S c h e d u l e II to their bank, in order to retain interest-free status N.B. — Please note that applications must go through the Financial A i d Office Do not send a p p l i c a t i o n s directly to the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n . Students are e n c o u r a g e d to submit a p p l i c a t i o n s at least 8 weeks prior to registration in a c o u r s e of studies. Students w h o , w i s h to obtain loans to attend institutions outside of C a n a d a s h o u l d write to the following address: Student S e r v i c e s , Ministry of E d u c a t i o n . 835 H u m b o l d t Street. Victoria, B . C . V8V 2M4 INTERNAL AWARDS — BURSARIES ( N . B . — B u r s a r i e s are n o n - r e p a y a b l e grants b a s e d on need) T h e following bursaries are administered by the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . A p p l i c a t i o n forms are available in N F 1 0 2 a n d s h o u l d be submitted to the F i n a n c i a l A i d A d v i s o r , unless otherwise noted. Association of University and College Employees — Local #4 Bursaries A bursary of $300 will be awarded on the basis of financial need to a full-time student in e a c h of the Fall and S p r i n g semesters. Fall semester deadline: O c t o b e r 31 S p r i n g semester deadline: J a n u a r y 30 B.C. Telephone Company Award T w o bursaries of $500 will be awarded in the S p r i n g semester Students c o m p l e t i n g first year w h o intend to c o n t i n u e s e c o n d year at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e are eligible S t u d e n t s w h o are enroled in p r o g r a m s of less than one year are also eligible. Satisfactory s c h o l a s t i c standing is a requirement. Deadline: J a n u a r y 30 15 B . C . Youth Foundation Interest-free loans are available to full-time students w h o are B . C . residents a n d under 30 years of age. Students are .requested to apply first to the C a n a d a G u a r a n t e e d Student L o a n Plan ( B . C . Student A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m ) . A suitable adult guarantor is required. L o a n s may be for fees, b o o k s a n d / o r a monthly a l l o w a n c e for living c o s t s . Deadline: Open Bursary A bursary of $250 will be awarded in the S p r i n g semester. Satisfactory s c h o l a s t i c standing is a requirement. Deadline: January 30 Bursary T h e bursary is o p e n to w o m e n students C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e in at least three c o u r s e s . enroled at Deadline: January 30 College Faculty Association A bursary of $300 will be awarded in e a c h of the Fall and S p r i n g semesters. F i n a n c i a l need is the main criterion. Deadline: January 30 Capilano College Foundation Bursaries John Percy Williamson Memorial Fund 16 bursaries worth $200 each will be awarded in the S p r i n g semester. A m i n i m u m average of C+ ( G P A 2.3) from the previous semester is normally required. Deadline: January 30. A large n u m b e r of bursaries a v e r a g i n g $200 in value will be a w a r d e d in both the Fall and S p r i n g semesters. A minim u m C+ average ( G P A 2.3) from the previous semester is normally required: vocational students in 6 month p r o g r a m s are eligible to apply. T h e s e bursaries are available to parttime a n d full-time students. D e a d l i n e : January 30 Credit U n i o n Foundation Bursary T h e C r e d i t U n i o n F o u n d a t i o n of B . C . awards two $150 grants e a c h year on the basis of financial need. A p p l i c a n t s must be C a n a d i a n citizens a n d residents of the area served by the C o l l e g e . 16 Accountants A $100 bursary is available to a full-time student at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c o m p l e t i n g the first year of the University Transfer p r o g r a m , w h o is p r o c e e d i n g to s e c o n d year or to a university in the c o m m e r c e o p t i o n , has a g o o d r e c o r d in the a c c o u n t i n g c l a s s e s c o m p l e t e d , has maintained a s e c o n d class standing overall, has financial need and w h o is interested in b e c o m i n g a C h a r t e r e d A c c o u n t a n t . Mary Neil Memorial Bursary T h i s $150 award is presented by the West V a n c o u v e r University W o m e n ' s C l u b in m e m o r y of M a r y N e i l , a former President a n d active m e m b e r S h e was a m u c h loved a n d respected m e m b e r of the C l u b a n d had a life-long interest in e d u c a t i o n . T h e bursary is presented e a c h year to a mature w o m a n student s t u d y i n g full-time or part-time w h o has satisfactory academic standing, demonstrated financial need, and w h o is registered in the a c a d e m i c p r o g r a m . Deadline: January 31. North Shore C o m m u n i t y Credit U n i o n Awards E a c h S p r i n g a $200 bursary is granted to a student with financial need w h o exhibits leadership, c i t i z e n s h i p and g o o d s c h o l a s t i c standing Eligible c a n d i d a t e s are residents of North V a n c o u v e r City or District w h o have c o m p l e t e d o n e year at C a p i l a n o College. Deadline: January 31. Student Society Bursaries T h e S t u d e n t S o c i e t y p r o v i d e s several b u r s a r i e s a n n u a l l y to full-time a n d part-time students. F i n a n c i a l need is the main requirement. George Raven Wood Fund - Deadline: January 30 Deadline: January 30. Deadline: January 30. T h i s award is made p o s s i b l e by the N o r t h S h o r e B u s i n e s s a n d P r o f e s s i o n a l W o m e n ' s C l u b in r e c o g n i t i o n of A l d e r m a n Margaret C a m p b e l l ' s o u t s t a n d i n g c o n t r i b u t i o n to the N o r t h V a n c o u v e r C o m m u n i t y a n d as past president of the C a n a d i a n Federation of B u s i n e s s a n d P r o f e s s i o n a l W o m e n ' s C l u b Capilano Association A $100 bursary is available to a student w h o has c o m p l e t e d the first year of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m in the C o m p u t e r option. Financial need a n d a m i n i m u m G P A of 2.5 are criteria for eligibility. Institute of Chartered of British C o l u m b i a Birks Family Foundation Margaret C a m p b e l l Data Processing Management Bursary W o r k - S t u d y Program T h e W o r k - S t u d y P r o g r a m , a part of the British C o l u m b i a Student A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m , is d e s i g n e d to provide o n c a m p u s work e x p e r i e n c e for students requiring financial a s s i s t a n c e while attending c o l l e g e . A limited n u m b e r of parttime o n - c a m p u s jobs, a v e r a g i n g 5 to 10 h o u r s per week, may be available. T h e P r o g r a m is only o p e n to students d e m o n s t r a t i n g a financial need under t h e ' t e r m s of the B . C . Student A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m . F o r .further details contact the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office. T h e Howe S o u n d Allowance T h e B o a r d of S c h o o l Trustees will give financial assistance to students from this district attending C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e classes c o n d u c t e d outside of S c h o o l District N o . 48 ( H o w e S o u n d ) o n the following terms and c o n d i t i o n s : 1. Students of parents resident in S c h o o l District N o . 48 (Howe S o u n d ) at the time of enrolment, w h o meet the entrance requirements of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e , taking four or more c o u r s e s , shall be eligible to receive the a l l o w a n c e Michael Carr Memorial Award O n e $150 a w a r d will be granted annually in m e m o r y of M i c h a e l C a r r T h e terms are under review. Deadline: January 2. T h e a l l o w a n c e shall be $50 00 per month 3. The a l l o w a n c e will be p a y a b l e only to students w h o have attended s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l within S c h o o l District N o . 48 (Howe S o u n d ) for at least two years within the four years prior to e n r o l i n g at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e 30. Michael Carr Memorial Bursary T h i s award will be given a n n u a l l y to a student e n r o l e d in the s e c o n d semester of any first year p r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . T h e award will go to a student w h o has c o m b i n e d hard work a n d p e r s e v e r a n c e in s c h o l a s t i c s a n d athletics and .who has s h o w n involvement in the c o m m u n i t y . Students w h o are p u r s u i n g studies in spite of h a n d i c a p s are e n c o u r a g e d to apply. 4. T h e a l l o w a n c e shall c e a s e if a student s h o u l d withdraw from courses so that the total number taken falls below four 5. T h e a l l o w a n c e will be payable for a m a x i m u m of four semesters for e a c h student. 6. A student will not receive an a l l o w a n c e for the s e c o n d year of studies unless taking at least four s e c o n d year courses. Letters of reference from an instructor a n d an athletic c o a c h may be requested to s u p p l e m e n t the a p p l i c a t i o n . Deadline: Open 7. Students will apply for the a l l o w a n c e as required by the C o l l e g e . T h e a l l o w a n c e is to be paid to the students at the e n d of e a c h semester provided that the student has c o m p l e t e d the semester as e v i d e n c e d by a transcript of marks presented to the B o a r d . I.B.M. Scholarship for Secretarial Studies A $300 s c h o l a r s h i p will be a w a r d e d to an outstanding student in S e c r e t a r i a l S t u d i e s in the final y e a r of the p r o g r a m A p p l y to the C o o r d i n a t o r , B . T . C . D . Office. 8. A p p l i c a t i o n s for financial assistance from students w h o do not meet the f o r g o i n g requirements but w h o feel they s h o u l d be eligible for assistance, will be referred to the B o a r d of S c h o o l Trustees of S c h o o l District N o . 48 (Howe S o u n d ) for c o n s i d e r a t i o n Kinsmen C l u b of North S h o r e Constance MacGregor INTERNAL AWARDS - SCHOLARSHIPS Scholarships Deadline; January 30. T . Buck Suzuki Memorial Deadline: January 30. Certified General Accountants Association of B . C . T h e Certified G e n e r a l A c c o u n t a n t s A s s o c i a t i o n of B . C . offers two s c h o l a r s h i p s equivalent to the first year's tuition ( a p p r o x i m a t e l y $550) to s t u d e n t s g r a d u a t i n g f r o m an a c c o u n t i n g / b u s i n e s s p r o g r a m w h o have been admitted to the C . G . A . p r o g r a m from C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . A p p l y to the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . Scholarship T w o s c h o l a r s h i p s of $500 e a c h will be a w a r d e d a n n u a l l y to the two students involved full-time in a first year S c i e n c e p r o g r a m w h o have achieved the highest a c a d e m i c standard. Deadline: January 30. O n e $150 a w a r d will be granted a n n u a l l y in m e m o r y of C a r o l i n e S m i t h . T h e terms are under review. Scholarship T o be eligible to apply, a student must have a c h i e v e d an excellent standing in the study of Social S c i e n c e s , particularly in relation to C a n a d i a n affairs. Four $600 s c h o l a r s h i p s will be a w a r d e d a n n u a l l y in the s e c o n d (Spring semester). At the time of printing, the terms of these s c h o l a r s h i p s were under review. Please c h e c k with the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office for c o m p l e t e details. Caroline Smith Memorial Award Memorial T h e C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e F o u n d a t i o n has established this s c h o l a r s h i p in r e c o g n i t i o n of the g e n e r o u s support received from the Estate of the late D o n a l d A n d e r s o n M a c G r e g o r T h e p u r p o s e of the s c h o l a r s h i p is to r e c o g n i z e the i n c r e a s i n g importance of the study of C a n a d i a n affairs in p o s t - s e c o n d a r y institutions. T h e C o l l e g e has a limited n u m b e r of s c h o l a r s h i p s to offer to students with a d e m o n s t r a t e d r e c o r d of s c h o l a s t i c e x c e l l e n c e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . It is h o p e d that the number of s c h o l a r s h i p s will increase; therefore, it is advisable to c h e c k with the F i n a n c i a l A i d Office in N F 1 0 2 on current availability of s c h o l a r s h i p s . Capilano College Foundation Scholarship A $200 s c h o l a r s h i p will be a w a r d e d a n n u a l l y to the top M u s i c T h e r a p y student. A p p l y to the C o o r d i n a t o r , M u s i c Department , T h e s e s c h o l a r s h i p s are restricted to students w h o will be returning to C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e to c o m p l e t e the s e c o n d year of the S c i e n c e p r o g r a m . S e l e c t i o n will be made automatically by the S c i e n c e Faculty at the e n d of the S p r i n g semester. Academic Studies/University Transfer A c a d e m i c transfer c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e provide the student with a variety of a c a d e m i c o p t i o n s within the framework of a two-year, comprehensive college Students transferring to a university c a n select full p r o g r a m s of study acceptable for e q u i v a l e n c y to c o u r s e s in the first two years of university (see note on C o u n s e l l i n g ) . S t u d e n t s w h o desire to take part-time a c a d e m i c studies or w h o are interested in a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s at the first or s e c o n d year level, without the intention of c o n t i n u i n g to upper-level study, c a n select from a range of c o u r s e s in various d i s c i p l i n e s . S t u d e n t s in need of extra help in key areas of a c a d e m i c study c a n select c o u r s e s aimed at basic literacy (see note on E n g l i s h placement exam and Math R e s o u r c e C e n t r e ) . Students interested in s p e c i a l fields of study s u c h as C a n a d i a n Studies, W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s , L a b o u r S t u d i e s , Interdisciplinary studies or s e l f - p a c e d learning c a n select from innovative programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). Mature students, a n d people w h o have not attended college previously or for many years, are urged to enrol in any of these c o u r s e s a n d , in fact, form a large a n d s u c c e s s f u l portion of the a c a d e m i c student body. T h e focus of a c a d e m i c instruction at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is on disciplinary a n d inter-disciplinary study of the highest intellectual calibre. T h e C o l l e g e carefully reviews the curriculum a n d a p p r o a c h e s to e n s u r e a c a d e m i c c u r r e n c y a n d acceptable university e q u i v a l e n c y . A significant, basic library c o l l e c t i o n is available as are full media reference services to complement the courses of study. A c o u n s e l l i n g a n d a d m i s s i o n s placement staff assists students in selecting the best program of studies. T h e final responsibility for c o u r s e s e l e c t i o n , however, rests with the student. Counselling All a c a d e m i c students are advised to see the A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r or a C o u n s e l l o r to plan their c o u r s e s of study. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d c o n s u l t the G u i d a n c e Information and the University Transfer G u i d e in this c a l e n d a r . English Placement Test T h o s e students w h o w i s h to enrol in E n g l i s h c o u r s e s in the A c a d e m i c D i v i s i o n must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students who have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test are required to take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n before registering for any E n g l i s h c o u r s e . S c h e d u l e s of E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s will be p o s t e d in the reception area, Student Info C e n t r e a n d the Humanities Division. The s c h e d u l e d government E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t tests are: J u l y 14, 1981, 7 p.m. in all B . C . C o l l e g e s (at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e in the North C a m p u s Cafeteria) S t u d e n t s s h o u l d write as early as p o s s i b l e . ' English Tutorial Room (B166) T h i s r o o m is reserved on a permanent basis to provide a d r o p - i n w o r k s h o p for students requiring a s s i s t a n c e with their writing p r o b l e m s S t u d e n t s may avail themselves of this service by s i g n i n g the form p o s t e d o u t s i d e the tutorial r o o m . T h i s is not a c o u r s e . Associate in Arts and Science Diploma A student who has c o m p l e t e d the requirements of any four-term C o l l e g e program may receive an A s s o c i a t e in Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma, provided s/he has fulfilled the following conditions. Academic Studies a. C o m p l e t e d 60 credits, at least 30 of w h i c h must be c o m p l e t e d at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . b. O b t a i n e d a 2.00 G r a d e Point A v e r a g e or better. c. O b t a i n e d at least 45 credit hours from the f o l l o w i n g subject areas, i n c l u d i n g at least 6 credit hours in E n g l i s h (100 level or better), a n d at least 6 credit h o u r s from subjects listed in A: B Biology Chemistry Geography Geology Mathematics Physics Anthropology Art Economics English Fine A r t s French Geography Geology German History Mathematics Music Philosophy Political S c i e n c e Psychology Religious Studies Sociology Spanish Theatre Women's Studies 19 Math Learning Centre (NF108) T h i s centre is e q u i p p e d with math learning aids, video tapes, d i a g n o s t i c tests, c a l c u l a t o r s , c o m p u t e r terminals a n d reference textbooks S t u d e n t s taking math c o u r s e s are e n c o u r a g e d to make use of this room to study math, a n d to seek a i d from the faculty m e m b e r o n duty. S e l f - s t u d y programs are available for students wishing to refresh or improve their mathematical skills through the M a t h 12 level. Refer to the c o u r s e descriptions of Math 009, 010, 011, 012 a n d consult with a math instructor for further information. Transfer To and From Other Institutions The A c a d e m i c D i v i s i o n takes s e r i o u s l y its responsibility to maintain transferability with other p o s t - s e c o n d a r y institutions. T o this e n d , m e e t i n g s are held with other institutions to ensure that current practice is c o m m o n l y a c c e p t a b l e a n d that a full transfer p a c k a g e c a n be articulated. C h a n g e s in prog r a m s , new c o u r s e s or new c o u r s e n u m b e r i n g s are carefully c o m p a r e d between institutions a n d this C o l l e g e strives to offer the most c o m p l e t e two year p a c k a g e p o s s i b l e within budget a n d facility restraints. T h e r e is a g r e e m e n t a m o n g all p u b l i c B . C c o l l e g e s to accept e a c h other's credits u p o n transfer, if a p p l i c a b l e to a p r o g r a m given in the admitting c o l l e g e , a n d given suitable e q u i v a l e n c y . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual c o u r s e credit. Transfer credits are granted to students o n a d m i s s i o n for a c c e p t a b l e work d o n e at other institutions; the transfer credits r e d u c e the total number of credits w h i c h are required at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for a certificate or d i p l o m a . S t u d e n t s w i s h ing transfer credit s h o u l d present suitable d o c u m e n t a t i o n to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. A l l approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student R e c o r d . Full information on transfer of specific c o u r s e s is available from the A d m i s s i o n s A d v i s o r , c o u n s e l l o r s and in the pertinent instructional division. Transfer information accurate to the time of printing is to be f o u n d in the Transfer G u i d e s e c t i o n at the back of the calendar. S t u d e n t s are urged to read this section when establishing their p r o g r a m s of study. Academic Course Descriptions Full d e s c r i p t i o n s of all a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s c a n be found in the a l p h a b e t i c a l listings f o l l o w i n g . S t u d e n t s are u r g e d to read carefully the general d i s c i p l i n e information i n c l u d e d in e a c h section. It is the student's responsibility to be familiar with the special information needed to select a c a d e m i c c o u r s e s Women's Studies Program A W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s P r o g r a m , c o n s i s t i n g of a variety of transfer credit, c o l l e g e credit and credit-free c o u r s e s , has been d e v e l o p e d at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . T h e W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s C o m m i t t e e , w h i c h is advisory to all s e g m e n t s of the W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s P r o g r a m , is m a d e up of representatives from the c o l l e g e faculty, staff, student b o d y and the c o m m u n i t y . In addition to the W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s C o l l e g e credit and transfer credit c o u r s e s , there are a c a d e m i c a n d career c o u r s e s in other d i s c i p l i n e s of s p e c i a l interest to w o m e n . A b r o c h u r e is available e a c h term listing additional short, credit-free c o u r s e s , w o r k s h o p s , a n d other presentations of s p e c i a l interest to w o m e n in the c o l l e g e and the community. 20 Labour Studies The L a b o u r S t u d i e s P r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to serve the needs of trade-union o r g a n i z a t i o n s a n d workers in g e n e r a l . C o l l e g e students a n d m e m b e r s of the C o l l e g e c o m m u n i t y will also find the c o u r s e s of benefit. A P r o g r a m A d v i s o r y C o m m i t t e e is e s t a b l i s h e d w h i c h gives o n - g o i n g a d v i c e a n d direction on c o u r s e content, offering, timetable, l o c a t i o n of c o u r s e s and instruction. T h e P r o g r a m offers both credit a n d credit-free instruction, as well as s p e c i a l s e m i n a r s a n d works h o p s For information, obtain the L a b o u r S t u d i e s B r o c h u r e by c a l l i n g 986-1911 ( L o c a l 334) T h e L a b o u r S t u d i e s p r o g r a m also has a g o o d resource h o l d i n g of current labour materials. Music All M u s i c courses listed in the C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l Programs s e c t i o n of the c a l e n d a r u n d e r the M U S I C T R A N S F E R P R O G R A M are transferable to the M u s i c Department at the University of British C o l u m b i a a n d the F a c u l t y of M u s i c at the University of Victoria. S o m e c o u r s e s also carry transfer credit into the Faculty of E d u c a t i o n at U B C and elective credit in the Faculty of Arts. Students are advised to c o n s u l t the M u s i c Department for further information. English as a Second Language S e e c o u r s e and p r o g r a m details page Art University Transfer credit is available for s p e c i f i c S t u d i o art c o u r s e s . C o n s u l t the transfer g u i d e (page ) or the S t u d i o Art Department. Self Paced Learning (SPL) In k e e p i n g with the C o l l e g e ' s p o l i c y for the development of alternative instructional m o d e s , it is p o s s i b l e for the student to pursue studies in first year C h e m i s t r y o n a s e l f - p a c e d time line. Refresher c o u r s e s in math up to the G r a d e 12 level are also available in this self study format. T h e s e p a c k a g e d c o u r s e s , prepared for h o m e study with the a i d of cassette tapes, manuals, slides a n d film loops, are designed to offer students w h o are unable to maintain regular attendance at the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s or a satellite centre the opportunity to pursue college c o u r s e s . T h e y are also available to students w h o are attending a n y c o l l e g e centre, providing these students with a viable alternative to the usual lecture/ tutorial instructional format. The c o u r s e of studies begins in J a n u a r y 1982 with c l a s s e s at the C o l l e g e , c o n t i n u i n g in K a t h m a n d u e d u r i n g February. Students, will be in N e p a l until early April, their program to include a major trek in the H i m a l a y a s , field situations in small g r o u p s , individual research projects, a n d s e m i n a r s at the University of Tribhuvan. Canadian Studies Specialty New Offering by Capilano College Students w h o wish to concentrate their studies on C a n a d i a n content c o u r s e s c a n c h o o s e c o u r s e s from the list below. All courses hold full transfer credit within the appropriate discipline, a n d transfer into the C a n a d i a n Studies P r o g r a m at S F U . N o prerequisites are required The C o l l e g e is offering a C a n a d i a n Studies Specialty to students who qualify for any of the C o l l e g e ' s 3 d i p l o mas and who c o m p l e t e at least 24 of their credits from the following list. T h e s e credits must be from at least 3 different departments. Of these 24 credits, at least 6 must be n u m b e r e d 200 or above. For a C a n a d i a n Studies S p e c i a l t y to be applied to a General Studies Diploma, an English or Communications c o u r s e is required. Canadian Studies 81/82 FALL SPRING B i o l o g y 105 A n t h r o p o l o g y 204 B i o l o g y 204 B i o l o g y 205 E c o n o m i c s 101 E n g l i s h 202 E n g l i s h 203 F r e n c h 160/161 F r e n c h 160/161 F r e n c h 260/261 F r e n c h 260/261 French 290 F r e n c h 291 G e o g r a p h y 106 G e o g r a p h y 106 G e o g r a p h y 108 History 110 History 111 History 201 History 205 History 206 Labour Studies 100 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 100 L a b o u r Studies 110 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 110 L a b o u r Studies 111 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 111 L a b o u r Studies 113 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 113 Labour Studies 115 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 115 Labour Studies 116 L a b o u r Studies 116 Labour Studies 117 L a b o u r Studies 117 Labour Studies 119 L a b o u r Studies 131 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 142 L a b o u r S t u d i e s 140 Political S c i e n c e 104 Political S c i e n c e 202 Q u e b e c Studies 100 Q u e b e c S t u d i e s 101 (in English) (in E n g l i s h ) S o c i o l o g y 200 S o c i o l o g y 201 W o m e n ' s Studies 104 C o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n s for the above are all listed in their respective d i s c i p l i n e s within this calendar. Students may w i s h to c h o o s e electives in related subjects in Humanities and Natural S c i e n c e s . For further information, contact faculty in the appropriate division. Students may apply to the Registrar to have the C a n a d i a n Studies S p e c i a l t y noted on their d i p l o m a s at the time they apply to graduate. T h e instructors' a p p r o a c h will be to integrate the perspectives and m e t h o d o l o g y of e a c h discipline, a p p l y i n g them to the cultural and p h y s i c a l landscape. For s p e c i f i c c o u r s e details see e a c h discipline. Science: General Information A. Non-Science Students Students planning to c o n t i n u e studies at a university are a d v i s e d to c o n s i d e r the following c o u r s e s to fulfill their S c i e n c e requirement: B i o l o g y 104, 105. (Note: T r a n s f e r credit for these B i o l o g y c o u r s e s is limited to n o n - s c i e n c e students) C h e m i s t r y 104, 105 G e o l o g y 110, 111 G e o g r a p h y 112, 114 M a t h 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 108 P h y s i c s 104, 105 Students p l a n n i n g to p u r s u e studies in E c o n o m i c s at U B C must take Math 110 a n d M a t h 111: S F U requires M a t h 108 or M a t h 110 Please c h e c k the prerequisites course description. given in the individual B. Science Students C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Natural S c i e n c e s D i v i s i o n offers a c o m p l e t e first a n d s e c o n d year university transfer p r o g r a m in Biology, Chemistry, Math and Physics. In addition, the Natural S c i e n c e s Division offers s c i e n c e transfer requirements in the following: p r e - m e d i c i n e , predentistry, e n g i n e e r i n g , c o m p u t e r s c i e n c e , g e o l o g y , g e o p h y s i c s and other earth s c i e n c e s , p h y s i c a l g e o g r a p h y , forestry, agriculture, p h a r m a c y , h o m e e c o n o m i c s , rehabilitation m e d i c i n e , dental hygiene. Students w i s h i n g s p e c i f i c c o u r s e requirements for a particular p r o g r a m s h o u l d contact the Natural S c i e n c e s D i v i s i o n . Either of above g r o u p i n g of transfer c o u r s e s f r o m those listed below: i) Biological Sciences (including programs select Biochemistry) First Year B i o l o g y 110/111 C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 P h y s i c s 110/111, 108/111 or 114/115 M a t h 110/111 Interdisciplinary Program to Nepal T h e departments of Anthropology, Biology and G e o g r a p h y will offer an interdisciplinary field study a p p r o a c h to the culture and l a n d s c a p e of N e p a l . T h i s program i n c l u d e s 9 a c a d e m i c , university transfer credits for students s e e k i n g a unique opportunity to participate in an intensive study of the area. E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) Second Year t A c o m p l e t e selection of s e c o n d year c o u r s e s w h i c h are transferable to all three B . C . universities is available. C o n s u l t the B i o l o g y Department for the s p e c i f i c requirements to transfer into third year at the University of y o u r c h o i c e . 21 ii) Chemistry First Year C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 P h y s i c s 114/115, 110/111 or 108/111 Math 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) Elective (6 credits) Second Year C h e m i s t r y 200/201 C h e m i s t r y 204/205 (Transfers to U B C . C o n s u l t a faculty member) P h y s i c s 200/201 a n d 210/211 or 220/221 Math 230, 231 or 235 (depending upon university — c o n s u l t a faculty member) M a t h 200 Elective S c i e n c e Elective from M a t h , P h y s i c s ( r e c o m m e n d e d Math 235) (optional for C h e m i s t r y h o n o u r s students) iii) Geological Sciences (including G e o p h y s i c s , G e o c h e m i s t r y and other earth s c i e n c e s ) First Year Only G e o l o g y 110/111 P h y s i c s 108/111. 110/111 or 114/115 C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 Math 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) iv) Mathematics First Year Math 110/111 P h y s i c s 114/115, 110/111, 108/111 C h e m i s t r y 110/111, 108/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits) Elective (6 credits)* (Math 101, 102, 103 are r e c o m m e n d e d for S F U b o u n d students. Math 103, 104, 106 are recommended for U B C bound students.) Second Year M a t h 200 M a t h 230/231 Math 215 Math 235 Electives v) Physics First Year P h y s i c s 114/115, 110/111 or 108/111 C h e m i s t r y 110/111 or 108/111 M a t h 110/111 E n g l i s h (6 credits - see c o u r s e descriptions) N o n - s c i e n c e Elective or G e o l o g y , B i o l o g y , or C o m p u t e r S c i e n c e (6 credits) Second Year P h y s i c s 200/201 P h y s i c s 210/211 P h y s i c s 220/221 Math 200 Math 230 Math 235 N o n - s c i e n c e Elective (6 credits) S c i e n c e Elective (6 credits) 22 Students interested in H o n o u r s P h y s i c s s h o u l d c o n s u l t P h y s i c s instructors. vi) Other Programs or Combinations of Programs: C o n s u l t Natural S c i e n c e D i v i s i o n for c o u r s e s e l e c t i o n , particularly with regard to s e c o n d year c h o i c e s . Lab/Course Relationship M a n y c o u r s e s require that students c o m p l e t e a lab a n d / o r tutorial. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d e n s u r e that they are aware of a n y s u c h lab requirement and that their timetables i n c l u d e both lab and lecture hours. Students should note that it is necessary to pass the lab in order to pass the c o u r s e . T h e cost of the labs are i n c l u d e d in the tuition fee, except for lab manuals a n d s o m e field trip c o s t s . C o u r s e Description C o d e O n the right hand side of e a c h c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n there is a series of c o d e letters a n d n u m b e r s , for e x a m p l e : E n g l i s h 100 L a n g u a g e S k i l l s (F.S) (3.0,1) T h e first letter(s) indicate the term in w h i c h the class will be offered. E x a m p l e : F-Fall, S - S p r i n g , S U - S u m m e r . T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is to be offered in the Fall a n d S p r i n g terms. T h e first number indicates the n u m b e r of credit hours granted for the c o u r s e a n d the n u m b e r of hours taught per week, the s e c o n d number denotes the n u m b e r of lab hours per week, and the third n u m b e r d e n o t e s the n u m b e r of seminar/tutorial/4th instructional hours per week. T h u s , E n g l i s h 100 is offered three hours a week for three credit hours with no lab times a n d o n e hour per week of 4th instructional hour. Anthropology Instructional Faculty Anthropology B e r d i c h e w s k y , B., B . A . ( U . of C h i l e ) , P h . D . (Madrid) L i n d , K., B.A., M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) General Information Students w h o intend to major or minor in A n t h r o p o l o g y s h o u l d take both A n t h r o p o l o g y 120 a n d 121- if they will be attending the University of British C o l u m b i a . S i m o n Fraser University o r University of V i c t o r i a . A l l other c o u r s e s listed receive A n t h r o p o l o g y credit at the above universities. W o m e n ' s Studies 122, W o m e n in A n t h r o p o l o g y may be s u b s t i t u t e d f o r A n t h r o p o l o g y 120 or 1 2 1 , m i n o r / m a j o r program. Anthropology 120 Introduction to Social Anthropology (F.S) (3,0,1) A survey of the d i s c i p l i n e to include the study of h u m a n evolution a n d o u r place a m o n g the primates, structure a n d organization of society, a n d the individual a n d society. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the c o m p a r a t i v e study of s o c i a l institutions of n o n - W e s t e r n cultures. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Anthropology 121 Introduction to Social Anthropology (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n t h r o p o l o g y 120, W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 122, o r by written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of A n t h r o p o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s a n d theories of culture, as well as the a n a l y s i s of cultural institutions s u c h as kinship, e c o n o m i c s , religion a n d politics. T r a n s f e r a b l e t o S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Anthropology 123 Introduction to A r c h a e o l o g y a n d the Prehistoric Past (F) (3,0,1) A survey of the g o a l s of A r c h a e o l o g y , its theoretical framework, and the method and t e c h n i q u e s to treat material. R e l a t i o n s h i p with other d i s c i p l i n e s , both in s o c i a l a n d natural sciences. R e c o n s t r u c t i o n and interpretation of the prehistoric past. Illustrated with e x a m p l e s . S t u d e n t s will have the o p p o r tunity to visit A r c h a e o l o g i c a l c o l l e c t i o n s a n d laboratories a n d will participate in g r o u p laboratory sessions. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Anthropology 124 Archaeology a n d H u m a n Origins (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n t h r o p o l o g y 120, A n t h r o p o l o g y 123 o r b y written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A n introduction to the theory a n d evidence for the p h y s i c a l and s o c i o - c u l t u r a l evolution of m a n k i n d as presented by A r c h a e o l o g y a n d P h y s i c a l A n t h r o p o l o g y . S t u d e n t s will participate in field trips to m u s e u m s a n d A r c h a e o l o g y laboratories. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . 200 Intermediate Social Anthropology (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n t h r o p o l o g y 120, W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 122 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A study of the s o c i a l structure and o r g a n i z a t i o n of various cultures of the w o r l d . E m p h a s i s o n the d y n a m i c s of culture, the c r o s s - c u l t u r a l a p p r o a c h , the t h e o r e t i c a l i s s u e s in Anthropology T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Anthropology 202 Introduction to Cultural E c o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) T h e study of people, culture, environment. T h e m e s will include the A r c h a e o l o g i c a l r e c o r d ; e c o l o g y of early f o o d p r o d u c t i o n ; adaptive strategies of hunter/gatherers, pastoralists a n d peasants. Current e c o l o g i c a l c o n c e r n s from an A n t h r o p o l o g i c a l perspective. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Anthropology 204 Ethnic Relations (F) (3,0,1) A study of the relations between ethnic g r o u p s i n c l u d i n g an e x a m i n a t i o n of h o w ethnic g r o u p s c o m e to be defined, how they are maintained, stereotyping, a n d h o w these processes interrelate with other s o c i a l variables s u c h as e c o n o m i c s , e d u c a t i o n , v i o l e n c e a n d the family. T h e f o c u s will usually be on B . C . Students will be e n g a g e d in s o m e primary research. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Anthropology 249 Comparative Cultures: A Field Study in Anthropology (S) (3) Prerequisite: A n t h r o p o l o g y 120 or b y written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A n interdisciplinary c o u r s e to consider in depth a particular g e o g r a p h i c area a n d its people. C o m p a r a t i v e institutions, cultural e c o l o g y , the l a n d s c a p e , m e t h o d s of observation a n d study. Students a n d instructors study in the field. In alternate years study will also take place in a country outside of C a n a d a . Offered as a c o m p o n e n t of the interdisciplinary p r o g r a m to N e p a l . S e e p a g e 21 for further details. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Women's Studies 122 W o m e n in Anthropology (F) (3,0,1) T h e a n t h r o p o l o g i c a l perspective a p p l i e d to w o m e n in different cultures of the w o r l d ; their role in e c o n o m i c , political, religious, kinship, a n d e x p r e s s i v e s y s t e m s . E x p l o r a t i o n of the work of w o m e n a n t h r o p o l o g i s t s and the effect of theory o n u n d e r s t a n d i n g w o m e n . W h a t is the w o m a n ' s e x p e r i e n c e in cultures and areas s u c h as the E s k i m o , A m a z o n jungle, Israeli kibbutz, G r e e c e , A f g h a n i s t a n , India, M e x i c o a n d A f r i c a . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. A n t h r o p o l o g y credit is available for this c o u r s e . Please see W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s for further information: 23 Biology Instructional Faculty Fitz-Earle, M., B . S c . (Nottingham), M . S c . (Toronto), P h . D . (Toronto) Frazier, E A . , B S c (Bristol), Cert. E d . ( C a n t a b ) , M . S . , P h . D . ( W a s h ) , C o o r d i n a t o r of B i o l o g y G i b s o n , W . G . , B.A., D i p l . E d . (Sask.), D i p l . E d . ( C a l g a r y ) , Ph D. (Brit. C o l ) , D i v i s i o n C o o r d i n a t o r , Natural S c i e n c e s Division Ricker, N.A., B A. (Calif.), M . S c , P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) S h a r p , J . C . , B . A . , B . S c ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . (Brit. C o l . ) W a d e , L.K., B . S c , M . S c . (Brit. C o l ) , P h D ( A . N . U . ) Laboratory Supervisors a n d Technician C a n n i n g , J . , B . S c , Prof. Teacher's Cert. (Brit. C o l ) , Laboratory Supervisor M c D o n e l l , L , B.H.E. (Brit. C o l . ) , Laboratory S u p e r v i s o r S a n d e r s o n , C , B . S c (Durham), Laboratory S u p e r v i s o r W i l l i a m s o n , B., D i p l . T e c h . ( B . C . l . T ) , L a b o r a t o r y T e c h n i c i a n General Information C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e B i o l o g y Department offers c o u r s e s to meet a variety of e d u c a t i o n a l needs. S t u d e n t s w h o have a general interest in b i o l o g y may take the B i o l o g y 100/101 c o u r s e s w h i c h have no laboratories. T h e B i o l o g y 104/105 series meet the laboratory s c i e n c e requirements for Arts stu? dents. T h o s e p l a n n i n g a major in b i o l o g y or s o m e other life s c i e n c e (eg. agriculture) s h o u l d enrol in B i o l o g y 110/111. P r e - p r o f e s s i o n a l students w h o intend to enter Dentistry, M e d i c i n e . Forestry, H o m e E c o n o m i c s , R e h a b i l i t a t i o n M e d i cine or Dental H y g i e n e s h o u l d also take B i o l o g y 110/111. T h e department also offers a p a c k a g e of t w o c o u r s e s in Plant P r o p a g a t i o n , B i o l o g y 150/151, for the interested amateur, biology majors a n d those students l o o k i n g for immediate entry into the j o b market. A prerequisite waiver e x a m i n a t i o n for B i o l o g y 110/111 is held d u r i n g the first week of c l a s s e s in S e p t e m b e r . T h o s e p a s s i n g this e x a m receive a prerequisite waiver for B i o l o g y 110/111, e n a b l i n g them to register directly in s e c o n d year b i o l o g y c o u r s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . N o credit, however, is given for B i o l o g y 110/111. T h e prerequisite waiver e x a m is not intended for those students w h o must have credit in first year b i o l o g y for their s u b s e q u e n t e d u c a t i o n a l goals. T h e b i o l o g y c o o r d i n a t o r s h o u l d be c o n t a c t e d for further details A c o m p l e t e s e l e c t i o n of s e c o n d year c o u r s e s is available w h i c h meet the credit transfer requirements of the three B . C . universities. S o m e of the s e c o n d year c o u r s e s may be included in the requirements for pre-professional p r o g r a m s , a n d for s p e c i f i c life s c i e n c e programs. T h e student s h o u l d consult the B i o l o g y Department for details of c o u r s e requirements for various programs. A l l biology c o u r s e s require weekly laboratory periods a n d / or field trips unless otherwise indicated below. ( S o m e c o u r s e s also have extended field trips.) T h e students' contributions to the c o s t s of the laboratories are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e tuition fee. L a b manuals for those c o u r s e s requiring them must be purchased for a nominal fee. T h e student is expected to defray in part the costs a s s o c i a t e d with s o m e field trips. For those c o u r s e s w h i c h have credit transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c , the student s h o u l d c o n s u l t the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the calendar. 24 Biology 100 C o n t e m p o r a r y Biological Issues I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for n o n - s c i e n c e students w h o require o r are interested in a s c i e n c e c o u r s e without a l a b o r a tory c o m p o n e n t . T h e c o u r s e will c o n s i d e r in d e p t h several c o n t e m p o r a r y b i o l o g i c a l issues, i n c l u d i n g fitness a n d repair a n d m a i n t e n a n c e of the h u m a n b o d y a n d relate these t o b a s i c b i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s . T h e c o u r s e is a l s o d e s i g n e d t o i n c r e a s e the students' ability to critically interpret a n d evaluate current issues related to biology. Tutorials will provide an opportunity for students t o q u e s t i o n a n d to c o n t r i b u t e their o w n e x p e r i ence. T h e r e will also be time to study d e m o n s t r a t i o n s , films and other audio-visual materials related to the c o u r s e content F o r university transfer status c o n s u l t B i o l o g y Department. Biology 101 Contemporary Biological Issues II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . In this c o u r s e , w h i c h is a c o m p l e m e n t to B i o l o g y 100, issues related to h u m a n g e n e t i c s , e v o l u t i o n , b e h a v i o u r a n d e c o l o g y will be c o n s i d e r e d . F o r university transfer status c o n s u l t B i o l o g y Department. Biology 104 H u m a n Biology (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . T h e first semester of a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d a s a laboratory s c i e n c e elective for students w h o d o not plan to take further c o u r s e s in the b i o l o g i c a l s c i e n c e s . B a s i c p r i n c i p l e s of h u m a n b i o l o g y will b e presented a n d the impact of the e n v i r o n m e n t u p o n h u m a n s will be evaluated. M a j o r t o p i c s will i n c l u d e h u m a n p h y s i o l o g y , h u m a n g e n e t i c s a n d d i s o r d e r s of both. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c Biology 105 Environmental Biology (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . T h e s e c o n d semester of a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d as a laboratory s c i e n c e elective for students w h o d o not plan to take further c o u r s e s in b i o l o g i c a l s c i e n c e s e x c e p t for B i o l o g y 204. B a s i c p r i n c i p l e s of e c o l o g y will be d e v e l o p e d a n d the impact of c o n t e m p o r a r y society o n the e n v i r o n m e n t will be a s s e s s e d . M a j o r t o p i c s include: e c o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s a n d e n v i r o n m e n t a l issues O n e s e c t i o n of B i o l o g y 105 will b e offered as part of the inter-disciplinary p r o g r a m in N e p a l , S p r i n g 1982. ( F o r further details s e e page ). T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 110 Introductory Biology I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e ; however, at least B i o l o g y 11 is strongly recommended. T h e standard introductory b i o l o g y c o u r s e for students w h o plan to take further c o u r s e s in this area. M a j o r t o p i c s will i n c l u d e the o r i g i n of life, c e l l structure a n d f u n c t i o n , t h e t y p e s of c e l l d i v i s i o n , introductory g e n e t i c s , a n d the p r o c e s s of development. O n e e n r i c h e d s e c t i o n of B i o l o g y 110 will be available. Prerequisite: G r a d e of B o r better in B i o l o g y 12 or c o n s e n t of the instructor. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 111 Introductory Biology II (S) (3,3,1) Biology 204 Ecology I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 105 or 111. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B i o l o g y 110 w h i c h further d e v e l o p s the d i s c u s s i o n of b a s i c b i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s i n c l u d i n g b i o l o g i c a l systems, evolution and e c o l o g y . The first term of an introductory course in general ecology, stressing biotic-environmental relationships at the ecosystem level: c o n c e p t of the e c o s y s t e m , its c o m p o n e n t s a n d d y n a m ics, energy flow in e c o s y s t e m s , nutrient c y c l i n g , b i o g e o climatic z o n e s with e m p h a s i s on British C o l u m b i a , vegetation a n d a n a l y s i s E m p h a s i s is o n p r i n c i p l e s of plant e c o l o g y a n d on p r o b l e m s in this field. C o u r s e i n c l u d e s a 2-day field trip to M a n n i n g Park a n d the S o u t h e r n O k a n a g a n Valley. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 150 Plant Propagation I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: N o n e ; however, at least B i o l o g y 11 is r e c o m mended Transferable to S F U , U B C . a n d U.Vic. A c o u r s e in practical plant propagation t e c h n i q u e s , providing as b a c k g r o u n d an e x a m i n a t i o n of basic botanical aspects i n c l u d i n g vascular plant life c y c l e s , reproductive methods, tissue systems, plant organs, a n d plant propagation systems in nature. Plant propagation objectives a n d t e c h niques will follow, with e m p h a s i s o n the various traditional propagation methods s u c h as layering, grafting, cuttings, offshoots, and propagation by seed. W e e k l y labs or field trips will e m p h a s i z e the d e v e l o p m e n t a n d practice of skills. M a n y of these will be held at other institutions i n c l u d i n g U B C and Van D u s e n Botanical G a r d e n s . For university transfer status consult B i o l o g y Dept. Biology 205 Ecology II (S) (3,3,1) Biology 151 Plant Propagation II (S) (3,3,1) Biology 209 Morphology of Non-Vascular Plants (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 150. Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B i o l o g y 150, with major e m p h a s i s on tissue culture, its theory and practical application. T h e aspects of cell biology, m i c r o b i o l o g y a n d sterile t e c h n i q u e s relevant to tissue culture will be e x a m i n e d as b a c k g r o u n d with further e m p h a s i s directed towards d e v e l o p i n g practical skills in this new field P o l y p l o i d y a n d its induction will be e x a m i n e d as a plant breeding tool. Weekly labs and field trips, with emphasis on practical e x p e r i e n c e , will be held, a n u m b e r of w h i c h will be off c a m p u s . U p o n c o m p l e t i o n of the c o u r s e an optional practicum may be made available. For university transfer status c o n s u l t B i o l o g y Department. A comparative study of the n o n - v a s c u l a r plant g r o u p s , the algae, fungi, lichens a n d b r y o p h y t e s with e m p h a s i s o n the m o r p h o l o g y , life-cycles, evolution, a n d e c o l o g y of e a c h of the g r o u p s . D i s c u s s i o n s of p r o b l e m s in n o n - v a s c u l a r plant morphology. Biology 200 Genetics (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisites: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. B i o l o g y 214 is r e c o m mended. Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 204. A continuation of Biology 204, with e m p h a s i s on principles a n d p r o b l e m s of animal e c o l o g y . Included are selected n o n British C o l u m b i a n e c o s y s t e m s ; population d y n a m i c s ; e c o l ogy of selected B . C . m a m m a l s ; e c o l o g i c a l aspects of animal behaviour. C o u r s e i n c l u d e s a 3-day field trip to the T o f i n o area, V a n c o u v e r Island. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U V i c Not offered in 1981/82. Biology 210 Morphology of Vascular Plants (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. A comparative study of t h e vascular plant g r o u p s , the pteridophytes, g y m n o s p e r m s and angiosperms with emphasis o n the evolution, m o r p h o l o g y , e c o l o g y a n d function of each of the groups. D i s c u s s i o n s of p r o b l e m s in plant m o r p h o l o g y . G e n e t i c s of procaryotes; c h e m i c a l basis of inheritance and the evolution of eukaryotes. M e n d e l i a n a n d m o d i f i e d M e n d e l i a n genetics, sex determination a n d s e x - l i n k a g e . G e n e t i c m a p p i n g a n d c h r o m o s o m a l aberrations. P o p u l a t i o n and quantitative genetics. C u r r e n t p r o b l e m s in applied genetics T h e r e is no laboratory for this c o u r s e Biology 212 Invertebrate Zoology (F) (3,3,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C . a n d U . V i c Not offered 1981/82. A comparative survey of the invertebrates. Major phyla and classes, with emphasis upon evolutionary trends, adaptive biology and e c o l o g y of e a c h g r o u p . T h e c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d a r o u n d the major unifying c o n c e p t of evolution. P r o b l e m s of contemporary interest in the field of invertebrate z o o l o g y . T h e c o u r s e will i n c l u d e a 3-day field trip to the B a m f i e l d M a r i n e Station Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic 25 Chemistry Biology 213 Vertebrate Z o o l o g y (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111. A c o n t i n u a t i o n from invertebrate z o o l o g y , c o v e r i n g the vertebrates a n d protochordates. E m p h a s i s again o n e v o l u tionary trends, especially in regards to m o r p h o l o g y , function and e c o l o g y of e a c h class. C u r r e n t c o n c e p t s a n d problems will be stressed. The lab is designed to examine representative s p e c i m e n s of existing classes of vertebrates. T h e m o r p h o l o g y and evolutionary trends in organ systems will be e m p h a s i z e d . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 214 Cell Biology I - Structural Basis (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111 a n d c o n c u r r e n t registration in C h e m i s t r y 200, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A n integrated study of cell structure a n d function as d e t e r m i n e d by electron m i c r o s c o p y ; ultrastructure will be related to cell physiology a n d biochemistry. T h e interrelations a m o n g the various c o m p o n e n t s will be d i s c u s s e d from an evolutionary viewpoint. Laboratory e x e r c i s e s will concentrate o n the use of light vs. electron m i c r o s c o p y a n d through this c o m p a r i s o n develop an appreciation for micro units. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 215 Cell Biology II - Introduction to Biochemistry (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 214 a n d c o n c u r r e n t registration in C h e m i s t r y 201, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the fundamental p r i n c i p l e s a n d basic facts of b i o c h e m i s t r y starting with protein structure a n d e n z y m e functions. C e l l energetics, b i o s y n t h e s i s and the m e c h a n i s m s w h i c h c o n t r o l cell m e t a b o l i s m will a l s o be c o n s i d e r e d T h e r e is no laboratory with this c o u r s e . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 220 Principles of M i c r o b i o l o g y (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 110 a n d 111: C h e m i s t r y 110 a n d 111. C o r e q u i s i t e : Transfer to U B C requires C h e m i s t r y 200/201. A c o m p r e h e n s i v e treatment of introductory m i c r o b i o l o g y T h e origin, basic structure, growth and m e t a b o l i s m of m i c r o o r g a n i s m s will be d i s c u s s e d . T h e lab provides practical e x p e r i e n c e in standard m i c r o b i a l t e c h n i q u e s . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Biology 221 Principles of Microbiology (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: B i o l o g y 220. A continuation of Biology 220. emphasizing immunological aspects, genetics and ecology of micro-organisms. T h e role of m i c r o - o r g a n i s m s in agriculture, various industries, health and sanitation is c o n s i d e r e d T h e lab also includes a major project of interest to the student. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. 26 Instructional Faculty Gilchrist, A . B . , Ph.D. (SFU) Le C o u t e u r , P . C . , B . S c , M . S c . ( A u c k l a n d ) , P h . D . (Calif.), C o o r d i n a t o r of C h e m i s t r y , G e o l o g y a n d P h y s i c s . R e a d , D.W., B.A., M . S c . (Brit. C o l ) . P h . D . ( M c G i l l ) Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians Allan, B.J., Dipl. Tech. (B.C.l.T.), Laboratory Technician S m i t h . I., H . N . C . ( A b e r d e e n ) , L a b o r a t o r y S u p e r v i s o r General Information All chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. T h e cost of the labs are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e tuition fee except for lab m a n u a l s a n d s o m e field trip costs. For transfer status of the following c o u r s e s at S F U , U B C , or U . V i c , please refer to the Transfer G u i d e at the b a c k of the calendar. Chemistry 030 A n Introduction to Chemistry ( S U ) Possibly (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: N o n e . ( N o university transfer credit.) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for those students w h o have h a d no previous chemistry, and w h o w i s h to g o on in s c i e n c e s . N o labs are given. T h e atom, atomic m a s s e s , the mole, c h e m i c a l formulas, i o n i c a n d covalent b o n d i n g . B a l a n c i n g e q u a t i o n s , s i m p l e stoichiometrical problems, solutions, acids, bases a n d salts, equilibrium. Chemistry 104 Fundamentals of Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) P r e r e q u i s i t e : N o n e , b u t some chemistry and mathematics recommended. A c o u r s e s p e c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d for n o n - s c i e n c e students w h o need first-year c h e m i s t r y requirements for n u r s i n g , home e c o n o m i c s a n d p h y s i c a l e d u c a t i o n , e t c A study of chemical principles; stoichiometry; oxidation-reduction, solids, liquids and gases; the c h e m i c a l b o n d ; atomic structure; c h e m i c a l periodicity. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 105 Fundamentals of Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 104. A study of electrochemistry, introductory thermodynamics; representative inorganic c h e m i s t r y ; e q u i l i b r i u m ; a c i d s , bases and salts: o r g a n i c chemistry. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 108 Basic Chemistry (F) (4.5, 3, 1.5) Chemistry 200 O r g a n i c Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 11 or C h e m i s t r y 030, M a t h 12 or equivalent. M a t h 110 s h o u l d be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y , if not already c o m p l e t e d . S t u d e n t s with C h e m i s t r y 12 permitted to enrol in C h e m i s t r y 108 only with C h e m i s t r y Department permission. Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 105 or 111 T h i s c o u r s e c o v e r s the material of C h e m i s t r y 110 a n d , in addition, provides the b a c k g r o u n d n e c e s s a r y for a student who has not taken C h e m i s t r y 12. A student p a s s i n g this c o u r s e s h o u l d be able to enter C h e m i s t r y 111 in the S p r i n g . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. A study of n o m e n c l a t u r e ; structure; identification a n d spectroscopy of organic molecules, alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic c o m p o u n d s , a l c o h o l s , a l d e h y d e s , ketones, ethers, a c i d s . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 201 O r g a n i c Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 200 Chemistry 110 Principles a n d M e t h o d s of Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 12 a n d Math 12 M a t h 110 must be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y if not already c o m p l e t e d . A c o u r s e for students w h o plan c a r e e r s in s c i e n c e . A study of stoichiometry: the g a s e o u s state; solids; liquids; solutions; atomic structure; the p e r i o d i c s y s t e m ; c h e m i c a l b o n d i n g . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 110 S . P . L . - Principles a n d M e t h o d s of Chemistry (F,S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 12 a n d Math 12. M a t h 110 must be taken concurrently, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A s e l f - p a c e d learning c o u r s e equivalent in content to C h e m i s t r y 110, o p e n to any student but d e s i g n e d to be of particular value to those students w h o are unable to attend the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, o n a regular basis. Optical isomerism; carbohydrates; amines, amides, nitriles, nitro, a z o , diazo a n d related c o m p o u n d s ; protein chemistry; electrophilic aromatic substitution; h e t e r o c y c l i c s ; p o l y m e r s ; natural products. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 204 Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 105 with " B " s t a n d i n g or C h e m i s t r y 111, a n d M a t h 111. A study of thermodynamics, thermochemistry; equilibrium; a c i d s a n d bases, p H determinations, solubility products, quantitative i n o r g a n i c analysis, c h e m i c a l kinetics. B i o l o g i c a l a p p l i c a t i o n s of these topics stressed. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic Chemistry 205 Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 204. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 111 Principles a n d Methods of Chemistry (S) (3,3,1) A study of electrochemistry; g a l v a n i c cells, o x i d a t i o n reduction in b i o l o g i c a l systems; m a c r o m o l e c u l a r s y s t e m s , main g r o u p systematic chemistry; transition elements a n d coordination complexes. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 108 or 110 Math 111 must be taken concurrently, if not already c o m p l e t e d . T h e r m o d y n a m i c s , equilibrium, a c i d s , bases, a n d salts; redox equations, electrochemistry; transition metals and their c o m p l e x e s ; o r g a n i c chemistry. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Chemistry 111 S . P . L . - Principles a n d Methods of Chemistry (F,S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C h e m i s t r y 108 or 110. M a t h 111 must be taken concurrently, if not already c o m p l e t e d . A s e l f - p a c e d learning c o u r s e equivalent in content to C h e m i s t r y 111 a n d d e s i g n e d to be of particular value to those students who are unable to attend the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, on a regular basis. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. 27 Commerce Economics General Information Instructional Faculty: T h e C o m m e r c e P r o g r a m is a University Transfer P r o g r a m primarily intended for students w i s h i n g to c o n t i n u e their studies at U B C or S F U . S t u d e n t s are a d v i s e d that the C o l l e g e a l s o offers a two-year C a r e e r P r o g r a m under the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department. A m o n , N., B.A. (Kent), M.A. ( S F U ) B r o w n , D., B.A. (Carleton), M.A. ( S F U ) M i r z a , M.A., B . S c . (Univ. L o n d o n ) , P h . D . ( S F U ) Sayre, J . E . , B . S . , B.A. (Denver), M.A. (Boston) A. Transfer to U B C General Information S t u d e n t s w i s h i n g to transfer to the F a c u l t y of C o m m e r c e at U B C after one year at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e must c o m p l e t e a " p r e - C o m m e r c e " p a c k a g e of c o u r s e s c o n s i s t i n g of the following: E c o n o m i c s is a social science concerned with the allocation of scarce resources and involving the production, distribution, a n d c o n s u m p t i o n of wealth E c o n o m i c s 100 and 101 are introductory courses which raise and explore the kinds of questions e c o n o m i s t s deal with. T h e y also serve as an i n t r o d u c t i o n to the study of formal e c o n o m i c theory in the 200 level c o u r s e s . i) A n y t w o of E n g l i s h 100 (or 102), 104, 105, 106, 108 ii) E c o n o m i c s 200 a n d 201. iii) T w o 100-level Mathematics courses. (Refer to Mathematics section). iv) 12 units of n o n - C o m m e r c e * electives. 'NoteStudents interested in transferring c o u r s e s to the Faculty of C o m m e r c e at U B C must c o m p l e t e the p r e - C o m m e r c e year before transfer credit will be granted for First-year C o m m e r c e c o u r s e s . S t u d e n t s w i s h i n g to c o n t i n u e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for their s e c o n d year of studies ("First-year" C o m m e r c e ) will hopefully be able to do so starting in the 1982/83 a c a d e m i c year. Interested s t u d e n t s s h o u l d c o n t a c t Division for further information. the Counselling B. Transfer to SFU S t u d e n t s w i s h i n g to transfer to the F a c u l t y of A r t s ( S c h o o l of B u s i n e s s A d m i n i s t r a t i o n a n d E c o n o m i c s ) at S F U after o n e or two years at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e s h o u l d contact the Counselling Division. Students w h o plan to major in E c o n o m i c s or C o m m e r c e s h o u l d c o m p l e t e E c o n o m i c s 200 a n d 201 before p r o c e e d i n g to third year c o u r s e s at U B C , S F U , or elsewhere. S t u d e n t s w h o plan to major in E c o n o m i c s at S F U are a l s o a d v i s e d to c o m p l e t e E c o n o m i c s 120 a n d 121. S t u d e n t s w h o plan to transfer to U B C C o m m e r c e s h o u l d take E c o n o m i c s 200/201 in their first year. Economics 100 Introduction to Economics (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e that involves the identification a n d study of current e c o n o m i c issues. R e f e r e n c e is m a d e to the nature a n d historical d e v e l o p m e n t of c a p i t a l i s m a n d h o w it has been c h a n g i n g a n d to the contrasts b e t w e e n c a p i t a l i s m a n d s o c i a l i s m . G o v e r n m e n t fiscal a n d monetary p o l i c i e s a n d s i m p l e e c o n o m i c c o n c e p t s s u c h as s u p p l y a n d d e m a n d are dealt with. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . Economics 101 Canadian Economics Macro and Micro Considerations (F) (3,0,1) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the c o n t e m p o r a r y structure of the C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y witti s o m e historical reference. T h e i m p o r t a n c e of international trade a n d tariffs, the effects of foreign investment and o w n e r s h i p ; the p r o b l e m s of regional disparities and poverty; the interplay of business, government a n d unions and federal-provincial relations a n d taxation polic i e s are c o n s i d e r e d . F o c u s is on the hard e c o n o m i c c h o i c e s the people of C a n a d a now face. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Economics 120 Economic History of the Pre-lndustrial Era (F) (3,0,1) A b r o a d s w e e p of e c o n o m i c history from man's earliest b e g i n n i n g s to the Industrial R e v o l u t i o n . T h e e c o n o m i c s of pre-historic m a n , the River C i v i l i z a t i o n s , G r e e c e , R o m e a n d E u r o p e in the M i d d l e A g e s are studied, while e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the transition f r o m E u r o p e a n F e u d a l i s m to early forms of capitalism. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. 28 English Economics 121 Economic History of the Industrial Era (S) (3,0,1) A study of the Industrial R e v o l u t i o n a n d s u b s e q u e n t e c o n o m i c growth to the present in context of several c o u n tries i n c l u d i n g C a n a d a C o n t r a s t is m a d e between the paths of development of today's industrial nations and those nations that are now attempting to industrialize. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Economics 200 Principles of Macroeconomic Theory (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: At least o n e 100 level E c o n o m i c s c o u r s e is strongly r e c o m m e n d e d . T h e formal K e y n e s i a n theory of national i n c o m e determination and s o m e c o n t e m p o r a r y critiques of this theory are c o n s i d e r e d Included is the study of the p o s s i b l e c a u s e s of and solutions to u n e m p l o y m e n t a n d inflation a n d the importance of international trade G o v e r n m e n t fiscal a n d monetary p o l i c i e s are e x a m i n e d in detail. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomic Theory (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: At least one 100 level E c o n o m i c s c o u r s e is strongly r e c o m m e n d e d . A study of the theoretical constructs of consumer behaviour and the operation of b u s i n e s s firms in the market e c o n o m y under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, m o n o p o l y and m o n o p o l i s t i c competition. Included is the analysis of the firm's equilibrium position and the determinants of i n c o m e distribution. Instructional Faculty B u r s t e i n , F., B.A. (Wash. St. L o u i s ) , M.A., P h . D . (Boston) C l i f f o r d , J . , B.A , M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) C o n n e l l , P L . , B.A., M.A. (Brit. Col.) C o u p e , R.. B.A. ( T a s m a n i a ) , P h . D . (Brit. Col.) C o u p e y . P L . , B.A ( M c G i l l ) . M.A. (Brit. Col.) F a h l m a n R e i d . M.L., B.A. (Brit. C o l . ) , M.A. (Toronto) Forst, G . N . , B.A., P h . D . (Brit. Col.) Gilbert, S R . , B.A. (U.Vic.). M . A . (Brit. C o l . ) H i n d m a r c h , G . . B.A.. M.A. (Brit. Col.) H o w a r d , I., B.A.. M.A. (Brit Col.) J a n t z e n , D.H., B.A. (Brit C o l . ) . M.A. (York) M c K e o w n . T., B.A., M.A. (Brit. Col.) S c h e r m b r u c k e r , W . G . . B . A ( C a p e t o w n ) . P . G r a d . Cert in E d . ( L o n d o n ) , M.A., P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) S h e r r i n , R . G . . B.A., M . F . A . (Brit. Col.) T h e s e n , S.„ B.A., M . A . ( S F U ) Whittaker, E . M . , B.A. (Brit. Col.) General Information S t u d e n t s intending to transfer to university s h o u l d take two first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s other than 190, 191. T h o s e b o u n d for S i m o n Fraser University c a n obtain transfer credits for 010, if they desire Intending majors a n d h o n o u r s students s h o u l d c o m p l e t e E n g l i s h 200 and 201, a n d are e n c o u r a g e d to take other s e c o n d - y e a r E n g l i s h c o u r s e s . E n g l i s h 200 a n d 201 are s o m e times required for certain Arts a n d E d u c a t i o n programs. Students s h o u l d seek university c a l e n d a r s a n d help from A d v i s o r s in d e t e r m i n i n g requirements. Note: For 1st year E n g l i s h Transfer credit at U B C , students must take a n y two of 100 or 102, 104, 105, 106, 108 Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Courses Not Offered 1981-1982 T h e following E n g l i s h c o u r s e s are not offered in 1981-82. T h e y will be reactivated w h e n there is sufficient student interest. If y o u s e r i o u s l y w i s h to take o n e of these c o u r s e s , inform the E n g l i s h Department. E n g l i s h 110/111 Introduction to L i n g u i s t i c s , E n g l i s h 160/161 R e a d i n g s in the 19th and 20th Century Novel, English 165/166 J o u r n a l i s m : C o l l e g e N e w s p a p e r P r o d u c t i o n , E n g l i s h 176/177 A n c i e n t and Mediaeval M y t h o l o g y / F o l k Tales and L e g e n d s , Humanities 100/101 M o v e m e n t s in Art and Literature. English Placement Test T h o s e students w h o wish to enrol in E n g l i s h c o u r s e s in the A c a d e m i c D i v i s i o n must submit the results of the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. T h o s e students w h o have not taken the B . C . G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test are required to take the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n before registering for any E n g l i s h , H u m a n i t i e s G e n e r a l or G e n e r a l S t u d i e s course. S c h e d u l e s of E n g l i s h S c r e e n i n g E x a m i n a t i o n s will be posted in the reception area. Student Info C e n t r e a n d the Humanities Division. 29 English 010 L a n g u a g e Skills (F,S) (3,0,1) English 105 Poetry (F,S) (3,0,1) Note: C r e d i t sections of this c o u r s e are transferable to S i m o n Fraser D r o p - i n s e c t i o n s are non-credit. A study of s e l e c t e d major a n d significant m i n o r 20th century poets w h o s e poetry is of intrinsic literary merit T h e chief a i m of the c o u r s e , b e y o n d b r o a d e n i n g a n d d e e p e n i n g the student's u n d e r s t a n d i n g and a p p r e c i a t i o n of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original r e s p o n s e s to literary e x p r e s s i o n , a n d to increase the student's ability to e x p r e s s those r e s p o n s e s in w e l l - d e v e l o p e d oral a n d written c r i t i c i s m . A n intensive Writing W o r k s h o p in basic l a n g u a g e skills to e n a b l e the student to p r o c e e d without difficulty through a regular c o l l e g e p r o g r a m . C u r r i c u l u m will evolve from the a s s e s s e d needs of the students M o s t work will be practical. S t u d e n t s may enter the d r o p - i n s e c t i o n s of the Writing W o r k s h o p d u r i n g the s e m e s t e r by s i g n i n g a list p o s t e d in the H u m a n i t i e s Division for individual half-hour appointments. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U . English 090/091/092 English A s A n Additional Language (F.S) (3,0,1.5) S e e listings at the e n d of E n g l i s h S e c t i o n : E . A . S . L . is part of the Department of M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s . English 100 C o m p o s i t i o n (F,S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in the f u n d a m e n t a l s of g o o d writing, giving students intensive practice in writing for a variety of purposes, with e m p h a s i s on the e s s a y form. T h r o u g h o u t the term, m u c h attention is given to precise, appropriate and effective s e l e c tion of words, with progressively i n c r e a s i n g e m p h a s i s on effective organization and development of material. P r o b l e m s in m e c h a n i c s of writing are dealt with individually, by revision of essays, a n d , if necessary, by g r o u p or individual drill. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C English 102 Composition (S) (3,0,1) A c o m p o s i t i o n c o u r s e d e s i g n e d for those w h o require a more intensive a n d c o m p r e h e n s i v e a p p r o a c h to E n g l i s h C o m p o s i t i o n than offered by the usual first year c o m p o s i t i o n c o u r s e ( E n g l i s h 100). T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Note: E n g l i s h 100 and E n g l i s h 102 d o not t r a n s f e r t o g e t h e r a s first year E n g l i s h . English 104 Fiction (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of s e l e c t e d 20th century short stories a n d novels, e a c h of intrinsic literary merit. T h e chief a i m of the c o u r s e , b e y o n d b r o a d e n i n g a n d d e e p e n i n g the student's u n d e r s t a n d ing a n d a p p r e c i a t i o n of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original responses to literary e x p r e s s i o n , a n d to increase the student's ability to express those r e s p o n s e s in w e l l - d e v e l o p e d oral and written criticism. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 106 Drama (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of selected and representative 20th c e n t u r y plays. T h e chief aim of the c o u r s e , b e y o n d b r o a d e n i n g a n d d e e p e n ing the student's understanding a n d appreciation of literature, is to e n c o u r a g e original responses to literary e x p r e s s i o n , a n d to i n c r e a s e the student's ability to e x p r e s s t h o s e r e s p o n s e s in w e l l - d e v e l o p e d criticism. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . English 108 T h e m e s in Contemporary Literature (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of 20th century w o r k s , e a c h of intrinsic literary merit, a r r a n g e d under a thematic h e a d i n g of s i g n i f i c a n c e in the c o n t e m p o r a r y w o r l d . T h e t h e m e h e a d i n g for e a c h s e c t i o n of the c o u r s e will be a n n o u n c e d at the time of registration. W o r k s will b e d r a w n from various genres a n d will be studied as artistically formed e x p r e s s i o n s of feelings a n d ideas, both separately a n d in relation to o n e another. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C . a n d U.Vic. English 110 Introduction to Linguistics (S) (3,0,1) Note: S e e separate h e a d i n g u n d e r L I N G U I S T I C S . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U . V i c . English 111 Introduction to Linguistics (S) (3,0,1) N o t e : S e e separate h e a d i n g u n d e r L I N G U I S T I C S T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 190 Creative Writing (F.S) (3,0,1) A n intensive w o r k s h o p c o u r s e d e s i g n e d t o help students d e v e l o p e x p r e s s i v e skill a n d c r a f t s m a n s h i p in poetry, fiction and d r a m a . S t u d e n t s are required to write extensively in their c h o s e n genre a n d to d e v e l o p an a w a r e n e s s t h r o u g h written practice of at least one of the other genres. S t u d e n t s are also required to submit their writing regularly for g r o u p d i s c u s s i o n . Students will be e n c o u r a g e d to develop their work to the point at w h i c h it s h o u l d b e c o m e a c c e p t a b l e for p u b l i c a t i o n in T H E C A P I L A N O R E V I E W a n d other literary m a g a z i n e s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic English 191 Creative Writing (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of E n g l i s h 190. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. 30 English 200 English Literature to 1660 (F.S) (3,0,1) English 205 Major American Writers since 1850 (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102. a n d 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102, and 104,105,106,108; or instructor's written permission; English 204 is recommended, but not required. A study of texts in all major g e n r e s from selected major authors to 1660. T h i s c o u r s e will provide the student with a broad historical a n d critical frame of reference, as well as s o m e in-depth study of individual works. Transferable to S F U . U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 201 English Literature since 1660 (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of English 100 or 102, a n d 104,105,106,108; or instructor's written permission. E n g l i s h 200 r e c o m m e n d e d , but not required. A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 200, but c o v e r i n g the later period indicated. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 202 Canadian Literature (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102, a n d 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to familiarize the student with major representative authors from the colonial beginnings of C a n a d a to W o r l d War II. T h i s c o u r s e will investigate various themes and styles w h i c h evolved through the early literature a n d w h i c h are reflected in c o n t e m p o r a r y C a n a d i a n literature. E x a m p l e s of significant F r e n c h - C a n a d i a n works will be studied in translation. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 203 Canadian Literature (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of English 100 or 102, and 104,105,106,108; E n g l i s h 202 r e c o m m e n d e d but not required; or instructor's written permission. T h e continuation of E n g l i s h 202, b e c o m i n g more intensive in the investigation of individual major, m o d e r n authors of poetry, novels and plays in C a n a d a s i n c e W o r l d W a r II. T h i s c o u r s e will study the e m e r g e n c e in m o d e r n form of themes and attitudes of a sensibility uniquely C a n a d i a n . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 204 Major American Writers to 1850 (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102, a n d 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to familiarize the student with the writings of selected major representative A m e r i c a n writers, and to provide the student with a b r o a d historical a n d critical frame of reference. T e x t s are c o n s i d e r e d both for their o w n literary merits a n d in historical context. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. Not offered in 1981/82. A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 204, but covering the period from 1850 to 1930. Transferable to S F U , U B C , and U.Vic Not offered in 1981/8? English 206 Second Year Drama (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102, a n d 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 106); or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . T h i s c o u r s e c o n t i n u e s from E n g l i s h 106 in investigating various forms of dramatic literature c h o s e n largely from a pre-20th century reading list. Students will e x p l o r e s p e c i f i c elements of style a n d form, various periods of d r a m a history, and various sub genres of d r a m a . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 212 Readings in World Literature to 1780 (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102, a n d 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . A c o u r s e to acquaint students with a variety of major or influential w o r k s of literature from the c l a s s i c a l Greek era to the e n d of the 18th century, and to provide the student with a broad historical a n d critical frame of reference. T e x t s are c o n s i d e r e d both for their o w n literary merits a n d in historical context. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 213 Readings in World Literature since 1780 (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102. and 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written permission. E n g l i s h 212 r e c o m m e n d e d , but not required A c o u r s e similar to E n g l i s h 212, but covering the period from 1780 to 1920, with e m p h a s i s on the 19th century. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 215 Poetry and Poetics, Prior to the 20th Century (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100 or 102, 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 105); or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . T h i s c o u r s e offers an investigation of poetry before the 20th century. S t u d e n t s will have an opportunity to read long w o r k s a n d / o r to concentrate on three or four major poets. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 216 Poetry and Poetics of the 20th Century (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: T w o of E n g l i s h 100, 104. 105, 106,108 (preferably 105); or instructor's written p e r m i s s i o n . This c o u r s e offers a study of theories of writing, theories of language, systems of thought and understanding of tradition as they relate to 20th century poetry a n d poetics. Not a survey, this c o u r s e presents the opportunity for intensive study of several significant poets a n d / o r the development of a particular form. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 290 Creative Writing - Poetry (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E n g l i s h 190 or 191, or instructor's written permission. T h i s c o u r s e offers an intensive w o r k s h o p in the writing of poetry. It will concentrate on furthering the student's k n o w l edge of current poetic forms while at the same time increasing awareness of one's o w n voice, o n e s individual g r o u n d for writing, a n d the development of one's own poetic Students will be expected to read a variety of contemporary work, both p o e m s and statements poets have made about their o w n poetics. T h e y will have the opportunity to try a variety of forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial p o e m , narrative verse, prose poetry. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. English 291 Creative Writing - Fiction (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: permission. E n g l i s h 190 or 191, or instructor's written T h i s c o u r s e offers an intensive w o r k s h o p in the writing of fiction. It will c o n c e n t r a t e o n furthering the student's k n o w l e d g e of the state of current fiction while giving the student the opportunity to develop an awareness of voice, word c h o i c e and rhythm, d i a l o g u e , character, a n d points-of-view. Students will be e x p e c t e d to read a variety of works of c o n t e m p o r a r y fiction a n d to d i s c u s s various t e c h n i q u e s In their writing, they will have the opportunity of trying out these t e c h n i q u e s in both short a n d extended forms of fiction. Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. 32 Fine Arts Instructional Faculty J u n g i c , J . , B.A., M.A., (Brit. C o l . ) R o s e n b e r g , A . , B.A., M . A . ( U . of T.) General Information All Fine Arts C o u r s e s have direct or indirect transfer credit at S i m o n Fraser, University of British C o l u m b i a a n d the U n i versity of V i c t o r i a . (Please c h e c k the transfer g u i d e in the calendar for further information). A c a d e m i c students may also take studio art c o u r s e s for credit in the C a r e e r Arts P r o g r a m . Please consult the appropriate s e c t i o n in the c a l e n d a r for details c o n c e r n i n g these credit offerings. Fine Arts 100 T h e History of Art I (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n historical survey of art from prehistoric times to the late G o t h i c P e r i o d with c o n s i d e r a t i o n given to the painting, architecture and sculpture of e a c h s u c c e s s i v e era as well as to the artists themselves a n d their s o c i a l context. P r o b l e m s in style a n d period c l a s s i f i c a t i o n will be d i s c u s s e d . Fine Arts 101 T h e History of Art II (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A c o n s i d e r a t i o n of painting, architecture a n d sculpture from the R e n a i s s a n c e to the present. T h e a p p r o a c h p u r s u e d in F i n e Arts 100 is c o n t i n u e d . A l t h o u g h students are e n c o u r a g e d to take Fine Arts 100 first, it is p o s s i b l e to enrol in the s e c o n d semester offering. Fine Arts 211 M o d e r n Art (20th Century) (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. This c o u r s e is a continuation of Fine Arts 210 concentrating on the art of the 20th C e n t u r y in E u r o p e a n d its s u b s e q u e n t development in the U n i t e d States. Fine Arts 250/251 Renaissance a n d Mannerist Art: Directed Study A b r o a d in Florence ( S U ) (6,0,1) N o prerequisite. Not offered in M a y - J u n e 1982. T h i s five week survey of Italian Art a n d A r c h i t e c t u r e from the early R e n a i s s a n c e (1400) through M a n n e r i s m (1600) c o n s i d e r s the work of major artists w h o have lived in F l o r e n c e a n d R o m e . E m p h a s i s will be given to a study of the formulation of the H i g h R e n a i s s a n c e style by L e o n a r d o , M i c h e l a n g e l o a n d R a p h a e l . D a y trips to important sites (Rome, A r e z z o , etc.) will be a r r a n g e d . T h e c o u r s e is five w e e k s l o n g : a n extra week is i n c l u d e d for free travel. S o m e requirements prior to the c o u r s e (in terms of preparation through lecture attendance) c o m p l e t e the six week credit unit. Interested p e r s o n s may contact the H u m a n i t i e s Division (locals 218, 281). T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. . I Fine Arts 104 Introduction to Visual Literacy I (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. This c o u r s e intends to introduce students to s o m e aspects of the History of Art in order to e n c o u r a g e them to b e c o m e visually literate. T h r o u g h e x p o s u r e the student will b e c o m e increasingly aware of how he or s h e perceives, gaining c o n f i d e n c e a n d certainty in the interpretation of all aspects of a visual work. It is h o p e d that this confrontation with a wide range of art forms a n d ideas will assist the student to think more visually. Fine Arts 105 Introduction to Visual Literacy II (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. In this c o u r s e there will be an e m p h a s i s o n local a r c h i t e c ture, certain a s p e c t s of local culture (e.g. Northwest C o a s t Indian Art, Oriental Art) a n d an i n t r o d u c t i o n to the aesthetics of Film a n d V i d e o , w h e n p o s s i b l e . Fine Arts 210 Modern Art (19th Century) (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e is a n in-depth study of E u r o p e a n art of the 19th C e n t u r y . It c o n s i d e r s artists from F r a n c e , G e r m a n y , S p a i n and E n g l a n d , f o c u s e s on important art m o v e m e n t s and counter m o v e m e n t s s u c h as N e o - c l a s s i c i s m , R o m a n t i c i s m , Realism and Impressionism. 33 French FRENCH COURSES Dialogue Canada French Instructional Faculty D i a l o g u e C a n a d a c o u r s e s have a o n e - d a y - p e r - w e e k i m m e r s i o n a p p r o a c h : a 3 hour c l a s s f o l l o w e d by 1 'A h o u r s of c o n v e r s a t i o n with a f r a n c o p h o n e Instructional A s s o c i a t e a n d VA hours of practice in the language laboratory. T h e e m p h a s i s in the D i a l o g u e C a n a d a c o u r s e s is o n C a n a d i a n content a n d the audio-visual method is u s e d . S t u d e n t s are required to s u p p l y two new tapes onto w h i c h a lesson is r e c o r d e d for practice at h o m e during the week. A l l students new to the D i a l o g u e C a n a d a p r o g r a m must attend a p l a c e m e n t interview w h i c h will be held d u r i n g in p e r s o n registration. C a n t i n O r r - E w i n g , L , B A. (Montreal), M.A. ( S F U ) D y b l k o w s k i , A., B.A. (Hons.) ( L o n d o n ) , P h . D . (Brit Col.) G l a s s , R., B.A. ( C a l i f ) , M.A. (South C a l i f ) , P h . D . (Washington) K e m p o . O , B A. (Alta.), M.A., P h . D . (Brit. Col.) Ravolo, D.. B.A. (Paris), M.A. (Brit. Col.) C o o r d i n a t o r of D i a l o g u e C a n a d a R e i d , R., M.A. (Edinburgh) Instructional Associates B o u r g e o i s - T r u m a n , Marie Bouton, Denys G a c i n a , Jeannette Guay, Lyse Lachance, Gabriel Legault, L y n e Pellerin, Micheline In addition to the c o u r s e s d e s c r i b e d above, D i a l o g u e C a n a d a also offers F r e n c h 290/291 a n d F r e n c h 296/297, F r e n c h 298/299. Neither of these c o u r s e s has c o n v e r s a t i o n c l a s s e s or labs. T h e c o u r s e s in Q u e b e c C u l t u r e will be given in F r e n c h and in E n g l i s h . Language Lab Supervisor French 160 Elementary I (F,S,) (3,3*,1) Jacquet, Joyce Program Developer Krohn, Louise (B.Ed. Prerequisite: G r a d e 11 or F r e n c h 100/101. (Montreal) T h i s is a c o u r s e d e s i g n e d by C a n a d i a n linguists within a C a n a d i a n context. T h e method e m p h a s i z e s the s p o k e n language. Summary of Programs B e g i n n e r s : 100/101 Dialogue Canada (Prerequisite: 100/101 or G r a d e 11) 160 161 260 261 290 291 Audio-lingual (Prerequisite: 100/101 or G r a d e 11) 102 103 . 202 203 Traditional a p p r o a c h (Prerequisite: G r a d e 12) 110 111 210 211 - *2.5 hours for evening s e c t i o n s . Transferable to S F U , U B C , a n d U.Vic. French 161 Elementary II (F,S) (3,3*,1) Prerequisite: French 160 or written permission of the instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of F r e n c h 160. At this level the student will be e x p e c t e d to start writing small c o m p o s i t i o n s . Students may opt to take a pair of c o u r s e s in one program, then c h a n g e to another pair of courses in a different program. Students are also e n c o u r a g e d to take c o u r s e s in any two programs at the s a m e time. It w o u l d be advisable to consult a member of the F r e n c h Department before registering. *2.5 hours for evening sections. Transferable to S F U , U B C , and U.Vic. French 260 Intermediate I (F,S) (3,3*,1) Course Descriptions French 100 Beginners' French (F) (3,1.75,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 160/161 or F r e n c h 102/103 or written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. N o prerequisite. For absolute beginners. A n intensive introduction to the F r e n c h language through p h o n e t i c s , p r o n u n c i a t i o n drills and grammar. Transferable to U B C and U.Vic. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of F r e n c h 160/161. At this level the student will be e x p e c t e d to participate in short d i s c u s s i o n s , give oral presentations a n d write c o m p o s i t i o n s . *2.5 hours for evening s e c t i o n s . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . French 101 Beginners' French (S) (3,1.75,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 100. T h i s course, together with F r e n c h 100, covers H i g h S c h o o l French grades 8, 9, 10 a n d 11 a n d prepares the student for entry into D i a l o g u e C a n a d a F r e n c h 160 or F r e n c h 102. (See under D i a l o g u e C a n a d a F r e n c h c o u r s e s a n d F r e n c h A u d i o L i n g u a l c o u r s e s below.) Transferable to U B C and U.Vic 34 French 261 Intermediate II (F,S,) (3,3*,1) Prerequisite: French 260 or written permission of the instructor. A continuation of F r e n c h 260. "2.5 hours for evening sections. Transferable to S F U and U B C . * French 290 A d v a n c e d Oral a n d Written F r e n c h (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: French 261 or written permission of the instructor. This c o u r s e is intended as a f o l l o w - u p to F r e n c h 261. T h e ultimate goal of F r e n c h 290/291 is to bring students to a level of oral/written proficiency w h i c h will enable them to pursue their o w n study of the language. Oral a n d written proficiency will be e n h a n c e d via the following methods: oral presentations, dictation, vocabulary e x e r c i s e s , a variety of grammatical exercises, the study of literary passages a n d recorded material. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . French 291 Introduction to Q u e b e c Literature (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 290 or written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. T h i s c o u r s e is intended as a f o l l o w - u p to F r e n c h 290. T h e goals of F r e n c h 291 are (1) to pursue the student's oral a n d written proficiency a n d (2) to gain a better k n o w l e d g e of Q u e b e c via its literary works. O r a l and written proficiency will be e n h a n c e d via the f o l l o w i n g methods: study of literary works, oral presentations, c o m p o s i t i o n s . F r e n c h 299 Studies in Q u e b e c Culture in English Translation (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: instructor. F r e n c h 298 or written p e r m i s s i o n from the T h i s c o u r s e is a c o n t i n u a t i o n French Audio-Lingual of F r e n c h 298. Courses T h e following F r e n c h c o u r s e s utilize the A u d i o - L i n g u a l method of language instruction. A l l four skills of listening, s p e a k i n g , reading a n d writing are taught, although primary e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d , from the b e g i n n i n g , o n the listening a n d s p e a k i n g skills. French 102 A d v a n c e d Beginners' F r e n c h I (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 100/101 or F r e n c h 11. T h i s c o u r s e , together with F r e n c h 103, constitutes G r a d e 12 F r e n c h . T h i s is a conversational a p p r o a c h to the F r e n c h language, i n c l u d i n g c o n t i n u i n g instruction in basic grammar. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic F r e n c h 103 A d v a n c e d Beginners' French II (S) (3,2.5,1) Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Prerequisite: F r e n c h 102 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. F r e n c h 296 Studies in Q u e b e c Culture (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 290/291 or F r e n c h 210/211. T h e aim of the c o u r s e is to familiarize the student with the important aspects of Q u e b e c culture, from its origins to the present day. T h e student s h o u l d gain a feeling of the c o n t i n u ity of the culture, its rapid transformation s i n c e 1960 and its place within c o n f e d e r a t i o n . T h i s will be d o n e by exploring Q u e b e c via its history, its politics, its literature, its music a n d its arts. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. F r e n c h 202 Intermediate French I (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 102/103 or F r e n c h 12. A n intermediate c o u r s e to c o n t i n u e oral fluency with g r a m m a r review, dictations, c o m p r e h e n s i o n , oral and written c o m p o s i t i o n . C o n t i n u e s the work of F r e n c h 103. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . F r e n c h 297 Studies in Q u e b e c Culture (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 296 T h i s c o u r s e is a c o n t i n u a t i o n T h i s c o u r s e , t o g e t h e r with F r e n c h 102, c o n s t i t u t e s G r a d e 12 F r e n c h . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of F r e n c h 102, this c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to g i v e a limited fluency in s p e a k i n g a n d reading, as well as writing skills. of F r e n c h 296. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic F r e n c h 203 Intermediate F r e n c h II (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 202 Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . T h i s c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken whenever p o s s i b l e in the term f o l l o w i n g F r e n c h 202. F r e n c h 298 Studies in Q u e b e c Culture in English Translation (F) (3,0,1) T h e aim of the c o u r s e is to familiarize the student with the important aspects of Q u e b e c culture, from its origins to the present day. T h e student s h o u l d gain a feeling of the c o n t i n u ity of the culture, its rapid transformation s i n c e 1960 and its place within C o n f e d e r a t i o n . T h i s will be d o n e by e x p l o r i n g Q u e b e c via its history, its politics, its literature, its music and its arts. No prerequisite. A c o n t i n u a t i o n o f the work of F r e n c h 202, with further e m p h a s i s on oral a n d written e x p r e s s i o n . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. F r e n c h Traditional Method Courses T h e following F r e n c h c o u r s e s e m p l o y the traditional method of l a n g u a g e instruction used at most universities, where the primary e m p h a s i s is placed o n g r a m m a r revision, written e x p r e s s i o n , style a n d literature. 35 Geography Instructional Faculty French 110 Intermediate French I (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 102/103 or F r e n c h grade 12 or s p e c i a l p e r m i s s i o n from the instructor. T o be taken by all students intending to p r o c e e d to the M a j o r or H o n o u r s p r o g r a m at another institution. Includes g r a m m a r revision, e x e r c i s e s , dictations, weekly a s s i g n m e n t s a n d F r e n c h literature. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. French 111 Intermediate French II (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 110. A continuation of the work d o n e in 110; c o m p o s i t i o n and study of F r e n c h literary texts. including T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. previous A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e with e m p h a s i s on written work, i n c l u d i n g formal translation, stylistic e x e r c i s e s , dictations, and c o m p r e h e n s i o n tests. Literary w o r k s c h o s e n from 20th C e n t u r y novels will be s t u d i e d , requiring s o m e b a c k g r o u n d reading. T h e c o u r s e i n c l u d e s cultural enrichment through m e d i u m of slides, films a n d m u s i c . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. French 211 Advanced French II (S) (3,2.25,1) Prerequisite: F r e n c h 210. T h i s c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, whenever p o s s i b l e , in the term following F r e n c h 210. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the work of F r e n c h 210, literary texts will be c h o s e n from 20th C e n t u r y F r e n c h works; b a c k g r o u n d reading required. C o u r s e i n c l u d e s cultural enrichment. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. General Information G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s are p l a n n e d for students w h o w i s h to major in this field as well as for those w h o wish electives. M o r e than one G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e may be taken simultaneously. S t u d e n t s intending to transfer to U B C may c o m b i n e G e o g r a p h y 111 a n d 200 to receive credit for U B C G e o g r a p h y 200/201. S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to transfer to S F U may take the G e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s in any s e q u e n c e with the e x c e p t i o n of G e o g r a p h y 216, 220 and 221 c o u r s e s w h i c h require prerequisites. G e o g r a p h y 112 a n d 114 are equivalent to G e o g r a p h y 101 at U B C and fulfill the lab s c i e n c e requirement at U B C and U.Vic. Note: All g e o g r a p h y c o u r s e s have university French 210 Advanced French I (F) (3,2.25,1) P r e r e q u i s i t e : F r e n c h 110/111 or c o n s i d e r a b l e e x p e r i e n c e in written and oral work. B r o w n , T., B . S c . (Bristol) E w i n g , K., B.A., M . S c . ( M i c h i g a n ) J o r d a n , P., B . S c , M . S c . (Brit. Col.) M c G i l l i v r a y , B „ B.A., M.A. (Brit. Col.) W i l s o n , G . : B . S c . (N.Y. State), M.A. (Brit. Col.) transferability. Geography 101 Environmental Geography: Perception & Change (F) (3,1,1) This c o u r s e introduces the student to environmental issues and c o n c e r n s through e x a m i n i n g the c o n f l i c t s between our lifestyles a n d attitudes, and the p h y s i c a l environment. T h e c o u r s e c o n c e n t r a t e s o n energy in our environment — e x a m ining interesting a s p e c t s that range from the role and need of nuclear energy to the demonstration of solar panels. T h e s e topics are a p p r o a c h e d through a p p l i c a t i o n of e c o l o g i c a l principles. L e c t u r e s , seminars, field trips, guest speakers, films, slides, etc. will be used in this c o u r s e . Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Geography 102 Environmental Geography: Problems and Prospects (S) (3,1,0) E n v i r o n m e n t a l G e o g r a p h y : P r o b l e m s a n d P r o s p e c t s is d e s i g n e d to follow G e o g r a p h y 101 but G e o g r a p h y 101 is not a prerequisite. In this c o u r s e s u c h important a n d interesting environmental issues s u c h as the food we eat. the use of land, wastes, a n d r e c y c l i n g are d i s c u s s e d . T h e s e issues are e x a m ined through a c o m p a r i s o n of human attitudes and perception, and n a t u r a l / b i o l o g i c a l systems F o l l o w i n g the 101 format, this c o u r s e e m p l o y s lectures, seminars, field trips, guest speakers, films, slides, etc. •Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Geography 106 British Columbia: A Regional Analysis (F) (3,1,0) T h i s c o u r s e is b a s e d on a g e o g r a p h i c b a c k g r o u n d to many historical a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y issues in this province. It deals with physical regions in B . C . and d i s c u s s e s the relationship between p h y s i c a l systems and h u m a n use systems. T o p i c s i n c l u d e natives a n d their problems, minority groups a n d r a c i s m , the influence of the C . P . R . , energy a n d alternative s o u r c e s , B . C . ' s industries, the preservation of agricultural land, and a range of other topics that will be a p p r o a c h e d through films, slides, simulation games, and lecture-discussion groups. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 36 Geography 108 Canada: A Topical Geography (S) (3,1,0) T h i s c o u r s e deals with p h y s i c a l and h u m a n a s p e c t s of C a n a d i a n G e o g r a p h y . T h e c o u r s e d i s c u s s e s topical issues arising out of the c h a n g i n g e c o n o m i e s of the Maritime provinces, the cultural g e o g r a p h y of Q u e b e c , a n d the position of the Western P r o v i n c e s . It also e x a m i n e s issues relating to urban growth, Northern development and energy and resource extraction. Geography 200 Technology and Economic Environments (S) (3,1,1) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the c o n c e p t s and themes of e c o n o m i c g e o g r a p h y in terms of p r o d u c t i o n and c o n s u m p t i o n . T h e traditional primary, s e c o n d a r y , tertiary a n d quaternary divisions in e c o n o m i c g e o g r a p h y are reviewed in terms of c o n temporary issues s u c h as development versus u n d e r d e v e l o p ment, poverty, a n d the location of industrial activities. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Geography 110 The Scope of Geography (F) (3,1,0) Geography 201 Urban Studies (S) (3,1,0) G e o g r a p h y is and c o n t i n u e s to be very diverse in its offerings (for e x a m p l e , urban g e o g r a p h y , e c o n o m i c g e o g r a phy, g e o m o r p h o l o g y , etc.). H o w e v e r , this c o u r s e d o e s not c o n f i n e y o u to a s p e c i f i c theme; rather, it stresses many themes a n d d i s c u s s e s the methods of inquiry a n d t e c h n i q u e s of analysis that are c o m m o n in the study of p e o p l e in their physical and h u m a n environments. Field trips, d i s c u s s i o n groups, media, lectures, a n d literature topics s u c h as how we perceive the world a n d how we understand the l a n d s c a p e as geographers, will be utilized. More and more of us are living in an urban world. Cities are b e c o m i n g more c o m p l e x ; cities are c a u s i n g us p s y c h o l o g i c a l and biological problems — it is necessary for us to understand our city. T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to e x a m i n e problems and issues that arise with urban living; i n c l u d i n g p s y c h o l o g i c a l problems, the cost of h o u s i n g , rapid transit, s l u m s , suburbs and their encroachment on agricultural land. While this course uses local e x a m p l e s it also draws u p o n e x a m p l e s from other cities in the world. This c o u r s e a p p r o a c h e s these topics through field trips into the city, slides, films, guest speakers, simulation g a m e s , etc. U r b a n studies leads to s o m e understanding of urban p l a n n i n g , real estate, architecture, urban politics, and general c o m m u n i t y awareness. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Geography 111 Human Geography (F) (3,1,0) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of h u m a n cultural characteristics and activities in different environmental situations. T h e distribution a n d characteristics of h u m a n p o p u l a t i o n s are e x a m i n e d in both global and c o n t e m p o r a r y N o r t h A m e r i c a n context C o n c e p t s stressed will be those of p e r c e p t i o n , culture and diffusion, as well as environmental relationships to resource use a n d urban growth. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Geography 112 Introduction to Earth Environments (F.S) (3,2,1) A n introduction to P h y s i c a l G e o g r a p h y using films, lectures, labs and field trips to e x p l a i n p r o c e s s e s in G e o m o r phology. S o m e of the environments to be c o n s i d e r e d are: glacial, v o l c a n i c , c o a s t a l , arid a n d fluvial. M a p s a n d aerial p h o t o graphs will be used to illustrate the various features. Emphasis will be p l a c e d on C a n a d i a n e x a m p l e s and the interactions between people and their p h y s i c a l environment. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U . V i c Geography 114 Weather and Climate (F.S) (3,2,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Geography 216 Our Atmospheric Environment (F,S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: G e o g r a p h y 114 or instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . A n e x p a n s i o n of the c o n c e p t s outlined in G e o g r a p h y 114. Large and small scale atmospheric p h e n o m e n a are d e s c r i b e d , and the p r o c e s s e s leading to their forms and distributions are d i s c u s s e d . Films, lectures, labs a n d d i s c u s s i o n groups will be used to explain s o m e basic p h y s i c a l laws and how they c a n be applied to the p r o c e s s e s we observe. T h e subjects of a t m o s p h e r i c energy, moisture and motion will be c o v e r e d with an aim to provide the student with a deeper u n d e r s t a n d ing of the atmosphere and its interactions with the Earth environment. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic Note: Not offered 1981/82. Geography 221 Map and Airphoto Interpretation (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisites: G e o g r a p h y 110 or 112 a n d / o r 114, or written p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A c o u r s e introducing students to the study of our a t m o s p h e r i c environment. P r i n c i p l e s of c l i m a t o l o g y and meteorology will be e x p l a i n e d (using films, lectures, labs and d i s c u s s i o n g r o u p s ) , to permit a basic u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the weather we e x p e r i e n c e daily E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on C a n a d i a n e x a m p l e s of the interactions between climate and other elements of our environment, i n c l u d i n g man. T h i s c o u r s e deals with the use of maps a n d aerial p h o t o g r a p h y to interpret natural and m a n - m a d e p h e n o m e n a . Major topics: p h y s i c a l l a n d s c a p e s , urban d e v e l o p m e n t and regional land use. Lecture a n d labs will include t o p o g r a p h i c and geologic maps; vertical and oblique air photos; and black/ white and c o l o u r photography. L a n d - u s e maps and multispectral remote s e n s i n g t e c h n i q u e s will be additional topics covered. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 37 Geology Geography 249 Comparative Cultures: A Field Study Course In Geography (S) (3,0,0) Prerequisite: D e p e n d s on study area or written p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. T h i s c o u r s e applies the tools, techniques, c o n c e p t s and methods of the g e o g r a p h e r to e x a m i n i n g the l a n d s c a p e . T h e f o c u s is primarily on these field research t e c h n i q u e s as they apply to a study area; a n d the study area will alternate e a c h year between B . C . a n d / o r C a n a d a and foreign countries. Note: B e c a u s e of c o s t s , instructor expertise, a n d the overall ability to offer all geography c o u r s e s it s h o u l d be noted that this c o u r s e may not be offered in s o m e years: and may not be interdisciplinary. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Offered S p r i n g 1982 as a c o m p o n e n t of the interdisciplinary program to Nepal. S e e page 21 for details. Instructional Faculty A t h a i d e , D., B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s C e r t . (Brit. Col.) T h o m l i n s o n , A G . , B.A., M . S c , Prof. T e a c h e r ' s Cert. (Brit. Col.) General Information G e o l o g y c o u r s e s include weekly t w o - h o u r laboratory periods or equivalent field projects. T h e s e c o u r s e s are d e s i g n e d for students w h o wish to gain a general k n o w l e d g e of the earth's structure, c o m p o s i t i o n a n d history, as well as for those w h o intend to p r o c e e d to further studies in earth s c i e n c e s at a university. S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to transfer to U B C may c o m b i n e G e o l o g y 110 and 111 to gain credit for U B C G e o l o g y 105. T h e cost of the labs are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e tuition fee except for lab manuals and s o m e field trip c o s t s . For transfer status of the f o l l o w i n g c o u r s e s at S F U , U B C , or U.Vic, please refer to the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the calendar. Geology 110 Physical Geology (F) (3,2,1) T o p i c s to be studied include: structure a n d identification of c o m m o n minerals, e c o n o m i c mineral d e p o s i t s ; origin and c l a s s i f i c a t i o n of rocks; weathering a n d e r o s i o n ; d e v e l o p m e n t of landforms; c o m p o s i t i o n and structure of c o n t i n e n t s and o c e a n basins; v o l c a n o e s a n d e a r t h q u a k e s ; p a l a e o m a g n e tism, continental drift, sea-floor s p r e a d i n g a n d t e c t o n i c s of lithospheric plates, internal constitution of the earth, origin of the earth. A s these t o p i c s entail the study of c h e m i c a l and p h y s i c a l p r o c e s s e s a c t i n g u p o n earth materials, students with little science background should consult the instructor to determine h o w they c a n best learn the n e e d e d principles. Transferable to S F U , U B C and U . V i c . Geology 111 Historical Geology (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: G e o l o g y 110 or equivalent. T h e g e o l o g i c a l evolution of c o n t i n e n t s a n d o c e a n basins constitutes the main theme of this course. T o p i c s to be studied include: relative a n d absolute age of minerals a n d rocks; fossils and stratigraphic palaeontology; g e o l o g i c time-scale; ancient environments a n d o r g a n i c evolution; g e o l o g i c a l history of the North A m e r i c a n continent a n d the Atlantic and P a c i f i c o c e a n - b a s i n s , g e o l o g i c a l history of our immediate environment; energy resources. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 38 German Instructional Faculty G e r m a n 200 S e c o n d Year G e r m a n (F) (3,2.5,1) Hankin, B , B.A. (Brit C o l ) . M.A (Wash.) Prerequisite: German 101, or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor. Instructional Associate Freiberg, Renate A course which includes conversation, grammar, composition and the study of modern literary selections. SFU Students who wish to proceed to SFU and to pursue further courses in German are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at SFU for all Capilano College German courses Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. As a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which would count toward a major in German. Courses which do not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. G e r m a n 201 S e c o n d Year G e r m a n (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: German 200, or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor. UBC Transferable to SFU, U B C and U.Vic. In the case of U B C present equivalent standards provide transfer credit on the following basis. Community Education: Consult C.E. flier for information re credit-free conversational German courses. Capilano College German 100 and 101 (3 credits each) German 200 and 201 (3 credits each) Transferable to SFU, U B C and U.Vic. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following German 200. A continuation of the work in German 200 UBC 100 (3) 200 (3) The student wishing to major fulfills departmental requirements with German 223, which may be taken in the third year by permission of the Department. Note: All courses in German include a total of five and onehalf hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures; one and one-half hours of laboratory practice; and one hour of conversational practice with a native speaker. Native speakers of German who wish to take a first or second-year German course must consult with the German instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry; in order to avoid any misunderstanding, such students are invited to discuss these problems with the department prior to enrolment. G e r m a n 10Q First Year G e r m a n (F) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: None A comprehensive introduction to the German language using a multiple approach; emphasis on understanding and speaking with reinforcement through reading and writing. Transferable to SFU, U B C and U.Vic. G e r m a n 101 First Year G e r m a n (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisite: German 100, or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following German 100. Recommended also for those who are considering taking German 200 at a later date and need review work. if Transferable to SFU, U B C and U.Vic. 39 History Instructional Faculty History 200 C a m p b e l l , R., B.A. (California), M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) L e G a t e s , M „ B.A. (Washington), M A . , M . P h i l . , P h . D . (Yale) T h e City, to 1800 (F) (3,0,1) G e n e r a l Information Students planning to major in history s h o u l d have at least four history c o u r s e s at the C o l l e g e . T h e s e c a n be any four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling of c o u r s e s in the S o c i a l S c i e n c e s a n d H u m a n i t i e s . Students p l a n n i n g to major in history at S i m o n Fraser University s h o u l d take s i x history c o u r s e s in the first two years. F o r U B C the requirement is four history c o u r s e s . Students planning to take honours should acquire a reading knowledge of an appropriate n o n - E n g l i s h language. A n a n a l y s i s of Western E u r o p e a n urban life, f o c u s i n g o n the A n c i e n t M e d i e v a l , R e n a i s s a n c e . B a r o q u e a n d early industrial city. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n s o c i a l history. T r a n s f e r a b l e t o S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. N o t offered 1981/82. History 201 T h e C i t y , 1800 T o T h e Present (F) (3,0,1) A study of North American urban life, with special emphasis p l a c e d o n the p r o c e s s of urbanization in the U n i t e d States and Canada. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . History 106 E u r o p e a n Civilization I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to W e s t e r n E u r o p e a n s o c i a l , political a n d cultural history from a p p r o x i m a t e l y 500 A . D to 1550 A . D . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . History 107 E u r o p e a n Civilization II (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to follow History 106, a n d c o v e r i n g the period from approximately 1550 A . D . to the 20th Century. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . History 108 Issues a n d T h e m e s in U . S . History (F) (3,0,1) A study of U.S. history, 1607 to 1877, f o c u s i n g o n selected themes a n d topics. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the g r o w t h of an " A m e r i c a n " culture. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Not offered 1981/82. History 109 Issues a n d T h e m e s in U . S . History (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to follow History 108, a n d c o v e r i n g the p e r i o d f r o m 1865 to recent times. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . History 110 C a n a d a Before C o n f e d e r a t i o n (F) (3,0,1) A n overview of the history of N e w France and British North A m e r i c a , with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s given to the p r o b l e m s of a c o l o n i a l culture a n d the development of C a n a d i a n society. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. History 111 C a n a d a S i n c e C o n f e d e r a t i o n (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to follow History 110, a n d to focus o n the development of a C a n a d i a n culture a n d identity. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . 40 History 205 British C o l u m b i a (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide a n overview of British C o l u m b i a , e m p h a s i z i n g its s o c i a l a n d political d e v e l o p m e n t from t h e eighteenth century to recent times. T h e c o u r s e will also e x a m i n e s o m e a s p e c t s of the d e v e l o p m e n t of the North Shore. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic P r o c e d u r e s for transfer credit to S F U are in progress. History 206 Q u e b e c in C a n a d a (S) (3,0,1) A n historical a p p r o a c h to the c o n f l i c t s between E n g l i s h and F r e n c h C a n a d i a n s a n d between "federalist" and " s e p a r a tist" F r e n c h C a n a d i a n s . Not offered 1981/82. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. W o m e n ' s Studies 120 W o m e n & the Past: A n Historical Survey (S) (3,0,1) A ' s u r v e y of the lives of w o m e n f r o m the A n c i e n t W o r l d to 20th C e n t u r y North A m e r i c a . A n u n c o v e r i n g of w o m e n ' s participation in a n d contribution to the m a k i n g of history. Private lives as well as p u b l i c a n d political activities will be studied. T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e reasons b e h i n d the extent to w h i c h w o m e n have been " h i d d e n f r o m history". Transferable to U.Vic. P r o c e d u r e s for transfer credit to S F U a n d U B C are in progress. For m o r e information see W o m e n ' s Studies. Labour Studies Instructional Faculty A m o n , N.. B.A. (Kent), M.A. ( S F U ) B o l t o n , M., B.A., L L . B . (Brit. Col.) H o e p p n e r , S.. B.A. (Brit. Col.) K e l g a r d , D., B.A., M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) Lavalle, E., B . C o m m . , L L . B . (Brit. C o l . ) , M . A . (Duke) L y n c h , N., B.A. (Western O n t a r i o ) , M.A. (Brit. Col.) M c G r a d y . L , B . A . (Toronto), L L . B . (Man.) M a c L e a n , A . H . , B.A. (Alta.), L L . B . (Brit C o l . ) Paterson, C . L L . B . (Western Ont.), L L . M . (Harvard) R u s h , S . , B.A. (Western Ont.). L L . B . (Brit. Col.) Sanguinetti, S . , B.A., M.A. (Brit. Col.) S u n , C , B.A. (Hons.) ( S F U ) , L L . B . ( D a l h o u s i e ) General Information T h e L a b o u r S t u d i e s P r o g r a m is c o m m i t t e d to meet the special e d u c a t i o n needs of B C . workers, their o r g a n i z a t i o n s and the labour movement in general C o u r s e s in L a b o u r S t u d i e s are offered on both a credit and credit-free basis. T h e Fall P r o g r a m is offered in O c t o b e r and N o v e m b e r and the S p r i n g P r o g r a m in F e b r u a r y through A p r i l . E a c h Fall a n d S p r i n g a s p e c i a l b r o c h u r e d e s c r i b i n g the c o u r s e s to be offered is issued. T h i s b r o c h u r e is available by writing the P r o g r a m or t e l e p h o n i n g 986-1911 ( L o c a l 334). C o u r s e s are offered in the evening and on weekends. M a n y participants in the P r o g r a m have their registration fees paid by the E d u c a t i o n Department of their U n i o n . S o m e of the credit c o u r s e s offered in the P r o g r a m are as follows: LSP 100 Economics for Trade Unionists (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) T h i s c o u r s e is an introduction to e c o n o m i c s that e m p h a sizes both orthodox and alternative views of how the C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y has developed a n d how it operates. D i s c u s s i o n will centre on policies towards u n e m p l o y m e n t , inflation, a n d the C a n a d i a n dollar LSP 110 The British Columbia Labour Code (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) A m o n g other issues, this c l o s e look at the B . C . L a b o u r C o d e e x a m i n e s unfair labour p r a c t i c e s , the L a b o u r R e l a t i o n s B o a r d , collective b a r g a i n i n g , strikes, essential services, a n d g r i e v a n c e arbitration S e s s i o n s will a l s o c o v e r labour law. p r o c e d u r e s before the L . R . B . a n d arbitration b o a r d s , as well as portions of the H u m a n R i g h t s C o d e . LSP 113 Public Service Staff Relations Act (PSSRA) (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) T h i s c o u r s e will undertake a w i d e e x a m i n a t i o n of the F e d e r a l labour laws d e a l i n g s p e c i f i c a l l y with the Federal p u b l i c s e c t o r w o r k e r and their impact. T h e r e will be e m p h a s i s on labour law research m e t h o d s a n d their a p p l i c a t i o n , c o l l e c tive agreements, g r i e v a n c e s a n d b a c k - t o - w o r k legislation for "essential" service w o r k e r s LSP 115 Issues in Occupational Health and Safety (F,S) (1,0,1.3) T h i s c o u r s e gives a general b a c k g r o u n d to a n d overview of the main social, m e d i c a l , e c o n o m i c , t e c h n i c a l a n d legal issues f a c i n g B . C . workers in the field of health a n d safety. S p e c i a l attention will be given to the W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n Board. LSP 116 Workers' Compensation - Claims and Appeals (F,S) (1,0,0.3) G e n e r a l l y geared to familiarize students with the preparation a n d presentation of a p p e a l s to the B o a r d of Review a n d C o m m i s s i o n , this c o u r s e l o o k s at the framework of the W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n B o a r d . A l l phases of c l a i m h a n d ling are c o v e r e d with e m p h a s i s on practical a p p l i c a t i o n of p r i n c i p l e s a n d an i n t r o d u c t i o n to people a n d material resources. LSP 117 Introduction to Unemployment Insurance Procedures (F,S) (1,0,0.3) T h i s c o u r s e e m p h a s i z e s a practical u n d e r s t a n d i n g ut the framework of u n e m p l o y m e n t i n s u r a n c e a n d its j a r g o n . S u b jects c o v e r e d will be the U.I. A c t , q u a l i f i c a t i o n s for i n s u r a n c e , types of benefits, how to file a c l a i m , a n d how to avoid trouble T h e c o u r s e will c o n c l u d e with a mock A p p e a l to the B o a r d of Referees. LSP 119 Civil Rights Problems In The Workplace (F,S) (1,0,0.3) T h i s s p e c i a l w o r k s h o p ' will study the s p e c i f i c civil rights p r o b l e m s arising in the w o r k p l a c e , i n c l u d i n g issues of political, e c o n o m i c a n d legal rights of the worker; e x a m i n a t i o n of legal remedies available to trade u n i o n s a n d the e m p l o y e e to prevent infringement of civil rights in the w o r k p l a c e ; protection of civil rights under the provincial a n d federal legislation through contracting and in collective agreements. A p r o b l e m solving format with d i s c u s s i o n s of current civil rights issues, 'right-to-work' legislation, race a n d sex d i s c r i m i n a t i o n . LSP 111 The Canada Labour Code (F,S) (1.5,0,0.5) A b r o a d e x a m i n a t i o n of the C o d e and d e c i s i o n s w h i c h affect unions under Federal labour jurisdiction, this c o u r s e will introduce m e t h o d s of labour law research and their a p p l i cation. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the p o l i c y u n d e r l y i n g the C o d e and the c r e a t i o n and effect of the collective agreement. 41 Linguistics LINGUISTICS C O U R S E S LSP 140 History of The Labour Movement in Canada (S) (1.5,0,0.5) T h i s c o u r s e surveys the history of the labour movement in C a n a d a from the formation of the w o r k i n g c l a s s in the 19th C e n t u r y through mass industrial u n i o n i s m . B y l o o k i n g at specific conflicts a g o o d overview is obtained of the struggles of the labour movement to gain the right to organize, obtain u n i o n recognition, bargain collectively, a n d provide decent w a g e s and w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n s . Linguistics 110 Introduction to Linguistics I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E n g l i s h 100. T h i s c o u r s e offers an introduction to l a n g u a g e with e m p h a s i s on the history a n d d e v e l o p m e n t of the E n g l i s h language. A d i s c u s s i o n of various p r o b l e m s related to l a n guage will be i n t r o d u c e d . T h e c o u r s e also e x a m i n e s the intellectual a n d cultural s i g n i f i c a n c e of l a n g u a g e a n d m e a n i n g , and presents various ways of r e c o r d i n g l a n g u a g e . Not offered in 1981/82. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic, LSP 142 History of The Labour Movement in B.C. (F) (1.5,0,0.5) This c o u r s e traces the birth and growth of trade u n i o n i s m in B . C T h e major e c o n o m i c a n d politicaf i s s u e s of the movement will be traced; the right to organize, the right to bargain, the d e m a n d for the nine a n d eight hour day. the p r o b l e m s of racism and immigration, the struggle to organize the industrial, public and clerical sectors, the fight for w o m e n ' s rights, political e x p r e s s i o n s . . . LSP 151 Women's Leadership Skills Assertiveness and Advocacy (F,S) (1,0,0.3) A s s e r t i v e n e s s . S e l f - i m a g e t e c h n i q u e s w h i c h form the basis for assertiveness. C o m m u n i c a t i o n skills, d e m o c r a t i c c o m m u nication, active listening, how to be heard. R o l e - p l a y i n g in assertiveness will be used G r o u p D y n a m i c s . P o w e r and C o m m u n i c a t i o n within g r o u p s D e v e l o p i n g leadership skills a n d learning t e c h n i q u e s for o r g a n i z i n g . A d v o c a c y S k i l l s T h e role of an advocate, self-image a n d its part in a d v o c a c y , learning s p e c i f i c a d v o c a c y t e c h n i q u e s . 42 Linguistics 111 Introduction to Linguistics II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E n g l i s h 110 r e c o m m e n d e d . T h e objective of this c o u r s e , as an e x t e n s i o n of L i n g u i s t i c s 110. is to survey the various a p p r o a c h e s to l a n g u a g e study, from normative g r a m m a r to generative g r a m m a r , a n d from historical linguistics to formal linguistics. T h e e m p h a s i s will be on c o n t e m p o r a r y studiesiin transformational g r a m m a r and in structural a n d formal linguistics. Not offered in 1981/82. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Mathematics Instructional Faculty Bentley. A . E . T . , B S c . (Brit. C o l ) , M.A., P h D (Missouri) H a u s c h i l d t , R., B S c . (Hons) (Queen's), M . S c . (Brit. C o l . ) R e n n i e , R.R.. B . S c , M . S c . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) . P h D. (Brit. Col.) T o w s o n , K.V., B . S c . M . S c ( S F U ) Verner, R.H., B.Sc (Brit. Col.), M . S c (E.W.S.C.), B . C T e a c h i n g Certificate (Brit. C o l . ) Ward, P., B . S c ( S F U ) , M . S c . E d . D . (Okla. State U.) Waterman, A.. B . S c (Brit. C o l ) , M . S c . ( S F U ) . B . C . T e a c h i n g Certificate. C o o r d i n a t o r of M a t h e m a t i c s Mathematics 011 Intermediate Algebra ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) with Functions Prerequisite: Math 010 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. T h i s c o u r s e c o n t i n u e s the development of the algebraic skills i n t r o d u c e d in M a t h 010. Inequalities; functions, e x p o nential and logarithmic functions; systems of linear equations; analytic geometry with e m p h a s i s o n the c o n i c s e c t i o n s . T h i s course is offered o n a self-study format. For transferability introduction. see "Option 1" of Mathematics General Information T h e M a t h e m a t i c s Department offers c o u r s e s primarily at the first and s e c o n d year university level; however, there are refresher c o u r s e s or skill u p g r a d i n g c o u r s e s available. t Refresher/Skill Development C o u r s e s O p t i o n 1: M a t h e m a t i c s 009, 010, 011, 012 T h e s e courses are offered in the Math R e s o u r c e Centre o n a self study format D i a g n o s t i c tests, w o r k b o o k s , video tapes and individualized instruction are available Registration for each c o u r s e is o n g o i n g throughout the a c a d e m i c year. F o r placement within the series it is s u g g e s t e d that y o u consult with a math instructor. Post s e c o n d a r y institutions in B . C . recognize the sequence of Math 010 011 and 012 as an Algebra 12 equivalent. T h e s e c o u r s e s receive no transfer credit at U B C (except if c o m b i n e d with Math 110 or 108) or U.Vic, but the s e q u e n c e Math 010, 011 a n d 012 receives transfer credit for S F U ' s M a t h 100 . O p t i o n 2: M a t h e m a t i c s 105 Mathematics 012 Trigonometry ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: Math 011 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. Introduction to the trigonometric functions, trigonometric identities; inverses; triangles; vectors a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s . T h i s course is offered on a self-study format. For transferability introduction see "Option 1" of Mathematics A c a d e m i c Transfer C o u r s e s Entering students s h o u l d use the following two s e c t i o n s , Parts A a n d B, as guidelines for selecting math c o u r s e s at the first year level. Due to the specialized needs of some programs at the universities, the Math Department advises students to consult the university c a l e n d a r a n d to seek g u i d a n c e from a c o l l e g e c o u n s e l l o r or math instructor for the appropriate c o u r s e selection. A S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G T O P R O C E E D IN S C I E N C E , MATH. ECONOMICS, ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING AND FORESTRY M a t h 105 is a p r e c a l c u l u s c o u r s e at the A l g e b r a 12 level w h i c h is r e c o g n i z e d by p o s t - s e c o n d a r y institutions in B . C . a s A l g e b r a 12 equivalent. It is run o n a regular c l a s s r o o m format and requires a " C " grade or better in A l g e b r a 11 as a prerequisite. Math 105 receives n o transfer credit at U B C (except if c o m b i n e d with M a t h 110 or 108) or U.Vic but d o e s receive transfer credit for S F U ' s Math 100 T h e s e students normally take Math 110, 111 during their first year. Mathematics 009 Arithmetic ( S U , F , S ) (1,0,0) 2. S c i e n c e students s h o u l d c o n s i d e r taking Math 103 and 104 or Math 104 and 106 as an elective in theirfirst year. Prerequisite: N o n e 1. Math 101, 102 are r e c o m m e n d e d by s o m e s c i e n c e departments at S F U . 3 A review of the basic arithmetic o p e r a t i o n s A p p l i c a t i o n s to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas a n d volumes. T h i s is a self-study c o u r s e primarily intended for returning students w h o require a basic math refresher. Mathematics 010 Elementary Algebra Comments: Math 110, 111 replaces the previous calculus sequence Math 112, 113, 114. (SU.F.S) (1,0,0) Prerequisite: Math 009 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. Reviews and d e v e l o p s b a s i c algebraic skills n e c e s s a r y in the solution of algebraic e q u a t i o n s a n d the factorization of polynomials. Introduction to analytic geometry with emphasis on straight lines. T h e c o u r s e is offered on a self-study format. For transferability introduction. see "Option 1" of Mathematics 43 B. STUDENTS PLANNING TO PROCEED COMMERCE PROGRAMS. IN A R T S O R Students planning to pursue a program in the Faculty of Arts, w h o wish to satisfy a o n e - y e a r s c i e n c e c o u r s e elective, normally take o n e of the following two c o u r s e combinations: M a t h 101 a n d 100 Math 101 a n d 102 Math 101 a n d 103 (not for S F U ) Math 103 a n d 104 (not for S F U ) M a t h 103 a n d 106 Math 104 a n d 106 Math 105 a n d 108 M a t h 105 a n d 110 Math 108 a n d 103 (not for S F U ) Math 108 a n d 100 Math 108 a n d 101 M a t h 110 a n d 111 Prerequisite: Math 101. A study of important statistical m e t h o d s c o m m o n l y u s e d in the analysis of research data, i n c l u d i n g : t-tests a n d their n o n - p a r a m e t r i c c o m p e t i t o r s o n e a n d t w o - w a y a n a l y s i s of variance, c h i - s q u a r e tests a n d r e g r e s s i o n a n a l y s i s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Mathematics 103 Introduction to C o m p u t e r P r o g r a m m i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y first year Math c o u r s e w h i c h may be taken concurrently Students p l a n n i n g to pursue a program in the Faculty of C o m m e r c e normally take: a. for transfer to U B C , one of the following combinations: Math Math Math Math Mathematics 102 Statistical Methods (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to B A S I C p r o g r a m m i n g for simple scientific c a l c u l a t i o n s , as well as various data p r o c e s s i n g p r o b l e m s in statistics a n d a c c o u n t i n g to provide a general u n d e r s t a n d i n g of c o m p u t e r s a n d s p e c i f i c e x p e r i e n c e in writing a n d e x e c u t i n g p r o g r a m s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . 101 a n d 100 105 a n d 108 105 a n d 110 110 a n d 111 Mathematics 104 Principles of C o m p u t e r P r o g r a m m i n g (S) (3,0,1) S t u d e n t s with a strong A l g e b r a 12 b a c k g r o u n d s h o u l d also c o n s i d e r M a t h 106 a n d 104 as an elective b. for transfer to S F U , o n e of the following courses: Math 100 or M a t h 105. F o r H o n o u r s E c o n o m i c s : Math 108. (In addition, Math 101 is advised.) S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to study E c o n o m i c s at U B C must take M a t h 110 a n d M a t h 111. For the transfer status of the following c o u r s e s at the three universities refer to the transfer guide at the back of the calendar Prerequisite: M a t h e m a t i c s 103 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A projects c o u r s e with projects related to c o m p u t e r structure; p r o g r a m m i n g l a n g u a g e ( P A S C A L , F O R T R A N , m a c h i n e a n d assembler); algorithms; a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s to numerical a n d non-numerical problems. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Mathematics 105 P r e - C a l c u l u s Mathematics (F,S) (3,0,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is not transferable to U B C except if c o m b i n e d with M a t h 110 or 108. Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 with at least a " C " grade or Math 010. Mathematics 100 Introduction to College Mathematics (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 or M a t h 010. A study- of set theory: matrices, linear probability, o p t i m i z a t i o n t e c h n i q u e s . programming; A review of algebra and a d i s c u s s i o n of f u n c t i o n s , g r a p h s and trigonometry. Primarily for students w h o anticipate taking c a l c u l u s c o u r s e s o r w h o w i s h to take an introductory c o u r s e in p h y s i c s but are weak in mathematics. For transferability introduction. see "Option 2 " of Mathematics Transferable to U B C . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. N o t transferable to U B C if taken a l o n e Mathematics 101 Introduction to Statistics (F,S) (3,0,1) Mathematics 106 Introduction to C o m p u t e r P r o g r a m m i n g in F O R T R A N (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y first year M a t h e m a t i c s c o u r s e w h i c h may be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y . A n introduction to the language of statistics a n d s o m e statistical methods, i n c l u d i n g r a n d o m variables a n d their distribution; random sampling; normal distribution, estimation of parameters a n d testing hypotheses. A n introduction to F O R T R A N p r o g r a m m i n g for simple scientific a p p l i c a t i o n s as well as various data p r o c e s s i n g p r o b l e m s in statistics a n d a c c o u n t i n g . P r o v i d e s a general u n d e r s t a n d i n g of c o m p u t e r s , p r i n c i p l e s of c o m p u t e r prog r a m m i n g a n d specific e x p e r i e n c e in writing a n d e x e c u t i n g programs. Transferable to S F U . U B C a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 11 or Math 010. 44 Mathematics 108 Calculus for Business a n d S o c i a l (S) (3,0,1) Sciences Mathematics 215 Introduction to Analysis I (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: At least a " B - " average in M a t h 110 a n d 111. Prerequisite: A l g e b r a 12 or Math 105 or M a t h 011. A brief review of algebra and functions. T h e derivative with applications to curve s k e t c h i n g , optimization, g r o w t h a n d decay. F u n c t i o n s of several variables, partial derivatives a n d applications. T h e integral with applications. A c o u r s e for students w h o plan to p r o c e e d in M a t h e m a t i c s L o g i c , sets, f u n c t i o n s , limits of s e q u e n c e s a n d series; introduction to continuity, the derivative, R i e m a n n Integral. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Mathematics 230 C a l c u l u s III (F) (3,0,1) Mathematics 110 C a l c u l u s I (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite Math 111 with at least a " C - " grade. Math 200 s h o u l d be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y , if not already c o m p l e t e d . Prerequisite: At least a " C " s t a n d i n g M a t h e m a t i c s 12 or M a t h e m a t i c s 105. in A l g e b r a 12 or A brief review of functions; trigonometry; analytic geometry; the derivative, techniques of differentiation, applications of the derivative to M A X - M I N a n d related rate problems, the definite integral, logarithmic a n d exponential functions. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transfer credit will not be given for both M a t h e m a t i c s 108 and M a t h e m a t i c s 110. A n a l y t i c geometry of three d i m e n s i o n s ; partial differentiation, applications; d o u b l e and triple integrals; transformations to various c o o r d i n a t e systems. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Mathematics 231 C a l c u l u s IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 230 with at least a " C - " grade. Line and surface integrals; Green's T h e o r e m ; vector fields; divergence theorem; S t o k e ' s T h e o r e m ; a p p l i c a t i o n s . Mathematics 111 C a l c u l u s II ( S U or F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: Math 110 with at least a " C - " grade. Mathematics 235 Introduction to Differential Equations (S) (3,0,1) A study of the anti-derivative; the integral, t e c h n i q u e s of integration and applications of the integral; sequences, infinite series a n d Taylor's T h e o r e m . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. THE MATH DEPARTMENT OFFERS A FULL SECOND Y E A R U N I V E R S I T Y T R A N S F E R P R O G R A M IN M A T H . S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G T O T A K E 200 L E V E L M A T H SHOULD SEEK ADVICE FROM MATH INSTRUCTORS. Prerequisite: Math 230 a n d Math 200 with at least a " C - " grade in e a c h . A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; s e c o n d order linear equations; first order linear systems; phase plane, applications to physics, geometry and electrical circuits. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Mathematics 200 Linear A l g e b r a (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Math 111 with at least a " C - " grade. A study of vector s p a c e s , linear transformation, matrices, determinants, eigenvalues, quadratic forms. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c Mathematics 205 Introduction to Probability a n d Statistics (S) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e will be offered only when sufficient student d e m a n d is evident during the Fall semester. Prerequisite: Math 111 with at least a " C - " grade or Math 110 and p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A c a l c u l u s based study of probability, investigating the elements of probability, discrete a n d c o n t i n u o u s r a n d o m variables, mathematical e x p e c t a t i o n , moment generating functions, C e n t r a l Limit T h e o r e m , s a m p l i n g f r o m n o r m a l populations. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 45 Philosophy Instructional Faculty Battersby, M , B A. ( N . Y . i l . ) , P h i l o s o p h y , P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) B r o w n e , A . , B.A., M.A., P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) D i x o n , J . , B.A., P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) G e n e r a l Information A l l of the P h i l o s o p h y c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit at every university in British C o l u m b i a P r o s p e c t i v e p h i l o s o p h y majors s h o u l d consult the faculty. Philosophy 101 Introductory Philosophy (F) (3,0,1) Philosophy 200 Political Philosophy (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e s e e k s to provide an a n a l y s i s of the rationale for political institutions a n d action S o m e of the q u e s t i o n s c o n s i d e r e d : A r e we really o b l i g e d to o b e y the law? C a n the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation of law in the p o l i c e m a n ' s holster? D o e s the State have g o o d reason for involving itself in c o m p u l s o r y p r o g r a m s of e d u c a t i o n ? T h i s is not a study in the history of political thought, a n d every effort is made t o view p r o b l e m s from c o n t e m p o r a r y perspectives. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . N o prerequisite. A n introduction to the p h i l o s o p h i e s of morality, politics, k n o w l e d g e , a n d the invisible w o r l d , with e m p h a s i s o n the relationship between law a n d morality; civil d i s o b e d i e n c e ; reason a n d p a s s i o n ; Existentialism; F e m i n i s m ; freedom a n d d e t e r m i n i s m ; C o m m u n i s m ; d o u b t a n d certainty; the nature of reality. T h e e m p h a s i s of this c o u r s e varies from instructor to instructor, a n d prospective students s h o u l d c o n s u l t the outlines of different instructors' c o u r s e s w h e n registering. Philosophy 201 Political Philosophy (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h i l o s o p h y 200. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Philosophy 210 Metaphysics a n d Epistemology (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Philosophy 102 Introductory Philosophy (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h i l o s o p h y 101. Note; There is no prerequisite for this c o u r s e (one d o e s not need c o m p l e t e d credit in P h i l o s o p h y 101 to take it). S t u d e n t s entering the C o l l e g e a r e w e l c o m e to begin their introduction to p h i l o s o p h y with this c o u r s e . A n introduction to s o m e of the traditional p r o b l e m s of m e t a p h y s i c s a n d e p i s t e m o l o g y . S o m e of the q u e s t i o n s c o n sidered are: Does free will exist? Is sense perception a primary or reliable s o u r c e of k n o w l e d g e What is the nature of c a u sality? Is materialism true? What is the nature of m i n d ? What is the relationship between mind a n d b o d y ? What is the scientific method? While this is not an historically oriented c o u r s e , it will c o v e r s o m e of,the c l a s s i c a l attempts to a n s w e r these questions. 9 Transferable to U B C a n d S F U . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Philosophy 110 Logical Self-Defense (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n introduction to the basic rules of clear a n d rational thought. T h e student will be taught t h r o u g h extensive e x a m p l e s h o w to detect false r e a s o n i n g , illegitimate appeals to e m o t i o n s , i n c o n s i s t e n c i e s a n d c o n t r a d i c t i o n s . T h e goal is to d e v e l o p o u r l o g i c a l a w a r e n e s s t o the point that w e c a n no longer be victimized by the rhetoric of everyday life, a n d c a n develop o u r o w n a r g u m e n t s , with clarity a n d c o n f i d e n c e . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Philosophy 111 Reason a n d Freedom: A n Introduction to the Philosophy of P s y c h o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisites. C a n there really be a s c i e n c e of h u m a n b e h a v i o u r ? H a s p s y c h o l o g y s h o w n that we are not in c o n t r o l of our p e r s o n a l ity a n d b e h a v i o u r ? O r c a n p s y c h o l o g y s h o w us h o w to attain freedom through a w a r e n e s s of our u n c o n s c i o u s drives? D o e s p s y c h o l o g y have ethical implications? Did Freud, for example, prove that we s h o u l d live sexually unrepressed lives? T h e s e a n d similar questions will form the f o c u s of this inquiry into the phijosophical implications of p s y c h o l o g y . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 46 Philosophy 211 Metaphysics a n d Epistemology (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h i l o s o p h y 210. Transferable to U B C a n d S F U . Philosophy Philosophy 220 in Literature (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of t h e lively r e l a t i o n s h i p b e t w e e n P h i l o s o p h y a n d Literature. P h i l o s o p h i c a l theories will be a p p r o a c h e d a n d d i s c u s s e d via literary work w h i c h either e m b o d i e s the theories or g r o u n d s them in h u m a n e x p e r i e n c e . T e x t u a l s o u r c e s will range f r o m the c l a s s i c a l G r e e k plays to B u r g e s s ' "A C l o c k w o r k O r a n g e " . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Philosophy 221 Existentialism in Literature (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e is, in spirit, a contin'uation of P h i l o s o p h y 220, but it is c e n t r e d o n the P h i l o s o p h y of E x i s t e n t i a l i s m in L i t e r a ture. T h e r e will be an introductory set of lectures o n E x i s t e n tiaMsm as a p h i l o s o p h y . T e x t u a l s o u r c e s will range f r o m D o s t o y e v s k y ' s "Notes F r o m the U n d e r g r o u n d " t o Sartre's "Nausea". T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics Instructional Faculty Freeman, M . , B . S c . (Brit. C o l ) , M . S c . ( C a l T e c h . ) , P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) Physics 111 General Physics II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 110 or 108 or 114 a n d M a t h 110. Math 111 is a pre or corequisite. Henry, M.I., B . A . (Alta.), M . S c . (Brit. C o l . ) P a l f f y - M u h o r a y , P., B . A . S c , M . A . S c . . P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) E l e c t r i c a l a n d m a g n e t i c fields, circuits, wave optics, a n d a t o m i c a n d nuclear p h y s i c s . Laboratory S u p e r v i s o r S i m s o n , B., B . S c . ( S F U ) Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. General Information A l l first-year p h y s i c s c o u r s e s i n c l u d e a weekly laboratory period. 2-hour T h e cost of the labs are i n c l u d e d in the c o u r s e tuition fee except for lab m a n u a l s a n d s o m e field trip c o s t s . Physics 114 Fundamental Physics I (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 12 or P h y s i c s 104; M a t h 110 is a pre or corequisite. For transfer status of the f o l l o w i n g c o u r s e s at S F U , U B C , or U.Vic, please refer to the T r a n s f e r G u i d e at the back of the calendar. A survey of m e c h a n i c s , i n c l u d i n g s p e c i a l relativity a n d waves. T h i s c o u r s e c o v e r s material similar to P h y s i c s 110 but at a more a d v a n c e d level. T h i s c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 115, is particularly suitable for students g o i n g into the p h y s i c a l s c i e n c e s or e n g i n e e r i n g . Physics 104 Principles of Physics I (F,S) (3,2,1) T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: N o P h y s i c s prerequisite. Math 12, M a t h 100 or M a t h 105 is required. T h i s c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 105, will serve a s a n introduction to p h y s i c s for students with little or n o b a c k g r o u n d in the subject. T h e y are intended for students not taking further studies in s c i e n c e . T o p i c s i n c l u d e m e c h a n i c s , energy, ray optics a n d heat. Physics 115 Fundamental Physics II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 114 or at least a B in P h y s i c s 108 or 110. M a t h 111 is a pre or corequisite. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h y s i c s 114 to material similar to that of P h y s i c s 111 but at a ' m o r e a d v a n c e d level. Transferable t o S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 105 Principles of Physics II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 104 or 110. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of P h y s i c s 104, e m p h a s i z i n g electricity, m a g n e t i s m , gravitation, relativity, light, q u a n t u m theory, a n d nuclear p h y s i c s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c Physics 108 Basic Physics (F) (4.5,2,1.5) Prereqisite: Math 12 o r 105. M a t h 110 is a pre or corequisite. T h e c o u r s e covers the material of P h y s i c s 110, together with those topics from high s c h o o l p h y s i c s needed by a s t u dent with no previous b a c k g r o u n d in p h y s i c s A student p a s s i n g this c o u r s e s h o u l d be able to enter P h y s i c s 111 in the spring. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 110 General Physics I (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 12, P h y s i c s 11 or P h y s i c s 104; a n d Math 110 is a pre or corequisite. A survey of mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, d y n a m i c s , energy, m o m e n t u m , rotation, gravitation, vibration and special relativity. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Physics 200 Heat, Kinetic Theory and Optics (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 111 or 115 a n d M a t h 111. M a t h 200 and 230 must be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y , if not already c o m p l e t e d . P h y s i c s 210 must be taken concurrently. Heat, temperature, the first a n d s e c o n d laws of t h e r m o d y n a m i c s , kinetic theory, a n d p h y s i c a l optics. T h i s c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 201, 210 a n d 211, is required for s t u dents majoring in p h y s i c s a n d r e c o m m e n d e d for students majoring in chemistry. Transferable t o S F U , U B C and U.Vic. Physics 201 Electrical Circuits (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 200, M a t h 230 a n d 200. M a t h 235 is a pre or corequisite. P h y s i c s 211 must be taken c o n c u r r e n t l y . T h e study of electrical a n d magnetic fields; f u n d a m e n t a l s of a.c. theory; L R , R C , L R C c i r c u i t s ; r e s o n a n c e ; m e c h a n i c a l a n a l o g s ; f o r c e d a n d d a m p e d oscillations. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Physics 210 Physics Laboratory I (F) (1,3,0) Prerequisite: a s for P h y s i c s 200, w h i c h concurrently. must be taken A w e e k l y t h r e e - h o u r l a b in m a t h e m a t i c a l electrical m e a s u r e m e n t s a n d optics. methods, T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 47 Physics 2 1 1 Physics Laboratory II (S) ( 1 , 3 , 0 ) Prerequisite: as for P h y s i c s 2 0 1 , w h i c h concurrently. must be taken A weekly three-hour lab in e l e c t r o n d y n a m i c s , electricity, and electronics. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Physics 2 2 0 Mechanics I (F) ( 3 , 0 , 1 ) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 110 or 108 or 114, M a t h 111. Math 230 is a pre or corequisite. N e w t o n i a n m e c h a n i c s of p a r t i c l e s . T o p i c s i n c l u d e k i n e m a t i c s , v i s c o u s a n d turbulent drag, rocket p r o p u l s i o n , c o n s e r v a t i o n laws, a n d centrifugal a n d C o r i o l i s forces. T h i s c o u r s e , together with P h y s i c s 221, is required for students majoring in p h y s i c s a n d r e c o m m e n d e d for students majoring in math or c o m p u t e r s c i e n c e . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U . U B C a n d U . V i c . Physics 2 2 1 Mechanics II and Special Relativity (S) ( 3 , 0 , 1 ) Prerequisite: P h y s i c s 220, M a t h 230 a n d 200. M a t h 235 is a r e c o m m e n d e d co r e q u is i t e . M o r e a d v a n c e d topics in m e c h a n i c s : application of special relativity to elementary particle creation a n d s p a c e travel, elliptical and interplanetary transfer orbits, rigid body dynamics and g y r o s c o p e s . Transferable to S F U . U B C a n d U . V i c . 48 Political Science Instructional Faculty Lavalle, E., B . C o m m . , L L . B . (Brit. C o l . ) , M . A . (Duke) L e i g h t o n , C . G . , B.A., M . A . (Toronto) Mier, P., B.A. ( S F U ) , M.A. (Toronto) Williams, D., B.A., M . A . (Calif. State U.) Political S c i e n c e 100 A n Introduction to Political T h o u g h t - Plato to Hegel (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e p u r p o s e of the c o u r s e is to introduce students to the tradition of W e s t e r n political inquiry from the A n c i e n t G r e e k s to the liberal and d e m o c r a t i c revolution of the 18th C e n t u r y . Elements within this tradition will be a p p r o a c h e d from an historical and p h i l o s o p h i c a l perspective. Particular e m p h a s i s will be placed u p o n the critical reading of original texts a n d b a c k g r o u n d material will b e presented in lectures a n d a d d i tional reading. Major t o p i c s c o v e r e d i n c l u d e A n c i e n t a n d Medieval P o l i t i c a l T h o u g h t , the rise of the national state, and the ideas of d e m o c r a t i c liberalism. Political S c i e n c e 201 International Relations (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A n y 100 level c o u r s e is r e c o m m e n d e d A study of a s p e c t s of g l o b a l conflict a n d w o r l d politics. T h e c o u r s e provides students with the b a c k g r o u n d necessary for an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of s o u r c e s of power, t e c h n i q u e s of w i e l d i n g influence a n d the formulation of foreign p o l i c y . T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the origins of the C o l d War, Imperialism, local and global wars, detente, a n d p r o b l e m s of militarization and disarmament. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic Political S c i e n c e 202 Government a n d Politics of British (S) (3,0,1) Columbia T h i s c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the government structure a n d political p r o c e s s of British C o l u m b i a . (Not offered in 1981/82). Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c Political S c i e n c e 101 Contemporary Ideologies ( F , S , S U ) (3,0,1) Political S c i e n c e 100 is r e c o m m e n d e d . A n introduction to the historical d e v e l o p m e n t of c o n t e m porary i d e o l o g i e s with an e x a m i n a t i o n of the ideas e x p r e s s e d in the political process. T h e c o u r s e includes a critical analysis of L i b e r a l i s m , C o n s e r v a t i s m , F a s c i s m , S o c i a l D e m o c r a c y and Marxism-Leninism. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Political S c i e n c e 102 Comparative Government (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the elements of government a n d politics in a comparative perspective. T h i s c o u r s e will take two or more political cultures a n d e x a m i n e the formal a n d informal political structures and p r o c e s s e s in e a c h . A variety of states/ countries are selected e a c h semester to use as " c a s e " studies. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c Political S c i e n c e 104 C a n a d i a n Government (F) (3,0,1) Political S c i e n c e 203 International Organizations (S) (3,0,1) Political S c i e n c e 201 is r e c o m m e n d e d . S i n c e the e m e r g e n c e of the C o n c e r t of E u r o p e in 1815, international o r g a n i z a t i o n s have played an increasingly important role in w o r l d politics. T h i s c o u r s e e x a m i n e s the history and development of international and regional governmental and n o n - g o v e r n m e n t a l organizations w h i c h act in the international arena. S p e c i a l e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the U n i t e d N a t i o n s , the N o r t h Atlantic Treaty O r g a n i z a t i o n , the W a r s a w Pact, the E u r o p e a n E c o n o m i c C o m m u n i t y , a n d OPEC. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U V i c . Political S c i e n c e 206 S c o p e a n d Methods: Political Analysis (S) (3,0,1) A n y 100 level c o u r s e in P o l i t i c a l S c i e n c e is r e c o m m e n d e d . A n introduction to political a n a l y s i s a n d m e t h o d o l o g y . U s i n g C a n a d a as a f o c u s , students will b e c o m e familiar with the theories and tools used hy political scientists to analyze problems T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. A study of the p r o c e s s e s , i d e o l o g i e s a n d government structures w h i c h make up the C a n a d i a n political reality. T h i s c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the role of the prime minister's office, the b u r e a u c r a c y , political parties, federal-provincial relations, a n d C a n a d i a n foreign p o l i c y . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Political S c i e n c e 120 Public Policy (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will look at the structure a n d o r g a n i z a t i o n of the administrative b r a n c h of the government at all three levels. It will e x a m i n e the role a n d f u n c t i o n of regulatory bodies a n d tribunals in the area of citizen interactions with the administrative b r a n c h . (Not offered in 1981/82). T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . 49 Psychology Instructional Faculty Alpert, J . G . , B.S. (New York), M . S c , P h . D . (McGill) Avery, P., B . A . (York), M . E d . (Toronto) E c c l e s , E „ R . N . (St. Pauls), B.A., M.A. ( U B C ) H a w r y l k o , R „ B.A. (Hunter), M.A. ( S F U ) M a c N e i l l , M „ B.A. ( U . of A l b e r t a ) , M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . (Calgary) M o e , S . , B.A., M.A. ( M e x i c o ) Pareis, N . , B . S c . (Rutgers), P h . D . (Texas) P s y c h o l o g y 204 Developmental P s y c h o l o g y (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the child's development f r o m i n f a n c y to a d o l e s c e n c e , i n c l u d i n g the d e v e l o p m e n t of s o c i a l behaviour, personality, l a n g u a g e a n d cognitive p r o c e s s e s . S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to d o r e s e a r c h projects a n d o b s e r v a t i o n s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . P s y c h o l o g y 100 Introduction to P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) P s y c h o l o g y 205 T h e P s y c h o l o g y of A g i n g (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to i n t r o d u c e the b e g i n n i n g p s y c h o l o g y student to s o m e of the major c o n c e p t s and a p p r o a c h e s n e c essary to a n u n d e r s t a n d i n g of h u m a n b e h a v i o u r f r o m a p s y c h o l o g i c a l perspective. T o p i c s c o v e r e d include learning, development, motivation, e m o t i o n , stress, sexuality', p e r s o n ality theory, behaviour d i s o r d e r s . Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. P s y c h o l o g y 101 Behavioural Theory (F.S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e a l i n g with the p s y c h o l o g i c a l d e v e l o p m e n t of the individual from early a d u l t h o o d to death, with e m p h a s i s o n intellectual a n d personality c h a n g e s , a n d the s o c i a l c o n text of a g i n g . A s well as b e i n g e x p o s e d to basic r e s e a r c h in the area, students will be e n c o u r a g e d to d e v e l o p an e m p h a t i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the a g i n g p r o c e s s t h r o u g h s u c h m e a n s as c o m m u n i t y projects. (Offered in 1983). T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A c o u r s e for those students w h o desire a c o m p l e t e survey of the basic areas of p s y c h o l o g y (when c o m b i n e d with P s y c h o l o g y 100), before p r o c e e d i n g to a n in-depth study of particular areas. T h e 101 c o u r s e covers s u c h t o p i c s as statistics, experimental d e s i g n , p s y c h o l o g i c a l assessment, learning theory, memory a n d c o g n i t i o n , p h y s i o l o g i c a l p s y c h o l o g y , sensation a n d perception, altered states of c o n s c i o u s n e s s , and the therapeutic p r o c e s s . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c P s y c h o l o g y 200 Social P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the d y n a m i c s a n d effect of s o c i a l influence on individual h u m a n behaviour. T h e c o u r s e entails a look at s u c h topics as attitudes a n d attitude-change, g r o u p p r o c e s s e s , leadership, prejudice, impression formation, conformity, altruism a n d interpersonal attraction. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. P s y c h o l o g y 201 G r o u p D y n a m i c s (F,S) (3,0,1) P s y c h o l o g y 206 Adolescent P s y c h o l o g y (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. T h i s c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the r e s e a r c h f i n d i n g s a n d theories pertaining to the development a n d b e h a v i o u r of a d o l e s c e n t s . T o p i c s c o v e r e d will i n c l u d e b i o l o g i c a l a n d s e x ual maturation, personality, intelligence, motivation a n d s o c i a l issues s u c h as d e l i n q u e n c y a n d family r e l a t i o n s h i p s . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . P s y c h o l o g y 220 T h e o r y of Personality (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the v a r i o u s theories of personality f r o m p s y c h o a n a l y t i c a l theory to learning theory. I n c l u d e d will be the ideas of F r e u d , R o g e r s , M a s l o w a n d others. C o n c e p t s to be c o n s i d e r e d will i n c l u d e the d e v e l o p m e n t of personality, and the structure a n d d y n a m i c s of personality. T h e c o u r s e will i n c l u d e c o n s i d e r a t i o n of theoretical p r o b l e m s , a n d students will b e c o m e familiar with empirical research in these areas. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the b e h a v i o u r of people in small g r o u p s , i n c l u d i n g research m e t h o d s , verbal a n d n o n - v e r b a l c o m m u nication, interaction d y n a m i c s , interpersonal influence a n d p e r c e p t i o n , sensitivity a n d e n c o u n t e r g r o u p s , g r o u p therapy for normals, a n d contemporary theories of h u m a n interaction. T h e student will have an opportunity to explore intellectually the d y n a m i c s of small g r o u p s , a n d to e x p e r i e n c e what goes on w h e n s / h e interacts with others. T h i s c o u r s e provides an intellectual a n d experiential a p p r o a c h to small g r o u p theory a n d allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive, small g r o u p setting. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 50 P s y c h o l o g y 222 A b n o r m a l P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: P s y c h o l o g y 100. A study of the various models a n d perspectives for viewing patterns a n d treatment of a b n o r m a l behaviour. Included will be an e x a m i n a t i o n of the research a s to h o w the m e d i c a l model, behaviouristic s c h o o l , h u m a n i s t i c s c h o o l a n d interpersonal s c h o o l view normal a n d a b n o r m a l behaviour. T h i s c o u r s e will also f o c u s o n the historical a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y a p p r o a c h e s to treatment. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Religious Studies Instructional Faculty G a l l a c h e r , R . J . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) . T e a c h e r ' s Cert. ( B . C . ) , M A . (Brit. C o l ) , R e l i g i o n , P h . D . ( W a l d e n U.) g i o u s texts s u c h as the Bible, K o r a n , B h a g a v a d G i t a , T a o T e C h i n g , etc. C o u r s e format will i n c l u d e d i s c u s s i o n s and films as well as guest speakers and visits to c h u r c h e s , s y n a g o g u e s , temples a n d a parish. General Information Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. R e l i g i o u s S t u d i e s c o u r s e s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit to all universities in British C o l u m b i a . Students w h o wish to c o n c e n t r a t e o n the facet of religion or on o n e religion's tradition are e n c o u r a g e d to make an appointment with the instructor for e n r o l m e n t under s p e c i a l arrangements. Religious Studies 100 Judaism, Christianity, Islam (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n investigation of the religions of the West: J u d a i s m , Christianity, Islam. E m p h a s i s will be on the origins a n d c o n temporary beliefs, rites a n d forms of w o r s h i p in e a c h of the three religions d e a l i n g with the ultimate c o n c e r n s of m a n . C o u r s e format will i n c l u d e d i s c u s s i o n s a n d use of m e d i a as well as guest s p e a k e r s a n d field trips to religious services. Transferable to U B C , S F U a n d U . V i c . Religious Studies 101 Hinduism, B u d d h i s m , Sikhism (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n investigation of the religions of India: H i n d u i s m , S i k h i s m a n d B u d d h i s m ; the interaction of B u d d h i s m with T a o i s m a n d C o n f u c i a n i s m in C h i n a a n d the development and c o n t e m p o r a r y beliefs of these religions with particular emphasis o n s p e c i f i c themes s u c h as suffering, revelation, salvation a n d e x i s t e n c e . Religious Studies 210 T h e O l d Testament (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h e f o c u s of this c o u r s e will be an e x a m i n a t i o n of the O l d Testament texts: Law, P r o p h e t s a n d Writings through historic a l , t h e o l o g i c a l a n d literary perspectives a n d h o w s p e c i f i c O l d Testament texts have influenced c o n t e m p o r a r y and s u b sequent literature through the ages. C o u r s e format will include lectures (where appropriate), d i s c u s s i o n s , guest speakers a n d field trips to J e w i s h a n d C h r i s t i a n services. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Religious Studies 211 T h e New Testament (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the N e w T e s t a m e n t writings with s p e c i f i c e m p h a s i s o n the life a n d teachings of J e s u s a n d the development of the C h r i s t i a n C h u r c h . Included will be a study of the literature influenced by N e w Testament texts. C o u r s e format will i n c l u d e lectures (where appropriate), d i s c u s s i o n s , guest s p e a k e r s a n d field trips to C h r i s t i a n services. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Note: R e l i g i o u s S t u d i e s 100 a n d 101 were formerly R e l i g i o u s S t u d i e s 200 a n d 201 (see C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e C a l e n d a r , 78/79). Re-articulation is in progress. C o u r s e format will i n c l u d e d i s c u s s i o n s , u s e of m e d i a as well as guest s p e a k e r s a n d field trips to religious services. Transferable to U B C , S F U a n d U.Vic. Religious Studies 102 Search for Meaning (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h i s c o u r s e will f o c u s o n the need for m e a n i n g in our lives a n d the ways in w h i c h religious thinkers have e x p r e s s e d that need. T o p i c s will i n c l u d e varieties of religious e x p e r i e n c e , the need for religion a n d whether or not religion c a n provide h u m a n s with ultimate m e a n i n g . T o p i c s will b e presented through c o n t e m p o r a r y religious and literary writings. C o u r s e format will include d i s c u s s i o n a n d films as well as guest speakers a n d visits to c h u r c h e s , s y n a g o g u e s , temples and a parish. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Religious Studies 103 Search for Meaning in Religious Literature (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. T h e f o c u s in this c o u r s e will be o n s p e c i f i c investigation of t h e m e s — free will, salvation, alienation, s e c u l a r i s m , c h u r c h a n d myth — and how e a c h of these is portrayed in the major religions of m a n . R e a d i n g s will i n c l u d e c o n t e m p o r a r y religious a n d literary writings as well as s e l e c t i o n s from reli- 51 Sociology Instructional Faculty G a y l e , N . , B.A. (York), M . A . (Western) G r o v e s , P. Heffron, B.A. (Toronto), P h . D . (Brit. C o l . ) Salter, R., B.A., M.A. (New Y o r k State), L L . B . (Brit. C o l . ) S p e i e r . M . , B.A. (New Y o r k ) , M.A., P h . D . (Berkeley) G e n e r a l Information All c o u r s e s in S o c i o l o g y are geared to help the student c o m p r e h e n d personal a n d global events in a relevant a n d meaningful way. S o c i o l o g y s h o u l d thus help the student in h i s / h e r e n d e a v o u r to c o p e with o u r i n c r e a s i n g l y c o m p l e x society. A major in s o c i o l o g y leads to work in the following areas: s o c i a l work, t e a c h i n g , probation work, c r i m i n o l o g y , industrial s o c i o l o g y , c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , m e d i a , government research, a n d related areas. , S t u d e n t s registering for S o c i o l o g y c o u r s e s s h o u l d note that there are no prerequisites for a n y of the c o u r s e s and that c o u r s e s c a n be taken in any order or c o m b i n a t i o n , a c c o r d i n g to student interest. T h o s e w h o intend to major s h o u l d c o m plete S o c i o l o g y 100 and 101. A l l 200-level c o u r s e s will provide the S i m o n Fraser transfer student with a s s i g n e d credit toward 2nd-year c o u r s e s . T h e U B C transfer student will be provided with u n a s s i g n e d credit toward a major. S o c i o l o g y 201 British C o l u m b i a Society (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u e d s o c i o l o g i c a l a p p r o a c h to the d y n a m i c s of C a n a d i a n society with special e m p h a s i s o n B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a . C l o s e attention will be given to s o c i a l m o v e m e n t s a n d e c o n o m i c , historical, a n d cultural d e v e l o p m e n t s w h i c h have s h a p e d British C o l u m b i a from a frontier into a m o d e r n industrial society. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . S o c i o l o g y 210 Current Social Issues (S) (3,0,1) A study of s o c i a l c o n c e r n s and cultural problems c o m m o n to current c o n d i t i o n s in the twentieth century in o u r s o c i e t y and in global perspectives. C l a s s i c a l s o c i o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s will be used to a n a l y z e media coverage a n d p o p u l a r p e r c e p tion of issues and problems. Current issues are p l a c e d in the context of the student's daily world, as it is h a p p e n i n g now — this s h o u l d d e v e l o p the student's s o c i o l o g i c a l i m a g i n a t i o n . This c o u r s e c a n be taken by itself, or a s a c o m p l e m e n t to S o c i o l o g y 211, S o c i o l o g y of U n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Not offered in 1981/82. S o c i o l o g y 211 S o c i o l o g y of Under Development (F) (3,0,1) T h e c o u r s e s y s t e m a t i c a l l y c o v e r s major t o p i c s a n d i s s u e s of c o n c e r n to a n y o n e w h o w i s h e s to begin to understand, and c o m e to terms with, the m o d e r n world in a personally a n d s o c i o l o g i c a l l y relevant way. T h e basic theme of the c o u r s e is that we are, to a greater extent than generally i m a g i n e d , prod u c e d , structured a n d run by the " s o c i a l m a c h i n e " . T h i s " s o c i a l m a c h i n e " c o m p r i s e s institutions s u c h as the family, religion, inequality, m a s s media, e d u c a t i o n as well as rules, customs, laws, etc. This c o u r s e looks at how w e are influenced by this " m a c h i n e " a n d , in turn, how we react to that influence. A study of the major theories of u n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t , e m p i r i c a l studies of under d e v e l o p m e n t , s o c i a l a n d cultural r e s p o n s e s to under d e v e l o p m e n t , a n d the inter-relationship of s o c i a l institutions in a n d between the " d e v e l o p e d " a n d " u n d e r - d e v e l o p e d " societies. T h i s c o u r s e will provide students with a n o p p o r t u n i t y to better u n d e r s t a n d the s o c i a l , e c o n o m i c , a n d political c a u s e s a n d effects of under d e v e l o p m e n t . B o t h s o c i o l o g i c a l a n d " n o n - s o c i o l o g i c a l " literature o n the m e a n i n g a n d effects of " u n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t " will be c o n s i d e r e d . T h i s c o u r s e may be taken by itself or as a c o m p l e m e n t to S o c i o l o g y 210, C u r r e n t S o c i a l Issues. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Not offered in 1981/82. B o t h S o c i o l o g y 100 a n d 101 are required for students intending to major in S o c i o l o g y at S i m o n Fraser or at U B C . S o c i o l o g y 222 S o c i o l o g y of the Arts (F) (3,0,1) Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. A m u s i c a l , artistic a n d s o c i o l o g i c a l study of creative e n d e a v o u r s of western civilization t h r o u g h p a i n t i n g , m u s i c a n d sculpture to c i n e m a . L e c t u r e s a r e illustrated with both pictures a n d m u s i c . T h e c o u r s e will relate the various art forms to the s o c i a l context in w h i c h they exist; h e n c e , it will d e v e l o p a n u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the inter-relationships between ideas ( e x p r e s s e d as Art), s o c i a l institutions a n d s o c i a l behaviour. S o c i o l o g y 100 Social Structures (F.S) (3,0,1) S o c i o l o g y 101 C o n c e p t s of Theories of Society (S) (3,0,1) With current s o c i a l c o n d i t i o n s in m i n d , this c o u r s e analyzes the general development of s o c i o l o g i c a l thought in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. W e will look at three major a p p r o a c h e s to u n d e r s t a n d i n g s o c i e t y (functionalism, conflict theory, a n d s y m b o l i c interactionism) a n d e m p l o y these a p p r o a c h e s to a n a l y z e events of current interest. This c o u r s e is particularly r e c o m m e n d e d as a c o m p l e m e n t to S o c i o l o g y 223, M e d i a a n d S o c i e t y , or S o c i o l o g y 101, C o n c e p t s & T h e o r i e s of S o c i o l o g y . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. B o t h S o c i o l o g y 100 a n d 101 a r e r e q u i r e d for students intending to major in S o c i o l o g y at S i m o n Fraser or at U B C . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S o c i o l o g y 200 C a n a d i a n Society (F) (3,0,1) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the study of C a n a d i a n s o c i e t y a n d culture, i n c l u d i n g a n analysis of the major C a n a d i a n institutions studied on a national basis, with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on the d y n a m i c s of c h a n g e in a multicultural, c o m p l e x society. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 52 S o c i o l o g y 223 Media a n d Society (S) (3,0,1) A n intensive a n d f a s c i n a t i n g study of the relationship between a s o c i e t y ' s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s y s t e m s as m e d i a and its t e c h n o l o g i c a l , e c o n o m i c , a n d political base, its i d e o l o g y , its behaviour patterns a n d its c u l t u r a l life. This will e n c o m p a s s current forms of television, radio, m a g a z i n e s , all f o r m s of advertisement, news p r o d u c t i o n , a n d the movies. This c o u r s e is particularly r e c o m m e n d e d as a c o m p l e m e n t to S o c i o l o g y 222, S o c i o l o g y of the Arts, or S o c i o l o g y 100, S o c i a l Structures. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Spanish Instructional Faculty C o l l i n s , N . J . , B . A . ( L o n d o n ) , M . A . (Brit. C o l . ) Furstenwald, C , B.A. ( M e x i c o ) S o u z a , A G . , B . A . (Hons.). M . A . (Brit C o l ) , C o o r d i n a t o r of Modern Languages Instructional A s s o c i a t e s Gacina, Jeannette S e w e r i n , Margarita, B . A . (Brit. C o l . ) S p a n i s h 140 Studies in Latin A m e r i c a n Culture (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A study of the p e o p l e s a n d cultures of s e l e c t e d Latin A m e r i c a n regions. T h e c o u n t r i e s to be studied are M e x i c o , G u a t e m a l a , C h i l e a n d P e r u . T h e c o u r s e will begin with an historical overview of e a c h region. A study of selected Latin A m e r i c a n literature in translation, and of this literature's roots in history, i n c l u d i n g the history of p r e - C o l u m b i a n civilizations (e.g. M a y a n , Inca). General Information SFU S t u d e n t s w h o w i s h to p r o c e e d to S F U a n d to p u r s u e further c o u r s e s in S p a n i s h are r e m i n d e d of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S F U for all C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S p a n i s h c o u r s e s . E x e m p t i o n from a n d placement in higher c o u r s e s are d e t e r m i n e d by the results of a placement test or other a s s e s s m e n t p r o c e d u r e . A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which would count toward a major in Spanish. C o u r s e s which d o not qualify toward a major will be a w a r d e d elective credit only. T h e literature will be read in translation but o n e of the two seminar s e s s i o n s e a c h week will be specially structured for students w h o wish to read w o r k s in S p a n i s h . T h e w o r k s selected for reading in S p a n i s h will be those that c a n be read b y students w h o have c o m p l e t e d the s e c o n d year S p a n i s h c o u r s e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . S p a n i s h 141 Studies in Latin A m e r i c a n Culture (S) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of 140. T h e c o u n t r i e s to be studied are A r g e n t i n a , C u b a a n d the C a r i b b e a n UBC At U B C , present equivalent s t a n d a r d s equate S p a n i s h 100 and 101 with S p a n i s h 100: S p a n i s h 200 a n d 201 with S p a n i s h 200. T h e student w h o plans to major in S p a n i s h may enter U B C ' s S p a n i s h w h e n s / h e c o m p l e t e s the C a p i l a n o c o u r s e s . Note: A l l c o u r s e s in S p a n i s h include a total of five a n d o n e half hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures: o n e a n d one-half h o u r s of laboratory practice; a n d o n e hour of c o n v e r s a t i o n a l practice with a native speaker. Native speakers of F r e n c h , G e r m a n or S p a n i s h w h o wish to take first or s e c o n d - y e a r c o u r s e s in these l a n g u a g e s must consult with the L a n g u a g e C o o r d i n a t o r first. University rules governing s u c h students differ within departments, but the L a n g u a g e C o o r d i n a t o r has c o r r e s p o n d e n c e d e a l i n g with matters relevant to credit transfer a n d point of entry. In order to avoid any m i s u n d e r s t a n d i n g , s u c h students are invited to d i s c u s s these p r o b l e m s with the L a n g u a g e C o o r d i n a t o r prior to enrolment. Spanish 100 First Year Spanish (F) (3,2.5,1) S p a n i s h 200 S e c o n d Year Spanish (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: S p a n i s h 100/101 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A c o m p l e t e review of S p a n i s h g r a m m a r with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on p r o b l e m a t i c areas normally e n c o u n t e r e d by students of the language. T h e reading, writing a n d oral fluency of the student will be improved t h r o u g h translations, c o m p o s i t i o n s a n d a high d e g r e e of c o n v e r s a t i o n . A l s o , the student will be i n t r o d u c e d to H i s p a n i c Literature. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S p a n i s h 201 S e c o n d Year S p a n i s h (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisites: S p a n i s h 200 or p e r m i s s i o n from the instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the work of S p a n i s h 200. T h i s c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, wherever p o s s i b l e , in the term following S p a n i s h 200. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Prerequisites: N o n e . T h i s is a beginners' c o u r s e w h i c h offers a c o m p r e h e n s i v e introduction to the S p a n i s h l a n g u a g e . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n grammar a n d the development of the students' s p e a k i n g , understanding a n d writing skills. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. S p a n i s h 101 First Year S p a n i s h (S) (3,2.5,1) Prerequisites: S p a n i s h 100 or p e r m i s s i o n from instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of the work of S p a n i s h 100, this c o u r s e s h o u l d be taken, wherever p o s s i b l e , in the term following S p a n i s h 100. R e c o m m e n d e d also for those w h o are c o n s i d e r ing taking S p a n i s h 200 at a later date a n d need review work T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . 53 Theatre Arts Instructional Faculty M o o r e , D., B.F.A. (U.Vic.) M u r d o c h , W „ B.F.A. ( U . V i c ) General Information T h e Theatre P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is d e s i g n e d to introduce the student to the theatre arts through c o u r s e s in acting, theatre history, a n d theatre-craft labs. It will provide training in the craft of performing and will prepare actors for further work in other institutions a n d acting s c h o o l s , also it will e n c o u r a g e their participation in recreational c o m m u n i t y theatre. Daytime a n d evening s e c t i o n s of most c o u r s e s are offered to allow both full-time and part-time students to take advantage of the Theatre P r o g r a m . Theatre c o u r s e s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e have transfer credit or elective credit at British C o l u m b i a ' s major universities. Please consult Transfer G u i d e a n d instructor Theatre 100 Acting I (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A n introduction to the craft of a c t i n g . Theatre 100 e m p h a sizes personal a n d g r o u p exploration of b o d y a n d voice; s e n s o r y observation, a w a r e n e s s , a n d recall; mime; mask; and character a n d role creation. T h e s e areas are e x p l o r e d through i m p r o v i s e d a n d scripted s c e n e work. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Theatre 101 Acting II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 100 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A n e x p l o r a t i o n of P e r f o r m a n c e Improvisation a n d n o n scripted theatre. Theatre 101 trains the performer in the art of improvisation a n d g r o u p c r e a t i o n . It e m p h a s i z e s e n s e m b l e performing, narrative skills, c h a r a c t e r relationship, a n d an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the nature of d r a m a t i c structure. T h e r e will normally be a p e r f o r m a n c e at term e n d . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. • Theatre 200 Script a n d Stage (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 101 or p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A n advanced course exploring scripted drama. Role development a n d c h a r a c t e r interaction is e x p l o r e d t h r o u g h a variety of scripted materials taken from u n c o n v e n t i o n a l s o u r c e s as well as from c l a s s i c a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y p l a y s . Traditional vocal a n d p h y s i c a l e x e r c i s e s will be taught to e x p a n d the student's abilities a n d to d e v e l o p a w a r m - u p regime. L a b s : T h e theatrecraft support areas of theatre. labs provide e x p e r i e n c e in the Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Theatre 201 Rehearsal a n d Performance (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 200 or p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor. A practical c o u r s e e x p l o r i n g the p r o c e s s w h i c h leads to performance. Development of a w a r m - u p regime will c o n t i n u e while students rehearse a n d p r o d u c e a one-act play. T h e r e will normally be a public p e r f o r m a n c e at term e n d . M o n o logues may be d e v e l o p e d to prepare the student for e n t r a n c e to other theatre c o u r s e s a n d auditions. Labs: Students will d e s i g n , construct, p u b l i c i z e , a n d crew the one-acts. Students will also be instructed in the c o m p i l a tion of a p r o f e s s i o n a l resume a n d other theatrical matters. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Women's Studies 192 W o m e n a n d Theatre (F or S) (3,0,1) A n introductory c o u r s e on w o m e n in theatre both a s characters a n d as participants. A n historical a p p r o a c h will survey the development of the female c h a r a c t e r a n d the e m e r g e n c e of w o m e n in the p r o f e s s i o n a l theatre w o r l d from early theatre through to the 20th century. B a s i c a c t i n g skills will be a p p l i e d to m o n o l o g u e s a n d s c e n e studies w h i c h e x p l o r e female u n i q u e n e s s and the d e v e l o p m e n t of the d e v e l o p i n g stage female. A l l d r a m a t i z a t i o n will b e d o n e in a studio atmosphere. T h e r e will be no p u b l i c p e r f o r m a n c e s . Transferable to S F U . Theatre 120 Introduction to Theatre History I (F) (3,0,1) N o prerequisite. A practical a p p r o a c h to the study of Theatre History. In the first term several periods from 5th century B . C . ( C l a s s i c a l Theatre) through to the 17th century will be covered using seminars, research presentation, play readings, a n d s o m e lectures to discover e a c h era. A practical d i s c o v e r y of the c o s t u m e s , set, acting a n d writing styles will be e m p h a s i z e d . Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Theatre 121 Introduction to Theatre History II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Theatre 120 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Theatre 120, Theatre 121 utilizes similar t e c h n i q u e s to d i s c o v e r major periods from the 17th to early 20th century. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. 54 C R E D I T - F R E E : C r e d i t free c o u r s e s in s u p p l e m e n t a r y p e r f o r m a n c e arts s u c h as movement, v o i c e , mask a n d m a k e up, will be offered to students in times c o m p a t i b l e with credit c o u r s e offerings. T h e a i m of these o p t i o n a l w o r k s h o p s is to provide additional training to students w i s h i n g to a u g m e n t the e x p e r i e n c e s provided in credit offerings. P l e a s e c o n t a c t instructor for further details a n d read the C R E D I T - F R E E flyer. Visual Literacy Instructional Faculty Instructors are s e c o n d e d from Fine Arts a n d the M e d i a Resource Program. General Information Visual Literacy is not a d i s c i p l i n e area but it may b e c o m e so in future, or like C a n a d i a n Studies it will be part of a special multi-disciplinary area of study within the college's A c a d e m i c and Career Divisions. While Fine Arts 104/105 which constitute a two-part introduction to Visual Literacy are heavily d e p e n dent u p o n materials selected from Art History, neither are typical surveys a n d both include reference to imagery a n d p r o c e s s e s outside the typical purview of Fine Arts. Women's Studies Instructional Faculty W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s offerings are taught by fully qualified instructors with e x p e r i e n c e in the field required by each course. T h e s e faculty are s e c o n d e d f r o m relevant d i s c i p l i n e s to W o m e n ' s Studies. Transfer ' S F U : S t u d e n t s w h o w i s h to pursue further c o u r s e s in W o m e n ' s Studies are advised that S F U has instituted a minor program in Women's Studies. Transfer credit has been received for W o m e n ' s Studies 104, 110, 120, 122 a n d 192, and is being sought for 193. For further information on transferability refer to the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the calendar. Women's Studies 104 Contemporary E n g l i s h - C a n a d i a n W o m e n Writers (F) (3,0,1) A d i s c u s s i o n - o r i e n t e d c o u r s e intended to broaden a n d intensify the student's a w a r e n e s s of a n d a p p r e c i a t i o n of the literature in E n g l i s h being p r o d u c e d by C a n a d i a n w o m e n writers today, with e m p h a s i s o n the current, local, West C o a s t literary scene; to examine and d i s c u s s the portraits of w o m e n , and of women's c i r c u m s t a n c e s revealed in these writings; in addition to students' reading a n d d i s c u s s i o n of the literature, there will be class visits for readings and d i s c u s s i o n by several prominent West C o a s t C a n a d i a n w o m e n writers. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U.Vic. Women's Studies 110 Women and Psychology (S) (3,0,1) A p s y c h o l o g i c a l e x a m i n a t i o n of sex-role definitions, their origins, development in c h i l d h o o d and m a i n t e n a n c e in adult life. T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e the differences in life patterns between men a n d w o m e n a n d the effect these have o n personality development a n d s e l f - c o n c e p t . It will i n c l u d e a critical e x a m i n a t i o n of male a n d female c o n s c i o u s n e s s a n d the extent t o w h i c h these affect a n d determine potential for human growth and freedom. Reference will be made to major p s y c h o l o g i c a l s c h o o l s of thought in terms of sexual bias. Non-sexist alternatives to present psychiatric practices will be e x p l o r e d . as well as public a n d political activities will be studied. T h e c o u r s e will e x a m i n e r e a s o n s b e h i n d the extent to w h i c h w o m e n have been " h i d d e n from history." Transferable to S F U a n d U.Vic. Transfer credit to U B C is being applied for. Women's Studies 122 W o m e n in A n t h r o p o l o g y (F) (3,0,1) T h e a n t h r o p o l o g i c a l perspective a p p l i e d to w o m e n in different cultures of the world: their role in e c o n o m i c , p o l i tical, religious, k i n s h i p , e x p r e s s i v e s y s t e m s . E x p l o r a t i o n of the work of w o m e n anthropologists and the effect of theory on understanding w o m e n . What is the w o m a n ' s e x p e r i e n c e in cultures a n d areas s u c h as the E s k i m o s , A m a z o n jungle, Israeli kibbutz, G r e e c e , A f g h a n i s t a n , India, M e x i c o a n d Africa. Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Women's Studies 192 W o m e n a n d Theatre (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introductory c o u r s e o n w o m e n in theatre both as characters a n d as participants. A n historical a p p r o a c h will survey the d e v e l o p m e n t of the female c h a r a c t e r a n d t h e e m e r g e n c e of w o m e n in the professional theatre world from early theatre t h r o u g h to the 20th century. B a s i c acting skills will be applied to m o n o l o g u e s a n d s c e n e studies w h i c h e x p l o r e female u n i q u e n e s s and the development of the d e v e l o p i n g stage female. A l l dramatization will be d o n e in a studio atmosphere. T h e r e will be no public p e r f o r m a n c e s . Transferable to S F U . T h e following W o m e n ' s Studies c o u r s e s will not be offered in 81/82. A n y student w h o is interested in these c o u r s e s s h o u l d contact the W o m e n ' s Studies C o o r d i n a t o r , L o c a l 252, Humanities. W o m e n ' s Studies 101 W o m e n ' s Studies 105 W o m e n ' s Studies 106 W o m e n ' s S t u d i e s 107 - Transferable to S F U a n d U.Vic. Women's Studies 120 W o m e n & the Past: A n Historical Survey (S) (3,0,1) A survey of the lives of w o m e n from the ancient world to 20th C . North A m e r i c a . A n u n c o v e r i n g of w o m e n ' s participation in a n d c o n t r i b u t i o n to the m a k i n g of history. Private lives W o m e n ' s Studies 112 W o m e n ' s Studies 121 W o m e n ' s Studies 150 W o m e n ' s Studies 151 W o m e n ' s Studies 193 - W o m e n a n d Work. Contemporary French-Canadian W o m e n Writers. C o n t e m p o r a r y United States W o m e n Writers. Contemporary European Women Writers (in translation). Women and Religion W o m e n a n d P o w e r in Western Society. S o u n d R e s o u r c e s W o r k s h o p for Women. V i s u a l R e s o u r c e W o r k s h o p for Women. W o m e n a n d Theatre. 55 Career/Vocational Programs CAREER PROGRAMS Exemption Standing - C a r e e r Students Career p r o g r a m s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e prepare adults for employment in business and industry. All secondary s c h o o l graduates are eligible for a d m i s s i o n : those without G r a d e 12 standing may also apply and will be c o n s i d e r e d on the basis of their particular e x p e r i e n c e , maturity, ability and interest. T h e suggested c u r r i c u l u m for e a c h p r o g r a m i n c l u d e s required, r e c o m m e n d e d and elective c o u r s e s . Every attempt is made to plan a program of studies best suited to individual needs; however, each student must assume final responsibility for selecting his/her p r o g r a m . T o provide the student with an insight into h u m a n nature, studies in the humanities and behavioural s c i e n c e s form an important part of C a r e e r P r o g r a m s . T h e student studies s o m e of the methods of inquiry into the nature of m a n , the natural w o r l d and s o c i a l institutions. T h e s e studies provide the prospective graduate with an opportunity to learn about the relationship of his/her career to the e c o n o m i c w o r l d in w h i c h s/he must perform. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o u r s e s also form part of every C a r e e r P r o g r a m . T h e s e are d e s i g n e d to assist the student to write clearly and speak well. S u c h c o u r s e s provide the resources to back up the special talents of the Career P r o g r a m graduate. In most programs "on-the-job" work e x p e r i e n c e forms part of the c u r r i c u l u m . T h i s type of e x p e r i e n c e brings relevancy to the material under study. T h e C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l D i v i s i o n prepares its graduates for positions in business a n d industry as well as in the field of the applied arts. T h e c o u r s e s offered in the various p r o g r a m s are under constant review to make certain that students are e x p o s e d to the latest of techniques a n d skills. A d v i s o r y committees, c o m p o s e d of e m p l o y e r s in the b u s i n e s s , i n d u s trial, professional and social services are constantly reviewing a n d making r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s for all p r o g r a m s . S t u d e n t s e n r o l i n g in a C a r e e r p r o g r a m may be e x e m p t e d from certain c o u r s e s within the p r o g r a m u p o n the s u c c e s s f u l d e m o n s t r a t i o n of a c q u i r e d skills a n d k n o w l e d g e in s p e c i f i c c o u r s e areas. S u c h e x e m p t i o n s t a n d i n g s will be noted on the Permanent S t u d i e s R e c o r d . S t u d e n t s granted s u c h e x e m p t i o n s will have their total c o u r s e load r e d u c e d by the n u m b e r of e x e m p t e d credit hours to the m a x i m u m of two c o u r s e s or six credit h o u r s per a c a d e m i c year without effect u p o n the status of the Certificate or D i p l o m a in the particular p r o g r a m . S u c h e x e m p t e d hours are not necessarily transferable to other institutions. E x e m p t i o n in e x c e s s of two c o u r s e s , or six credit hours, may be a w a r d e d a student only u p o n the r e c o m m e n d a t i o n of the appropriate p r o g r a m c o o r d i n a t o r a n d the D e a n of C a r e e r Programs. Transfer T o and From Other Institutions There is agreement a m o n g all public B . C . C o l l e g e s to accept e a c h other's credits u p o n transfer, if a p p l i c a b l e , to a p r o g r a m given at ,the admitting c o l l e g e , a n d given suitable e q u i v a l e n c y . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual c o u r s e credit. Transfer credits are granted to students o n a d m i s s i o n for a c c e p t a b l e work d o n e at other institutions: the transfer credits reduce the total n u m b e r of credits w h i c h are required at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e for the certificate or d i p l o m a . S t u d e n t s wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's P e r m a n e n t Student R e c o r d . Full information on transfer of s p e c i f i c c o u r s e s is available from the A d m i s s i o n A d v i s o r , C o u n s e l l o r s a n d in the pertinent instructional D i v i s i o n . A d m i s s i o n Criteria Student C o u r s e and Work L o a d x C a r e e r P r o g r a m c o u r s e work a p p r o x i m a t e s 21 h h o u r s per week. However, s o m e p r o g r a m s may require as many as 32 hours and others as few as 16 h o u r s per week. It is therefore strongly r e c o m m e n d e d that students not a c c e p t e m p l o y m e n t while undertaking full-time studies in any o n e of the C a r e e r P r o g r a m s offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . Employment Opportunities for the Graduate A l t h o u g h e m p l o y m e n t opportunities for the graduates of career p r o g r a m s have to date been g o o d , the C o l l e g e is in no position to guarantee job p o s i t i o n s for the graduates of particular career p r o g r a m s . E m p l o y m e n t opportunities are largely b a s e d on the a d v i c e of s p e c i a l i s t A d v i s o r y C o m m i t t e e s . T h e a d v i c e provided by these c o m m i t t e e s may be tempered by rapidly changing e c o n o m i c conditions, alterations in the requirements of certifying bodies, a n d the s p e c i f i c needs of particular e m p l o y e e s . T h e s e c o n d i t i o n s c a n c o m p l e t e l y alter the e m p l o y m e n t possibilities for individual graduates in a very short time. A d m i s s i o n to C a r e e r P r o g r a m s is limited to a fixed number e a c h year. A p p l i c a n t s will be c o n s i d e r e d on the criteria established by e a c h program area. S e e individual calendar program descriptions for details. B e c a u s e many of the more specialized p r o g r a m s a n d c o u r s e s offered are u n i q u e to the province there is no priority of a d m i s s i o n except that as a guideline a majority of the students shall be residents of the C o l l e g e region. A d m i s s i o n Dates E n r o l m e n t in s o m e C a r e e r P r o g r a m s may be curtailed d u e to s p a c e a n d equipment limitations. C o n s e q u e n t l y , those students w h o c o n t e m p l a t e e n t r a n c e to C a r e e r P r o g r a m s are e n c o u r a g e d to apply early. A p p l i c a n t s are required to have an interview with the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r prior to a d m i s s i o n to any of the C a r e e r P r o g r a m s . A p p l i c a t i o n s must be received before M a r c h 1 of e a c h year in order to guarantee c o n s i d e r a t i o n for the next A c a d e m i c Year (September). A p p l i c a t i o n s received after that date will be c o n s i d e r e d if s p a c e s are available. U n s u c c e s s f u l applicants w h o wish to be c o n s i d e r e d for the next year must re-apply. Programs Offered Music T h e particular programs, a n d specific options within the various divisions are listed below. 1 C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m — 2 years 2. M u s i c Transfer P r o g r a m — 2 years 3. M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m — 2 years Arts Programs O u t d o o r Recreation 1. 2. 3. 4. Details P a g e 59 C o m m e r c i a l Art — 2 years Crafts P r o g r a m — 2 years S t u d i o Art P r o g r a m — 2 years F o u n d a t i o n s of V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s — 1 year Business Management Programs Details P a g e 6 9 1. A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m — F u l l - T i m e a n d P a r t - T i m e — 2 years 2. M a r k e t i n g M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m — F u l l - T i m e a n d PartT i m e — 2 years 3. C o m p u t e r S y s t e m s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m — F u l l - T i m e a n d P a r t - T i m e — 2 years 4. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m — F u l l - T i m e a n d P a r t - T i m e — 2 years 5 . B u s i n e s s A d m i n i s t r a t i o n P r o g r a m — F u l l - T i m e — 1 year 6. Administrative Management Program — 2 years (Evenings) 7. Small Business Management Program — 3 years (Evenings) Business Training and Career Development Details P a g e 79 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1 2. 3. 4. 5. B u s i n e s s Office T r a i n i n g — 6 months C a r e e r Alternatives P r o g r a m — part-time L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s O p t i o n — part-time L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s P r o g r a m — 2 years L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m — 1 year M e d i c a l Office Assistant P r o g r a m — 1 year and evenings Secretarial P r o g r a m — 2 years Administrative Secretary — part-time W o r d P r o c e s s i n g P r o g r a m s — 1 month to 1 year (subject to funding) Details P a g e 101 Details P a g e 110 O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m — 2 years W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m — 1 <& years — C e r t i f i c a t e Fitness L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m — part-time — Certificate Leisure Lifestyling — part-time — Certificate A d v e n t u r e a n d C h a l l e n g e T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m — part-time — Certificate Retail Fashion M e r c h a n d i s i n g P r o g r a m Details on P a g e 118 1 Retail F a s h i o n M e r c h a n d i s i n g P r o g r a m — 2 years Vocational P r e - E m p l o y m e n t a n d U p g r a d i n g Details o n page 120 In addition to the programs listed a b o v e , the f o l l o w i n g short-term V o c a t i o n a l p r o g r a m s m a y be offered in 1981/82, subject to funding: 1. B u i l d i n g Material S u p p l y W o r k e r — 4 m o n t h s 2. C a r p e n t r y — P r e - A p p r e n t i c e — 5 m o n t h s 3. Heavy E q u i p m e n t O p e r a t o r — 1 month 4. Landscape and G r o u n d s Maintenance Worker — 6 months 5 . Retail Sales T r a i n i n g — 2 w e e k s 6. S m a l l E n g i n e Repair — 5 months 7. Waiter/Waitress T r a i n i n g — 2 weeks 8. Welding a n d Fabrication P r o g r a m — 10 months (subject to Ministry approval a n d funding) 9. A u t o m o t i v e a n d S m a l l E n g i n e R e p a i r P r o g r a m — 10 months (subject to Ministry approval a n d funding) 10. C a r p e n t r y a n d H o u s e h o l d Repairs P r o g r a m — 10 months (subject to Ministry approval a n d funding) ( For further i n f o r m a t i o n V o c a t i o n a l office. please contact the C a r e e r / Chemical and Metallurgical T e c h n o l o g y Program A r r a n g e m e n t s have been made to transfer students to B.C.I.T. (Contact the C h e m i s t r y Department for details.) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Department Details P a g e 91 1. J o u r n a l i s m P r o g r a m — part-time (subject to funding) Health and H u m a n Services Department Details P a g e 92 1. Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m — 2 years 2. Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n U p g r a d i n g — part-time 3. W o r k i n g with the Developmentally H a n d i c a p p e d — parttime 4 . H o m e m a k e r P r o g r a m — 12 w e e k s 5 . L o n g T e r m C a r e W o r k e r (subject to funding) 6. S e e also M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m — Media Resources Details P a g e 9 7 1. M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m — 2 years Training for Business & Industry T h i s d i v i s i o n of the c o l l e g e presents s p e c i a l i z e d training s e m i n a r s , c o u r s e s a n d c o n f e r e n c e s in S u p e r v i s o r y S k i l l s , Professional Selling, Interpersonal Skills, Management T e c h n i q u e s a n d C o m p u t e r S c i e n c e for b u s i n e s s , industry and government o r g a n i z a t i o n s . It is located o n the 7th floor of the D o w n t o w n E d u c a t i o n C e n t r e , 5 4 9 H o w e Street, V a n c o u v e r . F o r information call 682-0301. VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is offering V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s a n d U p g r a d i n g C o u r s e s under an agreement with the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n , Province of British C o l u m b i a . T h e p u r p o s e of V o c a t i o n a l E d u c a t i o n is to provide c o u r s e s in business, the skilled trades, service o c c u p a t i o n s a n d c o m m e r c i a l art to adults requiring s p e c i a l i z e d training as well as providing a service to e m p l o y e r s throughout the P r o v i n c e . Art Program Instructional Faculty C o g s w e l l . Barry, N . D . D . ( H a m m e r s m i t h ) , R C A . S c u l p t u r e D e g g a n , P a u l , D i p l o m a (Worthing C o . , E n g l a n d ) , S c u l p t u r e Dyke, S i d , Inst. T e c h . & Art ( C a l g a r y ) , G r a p h i c Art Eastcott, W a y n e , Sr. Cert. ( V . S . A . ) , R C A . P r i n t m a k i n g Forster, Fred, A l b e r t a C o l l e g e of Art, A d v e r t i s i n g Illustration J u n g i c , J o s e p h i n e , B.A., M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Art History K i n g a n , T e d , N . D . D . ( B l a c k p o o l ) , A . T . D . , R C A . T e a c h . Cert. (Manchester), B . C . T e a c h . Cert. D r a w i n g , D e s i g n Leskard, S t e p h e n , D i p l . (St. Martins, L o n d o n ) , G e n . D r a w i n g , Design, Painting Llewellyn, M a r i o n , B.A. (Manchester), G r a p h i c D e s i g n L o n g , J o h n , B . P . A . Art C e n t e r ( L o s A n g e l e s ) , G r a p h i c D e s i g n , Illustration M a c L a g a n , David, A . O . C . A . , I . D C , F.C.A. Illustration, General Drawing M c L a r e n , D o n n a , Cert. ( S h e r i d a n C o l l e g e ) , B . H . S c . ( G u e l p h ) Pottery M a r s h a l l , David, Cert. ( B . C . ) , S c u l p t u r e Mees, M i e n e k e , W e a v i n g M o l n a r , Frank, D i p l . ( P e n n s y l v a n i a ) , A n a t o m y , D r a w i n g , Painting N a u m a n n , R o s e , Cert. ( V S . A ) , C r e d . (Ins. A l l e n d e ) , W e a v i n g Newton-Mason, J o h n , Dipl. (Worthing C o l . , England) Environmental D e s i g n , D e s i g n R i c h m o n d , Lesley, M.Art E d . ( W a s h i n g t o n State Col.) T e a c h . Cert. (London) F a b r i c P r i n t i n g Rimmer, J i m , Lettering R o s e n b e r g , A n n , B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Art History, V i s u a l Literacy Sharpe, David, D i p l . (Alta. C o l . of Art), A p p l i e d D e s i g n Stribley, Roger, C e r a m . ( B i r m i n g h a m ) , ( L u n d Univ. S w e d e n ) , Pottery W o o d , A l a n , N . D . D , A . T . D . (Liverpool), R C A . P a i n t i n g , Drawing Y a s k i n s k i , Daniel, P h o t o g r a p h y Z i m m e r m a n , AI, Art C e n t e r ( L o s A n g e l e s ) , A p p l i e d D e s i g n General Description T h e s e programs offer a wide variety C o m m e r c i a l Art a n d Craft C o u r s e s . Advanced I Registration - Art D i p l o m a Students Fall T e r m 1981 1. R e t u r n i n g students for 2nd year Art D i p l o m a P r o g r a m : A p r i l 15-30. 2. A l l other d i p l o m a program Full-time: M a y 4-15 Part-time: M a y 18-29 students 3. F o r s p e c i f i c requirements in the C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m please refer to that s e c t i o n . II S p r i n g T e r m 1982 1. R e t u r n i n g students for all Art D i p l o m a p r o g r a m s , full a n d part-time — Nov. 16 - D e c . 11. Prerequisite Prerequisites may be waived in writing by either the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r or the instructor c o n c e r n e d w h e n it is felt that a student p o s s e s s e s the ability to c o p e with the requirements of any given c o u r s e . History of Art Courses S t u d e n t s in the Art P r o g r a m may w i s h to c o n s i d e r the following c o u r s e s offered by the A c a d e m i c Division: Fine Arts 100, Fine Arts 101. (May be taken instead of Fine Arts 104 a n d 105 for credit in the Art Program.) Transfer Credit of Studio Art, Admission and Registration P r o c e d u r e s Note: 1. C o m m e r c i a l Art a p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d requirements noted in that s e c t i o n . 4. S t u d e n t s w i s h i n g to repeat a c o u r s e : A n y student who has taken an art c o u r s e at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e a n d w h o has p a s s e d that c o u r s e may retake it only after all available s p a c e s have been filled by those students w h o w i s h to enrol in the c o u r s e the first time. STUDENTS MAY NOT REPEAT A C O U R S E MORE THAN O N C E W I T H O U T A N A P P R O V A L IN W R I T I N G F R O M THE COORDINATOR. refer to special 2. For the p u r p o s e s of a d m i s s i o n to art c o u r s e s a full-time student means a p e r s o n of any a g e w h o take a full career P r o g r a m (which may include s o m e Art c o u r s e s and s o m e A c a d e m i c c o u r s e s , or exclusively Art O p t i o n courses) w h i c h , u p o n c o m p l e t i o n in one or two years of study, entitles the student to either a C o l l e g e Certificate or the A s s o c i a t e of Arts a n d S c i e n c e D i p l o m a , or entitles the student to seek transfer credit to other p o s t - s e c o n d a r y learning institutions w h i c h r e c o g n i z e C C A . P . standards for a d m i s s i o n to their programs. 3. A student is not c o n s i d e r e d as " r e g i s t e r e d " in the Art P r o g r a m until his/her Registration F o r m a n d a valid c h e q u e for the full amount of tuition fees, a n d student society fees are d e p o s i t e d , registered and acknowledged with and by the Program Coordinator a n d C o l l e g e Registrar's Offices. T h e transfer g u i d e in the c a l e n d a r s h o u l d be referred to regarding transferability of s p e c i f i c c o u r s e s . T h e student s h o u l d u n d e r s t a n d that a d v a n c e d s t a n d i n g in any institution is usually based on interview a n d portfolio s u b m i s s i o n , as well as credits held. 1. Studio Art Program O p e n to both full and part-time students. Full-time students will gain a wide variety of b a s i c s and insights in this intensive two-year p r o g r a m of studies, providing them with the firm, b r o a d f o u n d a t i o n they need as a basis for further study a n d an eventual career in the V i s u a l Arts. T h i s full-time p r o g r a m provides e x t e n d e d s t u d i o time in P a i n t i n g , P r i n t m a k i n g a n d S c u l p t u r e with c o n c u r r e n t c o u r s e s in D r a w i n g , D e s i g n and Art History. A feature of the program is a weekly F o r u m where first a n d s e c o n d - y e a r students a s s e m b l e on a regular basis in order to meet a variety of professional performers in the V i s u a l Arts a n d allied fields, a n d to participate in s p e c i a l events. T h i s e x p o s u r e to other than their regular instructors will e n a b l e students to relate their c o l l e g e e x p e r i e n c e s to the realities of current thought and practice in the outside w o r l d . 59 Part-time students may participate in a s p e c t s of this p r o g r a m on a more tentative or selective basis. M a n y c o u r s e s are s c h e d u l e d in the e v e n i n g as a c o n s i d e r a t i o n for s u c h students. Note: S t u d e n t s w i s h i n g eventual transfer to other posts e c o n d a r y institutions are advised to c o n s u l t with faculty and c o u n s e l l o r s regarding current regulations a n d requirements prior to final c o u r s e or program selection. Associate in Arts a n d S c i e n c e Diploma Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Electives '. Credit Hours Lab Hours 54 6 6 39 0 0 66 39 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 6 3 0 0 0 18 9 Studio Art C u r r i c u l u m 2. Crafts Program O p e n to both full a n d part-time students. T h e c o r e content of this p r o g r a m c o n s i s t s of w e a v i n g , fabric printing a n d pottery but is s u p p o r t e d by c o u r s e s in d r a w i n g a n d d e s i g n . S t u d e n t s begin with instruction in b a s i c t e c h n i q u e s in all three of the craft d i s c i p l i n e s , a d v a n c i n g to p r o f e s s i o n a l c o m p e t e n c e . S t u d e n t s are e n c o u r a g e d to p u r s u e p e r s o n a l creative projects of both a functional or abstract nature as s o o n as basic skills are a c q u i r e d . S t u d i o a n d gallery visits are an important learning s e g m e n t of the p r o g r a m a n d students are e n c o u r a g e d to keep abreast of current c o n c e p t s and trends using traditional materials and new materials d e v e l o p e d by m o d e r n t e c h n o l o g y . T h o s e w h o graduate may seek e m p l o y m e n t as instructors in a variety of c o m m u n i t y art p r o g r a m s or in institutions where h a n d s o n art c o u r s e s are used as therapy. Alternatively, they may e s t a b l i s h themselves as practising artists on either a full-time or part-time basis. T h e crafts offer ideal opportunities for individuals w i s h i n g to extend their leisure time h o r i z o n s and for students in other p r o g r a m s s e e k i n g electives First Term F.A. 100 or F.A. 104 Art 156 Art 167 Art 150 Art 185 " C m n s 150 T h e History of Art I or Introduction to Visual Literacy I T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies I . . Sculpture I Drawing I Design C o n c e p t s I Basic Communications Associate in Arts and S c i e n c e Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Electives Diploma Credit Hours Lab Hours 60 6 _3_ 12 0 _0_ 69 12 3 3 3 3 3 _3 0 0 0 3 0 _0 18 3 3 3 ' 3 3 _3 0 0 3 0 _0 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 _3 0 0 3 0 0 _0^ 18 3 Second Term F.A. 101 or F.A. 105 Art Art Art Art 157 174 151 189 T h e History of Art II or Introduction to V i s u a l Literacy II T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l S t u d i e s II S c u l p t u r e II Drawing II D e s i g n C o n c e p t s II Crafts C u r r i c u l u m 3 3 3 3 3 0 6 3 0 _0 15 12 First Term Art Art Art Art Art Art 154 158 160 163 168 190 General Drawing I Design I F a b r i c Printing I Pottery I Weaving I Spinning and Dyeing Third Term F.A. 210 Art 271 Art 257 Art 262 Elective M o d e r n Art (19th Century) . T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies III S c u l p t u r e III D r a w i n g III 3 3 3 3 3 0 6 3 0 0 15 9 M o d e r n Art (20th Century) . 3 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies IV 3 S c u l p t u r e IV 3 Drawing IV 3 , 3 Communications a n d the Arts _3 0 6 3 0 0 __0 18 9 Fourth Term F.A 211 Art 272 Art 265 Art 263 Elective ' C m n s 153 Note: S t u d e n t s w i s h i n g to substitute E n g l i s h c o u r s e s for C o m m u n i c a t i o n s may d o s o o n r e q u e s t a n d in a c c o r d a n c e with c o l l e g e regulations. 60 Second Term Art Art Art Art Art 161 164 165 169 178 Fabric Printing II G e n e r a l D r a w i n g II Pottery II W e a v i n g II D e s i g n II Third Term " F . A . 104 Art 267 Art 273 Art 284 ' C m n s 150 Elective Introduction to V i s u a l Literacy I W e a v i n g III ' Pottery III F a b r i c Printing III Basic Communications Portfolio Requirements Fourth Term " F . A . 105 Art 268 Art 274 Art 285 " C m n s 153 Art 270 Introduction to V i s u a l Literacy II W e a v i n g IV Pottery IV Fabric Printing IV Communications a n d the Arts F a b r i c s for Interiors 3 3 3 3 0 0 3 0 3 3 0 0 18 3 ' S t u d e n t s w h o wish to substitute E n g l i s h c o u r s e s for C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150/153 may d o s o with the program representative's approval There s h o u l d be a m i n i m u m of 12 samples of original work representing current abilities i n c l u d e d . Imaginative and experimental d r a w i n g s in any m e d i u m are a w e l c o m e addition to the portfolio. S a m p l e s must be flat m o u n t e d , not rolled, framed or g l a s s e d . W e c a n n o t accept portfolios larger than 2 0 " x 2 6 " C o l o u r slides or prints of any larger work may be sent. However, photographs or slides do not replace the required m i n i m u m of 12 s a m p l e s of original work. T h e applicants name and " C o m m e r c i a l Art P r o g r a m " s h o u l d be o n the outside of the portfolio in large letters. " S t u d e n t s may also take F i n e Art 100 a n d 101 for credit. For further information please c o n s u l t Fine Arts. If a portfolio is to be returned, send either stamps or cheque to cover the cost of return postage. Do not send any portfolios by c r o s s - c o u n t r y bus s y s t e m as they are not delivered to Capilano College. 3. C o m m e r i a l Art Program Parcel Post insured or air parcel post insured is usually the best way to have portfolios sent a n d returned. O p e n to full time students only. T h i s is a two year program to provide training for those w h o like to draw a n d enjoy developing a c o n c e p t from its b e g i n n i n g into finished c o m m u n i c a t i o n . S t u d e n t s are t r a i n e d in d e s i g n , v i s u a l imagery, media c h o i c e , t y p o g r a p h y a n d c o n c e p t u a l thinking. In short, the student b e c o m e s a p r o b l e m solver. T h i s is a c o m m e r c i a l artist's function, the resolution of problems that affect the way people think, play, work, travel, s p e n d their money or c h a n g e their habits. Instructors are p r o f e s s i o n a l s w h o take time away from their o w n careers to teach, thus the program relates to the current demands of business a n d industry. Real and simulated problems are taken from initial to finished art and reproduction. Frequently guests from all levels of the profession are brought in to elevate student projects Every possible care is taken, but C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e cannot accept responsibility for loss or d a m a g e to an applicant's work. Associate in Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Credit Hours Lab Hours 66 3 45 0 69 45 C o m m e r c i a l Art C u r r i c u l u m First Term Admission Requirements: This program requires a high level of maturity and integrity. Students with a year or more of life e x p e r i e n c e following high s c h o o l are usually more k n o w l e d g e a b l e a n d mature in their c h o i c e of direction and better prepared. However, highly motivated high s c h o o l students without this year or more of experience c a n s u c c e e d here; a n d we e n c o u r a g e those students to apply. Art Art Art Art 152 154 162 175 Art 177 Art 192 " C m n s 150 Life D r a w i n g I General Drawing I Lettering a n d T y p o g r a p h y P h o t o g r a p h y for the G r a p h i c A r t s Graphic Design I Applied Design I Basic Communications .. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 Admission is based on a portfolio, past work and experience in related fields, general ability a n d the applicant's interests. A p p l i c a t i o n s a n d portfolios s h o u l d be submitted no later than M a r c h 1 of the desired entrance year. Portfolios are reviewed by a jury of three instructors and are assessed on the basis of drawing, d e s i g n , colour, creativity, m e d i a variety and presentation. All a p p l i c a n t s w h o s e portfolios meet the program's minimal standards are c a l l e d for personal interviews with the C o m m e r c i a l Art C o o r d i n a t o r within three weeks of s u b m i s s i o n . Final d e c i s i o n on the make-up of the new c l a s s is made by the c o o r d i n a t o r and faculty by M a y 1 a n d s u c c e s s f u l applicants constitute a waiting list in order of merit a n d are notified a c c o r d i n g l y . T h e y will be c a l l e d up, in order, to fill any v a c a n c i e s as they o c c u r . N a m e s are not held over for the following year. A l l u n s u c c e s s f u l applicants are given the opportunity to register in the Foundations of Visual C o m m u n i c a t i o n Program a n d are a c c e p t e d on first c o m e basis. Second Term Art 164 Art 170 Art 176 Art 179 Art 184 Art 193 G e n e r a l D r a w i n g II Graphic Arts I P h o t o g r a p h y for V i s u a l Communications G r a p h i c D e s i g n II Life D r a w i n g II . . .• A p p l i e d D e s i g n II 3 3 3 3 3 _3 18 Third Term Art Art Art Art Art 251 252 277 278 295 Illustration M e d i a A p p l i e d D e s i g n III Environmental Design I G r a p h i c Arts II A d v e r t i s i n g Illustration I 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ~15~ 15 61 Art Courses Fourth Term Art 253 Art 269 Art 279 Art 280 Art 298 A p p l i e d D e s i g n IV E x p e r i m e n t a l Illustration — E n v i r o n m e n t a l D e s i g n II — Portfolio S t u d i o Advertising Illustration II — 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 15 15 "Students w h o wish to substitute E n g l i s h c o u r s e s for C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150/153 m a y d o s o with the C o o r d i n a t o r ' s approval. Art 150 Drawing I (F) (3,0,1) A n investigation of the conceptual, technical and perceptual a s p e c t s of the d r a w i n g p r o c e s s through a wide variety of methods, materials a n d stimuli. E x p e r i e n c e s in both traditional and contemporary a p p r o a c h e s and c o n c e r n s , i n c l u d i n g representational, interpretive a n d e x p e r i m e n t a l d r a w i n g s in appropriate media (pencil, p e n , b r u s h , markers, m i x e d media, etc.) E m p h a s i s will be o n d e v e l o p i n g the student's c o n f i d e n c e , k n o w l e d g e , g r a p h i c sensitivity a n d c o n t r o l of media. Foundations of Visual C o m m u n i c a t i o n O p e n to both full a n d part-time students. T h i s program is d e s i g n e d to provide a foundation in d r a w i n g skills, figure studies, illustration a n d painting, media a n d t e c h n i q u e s , design p r i n c i p l e s a n d the history of art a n d design. It stresses the necessity of d e v e l o p i n g c o n s e c u t i v e l y the creative thought p r o c e s s e s a n d skills n e c e s s a r y for visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n . T h i s art b a s i c s p r o g r a m provides the d i r e c tions t o prepare the student for further studies in any of the many p r o f e s s i o n a l l y - o r i e n t e d art fields. Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s Credit Hours Lab Hours 30 6 Foundations of Visual Communication Curriculum First Term Art Art Art Art Art 158 152 154 159 166 Design I Life D r a w i n g I General Drawing I Location Drawing Anatomy I 3 3 3 3 _3_ 0 0 0 3 _fJ_ 15 3 3 3 3 3 . . 3 0 0 0 3 _0_ 178 184 164 155 191 15 3 Prerequisite: Art 150. A further investigation of the c o n c e p t u a l , t e c h n i c a l a n d perceptual a s p e c t s of the d r a w i n g p r o c e s s with a d d i t i o n a l e m p h a s i s o n the control of m e d i a a n d p e r s o n a l m o d e s of expression. Art 152 Life Drawing (F) (3,0,1) T h e study of d r a w i n g from the o b s e r v a t i o n of the h u m a n figure; e x e r c i s e s in d e v e l o p i n g visual p e r c e p t i o n , m e m o r y and basic d r a w i n g skills. S t u d y of the p r o p o r t i o n s of the h u m a n body. Structure a n d action d r a w i n g s with e m p h a s i s on e m p a t h y a n d perception of g r a p h i c e l e m e n t s ; instinctive, a n d structured d r a w i n g ; d e v e l o p i n g t h o u g h t - h a n d c o o r d i n a tion. S t u d y of line c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s in p e n c i l , p e n , c o n t e , c h a r c o a l techi.iques. C o n t o u r , c r o s s - c o n t o u r , gesture a n d v o l u m e d r a w i n g s from d r a p e d a n d u n d r a p e d m o d e l s . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Second Term Art Art Art Art Art Art 151 Drawing II (S) (3,0,1) D e s i g n II Life D r a w i n g II G e n e r a l D r a w i n g II Mediums & Techniques Composition and Painting Art 154 G e n e r a l Drawing I (F) (3,0,1) T h e study of primary drawing media and basic techniques, i n c l u d i n g p e n c i l , pen a n d ink, a n d brush a n d ink. S t u d y of perspective d r a w i n g from direct observation, printed reference material, a n d the imagination. S t u d y of representational rendering t e c h n i q u e s of objects, structures, surfaces, a n d textures. L e a r n i n g to visualize in g r a p h i c terms, s y m b o l i z i n g , stylizing in terms of line a n d line c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . D e v e l o p i n g power of observation a n d g r a p h i c sensitivity. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 155 Mediums and Techniques (F) (3,0,1) A c o m p a r i s o n of the a p p r o a c h of the m e d i a a n d h o w they may be used to achieve a wide variety of effects. A c o m p a r i s o n of the a p p r o a c h to d r a w i n g , painting or illustration. M e d i a to be i n c l u d e d a r e a variety of p e n c i l s , p e n s a n d inks, d y e s , water c o l o u r s , a c r y l i c s , eel vinyls, oils, repellants a n d c o l l a g e . 62 Art 156 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies I (F) (3,6,1) Art 161 Fabric Printing II (S) (3,0,1) Students will alternate between P a i n t i n g a n d P r i n t m a k i n g as they investigate basic t e c h n i c a l a n d c o n c e p t u a l c o n c e r n s , both traditional and c o n t e m p o r a r y . T h e r e will be an e m p h a s i s on personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n as materials, p r o c e s s e s and ideas are dealt with through themes derived from nature, objects and the imagination. Individual a n d g r o u p critiques will be held a n d students will be p r o v i d e d with a b a l a n c e of studio activities and lectures, seminars and tutorials, including a weekly F o r u m where first a n d s e c o n d - y e a r students will meet to gain e x p o s u r e to a variety of guest speakers, d i s c u s sions a n d special events relating to this c o u r s e , e s p e c i a l l y c o n c e r n i n g current trends a n d activities. P e r s o n a l research, gallery a n d studio visits will be a feature of this c o u r s e . Prerequisite: Art 160. Art 157 T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies II (S) (3,6,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of A r t 156, but with a b r o a d e n i n g of instruction in h a n d l i n g t e c h n i q u e s a n d materials not e n c o u n tered d u r i n g the first term. T h e r e will be an a d d e d e m p h a s i s on the need to develop personal bodies of knowledge through s k e t c h b o o k s , preliminary studies a n d s u p p o r t i n g material prior to attempting l a r g e - s c a l e and d i m e n s i o n a l works There will be a c o n t i n u a t i o n of the weekly F o r u m with opportunities for students to participate in d e t e r m i n i n g its content a n d structure. E x p l o r i n g paste resist t e c h n i q u e s with s t e n c i l s a n d silks c r e e n printing methods. A p p l i q u e a n d quilting t e c h n i q u e s will be used for surface d e c o r a t i o n a n d d e s i g n methods for e a c h method will be e x p l a i n e d . T h e r e will be an introduction to the history of printed fabrics. Art 162 Lettering a n d T y p o g r a p h y (F) (3,0,1) Historical origins of the alphabet, n u m e r a l s a n d letter styles. P r o p o r t i o n a n d s p a c i n g . Lettering indication in p e n cil, b r u s h , c h a l k s a n d felt markers. C o m p r e h e n s i v e a n d r e p r o d u c t i o n lettering Art 163 Pottery I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to basic p r o c e s s e s of pottery, i n c l u d i n g p i n c h , dug-out, c o i l a n d slab, elementary wheelwork, glaze theory a n d a p p l i c a t i o n , kiln a n d firing. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C . Art 164 General Drawing II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 154. Art 158 Design I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the c o n c e p t s a n d p r i n c i p l e s of visual art fundamentals with analytical a n d creative study of basic elements of pictorial o r g a n i z a t i o n . P r o c e s s a n d nature of visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , form characteristics are investigated with reference to fine arts, crafts a n d a p p l i e d arts. E x e r c i s e s in creating meaningful g r a p h i c c o m m u n i c a t i o n s on set a n d freely c h o s e n topics will be e m p l o y e d . M e d i a will include pencil, paint, ink, c o l l a g e materials a n d m i x e d media. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 159 Location Drawing (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will enable students to d e v e l o p a selective eye a n d work effectively with a variety of d r a w i n g media. T h e student will be able to select a m e d i u m best suited for the needs of a given d r a w i n g p r o b l e m . S t u d i e s will be p r o d u c e d that are suitable for later d e v e l o p m e n t as w o r k s in other media. T h e c o u r s e is a c o m b i n a t i o n of location a n d studio time. Further e x p l o r a t i o n of d r a w i n g media a n d t e c h n i q u e s with an e m p h a s i s o n a more individual a n d interpretive a p p r o a c h , d e v e l o p i n g themes for d r a w i n g s a i m e d at illustration a n d r e p r o d u c t i o n . S t u d y of d r a w i n g styles a n d m o d e s of g r a p h i c e x p r e s s i o n , interpretive stylization a n d distortion. D r a w i n g with pen and ink; w a s h e s , ink a n d brush, felt markers, m i x e d media. S t u d y of mass, light a n d dark, plane, d e p t h a n d s p a c e , and their g r a p h i c representation t h r o u g h various d r a w i n g techniques. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C . Art 165 Pottery II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 163. Further study of wheelwork with p r o g r e s s i v e l y more advanced shapes and designs. A n introduction to glaze theory and exploration of glaze materials. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 160 Fabric Printing 1 (F) (3,0,1) E x p l o r i n g resist printing methods i n c l u d i n g w a x resist with b r u s h , tjanting a n d block, stencil resist a n d tie-dye m e t h o d s , also e x p l o r i n g d e s i g n m e t h o d s for e a c h m e d i u m . Natural d y e s a n d fibre reactive d y e s will be used. T h e r e will be an introduction to the history of d y e d fabrics. 63 Art 166 A n a t o m y I (F) (3,0,1) Art 171 Painting I (F) (3,0,1) T h e m a i n p u r p o s e of this d r a w i n g c o u r s e is to teach the students to draw a n d u n d e r s t a n d the h u m a n b o d y . Investigation of the c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s a n d p o s s i b i l i t i e s of painting m e d i a t h r o u g h e x e r c i s e s a n d e x p e r i m e n t s d e a l i n g with paint c h e m i s t r y , m i x i n g , a p p l i c a t i o n a n d c o n t r o l . D e v e l o p m e n t of k n o w l e d g e of elements of picture m a k i n g s u c h a s form, c o m p o s i t i o n a n d structure, c o l o u r , v o l u m e a n d s p a c e through projects u s i n g figurative, abstract a n d non-figurative themes. G r o u p a n d o n e - t o - o n e d i s c u s s i o n s a n d a n a l y s i s of the student's o w n objectives, p r o b l e m s r e g a r d i n g i m a g e r y , content, methods, scale, m e d i a a n d materials. E x a m i n a t i o n of traditional a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y m e t h o d s a n d styles through slides, personal research, gallery a n d studio visits. T e a c h i n g will be c o n c e n t r a t e d o n d r a w i n g the b o n e s a n d m u s c l e s to enable the students to gain insight of their f u n c tions s o they will be able to a p p l y this k n o w l e d g e in their Fine a n d A p p l i e d Arts C o u r s e s . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C . Art 167 Sculpture I (F) (3,3,1) T h e study of f u n d a m e n t a l s of s c u l p t u r e a n d three d i m e n sional form. E x e r c i s e s in s k e t c h i n g a n d m o d e l l i n g in clay on the basis of direct observation from the model T h e study of three d i m e n s i o n a l form t h r o u g h the investigation of inner structure surface and m a s s . A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the p r o c e s s of p l a s t e r - m o u l d m a k e u p will be a c o m p o n e n t of the c o u r s e . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transferable units to B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 168 Weaving I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the materials a n d primary equipment of weaving, i n c l u d i n g , s p i n n i n g , d y e i n g , the p r o c e s s of felting, projects o n the b r a n c h l o o m , S a l i s h l o o m , b o a r d a n d frame weaving. T h e history of weaving. W e a v i n g a tapestry. Art 169 Weaving II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 168. Introduction to the m e c h a n i c a l l o o m . T h e basic weaves a n d their derivatives, pattern drafting, g a u z e a n d leno weaves. A n a p p r o a c h t o texture a n d c o l o u r . G a r m e n t weaving. Art 170 G r a p h i c Arts I (S) (3,3,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C . Art 172 Painting II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 171. C o n t i n u e d experiment with new a n d traditional painting m e d i a t h r o u g h individual a n d g r o u p projects, investigating possibilities of m i x e d media, large scale, e n v i r o n m e n t a l a n d d i m e n s i o n a l paintings, etc. G r o u p c r i t i q u e s a n d lectures, artist visitors a n d studio a n d gallery visits a n d field trips, a c c u m u l a t i o n of personal ideas a n d information in s k e t c h b o o k s , preliminary s k e t c h e s a n d series of w o r k s . Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C Art 174 Sculpture II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 167. Further study a n d practice of s c u l p t u r e , investigating t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l form, introduction to w o o d c a r v i n g with emphasis o n basic d e s i g n c o n c e p t s a n d individual expression. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C . Prerequisite: A r t 175. A basic c o u r s e in g r a p h i c arts p r o c e s s e s for g r a p h i c d e s i g n e r s , i n c l u d i n g letterpress, gravure, l i t h o g r a p h i c a n d s i l k s c r e e n r e p r o d u c t i o n . Instruction in the t e c h n o l o g y of c o l o u r r e p r o d u c t i o n by four c o l o u r p r o c e s s a n d by p r e s e p a r a t i o n . S t u d e n t s will p r o d u c e line a n d halftone negatives a n d perform b a s i c negative stripping a n d s i l k s c r e e n printing. F i e l d trips to printers a n d plate makers. Art 175 Photography for the G r a p h i c Arts (F) (3,0,1) B a s i c p h o t o g r a p h y with e m p h a s i s on optical and c h e m i c a l principles a n d the p r o c e s s c o p y c a m e r a , to prepare students for G r a p h i c A r t s 1 in the S p r i n g term. Instruction in 3 5 m m camera operation as an assist in graphic design and illustration. Art 176 Photography for Visual Communication (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 175. Instruction in t e c h n i q u e s a n d p r o c e d u r e s for creative p h o t o illustration, a d v a n c e d d a r k r o o m t e c h n i q u e s for black a n d white film, a n d the effective e x p o s u r e of c o l o u r film. 64 Art 177 Graphic Design I (F) (3,3,1) Art 184 Life Drawing II (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to d e s i g n elements (shape, line, value, texture, colour) to demonstrate the versatility a n d a p p l i c a t i o n of e a c h E x e r c i s e s to d e v e l o p a s o u n d g r a s p of design p r i n c i ples a n d to e n c o u r a g e experiment a n d d i s c o v e r y as well as how these elements work in c o m b i n a t i o n . M e d i a will include pencil, paint, c o l l a g e materials a n d m i x e d m e d i a . Prerequisite: Art 152. Art 178 Design II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 158. Further study of d e s i g n p r i n c i p l e s , pictorial o r g a n i z a t i o n , characteristics of visual form a n d m e d i a Extensive study of form and c o l o u r c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s as a m e a n s of e x p r e s s i o n a n d c o m m u n i c a t i o n of m o o d s , attitudes a n d a s s o c i a t i o n s derived from nonvisual e x p e r i e n c e s . S t u d y of form s y m b o l i s m a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y society. Introduction to t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l space a n d form. E x p e r i m e n t s with various materials a n d exploration of the principles of d e s i g n as a p p l i e d to crafts, fine a n d a p p l i e d arts. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 179 Graphic Design II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 177. Further study of d e s i g n p r i n c i p l e s , pictorial o r g a n i z a t i o n , characteristics of visual form. C o m b i n i n g d e s i g n elements of the previous semester with the new elements of t y p o g r a p h y a n d photography. M e d i a will i n c l u d e a wide variety of materials a n d an experimental a n d inventive a p p r o a c h will be stressed. Further study of d r a w i n g from the direct observation of the h u m a n figure. E x e r c i s e s in p e r c e i v i n g a n d g r a p h i c a l l y interpreting the elements of plane, m a s s rhythm a n d form; relating perceptual elements to d r a w i n g m e d i a . R e p o r t a g e of visual, e x p e r i e n c e a n d g r a p h i c interpretation of personal attitudes. Investigation of more c o m p l e x d r a w i n g t e c h n i q u e s a n d materials. P e r c e i v i n g g r a p h i c elements in life form a n d a c t i o n ; d r a w i n g from m e m o r y a n d imaginative reflection u p o n visual e x p e r i e n c e . Student's individual experimentation with d r a w i n g materials related to effects a i m e d at. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 tranfer S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . units to the B . F . A . Tranferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 185 Design C o n c e p t s I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to b a s i c d e s i g n principles a n d the p r o c e s s e s t h r o u g h w h i c h ideas m a y be translated into effective visual imagery T o p i c s will i n c l u d e b a s i c c o l o u r theory, m a n i p u l a t i o n of d e s i g n elements to create visual unity, s o u r c e s of imagery, stylization a n d a b s t r a c t i o n , e x p l o i tation of m e d i a c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , e n r i c h i n g f o r m - v o c a b u l a r y and the development of personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n . Art 189 Design C o n c e p t s II (S) (3,3,1) A continuation of Art 185 with added emphasis on problemsolving a n d personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n S o m e further exploration of t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l c o n c e r n s . A n extension of c o l o u r theories into subjective h a n d l i n g . D e s i g n i n g for s p e c i f i c p r o c e s s e s or functions. Further exploration of the design p r o c e s s , as it applies to a variety of media, techniques and d i s c i p l i n e s . A t the c o n c l u s i o n of this c o u r s e students will possess a resource s k e t c h b o o k containing material for further exploitation on an individual basis. Art 182 Printmaking I (F) (3,0,1) A f o u n d a t i o n c o u r s e for those with little or no e x p e r i e n c e . A n introduction to the basic t e c h n i q u e s of h a r d g r o u n d , softg r o u n d , drypoint a n d aquatint. L i n o , w o o d , relief and m o n o prints. M o s t work will be p r o d u c e d in black a n d white, with s o m e d i s c u s s i o n of the u s e of c o l o u r e d inks. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 183 Printmaking II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Art 182 with e m p h a s i s o n the study of black a n d white a n d c o l o u r printing methods. Study of ink formulation a n d g r i n d i n g s i n g l e a n d multiple plates and the c o l l o g r a p h . D i s c u s s i o n of h i s t o r i c a l a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y a p p r o a c h e s to i m a g e - m a k i n g will be o n g o i n g Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . 65 Art 190 Spinning a n d Dyeing (F) (3,0,1) Art 217 A d v a n c e d Editioning - Intaglio a n d Relief II A c o u r s e in using different methods of p r o d u c i n g yarn from a wide variety of fibres. E m p h a s i s o n the ability to d y e yarn as well as the u s e of c o l o u r a n d texture in textile production. (S) (3,0,1) Art 192 Applied Design I (F) (3,3,1) A n introduction to visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n a n d the role of professional designers. D e s i g n principles, layout t e c h n i q u e s , learning tools, methods, materials a n d m e d i a . E m p h a s i s will be o n c o n c e p t rather than o n " c o m p r e h e n s i v e " finish. A d m i s s i o n by instructor. Essentially a c o n t i n u a t i o n of Art 216, this c o u r s e will c o n c e n t r a t e o n the n e e d s of the individual w h o w i s h e s t o d e v e l o p personal e d i t i o n i n g p r o c e d u r e s a n d bridge the g a p between the student-artist a n d the exhibiting-artist. T h e practical problems of establishing a relationship with a gallery and putting o n a o n e - m a n s h o w will be d i s c u s s e d , as will other methods of g a i n i n g recognition by appropriate a g e n c i e s . It is anticipated that practising artists a n d gallery p e r s o n n e l will appear as guest speakers. Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 193 A p p l i e d Design II (S) (3,3,1) Art 250 Painting III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: A r t 177 a n d A r t 192. Prerequisite: A r t 172. A c o u r s e in t e c h n i q u e s relating to presentation of ideas at a p r o f e s s i o n a l level. M a k i n g rough layouts a n d tight c o m p s . Ideas evaluated against criteria established. Art 204 A d v a n c e d Stone Carving I (F) (3,3,1) A d m i s s i o n by instructor. A study of traditional a n d c o n t e m p o r a r y a p p r o a c h e s to stone c a r v i n g i n c l u d i n g e x p e r i e n c e with h a n d tools, a i r p o w e r e d c a r v i n g g u n s a n d grinders, and electrical tools. T h e investigation of personal m o d e s of e x p r e s s i o n as related to the stone c a r v i n g p r o c e s s E m p h a s i s on t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l d e s i g n c o n c e p t s , the efficient u s e of tools, materials a n d equipment. Students will be required to p u r c h a s e their marble from the c o l l e g e . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C . Art 206 Foundry s Practice I (S) (3,3,1) A d m i s s i o n by Instructor. E x p e r i e n c e in the use of the lost w a x m e t h o d of c a s t i n g u s i n g c e r a m i c shell molds. Information for d e s i g n i n g a n d o p e r a t i n g a s m a l l f o u n d r y suitable for c a s t i n g p i e c e s in a l u m i n u m a n d / o r bronze. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U . S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to be self-motivated a n d to develop towards a personal style. T h e investigation of painting m e d i a o n the basis of student interest a n d preference. S p o n taneous a n d s u s t a i n e d a p p r o a c h e s to a variety of themes derived from nature, objects a n d the imagination. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d be prepared to b e c o m e involved in o c c a s i o n a l g r o u p or set projects. Investigation of materials, c o l o u r , p r o b l e m s of pictorial structure a n d c o m p o s i t i o n , the art of the past a n d present. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 251 Illustration Media (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 164, Art 184. T o introduce the student w h o has a c h i e v e d a c o m p e t e n t d e g r e e of d r a w i n g skills to the m e d i u m s n e c e s s a r y to illustrative t e c h n i q u e s . T h e c o u r s e d e v e l o p s t h r o u g h stages from p e n c i l , pen & ink, ink & w a s h , water c o l o u r s a n d eel v i n y l . T h e use of the illustrator's tools a n d p r o c e s s e s s u c h as repellants, air b r u s h , m i x e d m e d i a , etc., a r e reviewed. Art 252 A p p l i e d Design III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 179 a n d Art 193. A d v a n c e d Editioning - Intaglio a n d Relief I (F) (3,0,1) A d m i s s i o n by instructor. D e s i g n e d to meet the n e e d s of the student/artist w h o , a l t h o u g h trained as a n image maker, has not matured as a printmaker o w i n g t o lack of a c c e s s t o suitable e q u i p m e n t , facilities a n d g u i d a n c e . T h e student will develop p r o c e d u r e s arising from individual needs, e n a b l i n g the p r o d u c t i o n of finished editions of prints a n d an e x p a n s i o n of k n o w l e d g e with respect to the intaglio p r o c e s s . E x t e n d e d studio time will be a feature of this c o u r s e . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . T h e a p p l i c a t i o n of d e s i g n a n d rendering skills to the d e v e l o p m e n t of s o l u t i o n s to print advertising. E x p l o r e s c o m p a n i e s , p r o d u c t s , services, c o r p o r a t e identification a n d their relationship to print advertising layouts a n d tight c o m p s prepared for class critiques. Art 253 A p p l i e d Design IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 252. A d v e r t i s i n g a g e n c y oriented. T h e interweaving of illustration, p h o t o g r a p h y , g r a p h i c s a n d television into a d v e r t i s i n g , p a c k a g i n g , a n d point of p u r c h a s e . C o n s u l t a t i o n o n student portfolio. _ 66 Art 255 Painting IV (S) (3,0,1) Art 265 Sculture IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 250. Prerequisite: Art 257. Further study and practice of painting in the m e d i u m of the student's individual c h o i c e . S u s t a i n e d development of ideas a n d themes through s k e t c h b o o k s : n o t e b o o k s , studies, etc. D i s c u s s i o n will take p l a c e o n a o n e - t o - o n e tutorial basis. M o d e l s will be available for nude and c o s t u m e painting. C o n t i n u i n g investigation of c o n t e m p o r a r y art a n d materials (as well as talks on artists from the past a n d present). S t u d i o and gallery visits A d v a n c e d p r o b l e m s in sculptural forms. S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to experiment in the m e d i a of their c h o i c e and to d e v e l o p their individual style. F i e l d trips to galleries a n d , w h e n p o s s i b l e , to s c u l p t o r s ' studios. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 257 Sculpture III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 174. A study of c l a s s i c a l a n d m o d e r n sculpture: the investigation of m o d e r n sculpture forms t h r o u g h the student's work; experimentation and work in several media; metal, plastics, w o o d , c l o t h , paper, stone a n d those p r o d u c i n g both soft and hard t h r e e - d i m e n s i o n a l forms and c o n s t r u c t i o n s . Introduction to basic foundry techniques i n c l u d i n g b r o n z e casting Introduction to marble carving using h a n d a n d power tools. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F A S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C a n d S F U . Art 262 Drawing III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 184 Life d r a w i n g with e m p h a s i s on an interpretive a n d creative a p p r o a c h , study in depth of d r a w i n g t e c h n i q u e s a n d styles in reference to c o n t e m p o r a r y trends in fine a p p l i e d arts. Further e x p l o r a t i o n of g r a p h i c e l e m e n t s derived from observation of the h u m a n body, action a n d character to e x p a n d perception a n d c o n t r o l of different m e d i a in o r d e r to d e v e l o p a personal style in d r a w i n g Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U and U B C . Art 263 Drawing IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 262. Further study a n d p r a c t i c e of interpretive a n d creative life d r a w i n g , i n c l u d i n g stylization a n d abstraction of h u m a n form; design element in figurative d r a w i n g , e x p e r i m e n t s with d r a w i n g media. Individual a n d c l a s s c r i t i c i s m s , d i s c u s s i o n s and demonstrations regarding t e c h n i q u e s a n d e x p e r i m e n t a tion with materials to b r o a d e n the individual's use of a wide range of materials. S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to be selfmotivated a n d d e v e l o p a p e r s o n a l style or direction in their work. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C Transferable to S F U and U B C Note: This c o u r s e carries 1 5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 267 Weaving III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 169 A d v a n c e d l o o m t e c h n i q u e s : d o u b l e weave, M o o r m a n technique, rug weaves, Ikat. E x p l o r a t i o n s of the t e c h n i q u e s with i n c r e a s i n g e m p h a s i s o n c r a f t s m a n s h i p a n d design in order to create w a l l h a n g i n g s . S t u d y of c o n t e m p o r a r y work in B.C. and abroad Art 268 Weaving IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 267 S t u d y of the evolution of n o n - l o o m p r o c e s s e s . C r e a t i n g , fibrestructures with a variety of t e c h n i q u e s : c o i l i n g , c r o c h e t , plaiting, basketry and S p r a n g . E m p h a s i s will be o n threed i m e n s i o n a l design c o n c e p t s . Field trips to weaver studios, art galleries a n d potential work situations. Art 269 Experimental Illustration I (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 251. T a k i n g the t e c h n i q u e s outlined in 251 into finished illustrations for books, magazines, murals, etc. A further expansion of the use of m e d i u m s to include mixed media and oils. Art 270 Fabrics for Interiors (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 267, Art 284 or instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . A c o u r s e to develop the aesthetic and functional properties of textiles and b e c o m e knowledgeable of weave constructions to be able to p r o d u c e fabric for w i n d o w s , walls, furniture a n d floors. Art 271 Two-Dimensional Studies III (F) (3,6,1) A d d e d e m p h a s i s on personal c o n c e r n s and self-generated projects. In P r i n t m a k i n g there will be a c o n c e n t r a t i o n on the study of intaglio, relief printing, d i m e n s i o n a l prints, photog r a p h i c techniques, u n - i n k e d e m b o s s i n g , etc. S p o n t a n e o u s and sustained a p p r o a c h e s to a variety of thematic c o n c e r n s derived from a broad s p e c t r u m of visual a n d cerebral stimuli will be dealt with in painting as students embark on both individual and group projects. T h e weekly forum will continue. 67 Art 278 Graphic Arts II (F) (3,3,1) Art 272 Two-Dimensional Studies IV (S) (3,6,1) S t u d e n t s will be e x p e c t e d to participate in p l a n n i n g their o w n areas of c o n c e n t r a t i o n and there will be an i n c r e a s e d e m p h a s i s on c o n t e m p o r a r y c o n c e r n s as they exist locally, nationally and internationally. P r o b l e m s of c o p i n g with e x h i bitions, c o m p e t i t i o n s , d e a l e r s , galleries, etc. will be c o v e r e d and the weekly Forum will continue. M o r e a d v a n c e d c o n c e p t s and techniques will be investigated a c c o r d i n g to individual and group needs. , Art 273 Pottery III (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 170. S u p e r v i s e d e x p l o r a t i o n of g r a p h i c arts and printing t e c h n i q u e s a n d the a p p l i c a t i o n of these to real or s i m u l a t e d r e p r o d u c t i o n p r o b l e m s . C o n t a c t with o u t s i d e trades and suppliers in the c o u r s e of c o m p l e t i n g a s s i g n m e n t s . Art 279 Environmental Design II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 277. Prerequisite: Art 165. Further e x p l o r a t i o n of pottery t e c h n i q u e s , particularly w h e e l w o r k a n d g l a z e materials; study of c o n t e m p o r a r y styles a n d creative c e r a m i c s . F i e l d trips to c e r a m i c studios and art-galleries. For the duration of this s e c t i o n the student will work o n the d e s i g n of the interior of a s h o p plus m e t h o d s of presentation. T h e p s y c h o l o g y of c o l o u r in m e r c h a n d i s i n g will be c o v e r e d as well as the use of indoor s i g n i n g a n d i n s i g n i a for s h o p identification. D e s i g n e r - c l i e n t relationships will be d i s c u s s e d with m e t h o d s of presentation. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Art 280 Portfolio Studio (S) (3,3,1) Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Prerequisite: Art 252, Art 278. Art 274 Pottery IV (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 273. Increasing e m p h a s i s on c r a f t s m a n s h i p and d e s i g n An exploration of more c o m p l e x forms, mainly made on the S t u d e n t s will prepare portfolios a n d s a m p l e s for d i s p l a y as well as d e s i g n i n g a n d p r o d u c i n g s p e c i f i c items. Projects will be s e l e c t e d to capitalize o n the student's a c q u i r e d k n o w l e d g e a n d skills a n d will involve their c o n t a c t with outside agents and suppliers. T h e student will be r e s p o n s i b l e from initial c o n c e p t to finished product. wheel; development of original glazes. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C . Art 282 Printmaking III (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 183 or instructor's Art 275 Advanced Advertising Illustration (S) (3,0,1) A d m i s s i o n by Instructor. T a k i n g illustration b e y o n d the point of l o o k i n g , seeing and c o p y i n g , to interpretation, feeling, t h i n k i n g a n d p r o b l e m s o l v i n g A n initiation to d e a d l i n e s , b u d g e t s a n d restrictions. D e v e l o p i n g and f i n i s h i n g illustrations for advertising a n d decorative use. D e s i g n a n d a p p l i c a t i o n of illustrations with c o n s i d e r a t i o n for r e p r o d u c t i o n requirements. permission A c o m p r e h e n s i v e study of intaglio a n d relief printing methods, this c o u r s e is primarily d e s i g n e d for the a d v a n c e d e t c h i n g student. O t h e r areas that c o m e u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n will i n c l u d e d i m e n s i o n a l prints, p h o t o g r a p h i c t e c h n i q u e s , uninked e m b o s s i n g , etc. Note: This c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C Transferable to S F U and U B C . L i n e , black a n d white, limited a n d full c o l o u r . A l l m e d i a . Art 277 Environmental Design I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 164, Art 179. T h i s s e c t i o n is intended to give insight into the proc e d u r e s involved in the d e s i g n of small c o m m e r c i a l retail structures s u c h as boutiques and service s h o p s in s h o p p i n g centres a n d malls. M o d e l - b u i l d i n g t e c h n i q u e s are studied as well as the use of c o l o u r in m e r c h a n d i s i n g a n d display. D u r i n g this s e c t i o n the e m p h a s i s is on exterior d e s i g n . 68 Art 283 Printmaking IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Art 282 or instructor's p e r m i s s i o n . D e s i g n e d for the a d v a n c e d p r i n t m a k i n g student, the main c o n c e r n will be with c o m b i n a t i o n t e c h n i q u e s b a s e d u p o n the individual's needs. T h i s c o u r s e will a l s o h e l p familiarize the student with print e x h i b i t i o n s , c o m p e t i t i o n s , p r i n t m a k i n g societies, w o r k s h o p s , etc. Note: T h i s c o u r s e carries 1.5 transfer units to the B . F . A . S t u d i o P r o g r a m at U B C . Transferable to S F U a n d U B C Business Management Programs Art 284 Fabric Printing III (F) (3,0,1) E x p l a i n s repeat y a r d a g e s c r e e n printing t e c h n i q u e s , airbrush a n d stencil m e t h o d s a n d direct paint o n effects. P i g m e n t s , inks, fibre reactive d y e s a n d french a l c o h o l dye's and d i s p e r s e d y e s will b e u s e d . Art 285 Fabric Printing IV (S) (3,0,1) E x p l o r i n g p h o t o g r a p h i c s i l k - s c r e e n printing methods with film a n d direct e m u l s i o n . B r o w n printing a n d blue printing techniques will be used a n d three dimensional fabric construction explored. Art 295 Advertising Illustration I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: A r t 164, Art 184. A c o m p r e h e n s i v e study of c o n t e m p o r a r y illustration t e c h n i q u e s a n d materials f r o m original c o n c e p t to final presentation. Art 298 Advertising Illustration II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Art 295. Further exploration of illustration t e c h n i q u e s using a variety of m e d i u m s a n d t e c h n i q u e s with the e m p h a s i s o n actual s t u d i o w o r k i n g methods. Art 305 Production Pottery I (F) (3,3,1) (Open) A d m i s s i o n by instructor. T h i s c o u r s e gives students in-depth lectures o n studio management, business procedures, professional presentation, ordering supplies, equipment a n d materials. A n introduction to b o o k k e e p i n g , taxes, licenses, studio start-up p r o b l e m s a n d c o s t s . S t u d i o will give a d v a n c e d study of kitchenware, electric a n d g a s kiln glazes, p o r c e l a i n , s l a b a n d c o i l forms, murals and clay sculpture. A d v a n c e d kiln e x p e r i e n c e in firing m a i n t e n a n c e a n d repairing. ' D e p e n d e n t upon approval from the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n Art 306 Production Pottery II (S) (3,3,1) (Open) A d m i s s i o n by instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Art 305. S t u d i e s with the addition of co-op procedures, pricing, c o m m i s s i o n projects, sales through craft fairs, stores a n d studios. ' D e p e n d e n t u p o n approval from the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n Business Management Programs Instructional Faculty B a r b a z u k , W m , B . A , B . E d , T e a c h i n g Certificate (Sask.) B e r r i n g t o n , Terry. B u s . Mgmt. 1972 ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) Carter, A.W., B . S c . ( U . of A l t a ) , C & G Cert. (Engield T e c h College, London) Duzita, W , B . C o m m . (Brit C o l ) E n t i c k n a p p , S . L L.B ( S a s k ) , Pract. Cert. (Law S o c . of B C ) Fane, G r a h a m , D i p l . T e c h . ( A d m i n . M g m t . B . C . I T . ) , R.I.A. (Brit. Col.) 1978 Farrell, G , Dipl.T. (Fin. M g m t , B . C . I . T ) , M . B . C . ( G e n . B u s , S F U ) , R.I A . Flanders, A , B . C o m m . G o y e t t e , R o n , R.I.A. 1978 G r u e n , F , B . M . (Rensselaer P o l m I n s t ) , M . S c . (Waterloo) H o w a r d , B l a n c h e , B . S c . ( A l t a ) , C A . (Institute of C A . Canada) Kilian, C , B.A. ( C o l u m b i a ) , M.A. ( S F U ) K u b i c e k , R a m o n , B.A. ( C o n c o r d i a University) 1970 L a C o s t e , W . H . , D i p l o m a T e c h , ( B . C . I . T ) , R.I.A. Lees, Yetta, B.A. ( S F U ) 1970 LeFlufy, R . C . L o b l a w , J . D , B.A. (Toronto) M a c K a y , R . B , L L . B . (Alberta), B . C o m m . (Brit. C o l . ) M a n s f i e l d , L y n n e , B . A , B . S . W , M . S . W . (Brit. C o l . ) Marshall, J R . , D i p l o m a - O p e r a t i o n s Mgmt. (B.C.I.T. ), S y s t e m s A n a l y s i s & D e s i g n ( C o l l e g e of N e w C a l e d o n i a ) M c i n t o s h , C , B . C o m m , C . G . A . (Brit. C o l . ) M c K i e , C , B . C o m m . (Brit. C o l . ) , P r o . T e a c h i n g Certificate M e g g y , Margaret, B . A (Brit. C o l . ) 1970 M i c h a e l s , L , B . S c , B . E d , M . E d . (Alta.) Millar, David, B. C o m m . (Brit. Col.) 1973 M o s e l e y , B , B . A , M . B . A . (Calif.) N i c h o l s , R . C , B . C o m m . ( A l t a ) , R.I.A. N i x o n . P , B . S c . ( U . Vic.) Norris, Ft, C A . (Inst, of C A . ) - Oberndorf, A G , B.S. (U. of N e w Haven), M.I.M. (Thunderbird G r a d , S c h o o l of International B u s i n e s s ) O ' C o n n o r , R , B u s . A d m i n . Degree (Ryerson) Payne, M , B . A , M . S . (Tenn.) Pennie, Willene, M . E d . (Western Washington) 1975 Praill. T , Industrial Relations (Queen's University) Priester, C L , F . C . B . A . (Queen's). B.A. (Sir G e o r g e William), M.A. (Brit C o l . ) R e n n i e , R , B . S , M . S . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) , P h . D . (Brit C o l . ) Richter, M , B . A , B . E d . (Sask.) Sayre, J , B.S B.A. (Denver), M.A. (Boston) Siegrist, G a r y , M . B . A ( S F U ) S m y t h , W m , B . C o m m . (Dalhousie) Taylor, M , B . S c . (Alta.) Tordoff. Peter, M . S c . ( U . of N . S . W , Australia) T o w s o n , K.V., B . S c . ( S F U ) V a n N o r m a n , D L , B . A , M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) V i c k . A H , B . C o m m . (Brit. C o l . ) W i l s o n , R o b i n , B . C o m m . (Brit. Col.) 1973 Y a c k n e s s , H . B , B . C o m m . (Brit. C o l ) , M . B . A ( S F U ) , C A . General Information T h e p r o g r a m / c o u r s e offerings of this department attempt to satisfy the f o l l o w i n g needs: A. A recent H i g h S c h o o l graduate, p l a n n i n g a c a r e e r in b u s i n e s s / i n d u s t r y w h o desires a c o m p r e h e n s i v e b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n (2 years full-time). 69 B. A H i g h S c h o o l graduate with 4 - 6 years b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e w h o desires a theoretical a n d practical b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n (2 years part-time). C . P e r s o n s with a m i n i m u m of 7 years b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e in industry, government, the military or private b u s i n e s s ventures w h o desire a c o n c i s e formal b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n (10 month full-time). D. P e r s o n s presently e m p l o y e d in b u s i n e s s , w h o require additional formal b u s i n e s s e d u c a t i o n or u p g r a d i n g (parttime, day or evening). E. P e r s o n s wanting to take c o u r s e s that carry credit towards n o n - C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e certificate and d i p l o m a programs (part-time, day or evening). Marketing M a n a g e m e n t Program F. P e r s o n s interested in furthering their k n o w l e d g e in a This particular program prepares the student for a wide variety of c h a l l e n g i n g positions requiring s p e c i a l skills in s u c h fields as retailing, b u y i n g , advertising, s e l l i n g , and marketing research. particular area of b u s i n e s s (part-time, day or evening). These programs/courses provide you with a comprehensive e d u c a t i o n in basic managerial skills. T h e y have a practical foundation for those w h o wish to enter a career in b u s i n e s s or to e x p a n d their career in b u s i n e s s either as an independent entrepreneur or as a prospective e m p l o y e e - m a n a g e r . A more detailed d e s c r i p t i o n of the p r o g r a m s / c o u r s e s follows (refer to c o r r e s p o n d i n g section A - F), or c a n be obtained by c a l l ing the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department at 986-1911, local 389 Students interested in pursuing a University Transfer P r o g r a m in C o m m e r c e (for U B C or S F U ) s h o u l d refer to the C o m m e r c e h e a d i n g listed in the A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s section of the C a l e n d a r . A. T W O YEAR FULL TIME PROGRAMS beginning in S e p t e m b e r e a c h year: 1. 2. 3. 4. Accounting/Financial Management Program Marketing Management Program Computer Systems Management Program Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m T h e s e intensive p r o g r a m s require a m i n i m u m of 30 hours per week in class and 30 hours per week outside of class. B e c a u s e of the limited s p a c e in these p r o g r a m s , interested p e r s o n s s h o u l d apply by A p r i l 1st. Entry to these programs is b a s e d on high s c h o o l grades, business experience, maturity, interest a n d aptitude. A C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e D i p l o m a is awarded u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of the program requirements (96 credit hours) as outlined below. T h e student w h o e n r o l s in this program will, in the first, year, take c o u r s e s that will acquaint h i m / h e r with a b r o a d b a s e d u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the b u s i n e s s e n v i r o n m e n t . In the s e c o n d year of the p r o g r a m , the student c o n c e n t r a t e s on s u c h areas as R e t a i l i n g , E l e m e n t s of A d v e r t i s i n g Strategy, Marketing R e s e a r c h , M e r c h a n d i s i n g , International Marketing, and Marketing M a n a g e m e n t . Projects, c a s e p r o b l e m s , s p e c i a l a s s i g n m e n t s , a n d field trips are extensively used to stimulate the a p p l i c a t i o n of theory and principles, a n d to d e v e l o p analytical abilities to achieve greater o c c u p a t i o n a l c o m p e t e n c e . C o m p u t e r Systems Management P r o g r a m In N o r t h A m e r i c a , the n u m b e r of c o m p u t e r installations has g r o w n from about 2,000 in 1960 to 100,000 in 1970 to 400,000 in 1980 a n d a forecasted 1 million in 1985. T h i s rapid growth has produced a serious shortage of qualified computer p r o g r a m m e r s and systems analysts. In the 1960s c o m p u t e r s were available only to the larger businesses because of their high costs Developments in the last d e c a d e (including a dramatic d r o p in their cost) have brought c o m p u t e r capability to an e v e r - e x p a n d i n g c i r c l e of smaller organizations. O n e s u c h development has been the creation of efficient a n d low-cost m i n i c o m p u t e r s a n d m i c r o computers. In terms of number of installations, these computers now represent 85 per cent of the total. T h i s d e v e l o p m e n t has resulted in not only a greater d e m a n d for c o m p u t e r personnel but a l s o more versatile c o m p u t e r p e r s o n n e l . T h e s e small organizations cannot afford "specialists in e a c h segment of c o m p u t e r application. T h e y require a p e r s o n trained in c o m p u t e r operation, p r o g r a m m i n g , s y s t e m s a n a l y s i s , the a p p l i c a t i o n of c o m p u t e r s a n d an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of all m a n a g e m e n t objectives. T h i s two year program provides the student with the c o m p r e h e n s i v e training required to satisfy this new b u s i n e s s need. Administrative Management P r o g r a m A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l Management Program T h i s p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to provide the student with the opportunity to obtain a s o u n d u n d e r s t a n d i n g of a c c o u n t i n g principles and c o n c e p t s as well as other a s p e c t s of b u s i n e s s . T h e p r o g r a m prepares the student for a career in p u b l i c a c c o u n t i n g or financial management in c o m m e r c i a l , i n d u s trial or g o v e r n m e n t enterprises. T h e student c o n c e n t r a t e s in h i s / h e r s e c o n d year on c o u r s e s in financial m a n a g e m e n t s u c h as: C o s t A c c o u n t i n g , Financial Accounting, Taxation, Labour Relations and A u d i t i n g , A p p l i c a t i o n of p r i n c i p l e s and theories is stressed through the use of c a s e - m e t h o d a n d p r o b l e m - s o l v i n g t e c h n i q u e s . Further preparation for work in m a n a g e m e n t will be a c h i e v e d by d e v e l o p i n g the student's ability to a n a l y z e b u s i ness p r o b l e m s a n d to arrive at logical s o l u t i o n s . U p o n g r a d u ation the student has received (in addition to our Diploma) a p p r o x i m a t e l y 60% of the credits required towards a C . G . A . or R.I.A. d i p l o m a . 70 T h i s p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to provide the student with an opportunity to obtain a s o u n d u n d e r s t a n d i n g of all a s p e c t s of b u s i n e s s management. After c o m p l e t i n g a general o n e year p r o g r a m (identical to that of the F i n a n c i a l / A c c o u n t i n g M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m ) the student c o n c e n t r a t e s in h i s / h e r s e c o n d year on c o u r s e s s u c h as P e r s o n n e l M a n a g e m e n t , M a n a g e r i a l A c c o u n t i n g , L a b o u r R e l a t i o n s , B u s i n e s s Law, A d v a n c e d Data P r o c e s s i n g a n d S a l e s M a n a g e m e n t . F O R P R O G R A M D E T A I L S R E F E R T O C H A R T O N P A G E 71 B. T W O Y E A R P A R T - T I M E P R O G R A M S b e g i n n i n g in S e p t e m b e r a n d J a n u a r y e a c h year: 1. 2. 3. 4. Accounting/Financial Management Program Marketing Management Program Computer Systems Management Program Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m T h e s e p r o g r a m s require a m i n i m u m of 20 hours per week in c l a s s a n d 15 hours per week outside of c l a s s . A d e s c r i p - tion of these programs can be f o u n d above (in S e c t i o n A). T h e detailed c o u r s e requirements of these p r o g r a m s c a n be obtained by calling the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department B e c a u s e of the limited s p a c e in these programs, interested p e r s o n s s h o u l d apply by M a y 1st a n d D e c e m b e r 1st r e s p e c tively. Entry to these p r o g r a m s is b a s e d on high s c h o o l grades, b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e , maturity, interest a n d aptitude. A C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate is a w a r d e d u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of the program requirements C F U L L - T I M E B U S I N E S S A D M I N I S T R A T I O N (10 months) programs b e g i n n i n g in J u l y e a c h year. 1. A c c o u n t i n g / F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m 2. M a r k e t i n g M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m 3. Administrative M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m T h e unique feature of these programs is the credit given for military a n d civilian b u s i n e s s e x p e r i e n c e . In e s s e n c e , the a d v a n c e credit allows o n e direct entry into the final year of a B u s i n e s s A d m i n i s t r a t i o n program, resulting in a C a p i l a n o College Diploma upon successful completion. T h e s e p r o g r a m s require a m i n i m u m of 30 hours per week in c l a s s and 30 hours per week outside of class. A b r o c h u r e detailing the c o u r s e requirements of these p r o g r a m s c a n be obtained by c a l l i n g the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department. B e c a u s e of the limited s p a c e in these programs, interested p e r s o n s s h o u l d apply by M a r c h 1st. For eligible students, financial support is available f r o m C a n a d a M a n p o w e r a n d / o r the U n e m p l o y m e n t Insurance C o m m i s s i o n for these programs. Entry to these programs is based on b u s i n e s s e x p e r i ence, maturity, interest a n d aptitude A C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e D i p l o m a in B u s i n e s s A d m i n i s t r a t i o n is awarded u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of the p r o g r a m requirements (60 credit hours). D. P A R T - T I M E C E R T I F I C A T E P R O G R A M S S e p t e m b e r a n d J a n u a r y e a c h year: beginning in i. P r o v i d e s a practical e x p o s u r e to the B a s i c M a n a g e r i a l S k i l l s required in business. S t u d e n t s enroled in this program c o m p l e t e a series of eight c o u r s e s (two per term) over a two or three year period. While the particular s e q u e n c e of c o u r s e s is not rigid, the f o l l o w i n g s e q u e n c e is r e c o m m e n d e d : Term 1: B S M G 184: A c c o u n t i n g I B S M G 176: M a n a g e m e n t in Industry Term 2: B S M G 185: A c c o u n t i n g II B S M G 172: Administrative Practices and Organization Term 3: B S M G 163: Principles of Supervision and Leadership B S M G 150: B u s i n e s s M a t h e m a t i c s Term 4: B S M G 180: I n t r o d u c t i o n to D a t a P r o c e s s i n g B S M G 240: B u s i n e s s L a w I Satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of the above c o u r s e s will provide the student with a Certificate In Administrative Management (27 credit hours). ii. P r o v i d e s a p r a c t i c a l e x p o s u r e to t h e M a n a g e r i a l M a r k e t i n g S k i l l s required in operating a small b u s i n e s s . Students e n r o l e d in this p r o g r a m c o m p l e t e a series of twelve c o u r s e s (two per term) over a three or four year period. Term 1: B S M G 172: Administrative Practices and Organization B S M G 184: A c c o u n t i n g I Term 2: B S M G 185: A c c o u n t i n g II B S M G 160: B a s i c M a r k e t i n g Term 3: B S M G 210: S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t B S M G 163: P r i n c i p l e s of S u p e r v i s i o n Term 4: B S M G 180: Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g B S M G 240: B u s i n e s s L a w I Term 5: B S M G 260: F i n a n c e I B S M G 273: E l e m e n t s of A d v e r t i s i n g Strategy Term 6: B S M G 230: S a l e s m a n s h i p I B S M G 176: M a n a g e m e n t in Industry Satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of the above c o u r s e s will provide the student with a Certificate in Small Business Management (39 credit hours). Persons interested in either of these two part-time programs s h o u l d call the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department by A u g u s t 1st a n d D e c e m b e r 1st respectively. E We offer c o u r s e s w h i c h carry credit towards n o n - C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e certificates a n d d i p l o m a p r o g r a m s b e g i n n i n g in S e p t e m b e r a n d J a n u a r y e a c h year. T h o s e professional areas currently r e c o g n i z i n g c o u r s e s taken at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e are: - Chartered Accountant ( C A . ) - Certified G e n e r a l A c c o u n t a n t ( C . G . A . ) - S o c i e t y of M a n a g e m e n t A c c o u n t a n t s (R.I.A.) - Institute of C h a r t e r e d Secretaries a n d Administrators - Certificate in M u n i c i p a l A d m i n i s t r a t i o n - A s s o c i a t e of the Trust C o m p a n i e s Institute (A.T.C.I.) P e r s o n s interested in transfer credit c o u r s e s s h o u l d call the Business Management Department for further information. F. P e r s o n s interested in furthering their k n o w l e d g e in a particular area of b u s i n e s s s h o u l d c a l l the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t Department for a list of the c o u r s e offerings for S e p t e m b e r and J a n u a r y e a c h year 71 A. TWO YEAR FULL-TIME P R O G R A M S CREDIT HOURS MARKETING MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING/ FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT FIRST T E R M (FALL) Business Management Business Management Business Management Business Management 150 158 160 170 Business Management Business Management Business Management Business Management 172 175 180 182 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 S E C O N D T E R M (SPRING) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 151 Business Management Business Management Business Management Business Management Business Management Business Management 159 171 176 180 181 182 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 185 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 151 E c o n o m i c s 200 L A P 201 . THIRD T E R M (FALL) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 220 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 221 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 230 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 240 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 260 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 263 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 264 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 267 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 271 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 273 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 275 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 284 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 293 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 295 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 297 E c o n o m i c s 201 FOURTH T E R M (SPRING) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 211 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 230 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 232 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 241 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 253 Business Management Business Management Business Management Business Management 256 261 265 274 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 276 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 277 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 278 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 279 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 280 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 285 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 294 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 296 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 298 Business Mathematics Marketing I Basic Marketing Mathematics o f Business & Finance I n t r o d u c t i o n to B u s i n e s s I Organizational Behaviour ,. Introduction to Data P r o c e s s i n g . Systems Analysis and Application I Accounting I Communications Statistical Analysis and Application M a r k e t i n g II Applied Business Statistics I n t r o d u c t i o n to B u s i n e s s II Introduction to D a t a P r o c e s s i n g " B A S I C " P r o g r a m m i n g II Systems Analysis and A p p l i c a t i o n II R P G II" P r o g r a m m i n g I A c c o u n t i n g If Business Writing P r i n c i p l e s of M a c r o Economic Theory Reading Dynamics Business Readiness Consumer Behaviour Salesmanship I Business Law I Financial Accounting I Finance I A d v a n c e d Data P r o c e s s i n g Cost and Managerial Accounting General Business Finance Merchandising I Advertising I Marketing Research Taxation I "COBOL"' Programming I Systems Analysis and A p p l i c a t i o n II " B A S I C P r o g r a m m i n g III " R P G II" P r o g r a m m i n g II P r i n c i p l e s of M i c r o Economic Theory Corporation and Society Salesmanship I Transportation and Distribution B u s i n e s s L a w II M a n a g e m e n t R e s p o n s i b i l i t y in Labour Relations F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g II F i n a n c e II Quantitative M e t h o d s Cost and Managerial A c c o u n t i n g II '. Marketing Management International M a r k e t i n g Sales Management A d v e r t i s i n g II Auditing T a x a t i o n II " C O B O L " P r o g r a m m i n g II M a n a g e m e n t Information Systems Data S y s t e m s M a n a g e m e n t COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT ADMINISTRATIVE MANAGEMENT — 3 — ... ... ... — 3 — ... ... ... 3 — 3 ... ... ... — 3 — 4% 3 3 — .... ... ... ... 4'h 3 3 — ... ... ... ... — 3 3 3 ... ... ... ... 4% 3 3 3 3 4'/? 3 24 ... ... ... 3 4% 3 24 ... ... ... 3 4% 3 25% ... ... ... — 4% 3 24 — 3 Vh 3 3 — ... ... ... ... ... ... — 3 Vh 3 3 — ... ... ... ... ... ... 4% — — 3 — 3 ... ... ... .... ... .«.. — 3 Vh 3 — — — — Vh 3 ... ... ... ... — — Vh 3 .. ... ... ... — 6 4'h 3 ... ... ... ... 3 — 4'h 3 3 Vh 2 5VJ ... ... 3 Vh 25% ... ... — Vh 25% ... ... 3 Vh 25% 1% Vh 3 3 — — — ... , ... ... ... ... ... ... Vh — 3 3 3 3 ... ... ... ... ... -... ... Vh — — — — 3 3 — 3 3 3 3 — — ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4% — — — — 3 — ... ... ... ... ... ... ... — — — — 3 — 6 — — — ... ... ... — — — ... ... ... 3 3 3 3 24 ... 3 24 ... — 25% i 1% — ... ... 1%— ... ... — 3 3 3 ... ... — 3 ... ... — — 3 ... ... ... ... — — — 3 3 ... ... ... ... — 3 3 3 3 -*— — ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 — — — — 3 3 — ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... — — — — — — — 6 ' — — 22% ... ... — — 22% ... ... 4% 3 19% — 3 — — 3 — , ' C o u r s e l o a d is d e f i n e d in c o n s u l t a t i o n w i t h c o o r d i n a t o r . F o r d e s c r i p t i o n s of r e q u i r e d c o u r s e s , other than B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t , p l e a s e c o n s u l t the a p p r o p r i a t e s e c t i o n of the C a l e n d a r 72 Business Management Courses B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 150 B u s i n e s s Mathematics ( F , S , S U ) (3,0,1) M a t h e m a t i c a l t o p i c s i n c l u d i n g : basic n u m b e r theory; sets, relations, a n d functions; linear a l g e b r a a n d matrix o p e r a tions; algorithmic methods, numeric analysis a n d financial mathematics. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 151 Statistical A n a l y s i s a n d A p p l i c a t i o n B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 164 Retail Mathematics (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e provides a pratical k n o w l e d g e of the mathematical methods utilized in retail operations. S t u d e n t s will d e v e l o p the ability to efficiently solve various types of p r o b l e m s relevant t o retailing. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 165 Essentials of B o o k k e e p i n g I ( F , S U ) (3,0,1) T h e theory a n d a p p l i c a t i o n of statistics a s it a p p l i e s to b u s i n e s s i n c l u d i n g : data p r e s e n t a t i o n a n d d e s c r i p t i o n ; probability theory a n d distributions; tests of h y p o t h e s i s ; a n d predictive a n d analytic t e c h n i q u e s . A n introductory course designed to cover basic terminology, t e c h n i q u e s a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of a c c o u n t i n g , i n c l u d i n g the theory a n d practice of k e e p i n g adequate records; use of special journals; controlling a c c o u n t s a n d subsidiary ledgers; periodic adjustments, c l o s i n g p r o c e d u r e s a n d preparation of financial statements. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 166 Marketing I (F,S) (3,0,1) Introduction T o B u s i n e s s Mathematics A n introduction to the C a n a d i a n marketing environment a n d marketing institutions A detailed study to e n a b l e the student to u n d e r s t a n d the realistic, p r a c t i c a l w o r k i n g s a n d functions of product p l a n n i n g , p r o m o t i o n , market r e s e a r c h , s e l e c t i o n of trade c h a n n e l s , m e r c h a n d i s i n g , advertising a n d salesmanship with e m p h a s i s o n both c o n s u m e r a n d industrial g o o d s a n d services. ( S U ) (3,0,1) (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 159 Marketing II (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158: M a r k e t i n g I or b y p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . T h i s c o u r s e is a c o n t i n u a t i o n of M a r k e t i n g I. It is intended to a d d more depth to the basic marketing k n o w l e d g e a n d e x p a n d o n the overall use of the marketing c o n c e p t in today's competitive environment. F i e l d trips a n d student projects will form part of t h e content of this c o u r s e . T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to assist students in d e v e l o p i n g the b a s i c skills a n d c o n c e p t s of quantitative a n a l y s i s relating to b u s i n e s s a n d personal finance. T o p i c s c o v e r e d include: P r o b l e m a n a l y s i s , elementary a l g e b r a , basic arithmetic a n d mathematics, a n d c a l c u l a t o r o p e r a t i o n . * B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 169 A c c o u n t i n g F u n d a m e n t a l s (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e d i s c u s s e s the w a y s in w h i c h a c c o u n t i n g systems are d e v e l o p e d a n d applied to retailing b u s i n e s s e s . In addition, the techniques used to apply a c c o u n t i n g information to m a n a g e m e n t d e c i s i o n s a r e t h o r o u g h l y c o v e r e d B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 170 Mathematics of B u s i n e s s a n d F i n a n c e (F) (4.5,0,1.5) B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 160 B a s i c Marketing (F,S) (3,0,1) Familiarization with a l l the basic C a n a d i a n marketing c o n c e p t s a n d their roles within the total C a n a d i a n e c o n o m y a n d the individual firm. E m p h a s i s will be o n c o n s u m e r product marketing, a l t h o u g h s o m e industrial marketing c o n c e p t s will b e d i s c u s s e d . S t u d e n t s will b e e n c o u r a g e d to actively participate in g r o u p a n d c l a s s d i s c u s s i o n s o n marketing p r o b l e m s a n d opportunities related to product p l a n n i n g , r e s e a r c h , p l a n n i n g , p r o m o t i o n a n d distribution s y s t e m s . M e r c h a n d i z i n g , advertising a n d s a l e s m a n s h i p will a l s o be i n c l u d e d in the overview of the marketing p r i n c i p l e s and their practical a p p r o a c h . A review of fundamental algebraic operations; ratios, p r o p o r t i o n s a n d percent; m a t h e m a t i c s of m a n a g e r i a l p l a n ning; discounts, markups, margins, selling price, mark-downs; simple interest, c o m p o u n d interest, d i s c o u n t i n g negotiable instruments, installment p u r c h a s e s ; annuities, s i n k i n g funds, amortization tables; d e p r e c i a t i o n ; investment b o n d s . B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 171 A p p l i e d B u s i n e s s Statistics (S) (4.5,0,1.5) An index examination numbers; of f r e q u e n c y probability, distributions, linear correlation averages, reliability and s a m p l i n g . Transferable to U.Vic. B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 163 B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172 P r i n c i p l e s of S u p e r v i s i o n a n d L e a d e r s h i p Introduction to B u s i n e s s I (F,S) (3,0,1) (F,S) (3,0,1) S t u d y of h u m a n elements in o r g a n i z a t i o n s , with e m p h a s i s on group behaviour C o n c e p t s in persuasion, g u i d a n c e a n d understanding of t h e individual within the g r o u p . A p p l i c a tions of h u m a n relations m a n a g e m e n t , i.e. leadership, power, authority, g r o u p d y n a m i c s , formal a n d informal organization, c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , conflict a n d the introduction of c h a n g e . A n introduction to the b a s i c nature of b u s i n e s s p r o b l e m s a n d to the administrative p r o c e s s involved i n h a n d l i n g them. S t u d y a n d d i s c u s s i o n of actual b u s i n e s s situations selected to illustrate typical p r o b l e m s met in industry requiring managerial analysis, decision a n d action T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C , Business Management 173 Organizational Communications (F) (3,0,1) This course provides a basic understanding of organizational c o m m u n i c a t i o n Continuity of ideas a n d content is provided by starting with the individual c o m m u n i c a t i o n process and then expanding through the two-person relationships to g r o u p s a n d finally to the total organizational level Business Management 175 Organizational Behaviour (F.S) (3,0,1) T h e f o c u s of this c o u r s e is on h u m a n behaviour within organizations. Students will actively participate in role playing a n d other simulated activities dealing with organizational a n d personal factors that influence different types of work behaviour, specific topics s u c h as motivation, leadership, c h a n g e within organization, a n d formal a n d informal organizations will be e x p l o r e d . Business Management 176 Introduction to Business II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172, or by p e r m i s s i o n of the Instructor a n d / o r C o o r d i n a t o r . written Business Management 182 Systems Analysis & Application I (F,S) (3,0,1) P r o v i d e s a b a s i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of s y s t e m c o n c e p t s i n c l u d i n g the life-cycle a n d the c o n c e p t of a b u s i n e s s as an information s y s t e m . Introduces the skills that are the w o r k i n g tools of s y s t e m s a n a l y s i s i n c l u d i n g form d e s i g n , c o d i n g , charting, f l o w c h a r t i n g a n d written verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n . P r o v i d e s detailed u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the four l i f e - c y c l e p h a s e s (Study, D e s i g n , D e v e l o p m e n t a n d Operation) t h r o u g h their a p p l i c a t i o n in a detailed c o n t i n u o u s c a s e study. P r o v i d e s an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the logical a p p r o a c h to s o l v i n g a p r o b l e m Business Management 183 " R P G II" Programming I (S) (6,0,2) This course provides the student with a practical training in the a p p l i c a t i o n of the R P G II p r o g r a m m i n g l a n g u a g e to solve b u s i n e s s problems. A r e a s of study i n c l u d e p r o g r a m m i n g fundamentals, c o m p i l a t i o n , d e s k - c h e c k i n g , d e b u g g i n g a n d b a s i c R P G II p r o g r a m m i n g c o n c e p t s as well as multi-file p r o c e s s i n g , c o n t r o l breaks, internal s u b - r o u t i n e s , a n d table a n d array handling. Business Management 184 Accounting I (F.S) (4.5,0,1.5) A n orientation to the nature of b u s i n e s s in the private enterprise system, with e m p h a s i s on the role and interaction of the three levels of government with b u s i n e s s ; the role of financial intermediaries and the C a p i t a l Market in influencing the behaviour of firms; a n d the financial functions of management A n introduction to b a s i c a c c o u n t i n g p r i n c i p l e s a n d p r o c e d u r e s i n c l u d i n g the r e c o r d i n g of transactions, a n d adjustments in basic a c c o u n t i n g r e c o r d s . T h e student will prepare financial statements for the p r o p r i e t o r s h i p a n d will study, in detail, the accounting and reporting of cash, accounts receivable, m e r c h a n d i s e inventory a n d l o n g - l i v e d assets. Note: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 172 a n d B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 175 taken together receive 3 semester hours credits in C o m m e r c e at S F U . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U . V i c . U B C to be d e t e r m i n e d . Transferable to S F U a n d U.Vic. Business Management 180 Introduction to Data Processing (F,S) (3,0,1) Provides a basic understanding of important E D P concepts,, terminology a n d t e c h n i q u e s used in b u s i n e s s . P r o v i d e s a general orientation to the c o m p u t e r — what it is, how itfunctions, and what it c a n a n d cannot do. Provides an understanding of the " B A S I C P r o g r a m m i n g L a n g u a g e as it relates to the solution of p r o b l e m s a n d tasks in the mathematical and b u s i n e s s application areas. Transferable to U B C and U.Vic. Business Management 185 Accounting II (F.S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 or by p e r m i s s i o n of the C o o r d i n a t o r . A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184. A n a l y s i s of funds flows, both c a s h a n d w o r k i n g c a p i t a l . M a n a g e m e n t uses of a c c o u n t i n g ; c a s h b u d g e t i n g , f o r e c a s t i n g , profit p l a n n i n g , a n d responsibility a c c o u n t i n g . A c c o u n t i n g for m a n u f a c t u r i n g operations. N o t e : W h e n b o t h B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 a n d 185 are c o m p l e t e d , they receive 6 semester credit in C o m m e r c e at S F U a n d 1.5 hours credit for C o m m e r c e 151 a n d 1.5 u n a s s i g n e d C o m m e r c e credit at U B C . Transferable to S F U , U B C to be d e t e r m i n e d . Business Management 181 " B A S I C " Programming II (F,S) (3,0,1) P i e r e q u i s i t e : B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180 or by written permiss i o n of the Instructor or C o o r d i n a t o r . T h i s c o u r s e is an extension of B M 180 strengthening the student's k n o w l e d g e of p r o g r a m m i n g in the " B A S I C " prog r a m m i n g language to solve b u s i n e s s problems. A r e a s of study include: program flowcharts, p r o g r a m organization, table h a n d l i n g t e c h n i q u e s , file m a i n t e n a n c e , d i s k file o r g a n i z a t i o n s , a c c e s s methods, a n d p r o g r a m m i n g efficiently. 74 Business Management 187 Introduction to Business (F.S.SU) (3,0,1) (This c o u r s e is a c o n d e n s a t i o n of the theoretical a s p e c t s of B u s i n e s s Management 172 a n d B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 176.) In this c o u r s e the five key tasks in m a n a g i n g a n enterprise, i.e., P l a n n i n g , A q u i s i t i o n of R e s o u r c e s , O r g a n i z a t i o n , A c t i v a tion, a n d C o n t r o l are e x p l a i n e d In addition, the key o r g a n i z ational functions of M a r k e t i n g , P r o d u c t i o n , F i n a n c e and P e r s o n n e l are c o v e r e d . T h e c o u r s e is essentially an overview of the theoretical framework of the task m a n a g e m e n t . Business Management 210 Small Business Management (F.S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e offers students a s p e c i a l opportunity to d e v e l o p skills a n d c o n c e p t s in areas of " S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t " where they r e c o g n i z e s p e c i f i c , personal needs. T h e y will learn down-to-earth t e c h n i q u e s for d e a l i n g with many of the multiplicity of d e m a n d s placed upon the manager of a small b u s i n e s s . Further, there will be a significant opportunity for students to s h a p e the e m p h a s i s of this d y n a m i c set of m i n i - c o u r s e s After a three to four s e s s i o n survey of s u c h issues as S m a l l B u s i n e s s S u c c e s s a n d Failure, M e t h o d s a n d F o r m s of O r g a n i z a t i o n , P u r c h a s e of F r a n c h i s e s a n d G o i n g C o n c e r n s ; topical e m p h a s i s will be determined by the class. T o p i c s will be selected from the following areas: 1. C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 2. F i n a n c i a l M a n a g e m e n t for S m a l l B u s i n e s s 3. C a s h M a n a g e m e n t for S m a l l B u s i n e s s 4. B u d g e t s a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 5. Credit G r a n t i n g a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 6. Y o u r Bank M a n a g e r a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 7. T a x a t i o n for C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s 8. C o m m e r c i a l L a w for C a n a d i a n S m a l l B u s i n e s s 9. G o v e r n m e n t a n d the S m a l l B u s i n e s s 10. E l e c t r o n i c Data P r o c e s s i n g for the S m a l l B u s i n e s s Business Management 211 Corporation a n d Society (S) (1.5,0,1.5) T h i s c o u r s e e x p l o r e s the c o n t e m p o r a r y relationship between the c o r p o r a t i o n a n d s o c i e t y f r o m a managerial point of view. T h e major historical, political a n d s o c i o - e c o n o m i c f o r c e s u n d e r l y i n g this relationship are d i s c u s s e d . In addition, analytical m o d e l s are d e v e l o p e d to provide students with an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the s o c i a l c o s t s a n d c o n s e q u e n c e s of c o r p o r a t e management d e c i s i o n s . Business Management 220 Business Readiness (F) (1.5,0,1.5) T o instruct the student in a s u c c e s s f u l j o b search — s e l l i n g him/herself at the highest market value. T i m e is spent in d e v e l o p i n g a total marketing p a c k a g e i n c l u d i n g a resume, cover letter a n d interview t e c h n i q u e s . T i m e will be spent d i s c u s s i n g the trade off of salary vs. l o n g term career o b j e c tives a n d p o s s i b l e p r o m o t i o n s . T h e student will be held r e s p o n s i b l e for preparing a potential e m p l o y e r s list as well. Business M a n a g e m e n t 221 C o n s u m e r Behaviour (1.5,0,1.5) T h i s c o u r s e e x p l a i n s the basics of c o n s u m e r behaviour as it relates to c o n s u m e r purchases, attitudes and behavioural patterns both o n an individual basis as well as g r o u p patterns. A p p r o a c h e s J o c o n s u m e r research, s o c i a l s c i e n c e s a n d marketing d e c i s i o n making are also c o v e r e d . D i s c u s s i o n s pertaining to all a s p e c t s of c o n s u m e r d e c i s i o n s a n d related b u s i n e s s developments. Business M a n a g e m e n t 230 S a l e s m a n s h i p I (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to professional selling. C o m m u n i c a t i o n i n c l u d i n g effective listening, p r o b i n g , p r o b l e m finding a n d s o l v i n g a n d creativity will b e c o v e r e d . S p e c i f i c t e c h n i q u e s of p r o f e s s i o n a l s e l l i n g i n c l u d i n g p r o s p e c t i n g , qualifying a n d c o n t r a c t i n g prospects. T h e c o u r s e will a l s o cover, in depth, the organization a n d m a n a g e m e n t of sales activities. Business Management 231 M e r c h a n d i s i n g II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 271. A survey c o u r s e of widely ranging m e r c h a n d i s i n g t e c h niques a n d strategies covering many commodities. W h e r e p o s s i b l e extensive use of s u c c e s s f u l m e r c h a n d i s e r s as guest lecturers will be made. Business Management 232 Transportation a n d Distribution (S) (3,0,1) P r o v i d e s a b a s i c u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the C a n a d i a n T r a n s portation a n d Distribution s y s t e m a n d its role w i t h i n the total marketing c o n c e p t . V a r i o u s a s p e c t s of w a r e h o u s i n g , p r o d u c t p r o t e c t i o n , s e v e r i t y a n d c o s t e f f e c t i v e n e s s of Transportation a n d Distribution systems will be e m p h a s i z e d . Student projects, field trips a n d a u d i o v i s u a l presentations will be utilized as instructional methods. Business Management 233 Interactive Forecasting (F,S) (3,0,1) P r o v i d e s a b a c k g r o u n d for f o r e c a s t i n g within a n active market area. A r e a s of study i n c l u d e a d a y - t o - d a y u s e of business statistics, forecasting models in a lower mainland operating b u s i n e s s . Business Management 240 Business Law I (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will e m p h a s i z e the a p p l i c a t i o n of legal p r i n c i p l e s to b u s i n e s s relationships t h r o u g h the study of C o u r t d e c i s i o n s (case law), hypothetical fact situations, a n d legislation T h e areas of study to be particularly c o v e r e d are the L a w of C o n t r a c t , the S a l e of G o o d s A c t a n d C o n s u m e r Protection, Secured Transactions and Creditors Rights, and A g e n c y a n d Partnership. Business Management 241 Business Law II (F.S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will e m p h a s i z e the application of legal principles to b u s i n e s s relationships through the study of C o u r t d e c i s i o n s (case law) a n d respective legislation. T h e areas of study to be particularly c o v e r e d a r e the L a w of Partnership, C o m p a n y L a w a n d the B . C C o m p a n i e s A c t , Torts a n d Insurance, a n d Real Property. Business Management 253 Management Responsibility in L a b o u r Relations (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of management's responsibility a n d role in present day labour relations. T o p i c s - i n c l u d e history of u n i o n i s m , contemporary unionism, B.C. Labour C o d e and Collective Bargaining. 75 Business Management 255 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184/185 or by permission of the C o o r d i n a t o r . T h i s c o u r s e studies the theories u n d e r l y i n g financial statement presentations, a n d is a logical c o n t i n u a t i o n a n d reinforcement of the material covered in Business Management 184/185. T h e c o u r s e e n c o m p a s s e s the study of F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g at the intermediate level Transferable to S F U . Business Management 256 Financial A c c o u n t i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255. T h i s c o u r s e is a l o g i c a l s e q u e l to B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255 in that it studies current d e v e l o p m e n t s in financial a c c o u n t i n g a n d their effects o n financial statement p r e s e n tation. T h e c o u r s e e n c o m p a s s e s the study of F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g at a level b e y o n d B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 255. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U . Business Management 257 the Corporation a n d Society (S) (3,0,1) A study of the interaction of b u s i n e s s firms with societies of w h i c h they are a part; a n e x a m i n a t i o n of s o c i a l r e s p o n s i bility, legitimacy, a n d a c c o u n t a b i l i t y as related to profit making organizations; the firm's responsibility with consumers, shareholders, labour, the c o m m u n i t y a n d government. Transferable to S F U . Business Management 260 Finance I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184 a n d 185. B u s i n e s s risk a n d uncertainty. F i n a n c i a l m e a s u r e m e n t s , ratio analysis, a n n u a l r a t e of r e t u r n , n e t present value, internal rate of return; A n n u a l cost, p a y - b a c k period. A n t i c i p a t i n g financial needs of the firm. T a x c o n s i d e r a t i o n s C a s e studies c o v e r i n g financial p r o b l e m s will form a major part of this course. Business Management 261 Finance II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 260. A c q u i r i n g financial r e s o u r c e s , cost of capital, internal f i n a n c i n g , a l l o c a t i n g financial r e s o u r c e s within the firm, leverage a n d liquidity, a d m i n i s t e r i n g c i r c u l a t i n g capital, financial a s p e c t s of mergers and take-overs C a s e studies will form an integral part of this c o u r s e . Business Management 263 A d v a n c e d Data Processing (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180. T h i s c o u r e s is an e x t e n s i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180. A r e a s of study include the m e a s u r e m e n t s a n d c o s t s of r e s o u r c e s , the criteria for e s t a b l i s h i n g s p e c i f i c a t i o n s , the criteria for evaluating r e s o u r c e s , the r e s o u r c e s available o n the West C o a s t , installing a c o m p u t e r system and m a n a g i n g the c o m p u t e r s y s t e m . Business M a n a g e m e n t 264 C o s t a n d Managerial A c c o u n t i n g I (F) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 184/185 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the Instructor a n d / o r C o o r d i n a t o r . D e c i s i o n - m a k i n g a n d p l a n n i n g in o r g a n i z a t i o n s u s i n g a c c o u n t i n g tools. T h e nature of a c c o u n t i n g controls. C o m m o n c o n t r o l methods. M e a s u r e s of m a n a g e m e n t p e r f o r m a n c e . T h e role of the management cost a c c o u n t a n t Business Management 265 Quantitative Methods (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 170/171 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the Instructor a n d / o r C o o r d i n a t o r . Quantitative tools in use in modern management. Inventory m o d e l s , E O Q , buffer levels a n d lead times, project p l a n n i n g , P E R T , linear regression as a forecasting tool, linear p r o g r a m m i n g as an optimization t e c h n i q u e . Business M a n a g e m e n t 266 C a n a d i a n Financial Institutions a n d M o n e y Markets (F) (1.5,0,1.5) E x a m i n a t i o n of financial intermediaries a n d their role in the c o m m e r c i a l structure of society. M o n e y a n d capital markets a s a l l o c a t o r s of credit. A firm's a n d individual's a c c e s s to these resources. E x a m i n e structure of C a n a d i a n Monetary System. Business Management 267 G e n e r a l Business Finance (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 176. T h e c o u r s e will cover a practical a p p r o a c h to finance with marketing c o n s i d e r a t i o n s . T h e s c o p e a n d nature of financial management, risk/return tradeoffs, ratio a n a l y s i s , profit p l a n n i n g a n d control, financial n e e d s of firm, cost of capital, capital allocation a n d b u d g e t i n g , lease f i n a n c i n g , international financial m a n a g e m e n t , d e c i s i o n s of reorganization a n d bankruptcy. C a s e studies will form a n integral part of this c o u r s e . Business M a n a g e m e n t 270 Personnel M a n a g e m e n t (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will e x p l o r e m a n a g e m e n t skills d e v e l o p m e n t in the p e r s o n n e l field. H e a v y e m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d on p r o v i d i n g the student with practical tools a n d e x p e r i e n c e s in s u c h interviewing areas as recruitment, s e l e c t i o n , p l a c e ment of p e r s o n n e l , j o b d e s c r i p t i o n s a n d a n a l y s i s , training a n d p e r f o r m a n c e a p p r a i s a l , wage a n d salary a d m i n i s t r a t i o n , u n i o n m a n a g e m e n t relations, etc. Business M a n a g e m e n t 276 Marketing Management (S) (3,0,1) Business Management 271 Merchandising I (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will a c q u a i n t the student with a n overview of both retailing a n d m e r c h a n d i s i n g o p e r a t i o n s in today's competitive market. D i s c u s s i o n will c o v e r the types of retailing establishments, a n a l y s i s of a trading area, site location, store layout a n d d e s i g n , witti a n e m p h a s i s o n c h a n g i n g life-styles a n d c o n s u m e r d e m a n d patterns In a d d i tion, students will be exposed to a wide range of merchandising techniques a n d strategies c o v e r i n g many c o r p o r a t i o n s a n d c o m m o d i t i e s . T h e c o u r s e will i n c l u d e the u s e of guest lecturers, a n d field trips t o e m p h a s i z e the practical aspects of the subject. Business M a n a g e m e n t 272 C o n s u m e r Behaviour (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is to 1) a c q u a i n t the student with the b a s i c c o n c e p t s of c o n s u m e r behaviour, 2) e x p l a i n the interrelationship that exists between the important variables, 3) develop an understanding of consumer decision processes. More specifically the c o u r s e will a n a l y z e the f o u n d a t i o n for c o n s u m e r behaviour, the individual, the environmental influences o n c o n s u m e r s , b u s i n e s s effects, a n d c o n s u m e r purchase decisions. Business Management 273 Advertising I (F) (3,0,1) T o e x a m i n e the C a n a d i a n a n d A m e r i c a n advertising industry from both m i c r o a n d m a c r o perspectives. T o enable the student to grasp the b a s i c theoretical a n d practical a p p ' o a c h e s t o advertising. T o provide a n insight into the various a s p e c t s of advertising history, creativity, c o m m u n i cation s y s t e m s , media c h o i c e and other functions. T h i s is not a c o u r s e o n d e s i g n i n g , creating a n d preparing s p e c i f i c types of advertising, but is meant to serve a s a n overview of what advertising is a n d h o w it relates to other m a r k e t i n g c o n c e p t s and operations. Business Management 274 C o s t a n d Managerial A c c o u n t i n g Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158/159. T h i s c o u r s e i n t r o d u c e s the student to the a p p r o a c h e s a n d p r o b l e m s of the marketing m a n a g e m e n t d e c i s i o n m a k i n g under the influence of c o n t r o l l a b l e a n d u n c o n t r o l l a b l e conditions Marketing strategy and planning, buyer behaviour, distribution strategy, product strategy a n d integrated programs will be studied Business Management 277 International Marketing (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of the m e c h a n i c s of international trade, foreign e x c h a n g e rates, tariffs, e t c . P r o d u c t - d i s t r i b u t i o n - p r o m o t i o n mixes for export markets of C a n a d i a n industry with e m p h a s i s on P a c i f i c R i m a n d U . S . A . market influences. A d a p t i n g d o m e s t i c marketing t e c h n i q u e s to foreign c o n d i t i o n s . Business Management 278 Sales Management (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 230. T h e s c o p e of this c o u r s e i n c l u d e s all of the activities w h i c h the p e r s o n in c h a r g e of an outside sales force is likely to e n c o u n t e r . M o r e s p e c i f i c a l l y it c o v e r s s a l e s o r g a n i z a t i o n , operations, planning, analysis and evaluation, and salesmanship techniques. Business Management 279 Advertising II (3,0,1) A s a f o l l o w - u p to A d v e r t i s i n g I this c o u r s e will offer the students an opportunity to create and present a full advertising c a m p a i g n for an operating c o m p a n y . A team a p p r o a c h will be u s e d to create a n advertising a g e n c y environment with s u c h areas as research, creative media, a n d a c c o u n t supervision being studied and portrayed. W h i l e not a prerequisite, A d v e r t i s i n g I is r e c o m m e n d e d t o fully u n d e r s t a n d the c o u r s e content a n d p r o g r a m . Business Management 280 Auditing I (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Business M a n a g e m e n t 185, II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 265. A more indepth study of subjects c o v e r e d in B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 264 C o s t determination for m a n u f a c t u r i n g operations. P l a n n i n g and Cost Control Systems, Performance Evaluation M e t h o d s , Strategic D e c i s i o n M a k i n g M e t h o d s . T h i s c o u r s e covers auditing p r o c e d u r e s for intangibles, proprietorship, financial statement preparation, the audit report, legal r e q u i r e m e n t s , a u d i t p r o c e d u r e s for s m a l l b u s i n e s s e s , share capital a n d c h a n g e s in s u r p l u s . Business Management 282 Auditing II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 280 Business Management 275 Marketing Research (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 158. T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d a s an introductory c o u r s e in the b a s i c s of marketing research. It will indicate the methods of making the most effective use of marketing research. T h r o u g h s o m e practical a p p l i c a t i o n s of a r e s e a r c h project the student will learn the e l e m e n t s of r e s e a r c h d e s i g n , b a s i c m e t h o d s of c o l l e c t i n g data, analysis and reporting. T h e student will gain a k n o w l e d g e in the p r o c e d u r e s a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of C a n a d i a n and A m e r i c a n research. T h i s c o u r s e covers auditing p r o c e d u r e s for intangibles, proprietorship, financial statement preparation, the audit report, l e g a l r e q u i r e m e n t s , a u d i t p r o c e d u r e s for s m a l l b u s i n e s s e s , share capital a n d c h a n g e s in s u r p l u s . Business Management 284 Taxation I (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is the first part of a t w o part c o u r s e a n d is c o n c e r n e d with the c o m p u t a t i o n of i n c o m e , for tax p u r p o s e s , from the four basic i n c o m e s o u r c e s — e m p l o y m e n t , b u s i n e s s , investments a n d capital g a i n s Business Management 285 Taxation II (S) (3,0,1) - Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 284, T h i s c o u r s e c o n t i n u e s from the prerequisite c o u r s e . T a x a b l e i n c o m e is c o m p u t e d a n d the federal a n d provincial i n c o m e taxes are c a l c u l a t e d C o r p o r a t e s u r p l u s distributions, trusts a n d partnerships, international i n c o m e a n d administration are also e x a m i n e d . Business Management 291 "RPG II" Programming II (F) (6,0,2) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183. T h i s c o u r s e is a n e x t e n s i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183, strengthening the k n o w l e d g e of " R P G II". A r e a s of study include disk file o r g a n i z a t i o n s , a c c e s s methods, file m a i n tenance a n d m a t c h i n g record p r o c e s s i n g Business Management 292 " C O B O L " Programming I (F) (6,0,2) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 180. P r o v i d e s the student with a practical training in the organization and writing of programs in the C O B O L language. T o p i c s include: program organization, program flow-charts, program instructions, compilation, desk checking and debugging. Transferable to U.Vic. Business Management 293 Systems Analysis a n d Application II (F) (3,0,1) Business Management 296 Management Information Systems (S) (4.5,1,1.5) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292, 295; 293. This c o u r s e brings together the various computer c o n c e p t s that have been studied in the previous three semesters. It involves an indepth c o m p u t e r study of a c o m p a n y situation. T o p i c s include integrated information systems, integrated data b a s e s , c o n t r o l s , d i s t r i b u t e d p r o c e s s i n g , f e a s i b i l i t y studies, s y s t e m s development phases, a n d project m a n a g e ment c o n c e p t s . Business Management 297 "RPG II Programming II (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183. T h i s c o u r s e is an e x t e n s i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 183, strengthening the knowledge of R P G II Areas of study include disk file organizations, a c c e s s methods, file m a i n t e n a n c e a n d m a t c h i n g record p r o c e s s i n g . Business Management 298 Data Systems Management (S) (3,0,1) This course will focus on data structures and data management techniques with e m p h a s i s o n the practical a p p l i c a t i o n of data base m e t h o d o l o g y . T o p i c s will i n c l u d e data structure types, index-sequential a c c e s s methods and s u c h data base topics as elements of a data base, f u n c t i o n s of data base administration, data integrity, data security, data dictionaries, and Q u e r y facilities. D e s i g n c o n s i d e r a t i o n s will also be d i s c u s s e d a n d labs will concentrate o n creating a c c e s s i n g (both programatically a n d Query) a n d restructuring data bases. Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182 T h i s c o u r s e is an e x t e n s i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 182 furthering the student's ability to a n a l y z e the managerial requirements of information systems. It provides a practical e x p e r i e n c e in the detailed design of o n - l i n e s y s t e m s for b u s i n e s s a p p l i c a t i o n s . T o p i c s i n c l u d e on-line c o n c e p t s , security, audit c o n t r o l s , file management, s c r e e n design a n d system d o c u m e n t a t i o n . Business Management 294 " C O B O L " Programming II (S) (6,0,2) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292. T h i s c o u r s e is an e x t e n s i o n of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 292. strengthening the k n o w l e d g e of C O B O L . A r e a s of study include table h a n d l i n g t e c h n i q u e s , master file updates, file maintenance, p r o g r a m instructions related to disk file handling techniques and programming for efficient execution. Business Management 295 "BASIC" Programming III (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 181. T h i s c o u r s e is a n extension of B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t 181, strengthening the k n o w l e d g e of B A S I C . A r e a s of study i n c l u d e disk file organizations, s c r e e n formatting, a c c e s s methods, file maintenance a n d file reorganization. 78 nil Business Training and Career Development Instructional Faculty Baker, Leslie, L L . B . (Brit. C o l . ) , T e a c h i n g Cert. ( S F U ) Blaney, Diane, B E M , V i c t o r i a Brown, Wendy, Lab Supervisor B r o w n , W i l l i a m , R.A. Bury, N a n c y , B.A. (Brit. C o l . ) , A C I , B O T C o o r d i n a t o r Clark, D o r i s , L a b S u p e r v i s o r C r a g g , Marion, B.A. Law (Durham), T e a c h i n g Cert. (Brit. Col.), Coordinator, Legal Stenographer Program D u M o u l i n , A n t h o n y , B . A , L L . B (Brit. Col.) Firbank, L i n d a , B . A , P . B (Brit. C o l . ) Freund, Shirley, Division C h a i r p e r s o n Hammond, Donna K a s s a m , N u r d i n , L . L . M . (Yale) K i s s , A n d r e a , B . E d . (Brit. C o l . ) Kyle. Robert, B.A (Portland) Lees, Yetta. B . C . ( S F U ) Little, Diane, R.N. (St. Paul's), P . H . N . (Brit. Col.), C o o r d i n a t o r , M e d i c a l Office A s s i s t a n t P r o g r a m Ludgate, A n n e , I.D. (Brit. Col.) M a t h e w s , Patricia May, G a r y , B . A , L L . B . (Brit. Col.) M c C a n d l e s s , C a r o l , B.A. ( S F U ) , M.A. (Brit. Col.) McPhedran, Louise, Lab Supervisor Phillips, D o n n a Piekaar, M a u r e e n , B.A. ( S F U ) Plant, Lila, I.D. (Brit. Col.) Potts, F r a n , B . A , L L . B . (Brit. Col.) Richards, Valerie, B u s i n e s s Management Cert. (Regent Street P o l y t e c h n i c ) , Legal Assistant D i p l . ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) , C o o r d i n a t o r , Legal Assistant P r o g r a m Salusbury, Pamela S e w a r d , M a r y , B.S.A. (St. F r a n c i s Xavier A n t i g o n i s h , N.S.), B.Ed. (Halifax) Smart, L y n n , I.D. (Brit. C o l ) . Coordinator, Secretarial Program S m i t h , Betsy, B . A , Prof. T e a c h i n g Cert. (Brit Col.) S p i c e r , Beverly, S t a n d a r d T e a c h i n g Cert. (Brit. C o l ) S p i c e r , Larry, B . C o m m . , Prof. T e a c h i n g Cert. (Brit. Col.) Stewart, Walter, B.A. ( S F U ) Tilley. W a n d a , B . E d . (Brit. C o l . ) , M.A. ( S F U ) V i c k a r s , Karin, B . E d . (Brit. Col.) Walker, A l a n , L L . B . (Brit. C o l . ) W a u g h , Gerrie, B.A. (Reading), M.A. (Brit. C o l . ) , Standard Teaching Credentials (UK) White, A n n e , Lab S u p e r v i s o r Business Office Training T h e B u s i n e s s Office T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m is a s i x - m o n t h vocational p r o g r a m with C l e r k Typist, S t e n o g r a p h e r and B o o k k e e p e r options. A p p l i c a n t s for this p r o g r a m s h o u l d contact the B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g a n d C a r e e r D e v e l o p m e n t department for a d m i s s i o n information. T h i s p r o g r a m has regular intakes throughout 12 m o n t h s of the year. S t u d e n t s are required to attend c l a s s e s for 30 hours per week. A certificate will be granted u p o n s u c c e s s f u l completion of the following c o u r s e s : Business Office Training Program Outline: BOT. 100 B O T . 101 BOT. 102 B O T . 103 BOT. 104 BOT. 105 BOT. 107 BOT. 108 - Business Arithmetic I - Business Arithmetic II - Business English - Calculators - Filing - Office Procedures - Recordkeeping I - Typing Business Office Training Options: Clerk Typist Option T h e C l e r k Typist students take the c o u r s e s listed above, a n d in addition they take B O T . 111 - D i c t a - t y p i n g ; a n d B O T . 112 - R e c o r d k e e p i n g II Stenographer Option The S t e n o g r a p h e r s take the c o u r s e s listed above and in addition they take B O T . 113 - S h o r t h a n d ; a n d B O T . 112 R e c o r d k e e p i n g II, and B O T . 111 - Dicta-typing. Bookkeeper Option T h e B o o k k e e p e r s take the above c o u r s e s , a n d in addition they take B O T . 110 - B o o k k e e p i n g C o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n s are listed below: Business Office Training Business Arithmetic I 100 T h e c o u r s e will review the b a s i c arithmetic skills a n d d e v e l o p t h e s t u d e n t s ' ability to apply these skills to a business situation. Business Office Training Business Arithmetic II 101 A c o n t i n u a t i o n of B O T . 100. General Information T h e B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g and C a r e e r D e v e l o p m e n t Department is c o m p r i s e d of the f o l l o w i n g p r o g r a m s : 1. Business Office Training - see page 2. Career Alternatives Program - see p a g e 3. Legal Assistant Studies Option - see page 4. Legal Assistant Studies Program - see page 5. Legal Stenographer Program - see p a g e 6 Medical Office Assistant Program - see page 7. Secretarial Program - see p a g e 8. Administrative Secretary - see page 9. Medical Office Assistant Evening Program, part-time - see p a g e 10. Word Processing Programs - see p a g e Business Office Training Business English 102 T h e c o u r s e will familiarize students with b u s i n e s s c o m m u n i c a t i o n s with e m p h a s i s o n s p e l l i n g , p u n c t u a t i o n , a n d grammar. In addition, a c o m p o n e n t on career d e v e l o p m e n t a n d creative job s e a r c h will e n a b l e students to use their training effectively. Business Office Training Calculators 103 T h e c a l c u l a t o r c o u r s e will assist the student in the ability to use a 10-key e l e c t r o n i c c a l c u l a t o r utilizing the t o u c h t e c h n i q u e , a n d to apply this skill to b u s i n e s s c o m p u t a t i o n s . Business Office Training Filing 104 Career Alternatives Program T h e c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of instruction in four b a s i c filing m e t h o d s - alphabetic, subject, n u m e r i c , a n d g e o g r a p h i c , with e m p h a s i s o n repeated p r a c t i c e for s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y . T h e c o u r s e will include information on c o n t r o l of office files, a n d g o o d records management practices. T h e C a r e e r Alternatives P r o g r a m is a four m o n t h part-time n o n - c r e d i t p r o g r a m . T h e p r o g r a m provides an o p p o r t u n i t y for students to assess their current lifestyles a n d set g o a l s b a s e d on their individual skills a n d interests. P a r t i c i p a n t s will get information about training programs; employment options; c o m m u n i t y r e s o u r c e s a n d other a g e n c i e s w h i c h may assist them in m a k i n g vocational d e c i s i o n s . Business Office Training 105 Office Procedures Career Alternatives Program Outline: T h i s is an introduction to p r o c e d u r e s c o m m o n to a b u s i n e s s office. S t u d e n t s will gain k n o w l e d g e in h a n d l i n g i n c o m i n g and o u t g o i n g mail, operating a Telex, a n d c o r r e c t t e l e p h o n e and receptionist t e c h n i q u e s . Business Office Training Recordkeeping I 107 T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to help students d e v e l o p basic clerical a n d c o m p u t a t i o n a l skills required in s u c h office a n d sales o c c u p a t i o n s as cashier, sales clerk, p o s t i n g clerk a n d general office worker. E m p h a s i s is on the u n d e r s t a n d i n g of a b u s i n e s s a n d b u s i n e s s forms a n d p r o c e d u r e s , d e v e l o p i n g proper work habits and attitudes, a n d neatness in writing w h e n k e e p i n g records. Business Office Training Typing 108 Students will learn basic skills of typewriting using correct t e c h n i q u e s to a c q u i r e s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y . T h e c o u r s e is also d e s i g n e d to instruct the student in the current b u s i n e s s styles of presenting typewritten material, a n d the correct methods of a c h i e v i n g these styles. Business Office Training 110 Bookkeeping T h e student will a c q u i r e a solid g r o u n d i n g in the d o u b l e entry system of bookkeeping, with emphasis placed on correct analysis, a c c u r a c y , a n d t h o r o u g h n e s s , as well as on attitudes of p r o f e s s i o n a l i s m a n d i n d e p e n d e n c e . In addition the student will b e c o m e a c q u a i n t e d with t e c h n i q u e s required for use of a mini-computer. Business Office Training Dicta-typing 111 S t u d e n t s will d e v e l o p m a c h i n e t r a n s c r i p t i o n s k i l l s . S p e c i f i c a l l y , students will learn to operate efficiently the Lanier transcriber, review systematically points of grammar, punctuation, spelling a n d transcription style, a n d transcribe mailable letters. Business Office Training R e c o r d k e e p i n g II 112 A continuation of B O T . 107. Business Office Training 113 Shorthand T h e c o u r s e will trace the development and structure of the G r e g g system of s h o r t h a n d , a n d d e v e l o p the student's expertise in the writing of this s y s t e m . 80 Career Development Seminar — i n c r e a s e d c o n f i d e n c e a n d s e l f - a w a r e n e s s ; job a n d training information, r e s u m e a n d interview t e c h n i q u e s . Communications — d e v e l o p m e n t written E n g l i s h . of skills in oral a n d Directed Work Experience — c l a s s e s students work at a job for o n e week. cancelled and Information meetings for o u r S e p t e m b e r a n d J a n u a r y terms are held throughout the year. F o r further a d m i s s i o n i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a c t the B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g a n d C a r e e r D e v e l o p m e n t department. Legal Assistant Studies O p t i o n T h i s o p t i o n is d e s i g n e d for students with at least two years legal e x p e r i e n c e w h o w i s h to s p e c i a l i z e in the f o l l o w i n g areas of study: C o m m e r c i a l a n d C o r p o r a t e L a w , Litigation, P r o b a t e a n d Property a n d L e g a l O f f i c e M a n a g e m e n t . A l t h o u g h s o m e p r o c e d u r a l c o u r s e s are s u g g e s t e d , the e m p h a s i s in the L e g a l A s s i s t a n t S t u d i e s O p t i o n is on providing students with a t h o r o u g h g r a s p of the theoretical a s p e c t s of the practice of law a n d practices within the legal office. C o u r s e s may be taken in any o r d e r a n d individuals are e n c o u r a g e d to adopt a p r o g r a m that meets their s p e c i f i c interests a n d requirements. P r o g r a m s must be a p p r o v e d by the C o o r d i n a t o r . S t u d e n t s must provide e v i d e n c e that they have legal office e x p e r i e n c e before b e i n g a d m i t t e d . Legal Assistant Studies Option Outline: C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate Major Program Requirements Recommended Courses 18 credit h o u r s 21 credit hours Credit Required Courses 2 - 100 level E n g l i s h c o u r s e s or Communications L G A S 150/151 Introduction to the S t u d y of L a w I & II L G A S 170 Legal R e s e a r c h L G A S 180 Contracts I Hours 6 6 3 3 18 " P l u s 21 credits to be taken from the various L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s c o u r s e s that are offered in the e v e n i n g p r o g r a m . Legal Assistant Studies Program T h e graduates of this p r o g r a m have studied legal theory and p r o c e d u r e s and c a n apply this k n o w l e d g e to assist legal practitioners. L e g a l A s s i s t a n t s will be w o r k i n g in a professional environment, directly or independently, u n d e r the supervision of a Barrister/Solicitor S i n c e one of the functions of a L e g a l Assistant is to relieve the lawyer of many routine legal a n d administrative responsibilities, students prepare legal d o c u m e n t s in a c c o r d a n c e with the S u p r e m e Court R u l e s and various Statutes, carry out investigations a n d interview witnesses, handle legal c o r r e s p o n d e n c e a n d act in a supportive c a p a c i t y with the law firm or legal department. In c o m p l i cated legal matters a legal assistant may work directly with the lawyer, but in many cases independent judgement is required. P r o g r a m requirements: Students are e x p e c t e d to maintain a " B " average throughout the P r o g r a m . A " B " grade is usually 80% a n d up in p r o c e d u r a l c o u r s e s a n d 70% in theory c o u r s e s . In order to receive the A s s o c i a t e of Arts and S c i e n c e D i p l o m a , students must c o m p l e t e a six month work study p r a c t i c u m in relevant legal work. T h e students s h o u l d begin their practicum at the e n d of their fourth term. • Entry into the program is in the Fall term only. For further a d m i s s i o n information please c o n t a c t the B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g and C a r e e r Development department. Legal Assistant Studies Program Requirements Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s Recommended courses Credit Hours Second Term 58.5 credit hours 21 credit hours 79.5 credit hours Major Program Requirement Courses A l l c o u r s e s offered in the first two terms are required c o u r s e s . In addition students must take four terms of E n g l i s h a n d / o r C o m m u n i c a t i o n s , L G A S 170 - L e g a l R e s e a r c h , L G A S 180 - Contracts I. These courses are a total of 58.5 credit hours. Note: L G A S = Legal A s s i s t a n t S t u d i e s C M N S 150 C M N S 152 L G A S 151 LGAS LGAS LGAS LGAS LGAS LGAS o r 155 167 162 163 177 179 Business Communications T e c h n i c a l Report W r i t i n g Introduction to the S t u d y of L a w II Conveyancing & Mortgaging I . . . . Wills and Probate P r o c e d u r e s II . . Litigation P r o c e d u r e s II C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s II Legal O f f i c e P r o c e d u r e s II L e g a l Interviewing 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 3 21 Third and Fourth Terms In the T h i r d and F o u r t h terms students will take an additional 30 credits and c o u r s e s will be offered from the following: Credit Hours English L G A S 159 L G A S 160 L G A S 165 L G A S 172 L G A S 180 L G A S 181 L G A S 252 L G A S 253 L G A S 255 L G A S 256 L G A S 257 L G A S 258 L G A S 266 L G A S 268 L G A S 270 T w o first year E n g l i s h c o u r s e s (required) A c c o u n t i n g for the L e g a l Assistant Legal Theory C o n v e y a n c i n g and M o r t g a g i n g II Legal Documents Contracts I C o n t r a c t s II Torts C o m p a n y Law Real Property Family L a w I Estate L a w Criminal Procedures Family L a w II Criminal Law Labour Law 6 . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Summer Term Credit First Term C M N S 150 L G A S 150 L G A S 152 L G A S 153 L G A S 154 L G A S 157 L G A S 161 L G A S 176 O F T R 252 Hours Basic Communications Introduction to L e g a l S t u d i e s I . . . B a s i c Litigation P r o c e d u r e s I Basic Corporate Procedures I . . . . L a n d Registry S y s t e m Wills and Probate P r o c e d u r e s I . . . Legislative P r o c e s s Legal O f f i c e P r o c e d u r e s I Interpersonal S k i l l s & Organizational Psychology 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 L G A S 170 L G A S 199/299 Legal Research Practicum 3 6 S t u d e n t s w h o c a n n o t take L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s 170 on a S a t u r d a y m o r n i n g the m o n t h s of May a n d J u n e between the s e c o n d a n d third terms will have to take this c o u r s e d u r i n g May a n d J u n e after they c o m p l e t e their fourth term. Note: C o u r s e s M a r k e d with an Asterix are to be taken by p e o p l e with other formal legal c o u r s e s or two years work e x p e r i e n c e in a related field. S e e program c o o r d i nator for further information. 22.5 81 Legal Assistant Studies Courses Legal Assistant Studies 150 Introduction to the Study of Law I (F) (3,0,1) Introduction to legal c o n c e p t s and legal reasoning. It will cover the historical development of legal institutions a n d the p r i n c i p l e s of c o m m o n law a n d equity, the interpretation of statutes, the doctrine of analysis of the s y s t e m ; its strengths and w e a k n e s s e s . Transferable to S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 151* introduction to the Study of Law II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 150 a n d is an introduction to private law. T h e areas c o v e r e d will include law of contracts, sale of g o o d s , partnership and c o m p a n y law. A l t h o u g h s o m e statutes will be c o n s i d e r e d , e m p h a s i s will be on case law and current development in the law. The development of the laws of negligence through various court d e c i s i o n s will be d i s c u s s e d . T h e c o u r s e will also cover some aspects of procedure, basic rules of evidence, capacity and status of parties. Transferable to S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 152 Basic Litigation I (F) (3,0,.5) Introduction to the court p r o c e d u r e s in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y a n d S u p r e m e C o u r t s of B . C . T h e c o u r s e will cover p r o c e d u r e s in pre-trial preparation, the preparation of d o c u ments, the use of precedents in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y and Supreme Courts Legal Assistant Studies 153 Basic Corporate Procedures I (F) (1.5,0,.5) A n examination of the B . C . C o m p a n i e s Act and the various d o c u m e n t s that a legal assistant must be familiar with in order to incorporate a c o m p a n y and attend to routine filings and resolutions R e c o r d s office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates a n d registration will a l s o b e covered. Legal Assistant Studies 154 Land Registry System (F) (1.5,0,.5) History and e x a m i n a t i o n of the L a n d Registry S y s t e m in B . C . . L a n d Titles Act requirements, d o c u m e n t s used in registration, the nature a n d effect of transfers a n d c h a r g e s a n d search p r o c e e d i n g s will a l s o be c o v e r e d . Legal Assistant Studies 155 Conveyancing and Mortgaging I (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite; Legal Assistant Studies 154. T h i s c o u r s e covers interim agreements, L a n d Titles Act requirements and p r o c e d u r e s , d o c u m e n t s a n d forms used in c o n v e y i n g title and registering various c h a r g e s . E m p h a s i s will be on preparing a c c e p t a b l e d o c u m e n t s , transfers of title, mortgages, agreements for sale a n d necessary related forms. 82 Legal Assistant Studies 157 Wills and Probate Procedures (F) (1.5,0,.5) A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the W i l l s Act, P r o b a t e F e e s A c t , a n d Administration Act Students will prepare the necessary d o c u ments to obtain Letters Probate a n d Letters of A d m i n i s t r a t i o n in the S u p r e m e C o u r t of B . C . Legal Assistant Studies 159 Accounting for the Legal Assistant (F) (3,0,1) P r o v i d e s the student with k n o w l e d g e of b a s i c a c c o u n t i n g p r i n c i p l e s T h r o u g h lectures a n d p r o b l e m s o l v i n g labs the student will gain an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the a c c o u n t i n g c y c l e ; be able to a n a l y z e financial statements, reports a n d budgets. E m p h a s i s is on the interpretation a n d analysis of a c c o u n t i n g data, not the practice of keeping b o o k s . Legal Assistant Studies 160 Legal Theory (F,S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the major theories of law. the nature of legal o b l i g a t i o n , a n d the relationship between law a n d m o r a l ity. A l t h o u g h it is a c o u r s e in legal p h i l o s o p h y the principal studies will be d i s c u s s e d in the context of s u c h practical issues as d e f e n d i n g the guilty, o b e y i n g immoral laws, legislating morals, penal reform, law a n d social c h a n g e s , a n d the use a n d a b u s e of legal technicalities. T h e e m p h a s i s will be on the role the legal s y s t e m plays in our s o c i e t y Legal Assistant Studies 161 Legislative Process I (S) (3,0,.5) A n a l y s i s of the relationship between legislative a n d administrative tribunals and the courts; the nature a n d limits of executive legislative a n d judicial power; articulation of government policy in statutory form, translation of p u b l i c p o l i c y into legislation a n d legal p r o b l e m s in i m p l e m e n t i n g legislated p o l i c y T h e British North A m e r i c a A c t will a l s o be d i s c u s s e d as the basis of legislative power. Legal Assistant Studies 162 Litigation Procedures II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s 152. T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for L e g a l A s s i s t a n t s a s s i s t i n g in a litigation practice. S u p r e m e Court R u l e s will be studied in detail from the beginning of a process to enforcing judgements. Legal Assistant Studies 163 Corporate Procedures (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 153. T h i s is a c o n t i n u a t i o n of L e g a l S t u d i e s 153 a n d will look at c o m p a n i e s , societies a n d various p r o b l e m s e n c o u n t e r e d in a corporate records office. Students with legal office experience in this field may challenge the prerequisite. Legal Assistant Studies 165 L e g a l Assistant Studies 180* C o n v e y a n c i n g a n d M o r t g a g i n g II (F) (3,0,1) C o n t r a c t s I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 154 a n d 155. C o v e r s major a s p e c t s of the law of contracts. S t u d e n t s will be made aware of how law in general a n d the law of contracts in particular fits into the overall pattern of society, a n d its pursuits. T o this e n d students will d i s c u s s critically in the class law, a s well a s the p r i n c i p l e s of contract law. A continuation of Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 154 a n d 155 with a more intensive a n d in-depth a p p r o a c h to L a n d Registry d o c u m e n t s a n d difficult title c o n v e y a n c e s , statements of adjustment, a n d reconciliation. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n client a p p r o a c h , preparation of d o c u m e n t s , fee structure, transfer a n d mortgaging of equities, power of attorney, s u b right to p u r c h a s e strata titles, transfers a n d d i s c h a r g e s . Legal Assistant Studies 181 C o n t r a c t s II (S) (3,0,1) Legal Assistant Studies 167 Prerequisite: L e g a l S t u d i e s 180. Wills a n d Probate II (S) (1.5.0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s 180. T o p i c s c o v e r e d will i n c l u d e s p e c i a l types of c o n t r a c t s s u c h a s a g e n c y , bailment and i n s u r a n c e ; credit transactions s u c h as chattel mortgages, c o n d i t i o n a l sales, a n d partnership a n d c o m p a n y law. Prerequisite: L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s 157. T h e law of wills, succession, intestate succession, principles of probate a n d administration of estates a n d m i s c e l l a n e o u s estate problems will be covered. Students with work experience in this area may c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s 170 Legal Assistant Studies 182* Legal R e s e a r c h ( S U ) (3,0,1) Collection a n d Foreclosure Proceedings P r o v i d e s the Legal Assistant with the t e c h n i q u e s a n d m e t h o d o l o g y of legal research a n d will i n c l u d e functions s u c h as reading briefs a n d legal d o c u m e n t s ; u s i n g e n c y c l o pediae, annotated reports, law reviews, c a s e c o m m e n t s ; l o c a t i n g d e c i s i o n s a n d preparing m e m o r a n d a of law. (F,S) (3,0,1) Discusses the principles, practice, a n d information gathering p r o c e d u r e s n e c e s s a r y to prepare d o c u m e n t a t i o n required in matters of f o r e c l o s u r e s a n d c o l l e c t i o n s . S t u d e n t s will practice d r a w i n g the various pleadings involved in the above i n c l u d i n g e x e c u t i o n p r o c e e d i n g s . L e g a l Assistant Studies 172 L e g a l D o c u m e n t s (F,S) (3,0,1) C o u r s e work includes the drafting of a g r e e m e n t s , c l a i m s and d e f e n c e s in litigation p r o c e e d i n g s , a n d a study of the rules of statutory interpretation. E m p h a s i s will b e p l a c e d o n d e v e l o p i n g a general style, rather than o b t a i n i n g a detailed k n o w l e d g e of s p e c i f i c law. Legal Assistant Studies 176 Legal Assistant Studies 199 Career Practicum (F,S,SU) (6,1,1) T h i s is the work portion of the C a r e e r P r a c t i c u m a n d c o n s i s t s of six months in a law firm. S t u d e n t s will be assisted by the instructor in f i n d i n g a p r a c t i c u m , but it is the student's responsibility to obtain a p r a c t i c u m position. Legal Office P r o c e d u r e s I (F) (3,0,1) P r a c t i c a l information about the o r g a n i z a t i o n of legal offices. Instruction in t i m e k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g systems, use of transcripts, legal briefs, use of a law library, library i n d e x i n g , filing a n d c o m m u n i c a t i o n s s y s t e m s , use of data p r o c e s s i n g equipment in the law office, ethical r e s p o n s i b i l ities, legal terminology and other p r o c e d u r e s particular to the legal p r o f e s s i o n . Legal Assistant Studies 177 Legal Office P r o c e d u r e s II (S) (1.5,0,.5) Legal Assistant Studies 252* T o r t s ( F , S ) (3,0,1) A n introductory study of "torts" — the protection of personal interest from interference a n d the way in w h i c h the courts meet this need in a c h a n g i n g society. P r i n c i p a l topics to b e studied are: intentional torts, n e g l i g e n c e , strict liability, defamation a n d n u i s a n c e , c o n c e p t s of standard of care, causality, duty a n d remoteness. S t u d e n t s will be required to pre-read cases for d i s c u s s i o n in the class. Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 176. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of office m a c h i n e s , a n e x a m i n a t i o n of b o o k k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s f o r a law office i n c l u d ing trust a c c o u n t s ; use of office e q u i p m e n t a n d relating c o s t s of m a c h i n e r y a n d services; time m a n a g e m e n t , a n d dictation skills. L e g a l Assistant Studies 179 L e g a l Interviewing (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will give a n u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the role of the Legal A s s i s t a n t a n d of the p r o c e s s of legal interviewing. S t u d e n t s will a c q u i r e skills in c o n d u c t i n g various types of interviews a n d preparing minutes of e v i d e n c e . L e g a l Assistant Studies 253 C o m p a n y L a w (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s 153 a n d 163. T h e law relating to c o r p o r a t i o n s a n d partnerships in C a n a d a ; historical formation, structure a n d r e o r g a n i z a t i o n of a c o r p o r a t i o n ; authority a n d fiduciary o b l i g a t i o n of m a n a g e ment; legal c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s ; rights a n d duties of officers, directors a n d s h a r e h o l d e r s . S t u d e n t s w h o have e x p e r i e n c e in this field may c h a l l e n g e the prerequisite. 83 • Legal Assistant Studies 255 Real Property (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Legal Assistant S t u d i e s 165. T h e c o m m o n law relating to real property as modified by legislation T h e L a n d Titles A c t a n d T h e C o n v e y a n c i n g a n d Law of Property A c t will be studied in this c o u r s e using the case analysis methods. Students having work experience in this field may challenge the prerequisite Legal Assistant Studies 256* Family Law (F,S) (3,0,1) Legal Stenographer Program T h e e x a c t i n g field of law offers excellent c a r e e r o p p o r t u nities for students graduating as legal s t e n o g r a p h e r s . T h i s 8 m o n t h v o c a t i o n a l p r o g r a m c o v e r s three main categories of information: c o u r s e s w h i c h provide a f u n d a mental u n d e r s t a n d i n g of the legal system in B . C . ; s h o r t h a n d a n d typing; a n d legal office p r o c e d u r e s . S t u d e n t s entering the program must have at least 45 w o r d s per minute in typing. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e P r o g r a m C o m p l e t i o n C e r t i f i c a t e is granted u p o n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of 44 credits First Term Courses L a w a n d the family, marriage a n d its d i s s o l u t i o n ; rights and duties of s p o u s e s a n d parents; the law in respect to c h i l d care; c u s t o d y ; a c c e s s , g u a r d i a n s h i p a d o p t i o n ; the role of Family C o u r t , J u v e n i l e C o u r t and h u m a n resource a g e n c i e s will be c o v e r e d . T h e various legislation in this area will be e x a m i n e d with s p e c i a l e m p h a s i s on the D i v o r c e A c t a n d the Family R e l a t i o n s A c t . L G S T 105 Legal Assistant Studies 257* Estate Law (F,S) (3,0,1) T y p i n g a n d S h o r t h a n d c o u r s e s will be a s s i g n e d a c c o r d i n g to the student's present level A c o n s i d e r a t i o n of a d v a n c e d p r o c e e d i n g s relating to Estates a n d Property interests of d e c e a s e d and incompetent p e r s o n s i n c l u d i n g related litigatious matters. L G S T 110 L G S T 113 L G S T 114 L G S T 116 L G S T 118 C M N S 150 A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the C r i m i n a l C o d e , theory of c r i m i n a l responsibility; legal elements of a crime; c r i m i n a l procedure; the law respecting the use of force, rules of e v i d e n c e , c o n f e s s i o n ; identification p r o c e d u r e s a n d s e n t e n c i n g . This c o u r s e will receive three general elective credits at S F U . LGST LGST LGST LGST LGST 107 108 109 111 112 Typing Skill and Speed D e v e l o p m e n t II Machine Transcription I M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n II B a s i c Litigation I L a n d Registry S y s t e m Basic Conveyance and Mortgage Procedures B a s i c Litigation II Legal O f f i c e P r o c e d u r e s II Directed W o r k E x p e r i e n c e Business Communications Transferable to S F U . Legal Assistant Studies 268* Criminal Law (S) (3,0,1) A d d i t i o n a l T y p i n g a n d S h o r t h a n d credits will be a s s i g n e d a c c o r d i n g to the student's level Transferable to S F U . 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 7.5 Second Term Courses L G S T 115 L G S T 117 L G S T 119 C M N S 151 Substantial elements of selected c r i m i n a l offences a n d c o n s i d e r a t i o n of the rules of evidence. Particular subjects include the nature of real and circumstantial evidence, burden of proof, hearsay, c o n f e s s i o n a n d a d m i s s i o n , c o m p e t e n c e , comellability a n d witnesses. T h i s c o u r s e will receive three general electives at S F U . Credits 20,5 L G S T 106 Legal Assistant Studies 258* Criminal Procedures (F) (3,0,1) Typing Skill a n d Speed Development Basic Corporate Procedures I B a s i c C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s II . . . . Wills a n d Probate P r o c e d u r e s Legal Office Procedures I Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e Communications 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.0 3.0 6.0 23.5 L E G A L S T E N O G R A P H E R TRAINING C O U R S E S Legal Stenographer Training 100 Production T y p i n g I (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: t y p i n g s p e e d of 50 w p m . Legal Assistant Studies 270* Labour Law (F,S) (3,0,1) U n i o n - M a n a g e m e n t relations; the collective bargaining process; arbitration and c o n c i l i a t i o n p r o c e d u r e s . T h e c o u r s e i n c l u d e s detailed c o n s i d e r a t i o n of the B . C . L a b o u r C o d e a n d a study of d e c i s i o n s of the B . C . L a b o u r Relations B o a r d . Note: C o u r s e s marked with an asterisk are to be taken by people with other formal legal c o u r s e s or two years work e x p e r i e n c e in a related field. S e e P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r for further information 84 E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d u p o n d e v e l o p i n g a p r o f e s s i o n a l a n d practical a p p r o a c h to typing p r o b l e m s with a m i n i m u m of supervision. Students are given timed production assignments and a c c e p t a b l e work standards are stressed. Legal Stenographer Training 101 Production T y p i n g II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: L G S T 100 (see above). P r o d u c t i o n p r o b l e m s of a more c o m p l e x nature will be introduced. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 102 Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 110 B e g i n n i n g S h o r t h a n d (F) (4.5,0,1.5) B a s i c C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s I (F) (1.5,0,.5) B e g i n n i n g study of a n alphabetic, G r e g g or P i t m a n shorthand s y s t e m with e m p h a s i s o n a p p l i c a t i o n of theory and development of s p e e d utilizing high frequency v o c a b u lary. S u c c e s s f u l students s h o u l d be able to take dictation at 80 w p m after c o m p l e t i n g o n e term T h i s c o u r s e requires an additional 1.5 hours of lab time per week A n examination of the B . C . C o m p a n i e s A c t and the various d o c u m e n t s that a legal assistant or secretary must be familiar with in order to incorporate a c o m p a n y a n d attend to routine filings a n d resolutions. R e c o r d s , office requirements, annual p r o c e e d i n g s , preparing share certificates a n d registration, etc. will also b e c o v e r e d . Legal Stenographer T r a i n i n g 103 S h o r t h a n d S p e e d Development I (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 170 o r a s h o r t h a n d s p e e d of 80 w p m . C o n t i n u a t i o n of s p e e d d e v e l o p m e n t a l o n g with theory review, i n c r e a s e d vocabulary, dictation of familiar a n d unfamiliar material a i m i n g at 90% a c c u r a c y in transcription. L a n d Registry S y s t e m (F) (1.5,0,.5) History a n d e x a m i n a t i o n of the land registry system in B . C . L a n d Registry A c t requirements, d o c u m e n t s n e c e s s a r y for registration; the nature a n d effect of transfers and charges; search p r o c e d u r e s will be c o v e r e d . Legal Stenographer T r a i n i n g 112 Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 104 S h o r t h a n d S p e e d Development L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 111 II (F,S) (3,0,1) B a s i c C o n v e y a n c e a n d Mortgage Procedures Prerequisite: Office T r a i n i n g 174 o r a s h o r t h a n d s p e e d of 80 w p m . (S) (1.5,0,.5) C o n t i n u a t i o n of s p e e d development with 9 5 % a c c u r a c y in transcription, i n c r e a s e d vocabulary, dictation of familiar a n d unfamiliar material. E m p h a s i s will b e p l a c e d o n reinforcing theory T h i s c o u r s e covers interim agreements, L a n d Registry A c t requirements, p r o c e d u r e s , d o c u m e n t s , forms involved in c o n v e y i n g title a n d registering various c h a r g e s . E m p h a s i s will b e o n preparing a c c e p t a b l e d o c u m e n t s , deeds of land, mortgages, agreements for sale a n d necessary related forms. Prerequisite: L e g a l S t u d i e s 111. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 105 T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d Development I Legal Stenographer T r a i n i n g 113 (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) R e m e d i a l drills, power drills, short a n d sustained timed writings to increase s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting. (F,S) Prerequisite: L G S T 110. Continuation T r a i n i n g 110. Legal Stenographer T r a i n i n g 106 T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t B a s i c C o r p o r a t e P r o c e d u r e s II (S) (1.5,0,.5) of work begun in L e g a l Stenographer II (1.5,0,.5) C o n t i n u a t i o n of L G S T 105. Legal Stenographer T r a i n i n g 114 Wills a n d Probate P r o c e d u r e s (F) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: T y p i n g s p e e d of 4 0 w p m . A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the Wills A c t , Probate Fees A c t , a n d Administration A c t Students will prepare the necessary d o c u ments to obtain Letters Probate a n d Letters of A d m i n i s t r a t i o n in the S u p r e m e C o u r t of B . C . L e g a l m a c h i n e transcription. P r a c t i c e in transcribing f o r m s , letters a n d reports f r o m L a n i e r dictation e q u i p m e n t . T h i s c o u r s e entails a mandatory 1.5 lab hours. Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 115 L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 107 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n I (F,S) (1.5,1.5,.5) B a s i c Litigation II (S) (1.5,0,.5) Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 108 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n II (S) (1.5,0,.5) Prerequisite: L G S T 107. Prerequisite: L e g a l S t u d i e s 109. Continuation T r a i n i n g 109. of work begun in L e g a l Stenographer C o n t i n u a t i o n of work b e g u n in L G S T 107 o r Oftr 182 in legal transcription. Legal Stenographer T r a i n i n g 116 L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 109 Legal Office P r o c e d u r e s I (F) (3,0,1) B a s i c Litigation I (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o u r s e to prepare legal s t e n o g r a p h e r students for positions in law offices. Instruction in time k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s , u s e of transcribers, legal briefs, use of law library, library i n d e x i n g , u s e of data p r o c e s s i n g e q u i p ment in the law office, ethical responsibilities, legal t e r m i n o l ogy, filing, a n d other p r o c e d u r e s particular to the p r o f e s s i o n Introduction to the court p r o c e d u r e s - i n S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y a n d S u p r e m e C o u r t s of B . C . T h e c o u r s e will c o v e r p r o c e d u r e s in pre-trial preparation, the preparation of d o c u ments, the u s e of precedents in S m a l l C l a i m s , C o u n t y a n d Supreme Courts. 85 L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 117 Second Term L e g a l Office P r o c e d u r e s II (S) (3,0,1) C M N S 157 M O A 102 Prerequisite: L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 116. A n introduction to b o o k k e e p i n g a n d a n e x a m i n a t i o n of b o o k k e e p i n g a n d a c c o u n t i n g s y s t e m s for a law office i n c l u d i n g trust a c c o u n t s . M O A 103 & M O A 104 M O A 106 L e g a l Stenographer T r a i n i n g 118 M O A 108 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e (F) (1,30,2) In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving a p p r o x i m a t e l y eight lecture hours a n d at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i ence in the field. A l s o c o v e r e d is the resume, j o b a p p l i c a t i o n , cover letter a n d interview. M O A 110 M O A 112 M O A 113 Legal S t e n o g r a p h e r T r a i n i n g 119 Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e (S) (1,30,2) M O A 115 In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving three lecture hours and at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the legal field. Medical Communications . . . Typing Skill and Speed Development Machine Transcription I & II M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s II Introduction to Health C a r e II Anatomy and P h y s i o l o g y II M e d i c a l T e r m i n o l o g y II Interpersonal S k i l l s and O r g a n i z a t i o n a l Psychology Directed Work Experience 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 3 3 1 23.5 MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT UPGRADING 3 3 Individual c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n s are listed below. PROGRAM M e d i c a l Office Assistant 100 (Proposed) (Part-time evening) T y p i n g II ( F , S ) (4.5,0,1.5) T h i s program is d e s i g n e d as an u p - g r a d i n g program for those people w h o are currently w o r k i n g in hospitals, c l i n i c s , or m e d i c a l offices a n d have gained at least o n e year's e x p e r i ence as a m e d i c a l receptionist, secretary o r assistant. T h e program is d e s i g n e d for those w h o w i s h to u p g r a d e their c l i n i c a l , clerical or interpersonal skills. Prerequisite: typing s p e e d of 45 w p m . S p e e d d e v e l o p m e n t a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting with e m p h a s i s o n p r o d u c t i o n , c o m p o s i t i o n of letters a n d letter styles a n d extensive practice in typing various office forms. M e d i c a l Office Assistant 101 F o l l o w i n g satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of required c o u r s e s a C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e certificate will b e a w a r d e d . F o r further information contact the B T C D Department. T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t (F) I (1.5,0,.5) R e m e d i a l drills, power drills, short a n d s u s t a i n e d timed writings to increase s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting. MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Graduates from this 8 month program receive employment in m e d i c a l offices a n d as well in a diverse n u m b e r of hospital settings. A l l applicants will have the opportunity to meet with the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r prior to registration to a s s e s s whether or not they have personal qualities a n d clerical skills n e c e s sary to be a s u c c e s s f u l M e d i c a l Office Assistant. A p p l i c a n t s to this program must have a typing s p e e d of 45 w p m . • M e d i c a l Office Assistant 102 T y p i n g Skill a n d S p e e d D e v e l o p m e n t (S) II (1.5,0,.5) C o n t i n u a t i o n of M O A 101. M e d i c a l Office Assistant 103 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n I (F,S) (1.5,1.5,.5) For additional a d m i s s i o n information contact the B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g a n d C a r e e r Development department. Prerequisite: T y p i n g s p e e d of 40 w p m . Note: M O A = M e d i c a l Office Assistant ' M e d i c a l m a c h i n e transcription. P r a c t i c e in transcribing forms, letters a n d reports from L a n i e r dictation equipment. T h i s c o u r s e entails a mandatory 1.5 lab hours. First Term M O A 100 M O A 101 M O A 105 M O A 107 M O A 109 M O A 111 M O A 114 T y p i n g II Typing Speed Development M e d i c a l Office Procedures I Introduction to Health C a r e I Anatomy and Physiology I Medical Terminology I Directed Work Credit Hours Lab Hours 4.5 6 Prerequisite: M O A 103. 1.5 C o n t i n u a t i o n of work b e g u n in M O A 103. 3 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 105 3 M e d i c a l Office P r o c e d u r e s (F.S) (3,0,1) 3 1 19 86 M e d i c a l Office Assistant 104 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n II (F.S) (1.5,1.5,.5) 6 T h i s is a n introduction to office p r o c e d u r e s c o m m o n to general m e d i c a l offices a n d hospitals. S t u d e n t s will gain expertise in m a k i n g a p p o i n t m e n t s ; k e e p i n g m e d i c a l r e c o r d s ; k e e p i n g f i n a n c i a l r e c o r d s ; billing; d e a l i n g with patients, etc. Students will also b e c o m e familiar with the professional ethics of the p a r a - m e d i c a l . Medical Office Assistant 106 Medical Office Procedures (F,S) (3,0,1) C o n t i n u a t i o n of M O A 105. Medical Office Assistant 107 Introduction to Health Care (F.S) (3,0,1) S t u d e n t s will learn about c l i n i c a l p r o c e d u r e s pertinent to the d o c t o r ' s office a n d the hospital setting. T h e c o u r s e includes general information about p h y s i c a l a n d mental health; m e d i c a t i o n s a n d health p r o d u c t s . S t u d e n t s will also learn how to use and maintain m e d i c a l office equipment. Half the time is spent on First A i d , a n d students will receive a S t a n d a r d First A i d Certificate u p o n c o m p l e t i o n of this phase of the c o u r s e . Medical Office Assistant 108 Introduction to Health Care (F,S) (3,0,1) C o n t i n u a t i o n of M O A 107. Medical Office Assistant 109 Anatomy and Physiology I (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of the structure, function a n d inter-relationships of the o r g a n i c s y s t e m s of the body C o m m o n m e d i c a l d i s orders, operative p r o c e d u r e s a n d related t e r m i n o l o g y will be studied in c o n j u n c t i o n with the s y s t e m s . Medical Office Assistant 110 Anatomy and Physiology II (F,S) (3,0,1) Medical Office Assistant 115 Directed Work Experience (S) (1,30.2) In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving tin •. lecti e hours and at least 30 hours of related office expe .-nee in the field. SECRETARIAL P R O G R A M Secretarial training provides a graduate with many e m p l o y m e n t opportunities. T h i s p r o g r a m is geared s p e c i f i cally towards improving practical skills, and towards p r o v i d ing students with an u n d e r s t a n d i n g of b u s i n e s s p r o c e d u r e s , particularly within the area students c h o o s e to seek e m p l o y ment. S t u d e n t s w h o s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e this program may apply for entry to the L e g a l S t e n o g r a p h e r a n d M e d i c a l Office Assistant P r o g r a m s . Capilano College Certificate Credit Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s Credit First T e r m C o u r s e s C M N S 150 O F T R 154 O F T R 162 163 O F T R 165 0 r O F T R 170 174 o r C o n t i n u a t i o n of the work b e g u n in M O A 109. Medical Office Assistant 111 Medical Terminology I (F,S) (3,0,1) 44 O F T R 180 O F T R 185 O F T R 300 Communications Basic Bookkeeping T y p i n g II T y p i n g III Typing Skill & Speed Development Beginning Shorthand Shorthand Speed Development Machine Transcription I . . . . Office T e c h n o l o g y I Directed Work Experience . . . Hours 3.0 3.0 4.5 or 3 15 4.5 or 3 1.5 3.0 t.O 22.0 A n introduction to G r e e k a n d Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots a n d c o m b i n i n g forms c o m m o n to m e d i c a l terminology. Credit Medical Office Assistant 112 Medical Terminology II (F,S) (3,0,1) Continuation and reinforcement of terminology in M O A 111. Medical Office Assistant 113 Interpersonal Skills and Organizational Psychology (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide students with basic p s y c h o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s a n d e x p e r i e n c e in several skill areas important in b u s i n e s s . It i n c l u d e s practice in relating, a s s e r tion, feedback and problem solving skills. Other topics include small group behaviour, verbal and non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n ; d y n a m i c s of personality; leadership styles; supervisory difficulties and conflict resolution. A n experiential a p p r o a c h allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive setting. Medical Office Assistant 114 Directed Work Experience (F) (1,30,2) In-term e x p e r i e n c e involving a p p r o x i m a t e l y eight lecture hours a n d at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. A l s o c o v e r e d is the resume, job a p p l i c a t i o n , c o v e r letter and interview. Second Term Courses C M N S 151 O F T R 163 O F T R 164 O F T R 166 OFTR OFTR OFTR OFTR OFTR OFTR 174 175 181 186 187 252 O F T R 301 0 r 0 r o r Communications T y p i n g III T y p i n g IV Typing Skill and Speed Development Shorthand Speed Development M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n II O f f i c e T e c h n o l o g y II Word Processing Interpersonal S k i l l s a n d O r g a n i z a t i o n a l Psychology Directed Work Experience Hours 3.0 3.0 15 3.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 22.0 Office Training 150 Bookkeeping I (F.S) (3,1.5,1) A n introductory c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to c o v e r b a s i c terminolo g y , t e c h n i q u e s , a n d a p p l i c a t i o n s of b o o k k e e p i n g , i n c l u d i n g the theory a n d practice of k e e p i n g adequate r e c o r d s ; use of special journals; c o n t r o l l i n g a c c o u n t s a n d s u b s i d i a r y ledgers; p e r i o d i c adjustments; c l o s i n g p r o c e d u r e s and preparation of financial statements. 87 Office T r a i n i n g 151 Office T r a i n i n g 170 B o o k k e e p i n g II (F,S) (3,1.5,1) B e g i n n i n g S h o r t h a n d (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite . ._ nts must have a m i n i m u m of " B " standing in Office I r a i n i i . j 150. B e g i n n i n g study of a n a l p h a b e t i c , G r e g g or P i t m a n s h o r t h a n d system with e m p h a s i s o n a p p l i c a t i o n of theory a n d development of s p e e d utilizing high f r e q u e n c y v o c a b u l a r y . S u c c e s s f u l students s h o u l d be able to take dictation at 8 0 w p m after c o m p l e t i n g o n e term. T h i s c o u r s e requires a n a d d i t i o n a l 1.5 hours of lab time per week. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of work b e g u n in Office T r a i n i n g 150 with e m p h a s i s o n practical a p p l i c a t i o n of b a s i c b o o k k e e p i n g functions. Office T r a i n i n g 154 Office T r a i n i n g 174 B a s i c B o o k k e e p i n g (F) (3,1.5,1) S h o r t h a n d S p e e d Development T h i s c o u r s e provides a general overview of b o o k k e e p i n g practices used in general offices. T h e o r y will be presented as it relates to particular b o o k k e e p i n g p r o c e s s e s . S t u d e n t s are e n c o u r a g e d to work independently a p p l y i n g the b o o k k e e p i n g principles to projects simulating actual b u s i n e s s situations. Prerequisite: Office T r a i n i n g 170 o r a s h o r t h a n d s p e e d of 60 w p m . I (F,S) (3,0,1) C o n t i n u a t i o n of s p e e d development a l o n g with theory review, i n c r e a s e d v o c a b u l a r y , dictation of familiar a n d unfamiliar material a i m i n g at 95% a c c u r a c y in transcription. Office T r a i n i n g 175 Office T r a i n i n g 161 Shorthand Speed Development II (F,S) (3,0,1) T y p i n g I (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Introduction to typewriting for students with no previous instruction. Mastery of k e y b o a r d s by t o u c h systems; correct typing technique; o p e r a t i o n and care of typewriters, d e v e l o p ment of s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y . Introduction to styles a n d formats of b u s i n e s s letters a n d m e m o s . S t u d e n t s s h o u l d be able to type 30 w p m at the e n d of four months. Prerequisite: O f f i c e T r a i n i n g 174 o r a s h o r t h a n d s p e e d of 80 w p m . A d v a n c e d s p e e d d e v e l o p m e n t in dictation of unfamiliar materials for varied time lengths, improvement of rapid a n d a c c u r a t e transcription skills a n d shortcuts in s h o r t h a n d systems. Office T r a i n i n g 180 Office T r a i n i n g 162 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n I (F,S) (1.5,1.5,.5) T y p i n g II (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Prerequisite: T y p i n g s p e e d of 40 w p m . Prerequisite: typing s p e e d of 30 w p m . C o n t i n u a t i o n of s p e e d development a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting with e m p h a s i s o n p r o d u c t i o n , c o m p o s i t i o n of letters a n d letter styles a n d extensive practice in typing various office forms. G e n e r a l b u s i n e s s m a c h i n e transcription. P r a c t i c e in transcribing forms, letters a n d reports from Lanier dictation e q u i p m e n t . T h i s c o u r s e entails a m a n d a t o r y 1.5 iab hours. Office T r a i n i n g 181 M a c h i n e T r a n s c r i p t i o n II (F,S) (1.5,1.5,.5) Office T r a i n i n g 163 Prerequisite: Office T r a i n i n g 180. P r o d u c t i o n T y p i n g I (F,S) (3,0,1) T h e student will gain further e x p e r i e n c e in p r o d u c i n g mailable finished p r o d u c t s to meet the p r o f i c i e n c y standard of the office environment. Prerequisite; T y p i n g s p e e d of 50 w p m . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d u p o n d e v e l o p i n g a professional a n d practical a p p r o a c h , t o typing p r o b l e m s with a m i n i m u m of supervision. Students are given timed production assignments a n d acceptable work standards are stressed. Office T r a i n i n g 164 P r o d u c t i o n T y p i n g II (F,S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Office T r a i n i n g 163. P r o d u c t i o n p r o b l e m s of a more c o m p l e x nature will be introduced. Office T r a i n i n g 165 T y p i n g S p e e d Development I (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) R e m e d i a l drills, power drills, short a n d sustained timed writings to increase s p e e d a n d a c c u r a c y in typewriting. Office T r a i n i n g 166 T y p i n g S p e e d Development II (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) C o n t i n u a t i o n of Office T r a i n i n g 165. 88 Office T r a i n i n g 185 Office T e c h n o l o g y I (F) (3,1.5,1) T h i s c o u r s e will a c q u a i n t students with office p r o c e d u r e s a n d management s y s t e m s . T i m e m a n a g e m e n t , meetings, image of the firm, reception and t e l e p h o n e m a n n e r s , a n d the office environment as it relates to morale a n d efficiency will be c o v e r e d . Office T r a i n i n g 186 Office T e c h n o l o g y II (S) (3,1.5,1) This course supplements Office Training 185 with emphasis on the current trends a n d developments in office t e c h n o l o g y and will indicate the impact a n d effects of m e c h a n i z a t i o n o n office personnel, systems, procedures and equipment. T o p i c s s u c h a s utilization of p e r s o n n e l , supervisory style, staff s e l e c tion, l a b o u r / m a n a g e m e n t relations, j o b classifications will be d i s c u s s e d . Current models of basic office e q u i p m e n t will be demonstrated, i n c l u d i n g w o r d p r o c e s s i n g , printing a n d d u p l i c a t i n g m a c h i n e s . S t u d e n t s will be provided with the opportunity to investigate, in depth, the operation of a selected b u s i n e s s office. Office Training 187 Word P r o c e s s i n g (F,S) (3,1.5,.5) Office Training 300 Directed Work Experience (F) (1,30,2) W o r d P r o c e s s i n g — the transformation of ideas into typewritten or printed form — has always been a major function of a secretary. T h i s c o u r s e will a c q u a i n t the student with the c o n c e p t s of w o r d p r o c e s s i n g a n d introduce the student to special terms, language, a n d the o p e r a t i o n of W P e q u i p m e n t resulting in more efficient p r o d u c t i o n of written, verbal, or r e c o r d e d information. In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving approximately eight lecture hours a n d at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. A l s o c o v e r e d is the resume, j o b a p p l i c a t i o n , cover letter a n d interview. Office Training 250 Professional Development Seminar ( F , S , S U ) (3,0,1) A s e m i n a r c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide an opportunity for students to meet in a g r o u p setting to e x p l o r e present or future career c o n c e r n s , relating to status, image, o p p o r t u n i ties for employment, job security a n d advancement E m p h a s i s will be placed u p o n meeting the needs of the individual within her personal a n d professional g e o g r a p h y . T h e c o u r s e will include guest speakers, films and extensive group d i s c u s s i o n . Office Training 252 Interpersonal Skills a n d Organizational P s y c h o l o g y (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide students with basic p s y c h o l o g i c a l c o n c e p t s and e x p e r i e n c e in several skill areas important in b u s i n e s s . It i n c l u d e s practice in relating, a s s e r tion, feedback and problem solving skills. Other topics include small group behaviour, verbal and non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n ; d y n a m i c s of personality; leadership styles; supervisory difficulties a n d conflict resolution. A n experiential a p p r o a c h allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive setting. Office Training 257 Office Administration (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give the student an overview of the office as an organizational unit. T h e main c o m p o n e n t s of an office system are the p e r s o n n e l a n d the j o b to be d o n e . T h i s c o u r s e will d i s c u s s the f o l l o w i n g as they relate to the office: s e l e c t i o n a n d appraisal systems; research t e c h n i q u e s for preparation of department reports a n d p r o p o s a l s , p r i n c i ples of s u p e r v i s i o n a n d motivation factors; p l a n n i n g a n d o r g a n i z i n g of p e r s o n n e l a n d work flow. Office Training 270 Executive Office Procedures (F) (3,0,1) A n a l y s i s a n d d i s c u s s i o n of • practical p r o b l e m s in the executive office. S u p p l e m e n t a r y topics i n c l u d e word p r o c e s s i n g ; r e p r o g r a p h i c s a n d records m a n a g e m e n t systems. Office Training 271 Executive Office Procedures II (S) (3,0,1) A study of o r g a n i z a t i o n a l structure a n d d y n a m i c s . Related topics i n c l u d e s u p e r v i s o r y skills, interviewing a n d hiring, a n d interpersonal relationships in b u s i n e s s . Office Training 301 Directed Work Experience II (S) (1,30,2) In-term work e x p e r i e n c e involving three lecture hours and at least 30 hours of related office e x p e r i e n c e in the field. A D M I N I S T R A T I V E S E C R E T A R Y (Proposed) Part-Time Evening Program This series of evening c o u r s e s is designed as an upgrading program for people w h o are currently working as clerk-typists, bookkeepers, or general secretaries w h o w i s h to prepare themselves for a more r e s p o n s i b l e position. T h e program will e m p h a s i z e training in the administrative, supervisory a n d managerial functions of b u s i n e s s enterprises. It will also ideally suit the needs of those c a n d i d a t e s preparing to write the Certified P r o f e s s i o n a l Secretary e x a m i n a t i o n s . Students e n r o l e d in this program c o m p l e t e a series of eight c o u r s e s or 24 credits over a m i n i m u m of four semesters. It is anticipated that two e v e n i n g c o u r s e s will be offered each term. S t u d e n t s may, however, enrol in daytime s e c t i o n s of required c o u r s e s , if s p a c e is available. Satisfactory c o m p l e t i o n of the required c o u r s e s will earn the student a n Administrative Secretary Certificate from Capilano College. Prerequisites: T y p i n g - 60 w p m . S h o r t h a n d - 80 w p m a n d / o r dictatyping experience. At least t w o years general office e x p e r i e n c e or at the discretion of the C o o r d i n a t o r . While the particular s e q u e n c e of c o u r s e s is not rigid, the following are required: Credit T e r m 1: Business M a n a g e m e n t 187 Office T r a i n i n g 270 Hours Essentials of M a n a g e r i a l Practice E x e c u t i v e Office Procedures I 3 3 T e r m 2: Business M a n a g e m e n t 240 Office T r a i n i n g 257 Business Law 3 Office A d m i n i s t r a t i o n 3 T e r m 3: Business M a n a g e m e n t 180 Office T r a i n i n g 271 Introduction to Data Processing E x e c u t i v e Office P r o c e d u r e s II 3 3 T e r m 4: Business M a n a g e m e n t 177 Elective Contemporary Accounting Issues ' 3 3 89 WORD PROCESSING PROGRAMS WDPR (Proposed) 100 Basic Word Processing Operator Training T h i s is a o n e month introductory c o u r s e for people with w o r k i n g e x p e r i e n c e or who have recently c o m p l e t e d a r e c o g nized business office training program. Prerequisite is 50 wpm typing s p e e d a n d transcription skills. WDPR 200 W o r d Processing Administrative Support Training T h i s 4 month program i n c l u d e s skills training o n word p r o c e s s i n g equipment as well as p l a n n i n g a n d organization of the word p r o c e s s i n g functional unit. T h e p r o g r a m provides training for those currently w o r k i n g in the field or w h o are graduates from r e c o g n i z e d business office training programs. Prerequisite is 50 w p m typing s p e e d a n d transcription skills. WDPR 300 A d v a n c e d Administrative S u p p o r t T r a i n i n g in Word Processing This 8 month program includes all c o u r s e s in levels I and II plus word p r o c e s s i n g m a n a g e m e n t / s u p e r v i s i o n . A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have two years work experience or one years training in a r e c o g n i z e d b u s i n e s s office training program. Students must have 50 w p m typing s p e e d , transcription skills and g o o d B u s i n e s s E n g l i s h skills. WDPR 400 W o r d P r o c e s s i n g Administrative S u p p o r t Upgrading T h i s program e n a b l e s a p e r s o n w h o is e m p l o y e d to u p g r a d e skills a n d theory in w o r d p r o c e s s i n g over a two year period. Communications Department Instructional Faculty C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 156 C o b l e y , J . , B . A . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) , M . A . (Brit. C o l ) G o l d b e r g , G . , B . A . ( M c G i l l ) , M . A . (Brit. C o l . ) Kilian, C , B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (SFU) K u b i c e k , R „ B . A (Sir G e o r g e W i l l i a m s ) , M . A . ( S F U ) R e i d , B., B . A . (Alberta) W i t t m a n , M . , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . (Brit. C o l . ) Media R e s o u r c e s C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (S) (3,0,1) Writing and speaking skills related to the Media R e s o u r c e s student. Emphasis o n interviewing techniques, story-boarding, and adaptive writing. S p o k e n presentations are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 170 P u b l i c S p e a k i n g (F,S) (3,0,1) General Information T h e C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Department of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e has the b r o a d objective of providing students in the C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s with c o m p e t e n c e in the u s e of the E n g l i s h l a n g u a g e a n d in media c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . B a s i c t e c h n i c a l writing, research papers, s p o k e n p r e s e n tations, b u s i n e s s reports, press reports, a n d briefs are s o m e of the t o p i c s studied in a c o m m u n i c a t i o n s c o u r s e . C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 150 B a s i c C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F,S) (3,0,1) D e v e l o p m e n t of writing a n d s p e a k i n g skills, with material largely related to s p e c i f i c career g o a l s . Extensive practice in improving E n g l i s h b a s i c s , n u m e r o u s writing a s s i g n m e n t s , and at least o n e s p o k e n presentation. R e s e a r c h i n g , o r g a n i z i n g , a n d presenting different kinds of s p e e c h e s . Attention to v o i c e training, non-verbal c o m m u n i cation, a n d p u b l i c s p e a k i n g in various c o n t e x t s . C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 180 B a s i c J o u r n a l i s m I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the gathering, writing a n d editing of news material for print media. C o u r s e content i n c l u d e s s p e cific requirements of various types of newswriting; acceptable newswriting style; analysis of local, national, and world news. Students must have g o o d writing skills and be able to type at least 30 w o r d s per minute. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 181 B a s i c J o u r n a l i s m II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n s o l i d a t i o n a n d elaboration of material c o v e r e d in C M N S 180. Prerequisite: s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of C M N S 180 or p e r m i s s i o n of the instructor C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 151 B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (F.S) (3,0,1) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 190 T h e b a s i c s of b u s i n e s s writing: resumes, m e m o r a n d u m s , b u s i n e s s letters, a n d reports. D e v e l o p m e n t of suitable styles for different b u s i n e s s p u r p o s e s . At least o n e s p o k e n presentation. M a g a z i n e Article Writing (F,S) (3,0,1) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 152 Report Writing (F,S) (3,0,1) R e s e a r c h i n g a n d writing articles for p u b l i c a t i o n in news m e d i a a n d m a g a z i n e s , e s p e c i a l l y "trade" and special-interest periodicals. A n a l y s i s of m a g a z i n e readership, t e c h n i q u e s of research a n d interviewing, the current market for articles and development of a n effective prose style S t u d e n t s will write three articles in suitable format, a n d submit them for publication in e s t a b l i s h e d p e r i o d i c a l s . R e s e a r c h i n g , o r g a n i z i n g , a n d presenting information for b u s i n e s s a n d technical reports. Attention to g r a p h i c s , style, a n d report format. S p o k e n presentations using a u d i o v i s u a l aids are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 153 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s a n d the Arts (S) (3,0,1) T h e use of language in c o m b i n a t i o n with g r a p h i c a n d other arts. Attention to g r a p h i c s a n d l a n g u a g e used in advertising a n d propaganda. S p o k e n presentations using audiovisual aids are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 154 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Recreation (S) (3,0,1) W r i t i n g a n d s p e e c h related to O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n Management: reports, m e m o r a n d u m s , press releases, articles and briefs. S p o k e n presentations are required. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 155 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n (S) (3,0,1) Effective verbal a n d non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n , a n d the writing of letters, reports a n d briefs. S p o k e n presentations are required 91 Health and Human Services Instructional Faculty Adler, M X B.A. (Toronto), M . S . W . (Brit. Col.) B r o w n , J , B . S c . H . E c (Man.), P . G . (Van. Gen.) Clark, J , R . N . ( R e g i n a G e n e r a l Hospital), T e a c h i n g Dipl. (Sask.) Kulick, B , Orff T e a c h e r ' s Certificate (Toronto) Dipl. E . C . E . (Copenhagen) Pardy, J . L , B.A. (Windsor), M . E d . (Detroit) R a w s t h o r n e , M , B . H . E . (Brit. Col.) Rennie, L . J , B . S c . ( B r i g h a m Y o u n g ) Warrell. E . M , D i p l . P h y s . E d . (Liverpool), M . E d . (Western W a s h . State) W o r m a n , E , B . A , D i p l . C h i l d S t u d y (Toronto), C o o r d i n a t o r A p p l i c a t i o n s received by M a r c h will be e n s u r e d of c o n s i d e r a t i o n . T h o s e received after that date will be c o n s i dered IF s p a c e permits. A p p l i c a n t s are required to present a medical report on a form s u p p l i e d by the C o l l e g e , plus evidence of a b s e n c e of active t u b e r c u l o s i s . A p p l i c a n t s w h o have previously taken Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n c o u r s e s elsewhere may submit a record of these c o u r s e s for c o n s i d e r a t i o n for credit towards the C o l l e g e Diploma. Individual c o u r s e s may be taken if s p a c e permits, with the written p e r m i s s i o n of the c o u r s e C o o r d i n a t o r . Associate in Arts and Science Diploma General Information T h e Health and H u m a n S e r v i c e s Department offers the following programs: 1 Early Childhood Education Program - 2 years 2. Early Childhood Education Upgrading - part-time 3 Working with the Developmentally Handicapped - part-time 4 Homemaker Program - 12 w e e k s 5. Homemaker Program - part-time Early Childhood Education Program Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n is a two year program based on the C o m p e t e n c i e s in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n develo p e d by the Ministry of E d u c a t i o n , M a r c h 1979. O n c o m p l e tion of the four terms of the p r o g r a m , the student will have d e m o n s t r a t e d achievement of the Level II C o m p e t e n c i e s . U p o n fulfilment of 500 hours work e x p e r i e n c e required by the P r o v i n c i a l C h i l d C a r e Facilities L i c e n s i n g B o a r d , graduates will be qualified to be in charge of a centre for y o u n g children. Level I c o m p e t e n c i e s (Assistant level) are achieved at the end of the third term at w h i c h time the student may d e c i d e to seek e m p l o y m e n t as an assistant or to c o n t i n u e on for the S u p e r visor's level Students w h o select the first option may return later for the Fourth T e r m c o u r s e s . T h e program f o c u s e s on children from 18 months of age to 6 years and we are currently requesting the L i c e n s i n g B o a r d to r e c o g n i z e our graduates as qualified to work with this age range. T h e core material of the program c o n c e n t r a t e s on the study of h u m a n development a n d the foundations and p h i l o s o p h y of Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n . A n interrelated series of c o u r s e s permits detailed study of program organization, c u r r i c u l u m content and g u i d a n c e methods. Other areas of study include health, nutrition, first aid, family-life, the e x c e p t i o n a l c h i l d , p a r e n t - t e a c h e r r e l a t i o n s h i p s a n d the administration of p r e s c h o o l centres. T h e o r y and practice are closely related throughout the program, as students spend regular periods e a c h term o b s e r v i n g and participating in the C o l l e g e Day C a r e Centre a n d other p r e s c h o o l s under the supervision of C o l l e g e instructors. E a c h student has one field work placement in a S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m and o n e in an " U n d e r T h r e e " P r o g r a m , as well as 3 placements in regular 3 - 5 year old programs. C o u r s e s are presented in a manner w h i c h promotes active student participation through labs, practical demonstrations, reports, projects and general d i s c u s s i o n . C o n s i d e r a b l e responsibility is given students, enabling them to develop into creative, independent, competent persons. 92 Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements Applied Theory - Practicum Credit Hours Lab Hours 39 6 18 6 30 63 36 First Term C m n s . 150 E d u c a t i o n 152 E d u c a t i o n 154 Education 155" E d u c a t i o n 364 Basic C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 3 Program Development I . . 3 Health a n d First A i d . . . . 3 Human Growth and Development I 3 Applied Theory Practicum I 3 15 2 6 8 Second Term E d u c a t i o n 151 E d u c a t i o n 153 E d u c a t i o n 156 E d u c a t i o n 164 E d u c a t i o n 365 E d u c a t i o n 366 L a n g u a g e Arts Program D e v e l o p m e n t II Human Growth and Development I Nutrition Applied Theory P r a c t i c u m II Applied Theory P r a c t i c u m III 3 3 2 3 3 3 6 3 6 18 14 Third Term E d u c a t i o n 157 E d u c a t i o n 250 E d u c a t i o n 262 E d u c a t i o n 268 E d u c a t i o n 367 T h e C h i l d and Family Life Program D e v e l o p m e n t III Special Education I Interpersonal relations in t e a c h i n g Applied Theory P r a c t i c u m IV 3 3 3 2 3 3 6 15 8 Fourth T e r m C m n s . 150 E d u c a t i o n 252 E d u c a t i o n 264 E d u c a t i o n 368 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Early Childhood Education . . . Program D e v e l o p m e n t IV Preschool Administration I Applied Theory - 3 3 3 6 15 " E d u c a t i o n 155 H u m a n G r o w t h a n d D e v e l o p m e n t I must be taken prior to o r c o n c u r r e n t l y with E d u c a t i o n 152. Early C h i l d h o o d Education U p g r a d i n g Program - The Competency Approach T h i s is a part-time p r o g r a m d e s i g n e d for p e r s o n s w h o already hold E . C . E . qualifications (are registered with the C h i l d C a r e Facilities L i c e n s i n g Board) a n d have e x p e r i e n c e w o r k i n g in a centre for p r e - s c h o o l c h i l d r e n T h e s e a d v a n c e d level c o u r s e s are planned to update a n d extend k n o w l e d g e , awareness a n d skills using as a focus the e x p e r i e n c e , p r o b lems a n d q u e s t i o n s of the participants. C o u r s e outlines have been prepared in a c c o r d a n c e with Level II of the C o m p e t e n c i e s in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n (Ministry of E d u c a t i o n , M a r c h 1979). C o u r s e s will be offered o n a rotating basis in the evenings. A few of the c o u r s e s are a l s o available in the d a y time as part of the two year E . C . E . D i p l o m a program. Students may enrol in a single c o u r s e or complete the p r o g r a m for a C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate. T h e r e is no prescribed order in w h i c h c o u r s e s s h o u l d be taken, but students are requested to c o n sult with the program C o o r d i n a t o r before registering for A d v a n c e d P r a c t i c u m or Individual Project. G r a d u a t e s of s o m e E . C . E . P r o g r a m s will already have credit for s o m e of the c o u r s e s . For information about the course(s) offered in a particular semester, or to make an appointment, call the P r o g r a m C o o r dinator, 986-1911, local 361. A b r o c h u r e will b e mailed o n request. etc. w h o have had s o m e e x p e r i e n c e w o r k i n g with c h i l d r e n , and w h o wish to work with the developmentally h a n d i c a p p e d . T h e program will cover infancy through a d u l t h o o d . O n c o m p l e t i o n of the program the graduate will be qualified for s u c h positions as: S u p e r v i s o r y teacher in pres c h o o l s for children with s p e c i a l needs (with prior E . C . E . qualifications), residential c o u n s e l l o r in a group home, Assistant in a V o c a t i o n a l T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m , C h i l d C a r e Worker, Family S u p p o r t Worker. T h e c o u r s e s will be offered o n a rotating basis in the e v e n i n g . A few of the c o u r s e s are a l s o available in the day time as part of the two year Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m . Students may enter the program at the beginning of a n y term, a s there is n o prescribed order in w h i c h c o u r s e s must be taken. However students are requested to consult with the Program Coordinator before registering for Practicum (Applied Theory) or Individual Project. A n e x e m p t i o n c a n be granted for equivalent c o u r s e s taken previously. A d m i s s i o n requirements include an interview with the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r , a n d d o c u m e n t a t i o n of the prerequisite qualification as stated above. For a b r o c h u r e e x p l a i n i n g the entire program, information about the course(s) offered e a c h term, or to make an appointment, call 986-1911, local 361. Working with the Developmentally H a n d i c a p p e d Program Requirements C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate E d u c a t i o n 155 and 156 E d u c a t i o n 157 E d u c a t i o n 262 E d u c a t i o n 263 E d u c a t i o n 265 E d u c a t i o n 269 E d u c a t i o n 271 E d u c a t i o n 275 E d u c a t i o n 368 or equivalent c o u r s e work in Developmental Psychology T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life or equivalent S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n I o r equivalent S p e c i a l E d u c a t i o n II A d m i n i s t r a t i o n II Interpersonal S k i l l s II Individual Project P r o g r a m P l a n n i n g for the Developmentally Handicapped Applied Theory - Practicum V Early C h i l d h o o d Education U p g r a d i n g Program Requirements C a p i l a n o College Certificate Education Education Education Education 154 157 164 253 E d u c a t i o n 255 E d u c a t i o n 262 E d u c a t i o n 265 E d u c a t i o n 269 E d u c a t i o n 271 E d u c a t i o n 368 Health a n d First A i d T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life Nutrition A d v a n c e d P r o g r a m P l a n n i n g for the Preschool Centre Curriculum Enrichment Special Education A d m i n i s t r a t i o n II Interpersonal S k i l l s II Individual Project Applied Theory - Practicum V W o r k i n g with the Developmentally H a n d i c a p p e d Part-Time Programs T h i s part-time program is d e s i g n e d for p e r s o n s w h o hold a qualification in E a r l y C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n in a related field ie. T e a c h i n g , N u r s i n g , S o c i a l Work A i d , C h i l d C a r e W o r k e r 93 Education Courses Education 151 Language Arts (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 152 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the Program Coordinator. T h e f o c u s of this c o u r s e is on the development of listening skills a n d oral language. E m p h a s i s will be placed o n the teacher's role in implementing appropriate language activities to meet the particular needs of individual c h i l d r e n , i n c l u d i n g the E S L c h i l d . C o n s i d e r a t i o n will be given to the criteria for s e l e c t i o n of literature for the p r e s c h o o l c h i l d . T e c h n i q u e s for presenting stories a n d poetry will be d e v e l o p e d . Education 152 Program Development I (F) (3,2,1) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the p l a n n i n g a n d d e v e l o p m e n t of p r o g r a m s for p r e - s c h o o l centres with a major f o c u s o n D a y C a r e . B a s i c play activities a n d routines will be d i s c u s s e d with attention to their contribution to the development of the child, materials required a n d teaching methods. P r i n c i p l e s a n d m e t h o d s of g u i d a n c e will be studied. W e e k l y l a b s e s s i o n s provide direct involvement with materials. Education 153 Program Development II (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 152 a n d 155. Further study of program p l a n n i n g a n d development with particular reference to d a y care. W r i t i n g p r o g r a m g o a l s a n d activity plans will be e m p h a s i z e d . Attention will be given to meeting the needs of the individual c h i l d i n c l u d i n g the new c h i l d to the p r o g r a m , appropriate g u i d a n c e m e t h o d s for the c h i l d w h o is w i t h d r a w n , aggressive, etc. L a b s e s s i o n s provide further involvement with materials a n d activities. Education 154 Health a n d First A i d (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to familiarize students with s o m e of the c o m m o n c h i l d h o o d illnesses. Particular e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the m a n a g e m e n t of the y o u n g c h i l d with a health p r o b l e m in a p r e s c h o o l setting. T h e c o u r s e studies preventive health measures a n d first a i d practices a n d p r o c e d u r e s . O n s u c c e s s f u l c o m p l e t i o n of the c o u r s e the student will receive a St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e Safety O r i e n t e d First A i d Certificate.' Education 155 H u m a n Growth a n d Development I (F) (3,0,1) T h e first half of a two-part s e q u e n c e . A study of h u m a n growth a n d development from birth to the e n d of the pres c h o o l years. A n introductory study of theories, principles of development a n d c h i l d study t e c h n i q u e s . Education 156 H u m a n Growth a n d Development II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 155. A continuation of E d u c a t i o n 155 following the preschooler through the middle years of c h i l d h o o d , a d o l e s c e n c e a n d l a u n c h i n g into a d u l t h o o d . 94 Education 157 T h e C h i l d a n d Family Life (F) (3,0,1) A s o c i o l o g i c a l perspective o n family life in our culture a n d others, f o c u s i n g o n c h i l d h o o d s o c i a l i z a t i o n a n d the factors affecting its s o c i o - e c o n o m i c c o n d i t i o n s , cultural values a n d ideology, ethnic a n d racial origins. C o n s i d e r a t i o n of c h a n g i n g lifestyles, roles a n d values. T h e i r impact o n the family a n d implications for the p r e s c h o o l c h i l d . Education 164 Nutrition (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e i n t r o d u c e s the student to the basic nutrients a n d their role in h u m a n p h y s i o l o g y , a n d the s p e c i a l requirements of the y o u n g c h i l d for o p t i m u m health. T h e s e c o n d part of the c o u r s e deals with the preparation of foods a n d s n a c k s for p r e s c h o o l e r s , m e n u p l a n n i n g for day care facilities, f o o d storage a n d food sanitation. Education 250 Program Development III (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 a n d E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . A detailed look at c h i l d r e n ' s early c o n c e p t d e v e l o p m e n t in s c i e n c e , s o c i a l studies a n d mathematics. S t u d e n t s will work o n individual and g r o u p presentations of materials, activities and e x p e r i e n c e s for the y o u n g c h i l d . E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n the integration of these with other c u r r i c u l u m areas to achieve a b a l a n c e d , f l o w i n g , creative p r o g r a m . Included is a w e e k e n d field trip early in the term a n d w e e k l y lab experiences. Education 252 Program Development IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 a n d E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . A c o u r s e w h i c h c o m b i n e s theory a n d participation in Art, M u s i c a n d M o v e m e n t for y o u n g c h i l d r e n . T h e c o u r s e integrates a n d extends the e x p e r i e n c e a n d k n o w l e d g e gained in previous c o u r s e s . Implementation of activity p l a n s will b e required as the student furthers h e r / h i s t e a c h i n g skills. Education 253 A d v a n c e d Program Planning for the Preschool Centre (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in w h i c h the participants are e n c o u r a g e d to use their o w n work e x p e r i e n c e s as a starting point for a new look at the structure and c o m p o n e n t s of the p r o g r a m in a centre for y o u n g c h i l d r e n , a n d to extend their c o m p e t e n c y in g o a l setting, c u r r i c u l u m p l a n n i n g ( i n c l u d i n g routines) g u i d a n c e a n d evaluation. P a r t i c i p a n t s will be actively involved in projects a n d d i s c u s s i o n . Education 262 Special Education (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 a n d E d u c a t i o n 156 or by written permission of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . A c o u r s e w h o s e major g o a l s will be introduction to a n d general study of s p e c i a l needs of c h i l d r e n in order that the student may i n c r e a s e her/his abilities to identify a n d work with e x c e p t i o n a l p r e s c h o o l c h i l d r e n in regular or s p e c i a l programs. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n c o m m u n i t y facilities serving e x c e p t i o n a l c h i l d r e n a n d a p p l i c a t i o n will be m a d e to the gifted, d e v e l o p m e n t a l l y - d e l a y e d , n e u r o l o g i c a l l y h a n d i c a p p e d , e m o t i o n a l l y disturbed a n d m u l t i - h a n d i c a p p e d c h i l d . Education 263 Special Education II (F) (3,0,1) This is a c o u r s e w h i c h will provide the student with an opportunity to e x a m i n e a n d evaluate current issues related to w o r k i n g with the developmentally h a n d i c a p p e d . T o p i c s c o v e r e d will i n c l u d e p h a r m a c o l o g y , integration of the s p e c i a l needs p e r s o n into a regular setting, interacting with parents of the s p e c i a l needs individual, a s s e s s m e n t , a d v o c a c y etc. A s e l e c t i o n of current literature will be e x a m i n e d . E d u c a t i o n 264 Administration I (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to acquaint the student with the administrative functions n e c e s s a r y t o e n s u r e the effective operation of a program for y o u n g c h i l d r e n . T o p i c s c o v e r e d will include: licensing regulations, procedures for setting up a centre, w o r k i n g with a B o a r d of Directors, d e v e l o p i n g policies and p r o c e d u r e s , budget p l a n n i n g , hiring a n d d i s m i s s i n g staff, writing j o b d e s c r i p t i o n s , staff relationships, r e c o r d k e e p i n g . A s s i g n m e n t s will f o c u s o n practical a p p l i c a t i o n s a n d the development of a resource manual. Education 265 Administration II (Not planned for Fall 1981) With reference to centres for y o u n g c h i l d r e n a n d to p r o g r a m s serving individuals w h o a r e h a n d i c a p p e d , this c o u r s e will identify basic administrative functions w h i c h are n e c e s s a r y for effective o n g o i n g operation of the centre. Participants will draw from their e x p e r i e n c e to identify the various facets of the Director's role, a n d the skills required to carry out these tasks. Students will extend their ability to analyze, plan, o r g a n i z e , supervise a n d evaluate. Education 269 Interpersonal Relationships II (F) (3,0,1) (Not planned for Fall 1981) A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e w h i c h is planned to help the participants identify a n d demonstrate effective methods of e s t a b l i s h i n g a n d d e v e l o p i n g a mutually supportive relations h i p between h o m e a n d centre. S t u d e n t s will be actively involved in extending their c o m m u n i c a t i o n skills and problem solving abilities. T h e c o u r s e will rely heavily o n the work e x p e r i e n c e a n d questions of the participants. Education 271 Individual Project (F,S) (3,0,1) (Not planned for Fall 1981) In c o n s u l t a t i o n with the instructor the student will undertake an in-depth study of a p r o g r a m or an area of individual d e v e l o p m e n t relative to the s p e c i a l needs person or personal interest of the student. Education 255 C u r r i c u l u m Enrichment (F) (3,0,1) In this c o u r s e participants will have an opportunity through participation, d i s c u s s i o n a n d the use of resources to extend their "repertoire" of c u r r i c u l u m activities in s u c h areas as M u s i c a n d M o v e m e n t , C o o k i n g in the C l a s s r o o m , M a t h e m a tics g a m e s a n d m u c h more. S p e c i f i c areas included c a n be modified in a c c o r d a n c e with the interests of class members. Education 364 Applied T h e o r y - Practicum I (F) (3,6,2) Prerequisite: T a k e n c o n c u r r e n t l y with E d u c a t i o n 152 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . T h e first of a 5 part s e q u e n c e of c o u r s e s in w h i c h the student relates a c l a s s r o o m theory to its practical a p p l i c a t i o n through d i s c u s s i o n , observation a n d participation in a pres c h o o l p r o g r a m . T h i s c o u r s e has two a s p e c t s a) A n awareness of r e c o r d i n g methods a n d the development of skill in objectively o b s e r v i n g a n d r e c o r d i n g the behaviour of y o u n g children b) a practicum period of one full week in the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Day C a r e Centre, participating in the program under the direct g u i d a n c e of a teacher Education 268 Interpersonal Relationships in Teaching (F) (3,0,1) Education 365 - 367* A p p l i e d T h e o r y - Practicum II - IV (F,S) (3,6,2) Prerequisite: E d u c a t i o n 153 and E d u c a t i o n 15,6 or by written p e r m i s s i o n of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r . T h i s is a series of three c o u r s e s , in w h i c h c l a s s r o o m d i s c u s s i o n a n d supervised participation in a program for y o u n g c h i l d r e n c o m b i n e to e n a b l e the student to develop i n c r e a s i n g c o m p e t e n c e in w o r k i n g as part of a t e a c h i n g team, p l a n n i n g , i m p l e m e n t i n g a n d evaluating p r o g r a m activities, a n d interacting with children a n d their parents. In e a c h c o u r s e the student has a b l o c k field work placement of 5 w e e k s , 4 full days per week A s s i g n m e n t s are d e s i g n e d to facilitate the translation of theory into practice a n d to further develop the students' ability to observe a n d record children's behaviour. A n e x a m i n a t i o n of the role of the p r e s c h o o l teacher in establishing meaningful relationships with parents, colleagues and c o m m u n i t y representatives. S p e c i f i c c o m m u n i c a t i o n skills will be d e v e l o p e d through the g r o u p p r o c e s s , role play, s o c i o d r a m a a n d interviewing techniques. C o m m u n i t y resources a n d referral p r o c e d u r e s will a l s o be studied. 95 Education 368* Applied Theory - Practicum V (S) (6,6,2) Homemaker Program T h i s is a c o u r s e for students w h o are c o m p l e t i n g Level II of the C o m p e t e n c i e s in Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n . A 5 week block p r a c t i c u m placement is c o o r d i n a t e d with c l a s s r o o m d i s c u s s i o n , tutorials and a s s i g n m e n t s . S t u d e n t s e n r o l e d in w o r k i n g with the D e v e l o p m e n t a l l y H a n d i c a p p e d a n d the E . C . E . U p g r a d i n g P r o g r a m work c l o s e l y with the instructor to set up their o w n personal goals, plan a m e t h o d to achieve these a n d then implement this plan in a centre w h i c h may be the student's o w n w o r k p l a c e . T h i s 12 week full-time p r o g r a m qualifies the student to work under p r o f e s s i o n a l s u p e r v i s i o n as a m e m b e r of a H e a l t h C a r e T e a m providing care to individuals a n d families in their own h o m e s or in institutions. 'Note:Students in the 2 year Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n P r o g r a m will have one placement in a S p e c i a l E d u c a tion P r o g r a m , one in an " U n d e r 3 " P r o g r a m and two in regular 3-5 year old programs. Training includes: Full-time Day Program T h e L o n g T e r m C a r e P r o g r a m b e g u n by the Ministry of Health in J a n u a r y 1978 has resulted in an e v e r - g r o w i n g n e e d for people with this training to fill both full a n d part-time positions with p u b l i c a g e n c i e s a n d private c o m p a n i e s . J o b opportunities are excellent. 1. individual a n d g r o u p practice of d e m o n s t r a t e d skills 2. s u p e r v i s e d field work with local a g e n c i e s 3. s u p e r v i s e d p r a c t i c u m a s s i g n m e n t s in s e l e c t e d c o m m u n i t y homes 4. visits to c o m m u n i t y health a n d rehabilitation a g e n c i e s a n d institutions. Course Content Job Orientation — the e m p l o y m e n t market. Occupational Development — the role a n d f u n c t i o n of the homemaker. Protection — the need for h o m e safety, c o n t r o l l i n g c o m m o n hazards, p r o v i d i n g sanitation, i m p l e m e n t i n g c l e a n ing p r o c e d u r e s , m a i n t a i n i n g a p p r o v e d p e r s o n a l standards of hygiene a n d meeting c o m m o n e m e r g e n c i e s . Nutrition and Meal Management — the provision of adequate nutrition for clients of all a g e s a n d stages, ethnic backgrounds, and socio-economic conditions. Growth and Development — the u n d e r s t a n d i n g of individuals at various stages of g r o w t h a n d d e v e l o p m e n t a n d the appropriate h e l p i n g a p p r o a c h e s required in meeting basic needs. Communication — the a p p l i c a t i o n of the b a s i c p r i n c i p l e s of c o m m u n i c a t i o n to effective p e r f o r m a n c e o n the job. Health — the d e v e l o p m e n t of k n o w l e d g e a n d skills n e c e s s a r y to assist clients to maintain the activities of daily living. G r a d u a t e s receive a P r o v i n c i a l l y r e c o g n i z e d Certificate of C o m p e t e n c e in the H o m e m a k e r P r o g r a m . C E I C financial a s s i s t a n c e may be available for eligible adults. Part-Time Evening Program • T h e full-time c o u r s e is divided into 4 units e a c h of 15 weeks. T h e equivalent of the full-time p r o g r a m is a c h i e v e d by c o m p l e t i n g all 4 units. C l a s s e s are held 1 night a week, 6:30 p.m. - 9:30 p.m. Admission Requirements 1. Desire to work with people. 2. G o o d p h y s i c a l and mental health, (a m e d i c a l certificate a n d chest X - r a y are necessary) 3. Ability to c o m m u n i c a t e effectively in written a n d s p o k e n English. 4. M i n i m u m age 19. For c o u r s e c o m m e n c e m e n t dates, information call 986-1911, local 412. applications, and Media Resources Program Second Term Instructional Faculty Azaroft, P., B.A. (Heb. U. Israel) B i z z o c c h i , J.V.. B.A. ( M i c h i g a n ) T e a c h i n g C e r t . (Sec.) (Michigan) Blitstein, G . , B . A . (California) C o o k , R.D . B.A. (Toronto), A . A S . , M e d i a S p e c . Cert. (Capilano College) Kellington, T P , A . A S . , Media Spec. Cert. (Capilano College) L y n c h , N , B.A, (Western O n t a r i o ) , M.A. (Brit. C o l ) S i m p s o n , M , B.A. (Brit. Col.) T h o m p s o n . P., B . A (Stanford), M . E d ( M i n n e s o t a ) General Information G r a p h i c s for Productions M e d i a 151 M e d i a 153 M e d i a 155 C m n s . 156 Multi-media M e d i a 171 M e d i a 182 M e d i a A p p l i c a t i o n s II Media Resources Communications S m a l l Format T e l e v i s i o n Advanced Audio M e d i a 174 M e d i a 172 M e d i a 185 A u d i o T e c h n o l o g y II Video Technology Advanced Photography 3 3 3 15 3 .. 22.5 T h e M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m trains students for the g r o w i n g opportunities in using intermediate-level media t e c h n o l o g i e s in all forms of e d u c a t i o n a n d training. T h e c o r e p r o g r a m involves p r o d u c t i o n training in basic a n d a d v a n c e d p h o t o g r a p h y , g r a p h i c s , a u d i o , film, m u l t i - m e d i a , a n d television A l l students are trained in the basic t e c h n i c a l a n d aesthetic skills in these m e d i a a n d complete finished productions in them. In addition the p r o g r a m i n c l u d e s c o u r s e s in learning theory, resource centres a n d libraries, basic electronic systems, c o m m u n i c a t i o n s and the politics of media. Third Term M e d i a 253 M e d i a 254 M e d i a 260 M e d i a 271 . M e d i a A p p l i c a t i o n s III Slide-tape Productions . . Educational Television M e d i a 272 Video Technology A s s i g n m e n t s a n d c o u r s e s f o c u s o n the types of needs now being e x p r e s s e d in the media field. P r a c t i c u m s o c c u p y m u c h of the student's time in the fourth term. Fourth Term M e d i a 256 Learning Resources T h e program is oriented toward e d u c a t i o n a l institutions at all levels, s o c i a l a g e n c i e s , c o m m u n i t y m e d i a a n d j o u r n a l i s m , as well as industry. Work opportunities in this field include p r o d u c t i o n , distribution, training for media skills and social animation roles. M e d i a 301 Special M e d i a 302 Instructional M e d i a 303 T h e program c o n s i s t s of four terms of study and begins e a c h year in the Fall T e r m . M e d i a 263 T h e M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t in Education and Training . . Technical A p p l i c a t i o n forms are available from the department. A p p l i c a t i o n s are accepted starting in J a n u a r y a n d are dealt with on a 'first c o m e ' basis. Interviews are c o n d u c t e d until the class is filled. T h e r e are no interviews in J u n e a n d J u l y . M e d i a 304 M e d i a 305 M e d i a 306 C m n s . 159 Associate in Arts and S c i e n c e Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s G e n e r a l E d u c a t i o n Requirements First Term Media Media Media Media 154 173 181 183 M e d i a 189 Basic Communications . . . G r a p h i c s for the M e d i a Specialist Media Applications I Audio Technology I Basic Audio Production .. Theory & Applications Of P h o t o g r a p h y Production Research Methods 91.5 30 Credit Hours Lab Hours 6 3 25.5 6 3 3 21 12 3, 3 Instructional 3 Media 6 C o m p u t e r s in Education .. . F r e e l a n c i n g in M e d i a . . . . Medianalysis Media Resources Communications 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Studio Lab Hours 30 3 6 1.5 3 3 22 5 82.5 9 3 6 3 3 3 Diploma Credit Hours C m n s . 150 M e d i a 152 3 1.5 1.5 3 Option Courses E a c h term the department will offer s o m e c o u r s e s that are open to college students a n d c o m m u n i t y members not enroled full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . T h e s e c o u r s e s carry c o l l e g e credit a n d may be a p p l i e d towards a C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e D i p l o m a . In general, these c o u r s e s are n u m b e r e d M e d i a 050 to M e d i a 081. C h e c k the timetable to see w h i c h ones will be offered in a given term. M e d i a 051 Video Studies (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) A n introduction to the role of video in a variety of c o m m u n i t y situations. S t u d e n t s will study the effect of T V on our society a n d look at other uses for video in affecting change. 97 Media 052 Small Format Media Studies (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) T h e uses of small format e d u c a t i o n a l media will be e x p l o r e d in this c o u r s e . Filmstrips. slide tape, still photography a n d other m e d i a will be d i s c u s s e d a n d a n a l y z e d . Media 053 Film Studies (F) (3,0,1) (Open) A study of contemporary and historical films. The lectures, d i s c u s s i o n s , a n d assignments will be b a s e d on films s h o w n in the c l a s s and on selected readings in film history, criticism, a n d history. T h i s c o u r s e is for students not e n r o l e d full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . Media 059 Audio Applications (F.S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d for people who w i s h to make more effective use of their tape recorders and who wish to learn simple editing p r o c e d u r e s . , Media 060 Graphic Applications (F.S.SU) (1.5,0..5) (Open) T h e use of g r a p h i c s as it applies to m e d i a p r o d u c t i o n . Lettering, s i l k s c r e e n i n g a n d other forms of g r a p h i c s will be studied as they a p p l y to media s u c h as film, T V , slide tape, overhead transparencies. Media 061 Slide-tape Productions (F,S,SU) (1.5.0..5) (Open) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d for people w i s h i n g to improve their present skill in slide tape p r o d u c t i o n s . S t u d e n t s will p r o d u c e a slide tape u s i n g their own slides a n d s o u n d tracks. Media 062 Photographic Usage (S) (3,0,1) (Open) A n introduction for b e g i n n i n g p h o t o g r a p h e r s T h e c o u r s e will c o v e r s u c h t o p i c s as e x p o s u r e , depth of field, treatment of motion, c h o i c e of lenses, basic lighting, creativity in photography, and p u r c h a s i n g of equipment Participants to s u p p l y their own c a m e r a s and supplies. T h i s c o u r s e is for students not enroled full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . Media 063 Advanced Photographic Usage (S) (3,0,1) (Open) A c o u r s e in a d v a n c e d p h o t o g r a p h y for e x p e r i e n c e d ' p h o t o g r a p h e r s . In a given term the c l a s s might centre on free lance p h o t o g r a p h y , creative p h o t o g r a p h y , p h o t o j o u r n a l i s m , or other a d v a n c e d topics. Students to use their own e q u i p ment. T h i s c o u r s e is for students not enroled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 064 Film Usage (S) (1.5,0,.5) (Open) A c o u r s e in film making for amateur film makers. T h e class will cover film aesthetics a n d techniques for beginners. T o p i c s include c a m e r a work, editing, titling, use of s o u n d , a n d c h o i c e of equipment. S t u d e n t s to use their o w n e q u i p m e n t a n d supplies. Media 070 Basic Photography - Open Lab (F,S) (3,0,1) (Open) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in b e g i n n i n g p h o t o g r a p h y similar to M e d i a 072. T h i s c o u r s e will provide open a c c e s s to laboratory times in p l a c e of structured laboratory instruction. N o t for students e n r o l e d full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program. Media 071 Advanced Photography - Open Lab (F,S) (3,0,1) (Open) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in a d v a n c e d p h o t o g r a p h y similar to M e d i a 073 T h i s c o u r s e will provide o p e n a c c e s s to laboratory times in place of structured laboratory instruction. Not for students e n r o l e d full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program. Media 072 Basic Photography (SU) (3,3,1) (Open) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in b e g i n n i n g p h o t o g r a p h y . S i m i l a r to M e d i a 183, this c o u r s e is not for students enroled full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . Media 073 Advanced Photography (SU) (3,3,1) (Open) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in a d v a n c e d p h o t o g r a p h y . S i m i l a r to M e d i a 185, this c o u r s e is for students not e n r o l e d full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . Media 074 Basic Film Making (SU) (3,3,1) (Open) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in film m a k i n g , s i m i l a r to M e d i a 253. T h i s c o u r s e is not for students e n r o l e d full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . Media 075 Basic Film Making - Open Lab (F.S) (3,0,1) (Open) A practical a n d lecture c o u r s e in c i n e m a t o g r a p h y , similar to M e d i a 253. but more limited in s c o p e and depth of coverage. T h i s c o u r s e will provide a c c e s s to p r o d u c t i o n facilities rather than structured laboratory instruction. N o t for students enroled full-time in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . Media 081 Basic Audio Production (SU) (3,0,1) (Open) A n introduction to the b a s i c s of a u d i o p r o d u c t i o n t e c h n i q u e s for students not e n r o l e d in the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s Program Media 151 Graphics for Multi-Media Productions (S) (3,0,1) A c o u r s e in audiovisual g r a p h i c s to p r o d u c e g r a p h i c s appropriate for use in slide-tape s h o w s , a n i m a t e d films, etc. Media 152 Graphics for the Media Specialist (F) (3,0,1) Media 181 Basic Audio Production (F) (3,3,1) An introduction to the equipment and techniques used by the graphic designer in media productions. Most ot the course is devoted to studio assignments, involving layout and typography, photography, silkscreen and overhead transparencies and their application to media production. An introduction to basic production techniques for educational materials. Emphasis will be on interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, and mixing. The course will also cover the proper operation of microphones, tape recorders and dub/mix facilities. Media 153 Film Animation (S) (3,0,1) Media 182 Advanced Audio Production (S) (3,0,1) An introduction to film animation techniques using Super 8 film, basic motion picture camera and studio lighting techniques in lectures, demonstrations and workshop exercises, including a wide range of film animation media; drawing on film; bleaching; table top animation; cutouts; camera animation of graphics and photographs; titling and basic animation cell techniques. Media 154 Media Applications (F) (6,0,2) An introduction to the educational and social uses of media. Emphasis will be on projects involving basic media, photography, graphics, transparencies, etc. Media 155 Media Applications II (S) (3,0,1) Intermediate course in the educational and social uses of media. Introduction to theories of learning, communication systems, and educational applications. Media 171 Small Format Television (S) (3,0,1) Introduction in television production. The course will centre on uses of the half-inch portable "rover" system Media 172 Video Technology (S) (1.5,0,.5) An introduction to video systems, including a history of video technology, components of a complete video system, and a comparison of different formats. Media 173 Audio Technology I (F) (1.5,0,.5) An introduction to electronics emphasizing potential application in understanding and maintaining basic audio equipment. Included in the course are a survey and history of audio technology, an examination of tape recorders, speakers and microphones and consideration for various components of music and location sound reinforcement and recording. Media 174 Audio Technology II (S) (1.5,0,.5) A continuation of audio systems examination, with priority given to the care, maintenance and troubleshooting of all forms of audio equipment. The practical application of test equipment, critical analysis of test reports and product specifications and an introduction to other basic equipment are also presented. w A practical and lecture course covering documentaries, drama, satire, dramatization, music recording and special learning formats. Some of the work will involve the department's production studio. Media 183 Theory and Applications of Photographic Production (F) (6,3,2) A beginning course in photographic theory and practice, examining basic principles of camera operation; exposure; developing and printing. Media 185 Advanced Photography (S) (3,3,1) The application of photographic techniques, with emphasis on combining shot sequences to tell a story, as well as editing, layout and presentation. Media 189 Research Methods for the Media Specialist (S) (3,0,1) Research and background techniques for media productions. The role of the media specialist in consultation with clients and content experts in interviewing, and in utilizing libraries, newspapers and other sources of material. Media 253 Film Making (F) (6,3,2) An introduction to basic motion picture production; camera; film stock,, lighting; exposure controls; lenses and perspectives; camera movement; pictorial and directional continuity; editing, titling, scripting, with emphasis upon film as a graphic medium. A production course emphasizing continuity, dramatic and educational films, utilizing Super 8 equipment. Media 254 Media Applications III (F) (3,3,1) Further work in uses and applications of media in a field setting. The role of the Resource Centre in an institution. Media 256 Learning Resources Centre (S) (3,0,1) A course in which the student will produce a plan of an audiovisual resource in relation to the developing concept,of total learning resources services. 99 Media 260 Audiovisual Graphics (F) (3,3,1) A basic c o u r s e in the principles of graphic information and preparation of g r a p h i c materials for c l a s s r o o m instructional p u r p o s e s , film or television p r o d u c t i o n s , i n c l u d i n g w o r k s h o p a s s i g n m e n t s with c o l o u r t o n e t e c h n i q u e s ; p h o t o g r a p h i c p a s t e - u p a n d r e d u c t i o n t e c h n i q u e s ; the p r o d u c t i o n of diagrams; basic d i s p l a y a n d flow charts. Media 263 Technical Applications IV (S) (1.5,0,.5) D e s i g n i n g of s y s t e m s for m e d i a p r o d u c t i o n a n d delivery. Includes b u d g e t i n g a n d p u r c h a s i n g of e q u i p m e n t s y s t e m s , a c c o m m o d a t i o n of s y s t e m s , d e s i g n i n g to institutional needs and r e s o u r c e s , a n d interfacing of different types of systems. Media 271 Educational Television Systems (F) (6,3,2) A production c o u r s e in medium format television, including portable W a n d 1" videotape equipment, s i n g l e - c a m e r a p r o d u c t i o n s , d o c u m e n t a r i e s , a n d full studio p r o d u c t i o n s . T r a i n i n g i n c l u d e s c a m e r a work, directing a n d s w i t c h i n g , lighting, editing, g r a p h i c s , telecine. Media 272 Video Technology (F) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of video s y s t e m s with an e m p h a s i s on colour, the practical a p p l i c a t i o n of test equipment, s y s t e m s d e s i g n , and a look into the future of video t e c h n o l o g y Media 301 Specialized Instructional Aids (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of the specialty c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A n a d v a n c e d c o u r s e in the p l a n n i n g a n d preparation of special g r a p h i c a n d instructional a i d s for c l a s s r o o m , film and T V p r o d u c t i o n s , as well as the study of p r o d u c t i o n t e c h niques, colourtone production and other display media. A field p r a c t i c u m c o u r s e involving one or more major a s s i g n m e n t s . Media 302 Instructional Media Productions (S) (6,0,2) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of s p e c i a l t y c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A n advanced c o u r s e in media productions, including audio, slide, tape, film, v.t.r. and e.t.v. as these relate to e d u c a t i o n a l and training needs, with p r o d u c t i o n styles for specific needs a n d a u d i e n c e s . A field p r a c t i c u m c o u r s e involving o n e or more a s s i g n m e n t s . 100 Media 303 The Media Specialist in Education and Training (S) (3,8,1) Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n of specialty c o u r s e s in the first year of the M e d i a R e s o u r c e s P r o g r a m . A c o u r s e c o n c e r n e d with the uses of m e d i a for motivation, triggers, information t r a n s m i s s i o n , emotive learning a n d selfawareness; the relationship of the M e d i a S p e c i a l i s t to e d u cation in g e n e r a l , with e m p h a s i s o n the tasks c o n f r o n t i n g him. A field p r a c t i c u m c o u r s e involving o n e or more major assignments Media 304 Computers in Education (S) (1.5,0,.5) A theoretical and h a n d s - o n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the use of c o m p u t e r s in e d u c a t i o n S t u d e n t s will learn the s e t - u p , operation a n d elementary p r o g r a m m i n g of m i c r o - c o m p u t e r systems. T h e c o u r s e will c o n s i d e r the different types of c o m p u t e r - a s s i s t e d i n s t r u c t i o n (CAI) b e i n g u s e d , a n d the basics of d e s i g n a n d evaluation of C A I p r o g r a m s . T h e potentials for linking c o m p u t e r s with other media will be examined. Media 305 Freelancing (S) (1.5,0,.5) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to many of the skills n e e d e d to survive in the e v e r - g r o w i n g , even competitive w o r l d of A u d i o v i s u a l p r o d u c t i o n . S o m e of the areas to be reviewed are f i n a n cial, legal, marketing, portfolio preparation a n d d e v e l o p i n g clientele. Media 306 Medianalysis (S) (1.5,0,.5) A n introductory critical a n a l y s i s of m a s s a n d alternative media — radio, T V , newspapers, magazines, records a n d other software — from a number of different perspectives, i n c l u d i n g production techniques, social impact, influences o n the media, historical and t e c h n o l o g i c a l development, evolution of m e d i a s o p h i s t i c a t i o n and potential future role of media in society. T h e c o u r s e , prerequisite is one a n d a half years of m e d i a p r o d u c t i o n a n d familiarity with m e d i a terminology. Music Instructional Faculty A r d i e l , F.. C o m m e r c i a l Guitarist. C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m A r m s t r o n g , K., A . R . C . M . (Royal C o l l e g e of M u s i c , L o n d o n ) , University T r a n s f e r P r o g r a m Beatty, B., B.Sc. (Phys. Ther.), C P A . Teacher's Cert. ( M c G i l l ) , Music Therapy Program B o h n a , N., B . M u s (Brit. C o l ) . V o i c e Boyle, G . , P e r c u s s i o n Branter, D , B . M u s . , M . M u s . (Indiana), C l a s s i c a l / C o m m e r c i a l Woodwinds B r o w n , D., S t r i n g s Burke, K., B.A. ( A n t i o c h ) , M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Cernauskas. K , Diploma (Salzburg), B.Mus. (Toronto), Classical Woodwinds C o x , G . , B . M u s . (Eastman), C l a s s i c a l W o o d w i n d s Daniels, P., B.Mus. (Brit. C o l . ) , M . M u s . (Julliard), C l a s s i c a l Woodwinds Doyle, R., C o m m e r c i a l P i a n o D u n a w a y , B., B.A. (Western W a s h i n g t o n ) , Strings Falls, L., A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s , M . M u s . (Brit. C o l . ) , Music Coordinator F e i n g o l d , S., B.A. (Hons.) E n g l i s h (SFU) G r a y s o n , J . , M.A. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s ( S F U ) , M u s i c T h e r a p y Program G u r r , R., M u s i c T h e r a p y Guitar H i g h a m , P., B.A. (Alta.), L . R . A . M . (Royal A c a d e m y , L o n d o n ) , M.Mus. (Alta). Classical Guitar H u n t s m a n , E., P h . D . (Washington), M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Inman, S., M.A. ( C a l i f ) , M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Keenlyside. T., B.Mus (Brit. C o l ) , C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c Program K i n g , S., B . M u s . (Brit. C o l ) , C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m K o b y l a n s k y , K., B.Mus., M . M u s . (Brit. C o l ) , University Transfer P r o g r a m < K r e b s , S., M . M u s . (Hamburg), M u s i c T h e r a p y P i a n o K r e b s , J . J . B . , D i p l o m a I (Inst, of C h e m . T e c h n o l o g y ) , D i p l o m a II, R e s e a r c h T e c h n o l o g y (Royal D u t c h S o c i e t y of C h e m i s t r y ) , D i p l o m a , M u s i c T h e r a p y (U of V i e n n a ) . R e g i s t e r e d M u s i c T h e r a p y (West G e r m a n y ) , M u s i c Therapy Program K u k u r u d z a , I , C o m m e r c i a l Guitarist, C o m m e r c i a l G u i t a r / B a s s Lenhart, R., Cert., D i p l o m a (Prague), Strings M c M a s t e r , N., B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , D i p l o m a , M u s i c T h e r a p y (Nordoff & R o b b i n s ) . M.T.A.. M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m Moffitt, E., B M u s . ( M c G i l l ) . D i p l o m a , M u s i c T h e r a p y ( C a p i l a n o ) , M.T.A., M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m M o o r h o u s e , L., A . T . C . M . / L . R . C . T . (Toronto), C l a s s i c a l P i a n o Newman, J . , Voice Reveley, M., B . M u s . (Brit. C o l ) , C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m S i m p s o n , J . . B . M u s . (Brit. C o l ) . University Transfer P r o g r a m S l e m o n , P., B.A. (Toronto), B . S c , B . M u s . (Brit. C o l . ) , M . M A. ( M c G i l l ) , University Transfer P r o g r a m T h o m p s o n , R , A A (Douglas), C o m m e r c i a l G u i t a r W h i t i n g , J , L T . C . L . / F . T . C . L . (Trinity), C l a s s i c a l P i a n o Wikjord, B., P e r c u s s i o n W o l d . A., B M u s . (Brit. C o l . ) , A . R . C . T . (Toronto). C o m m e r c i a l Music Program Worst, R., C o m m e r c i a l B a s s i Music Therapy Practicum Placements and Supervisors Bob Berwick Preschool Sup: Wanda Justice B u r n a b y M e n t a l Health: T h e M a p l e s S u p : Keith P h i l l i p s C h o w n Adult Day C e n t r e Sup: Brooke Morris G . F . S t r o n g Rehabilitation C e n t r e Sup: Madelon Schoutes Kettle F r i e n d s h i p S o c i e t y Sup: Suzanne Jean Oakridge School Sup: Alan Hasle Pearson Hospital Sup: Julie McFerron Sunnyhill Hospital Sup: Marianne Moser U B C Extended Care Sup: Susan Peterson U B C Health S c i e n c e s Day C a r e S u p : Liz Moffitt Valleyview H o s p i t a l Sup: Kerry Burke V . G . H . Health Unit for C h i l d r e n Sup. Sharie Scheske Westside Community Care Team Sup: Carolyn Atkinson Woodlands School S u p : David C r e i g h t o n General Information C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers three programs: the C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m , the M u s i c T h e r a p y P r o g r a m and the M u s i c Transfer P r o g r a m . Most c o u r s e s are o p e n to part-time students. Commercial Music Program T h i s program offers the a s p i r i n g jazz m u s i c i a n an in-depth g r o u n d i n g in his/her field. T h e w o r k i n g m u s i c i a n will also gain deeper u n d e r s t a n d i n g a n d practice of h i s / h e r craft as a part-time student. Four theory c o u r s e s offer a thorough insight into the tonal period a n d 20th century t e c h n i q u e s O r c h e s t r a t i o n a n d arranging c o u r s e s will e n a b l e the student to use h i s / h e r theoretical k n o w l e d g e in more practical ways. Improvisation a n d Private M u s i c Instruction c o u r s e s develop the soloistic p e r f o r m a n c e of the student E n s e m b l e c o u r s e s will permit the student to e x p e r i e n c e work in a large stage band or in smaller jazz e n s e m b l e s . All C o m m e r c i a l & University Transfer m u s i c c o u r s e s carry transfer credit towards a B . M u s . degree in J a z z at the University of Western W a s h i n g t o n All full-time C o m m e r c i a l students will be required to take e n s e m b l e e a c h semester S t u d e n t s not ready to enter the d i p l o m a p r o g r a m will be advised as to appropriate c o u r s e w o r k . 101 Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Music Transfer Program Credit Hours Lab Hours Major Program Requirements 75 4 First Term Credit Hours Lab Hours M u s i c 200 M u s i c 170 M u s i c 140 M u s i c 180 M u s i c 114 M u s i c 194 M u s i c 188 M u s i c 184 Theory V History of J a z z Private M u s i c Instruction . . Improvisation Class Piano Repertoire Improvisation E n s e m b l e . . . S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g .. 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 1.5 3 16.5 Second Term M u s i c 201 M u s i c 141 M u s i c 115 M u s i c 181 M u s i c 195 M u s i c 154 M u s i c 171 M u s i c 184 M u s i c 185 T h e o r y VI Private M u s i c Instruction . . Class Piano Improvisation Repertoire Orchestration History of R o c k Improvisation E n s e m b l e . . . . S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g .. 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 15 1.5 3 19.5 1 1 T h e o r y VII Private M u s i c Instruction . . . Arranging Class Piano Repertoire Improvisation Improvisation E n s e m b l e . S o n g Writing Sightsinging/EarTraining .. 3 1.5 > 3 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 19.5 S o m e c o u r s e s also carry transferability into the F a c u l y of E d u c a t i o n at U B C . In addition students desiring to transfer into the Faculty of Arts with a major in music may take M u s i c 100/101 a n d M u s i c 120/1 in their first year, a n d M u s i c 200/1 and 220/1 in their s e c o n d year. M u s i c Transfer students will be advised to take the S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g c o u r s e ( M U 184/185) d e p e n d i n g o n the results of their theory placement test. 1 Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements 1 Third Term M u s i c 250 M u s i c 240 M u s i c 254 M u s i c 214 M u s i c 294 M u s i c 280 M u s i c 288 M u s i c 270 M u s i c 284 T h i s program is d e s i g n e d for students w h o desire to go on to a B . M u s . degree p r o g r a m at a C a n a d i a n university. A l l c o u r s e s in this program carry transfer to the M u s i c Department of the University of B . C . Transferability has also been arranged with the Faculty of M u s i c at the University of Victoria T h e program c o n s i s t s of a liberal arts e d u c a t i o n a n d s p e c i a l ized m u s i c training, i n c l u d i n g theory, history a n d a p p l i e d music. M u s i c 120 M u s i c 130 M u s i c 140 M u s i c 110 M u s i c 210 M u s i c 114 M u s i c 100 Elective o r 1 A n y transferable English course History I Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction .. Class Strings Class Woodwinds Class Piano '. T h e o r y III C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r Fourth Term M u s i c 251 M u s i c 241 M u s i c 255 M u s i c 215 M u s i c 295 M u s i c 291 M u s i c 289 M u s i c 260 M u s i c 285 60 24 4 84 4 3 3 3 1.5 3 1-5 3 3 21 T h e o r y VIII Private M u s i c Instruction . . . Arranging Class Piano Repertoire Improvisation Improvisation E n s e m b l e . . . C o m m e r c i a l Relations in M u s i c Sightsinging/EarTraining .. 3 15 3 15 3 1.5 1.5 - 1 Second Term English 1 15 3 19.5 1 Note: T h o s e students w h o w i s h to enter T h e o r y 200 s h o u l d k n o w the R u d i m e n t s of T h e o r y ( M u s i c 010). S t u d e n t s who do not have e n o u g h b a c k g r o u n d in theory will be required to take M u s i c 010. M u s i c 190/1 & 290/1 may be substituted for M u s i c 140/1 in the C o m m e r c i a l M u s i c P r o g r a m only. S e e registration p r o c e d u r e printed after M u s i c T r a n s f e r Program 102 Lab Hours First Term English 1 Credit Hours M u s i c 121 M u s i c 131 M u s i c 141 M u s i c 111 M u s i c 211 M u s i c 115 M u s i c 101 Elective o r A n y transferable English course History II Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction . . Class Strings Class Woodwinds Class Piano T h e o r y IV C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r 3 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 3 1 3 21 1 Music Therapy Program Third Term E n g l i s h 200 M u s i c 200 M u s i c 230 M u s i c 110 M u s i c 210 M u s i c 220 M u s i c 240 M u s i c 214 Elective o r Literature to 1660 Theory V Ensemble C l a s s Strings Class Woodwinds History III Private M u s i c Instruction . . Class Piano C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 1 3 21 1 Fourth Term E n g l i s h 201 M u s i c 201 M u s i c 231 M u s i c 111 M u s i c 211 M u s i c 221 M u s i c 241 M u s i c 215 Elective Literature since 1660 T h e o r y VI Ensemble ClassStrings Class Woodwinds History VI Private M u s i c Instruction .. Class Piano C h o s e n in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the C o o r d i n a t o r 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 1 3 21 1 B o t h the c o m m e r c i a l and m u s i c transfer p r o g r a m s offer students e n r o l e d in other C o l l e g e p r o g r a m s a c o n t i n u i n g e d u c a t i o n in m u s i c a n d elective credit. N u m e r o u s m u s i c c o u r s e s are available to part-time students. A l l a p p l i c a n t s for either the C a r e e r or the M u s i c T r a n s f e r programs must do the f o l l o w i n g : 1. C o m p l y with general a d m i s s i o n requirements of C a p i l a n o College 2. Participate in a private interview with the C o o r d i n a t o r of M u s i c a n d / o r P r o g r a m Instructor. 3. Write a theory placement e x a m i n a t i o n . 4. P l a y an audition on their major instrument 5. T a k e an E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test 6. S t u d e n t s are advised to take a hearing test a n d submit the results to the department. A u d i t i o n s will involve the presentation of a short prepared p i e c e a n d a d e m o n s t r a t i o n of the student's instrumental t e c h n i q u e a n d sightreading ability. R e t u r n i n g c o m m e r c i a l m u s i c students may pre-register d u r i n g the m o n t h of A p r i l . N e w full-time students d e m o n strating sufficient instrument a n d / o r theoretical a c c o m p l i s h ment in their placement test a n d audition may pre-register d u r i n g M a y a n d A u g u s t to e n s u r e their full enrolment. Parttime c o m m e r c i a l students may register during in-person registration. , This program trains students to use m u s i c as a therapeutic m e d i u m in a variety of treatment settings. M u s i c therapists can be e m p l o y e d in psychiatric settings, s c h o o l s a n d h o m e s for retarded c h i l d r e n and adults, general hospitals, facilities for h a n d i c a p p e d p e o p l e , c o r r e c t i o n a l institutions, extended care units and geriatric hospitals, s c h o o l s for emotionally disturbed a n d behaviour problem children as well as centres for c o n c e n t r a t i n g on preventative m e d i c i n e s u c h as h u m a n growth and awareness institutes. S t u d e n t s w i l l be i n t r o d u c e d to s e v e r a l e s t a b l i s h e d therapeutic models, will develop their musical a n d interpersonal skills, a n d apply these developing skills in practicum settings. P r a c t i c u m placements a n d supervisors are listed under Instructional Faculty. T h e list will c h a n g e slightly from semester to semester. S t u d e n t s will be e x p e c t e d to s y n t h e s i z e p e r s o n a l therapeutic a p p r o a c h e s from their o w n values a n d abilities, as well as from the c o u r s e information. G r a d u a t e s will be e q u i p p e d to d e s i g n m u s i c therapy p r o g r a m s for any age g r o u p with mental, p h y s i c a l or e m o t i o n a l disabilities, in s u c h settings as s c h o o l s , g r o u p h o m e s , small treatment centres or provincial treatment institutions offering psychiatric, special e d u c a t i o n a n d s o m e physiotherapy programs M u s i c therapists s h o u l d expect to earn salaries c o m p a r a b l e with o c c u p a tional therapists, p s y c h i a t r i c nurses, c l i n i c a l p s y c h o l o g i s t s , d e p e n d i n g on their delegated amount of responsibility on a therapeutic team. In addition to the M u s i c T h e r a p y coursework, appropriate m u s i c a n d p s y c h o l o g y c o u r s e s (to a m a x i m u m of 18 credit hours per semester) may be p r e s c r i b e d . Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Credit Hours Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements 58.5 6 64.5 Semester 1 Music Therapy Music Therapy M u s i c 140 M u s i c 180 Music Therapy Music Therapy 150 160 190 170 The Influence of M u s i c Music Therapy I Private M u s i c Instruction Improvisation Practicum I Intervention in C h i l d Development — 3 3 1.5 1.5 6 3 18 M u s i c transfer students may register at a n y time. A l l interviews, auditions and placement tests will be held in M a y a n d A u g u s t of 1981. Interested p e r s o n s are a s k e d to p h o n e the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Department, 986-1911, for further information. Semester 2 M u s i c T h e r a p y 180 M u s i c T h e r a p y 151 M u s i c T h e r a p y 161 M u s i c 141 M u s i c T h e r a p y 191 P s y c h 222 Interpersonal S k i l l s for Music Therapy T h e Influence of M u s i c M u s i c T h e r a p y II Private M u s i c Instruction P r a c t i c u m II Abnormal Psychology — 1.6 3 3 1.5 6 3 18 103 Semester 3 M u s i c T h e r a p y 260 M u s i c 240 M u s i c T h e r a p y 290 M u s i c T h e r a p y 250 P s y c h 201 Music Therapy Technique . . . Private M u s i c Instruction P r a c t i c u m III M u s i c a n d the Creative Arts . Group Dynamics 3 1.5 6 15 3 Music 030 B e g i n n i n g Ensemble (F) (3,0,1) E n s e m b l e e x p e r i e n c e for those students not yet ready to enter M u s i c 100 S e e M u s i c 130 15 Semester 4 M u s i c T h e r a p y 261 M u s i c 265 M u s i c T h e r a p y 291 M u s i c T h e r a p y 264 Professional Development Private M u s i c Instruction P r a c t i c u m IV Clinical Orientation ... 3 1.5 6 3 13.5 C o n t i n u a t i o n in the p r o g r a m a n d g r a n t i n g of the Arts a n d S c i e n c e d i p l o m a will be contingent u p o n d e m o n s t r a t i o n of an adequate level of p e r s o n a l , a c a d e m i c a n d clinical skills as jointly evaluated e a c h semester by the student, m u s i c therapy faculty a n d field supervisors A l l students entering M u s i c T h e r a p y must: 1 C o m p l y with the general c o l l e g e entrance requirements. 2. Participate in a n interview with the M u s i c C o o r d i n a t o r a n d / o r a M u s i c T h e r a p y instructor. 3 Play a n d a u d i t i o n o n h i s / h e r c o n c e n t r a t i o n instrument a n d demonstrate both technique and repertoire of a G r a d e 7 T o r o n t o C o n s e r v a t o r y level (or equivalent) together with musical sensitivity. 4 T a k e a theory piacement test and demonstrate a grasp of tonal harmony. 5. Have s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e d a c o u r s e in introductory psychology. 6. Have s o m e e x p e r i e n c e with (or e x p o s u r e to) people with special needs 7. T h i s p r o g r a m requires a n unusually high level of maturity and integrity. S t u d e n t s with a year or more of life experience following high s c h o o l are usually more k n o w l e d g e a b l e a n d mature in their c h o i c e of direction and are better prepared. 8. Students are advised to take a hearing test and submit the results to the department. For transfer credit regarding the following M u s i c courses* see the Transfer G u i d e in the back of the calendar. Music 010 T h e o r y I (F) (3,1,1) A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to teach m u s i c rudiments i n c l u d i n g : the staff, the clefs, notes a n d rests, major a n d minor scales, intervals a n d c h o r d s . Ear training will i n c l u d e r e c o g n i t i o n of all intervals — m e l o d i c a l l y a n d h a r m o n i c a l l y — major, minor, a u g m e n t e d and d i m i n i s h e d triads. Sight s i n g i n g will e n c o m pass e x a m p l e s in d u p l e and triple metre in major a n d minor keys u s i n g stepwise a n d disjunct m e l o d i c motion. Music 011 T h e o r y II (S) (3,1,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c 010. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 010. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U . 104 M u s i c 031 Beginning Ensemble II (S) (3,0,1) C o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 030. S e e a l s o M u s i c 130. M u s i c 100 T h e o r y III (F) (3,2,1) A penetrating study of the main b u i l d i n g b l o c k s of m u s i c — m e l o d i c motion a n d rhythm. T h r o u g h p e r f o r m a n c e a n d analysis of w o r k s of P a l e s t r i n a a n d L a s s u s a n d attempts at c o m p o s i t i o n u s i n g their l a n g u a g e , a k n o w l e d g e of m o d e s , rhythmic usage, a n d m e l o d i c intervallic structures is g a i n e d . T h i s sets the basis for writing 2 v o i c e c o n t r a p u n t a l m u s i c without the necessity of a study of the F u x i a n c o n c e p t of s p e c i e s counterpoint. T w o part writing will be attempted d u r i n g the s e c o n d half of the semester. Ear training will be e m p h a s i z e d d u r i n g the c o u r s e T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C M u s i c 101 Theory IV (S) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c . A continuation of the work of M u s i c 256 with concentration o n 2, 3 and 4 part contrapuntal writing. Detailed e x a m i n a t i o n of cadential patterns, s u s p e n s i o n usage, a n d h o m o p h o n i c m u s i c will be undertaken. E a r training will be e m p h a s i z e d d u r i n g the c o u r s e . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U a n d U B C M u s i c 110 C l a s s Strings (F) (3,2,1) A practical study of the violin family. T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 111 C l a s s Strings (S) (3,2,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 110. T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 114 Piano C l a s s (F) (1.5,2,.5) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for students w h o w i s h to learn basic k e y b o a r d skills. R e a d i n g , i m p r o v i s a t i o n , transposition and h a r m o n i z a t i o n are the skills d e v e l o p e d d u r i n g this c o u r s e and the three s u b s e q u e n t levels. T h e o r e t i c a l c o n c e p t s are a p p l i e d at the k e y b o a r d a n d i n c l u d e diatonic triads a n d sevenths of the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrac h o r d s . A weekly lab reviews material c o v e r e d in c l a s s . S t u d e n t s c a n practise o n the department's p i a n o s . Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 115 Piano Class (S) (1.5,2,.5) Music 140 Private Music Instruction (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 114. In addition, k e y b o a r d s e q u e n c e s , a r p e g g i o s , and major scales are i n t r o d u c e d along with e a s y original repertoire. A c o u r s e primarily d e s i g n e d to permit the student to pursue in-depth study of his/her own music specialty. Students will be e x p e c t e d to s h o w progress at the b e g i n n i n g a n d at the e n d of the term for the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Faculty in order to assist the evaluation by m u s i c faculty in c o n j u n c t i o n with the private m u s i c teacher. T h e c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of weekly hour lessons T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C and U.Vic. Music 120 History I (F) (3,0,1) A study of m u s i c a l history from the time of ancient G r e e c e to Dufay. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Music 121 History II (S) (3,0,1) A study of m u s i c history f r o m D u f a y to M o n t e v e r d i . T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . Music 130 Ensemble I (F) (3,0,1) M u s i c 030, 031, 130, 131, 230, 231 all have four sections. Section 1 - Choir A n exploration through five centuries of choral music from the R e n a i s s a n c e to the present O p p o r t u n i t i e s for singing without a c c o m p a n i m e n t (a capella), with piano, with rhythm s e c t i o n a n d / o r with c o m p l e t e s y m p h o n y o r c h e s t r a . Particular attention will be paid to pitch, rhythm, diction, a n d balance. Performance before an audience will be the culminating event of the semester. Section 2 - Orchestra Rehearsal and p e r f o r m a n c e of c o n c e r t repertoire. S t r i n g players will be a c c e p t e d without audition W i n d players must contact the M u s i c Department at least one week before classes c o m m e n c e to arrange for an audition. P e r s o n s w i n n i n g a position through audition will be a l l o w e d to register. Section 3 - Swing Choir S e c t i o n 4 - Guitar Music 131 Ensemble II (S) (3,0,1) Transferable to U B C and U.Vic. M u s i c 140, 141, 240, 241 all have 12 sections. 1. C o m m e r c i a l G u i t a r / B a s s 2 Strings 3. V o i c e 4 Classical Guitar 5. C l a s s i c a l P i a n o 6. C o m m e r c i a l P i a n o 7. M u s i c T h e r a p y P i a n o 8. C l a s s i c a l W i n d s 9. C o m m e r c i a l W i n d s 10. M u s i c T h e r a p y Guitar 11. C o m p o s i t i o n 12. P e r c u s s i o n Note: This c o u r s e is available to those students enroled in 15 credit hours of m u s i c c u r r i c u l u m . T h o s e students with less than 15 credit hours of m u s i c c u r r i c u l u m and w h o desire credit for M u s i c 140 must consult the M u s i c C o o r d i n a t o r prio/ to registration. Music 141 Private Music Instruction (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 140 T r a n s f e r a b l e to U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 154 Introduction to Arranging & Orchestration (S) (3,1,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c 200 or perrfiission of instructor. S t u d e n t s will undertake the study of s c o r e preparation, b a s i c m u s i c a l terms a n d articulations, rhythm s e c t i o n writing and b e g i n the study of s e c t i o n writing t e c h n i q u e s . Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 130. Music 164 Piano Class (F) (1.5,0,0) G r o u p l e s s o n s for those students without previous m u s i c theory k n o w l e d g e . S t u d e n t s will learn to read m u s i c a n d a c q u i r e basic pianistic skills. Music 165 Piano Class (S) (1.5,0,0) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 164. Music 170 History of Jazz (F) (1.5,0,.5) A survey of jazz t h r o u g h styles a n d stylists from its roots in A f r i c a to the present. 105 M u s i c 171 M u s i c 191 History of R o c k (S) (1.5,0,.5) A survey of rock styles from its roots to the present. Private Music Instruction — Secondary Instrument (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 190 M u s i c 180 Improvisation (F) (1.5,0,.5) S e c t i o n 1: M u s i c T h e r a p y S e c t i o n 2: C o m m e r c i a l music. T h i s s e c t i o n by audition only. A c o u r s e to teach the b a s i c s of improvisation o n c h o r d c h a n g e s . T h e first semester will be devoted to rhythmic concepts, basic chord-scale relationships a n d development of technical e x e r c i s e s for basic c h o r d progressions M u s i c 181 Improvisation (S) (1.5,0,.5) A continuation of M u s i c 180. This semester will be devoted to analysis of c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n s a n d more a d v a n c e d c h o r d scale analysis At the e n d of this semester, students s h o u l d have the basic theoretical k n o w l e d g e necessary to analyse and learn to improvise o n any " s t a n d a r d " jazz tune. M u s i c 194 Repertoire (F) (3,0,1) This is a flexible course open to students in the commercial program w h o wish to gain e x p e r i e n c e in the rehearsal t e c h niques a n d performance. S t u d e n t s will rehearse under supervision as vocalists or instrumentalists, individually or in small groups. T h e c o u r s e requirements include about four hours of rehearsal per week plus a given n u m b e r of public performances M u s i c 195 Repertoire (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 194. M u s i c 184 Sightsinging/Ear T r a i n i n g (F) (3,0,1) Aural and sight training concentrating o n melodic, rhythmic dictation and sightsinging. M u s i c 200 Theory V (F) (3,2,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c 101 or M u s i c 011 M u s i c 185 Sightsinging/Ear T r a i n i n g (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 184. M u s i c 188 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (F) (1.5,0,.5) T o b e taken with M u s i c 180. P r a c t i c a l e x p e r i e n c e in a small g r o u p situation. S t u d e n t s will play tunes b a s e d o n c h o r d p r o g r e s s i o n studied in M u s i c 180. B y audition only. A study of m u s i c f r o m c a . 1600 to c a . 1800 A study of harmony; triads, n o n - h a r m o n i c materials, d o m i n a n t seventh a n d derivatives, s e c o n d a r y d o m i n a n t s , s i m p l e m o d u l a t i o n . Elementary forms, analysis of 17th and 18th century literature. S i g h t s i n g i n g , m e l o d i c rhythmic, a n d h a r m o n i c dictation. K e y b o a r d harmony; p l a y i n g of c a d e n c e types, m o d u l a t i o n to closely related keys, realization of elementary figures bass Transferable to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . M u s i c 189 M u s i c 201 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (S) (1.5,0,.5) T h e o r y VI (S) (3,2,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 188. M u s i c 190 Private M u s i c Instruction - S e c o n d a r y Instrument (F) (1.5,0,.5) T h i s c o u r s e c o n s i s t s of weekly half-hour lessons o n the student's s e c o n d a r y instrument Students will-be e x p e c t e d to s h o w progress at the e n d of the term for the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e M u s i c Faculty. Prerequisite: M u s i c 200. A study of music from c a . 1800 to the d i s s o l u t i o n of tonality C h r o m a t i c h a r m o n y a n d a n i n t r o d u c t i o n to 20th century t e c h n i q u e s . E x t e n d e d forms a n d a n a l y s i s of 19th a n d early 20th century literature. K e y b o a r d h a r m o n y ; i m p r o v i s a tion, figured bass in b a r o q u e style. Sight s i n g i n g a n d dictation. Transferable to: S F U . U B C a n d U . V i c M u s i c 190, 191, 290, 291 all have 12 s e c t i o n s : 1. C o m m e r c i a l G u i t a r / B a s s 2. Strings 3. V o i c e 4 C l a s s i c a l Guitar 5. C l a s s i c a l P i a n o 6. C o m m e r c i a l P i a n o 7. M u s i c T h e r a p y P i a n o 8. C l a s s i c a l W i n d s 9. C o m m e r c i a l W i n d s 10. M u s i c T h e r a p y G u i t a r 11. C o m p o s i t i o n 12 P e r c u s s i o n 106 M u s i c 210 Class Woodwinds (F) (3,2,1) A practical study of the w o o d w i n d family. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. M u s i c 211 Class Woodwinds (S) (3,2,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 210. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 214 Piano Class (F) (1.5,2,.5) Music 250 Theory VII (F) (3,0,1) For students w h o have taken M u s i c 115 or have had previous k e y b o a r d experience. S t u d e n t s are i n t r o d u c e d to c o m m o n i d i o m a t i c a c c o m p a n i m e n t patterns as well as 4-part c h o r a l e studies, k e y b o a r d s e q u e n c e s , minor s c a l e s and c h o r d s B a s i c k e y b o a r d techniques are e m p h a s i z e d including relaxation, t o u c h , rotation, weight transfer and their musical a p p l i c a t i o n in simple repertoire. T h e lab hour is utilized to develop sight-reading skills at the k e y b o a r d . Prerequisites: M u s i c 200, 201 or p e r m i s s i o n of T h o u g h principally a i m e d at c o n t e m p o r a r y popular and jazz c o m p o s i t i o n , all m u s i c i a n s will benefit from the extensive study of tonal m u s i c undertaken in this c o u r s e . S t u d e n t s will study the principles of c h o r d progression a n d m e l o d i c writing involved in traditional major/minor, m o d a l , m i x e d m o d e , c h r o m a t i c a n d parallel h a r m o n i c t e c h n i q u e s . Transferable to U B C . Music 251 Theory VIII (S) (3,0,1) Music 215 Piano Class (S) (1.5,2,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 214 with i n c r e a s e d c o m p l e x i t y of repertoire a n d t e c h n i q u e . Transferable to U B C instructor. Prerequisite: M u s i c 250. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 250. Music 254 Arranging/Orchestration (F) (3,0,3) Prerequisites: M u s i c 200, 2 0 1 , 1 1 0 or p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. Music 220 History III (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d as a c o m p l e m e n t a r y study both for M u s i c a n d G e n e r a l Arts students. T h e m u s i c from C a v a l l i to M o z a r t will be e x a m i n e d e m p h a s i z i n g aural recognition of the evolution of musical style. T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c . A c o n t i n u a t i o n and e x p a n s i o n of the s e c t i o n writing t e c h n i q u e s b e g u n in M u s i c 154 with the addition of more linear b a s e d a p p r o a c h e s . A d v a n c e d c h o r d v o i c i n g c o n c e p t s ; b a c k g r o u n d writing styles; orchestration for brass, s a x o phones, w o o d w i n d s , v o i c e s a n d strings. T o be taken with M u s i c 250. Music 255 Arranging II (S) (3,0,2) Music 221 History IV (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M u s i c 254. A n interesting c o u r s e w h i c h is d e s i g n e d as a c o m p l e m e n tary study both for M u s i c a n d G e n e r a l A r t s students. T h i s c o u r s e will examine m u s i c from B e e t h o v e n to the present day. T h e e m p h a s i s will be on an aural r e c o g n i t i o n of the evolution of m u s i c a l style and its relationship to its historical context. Music 260 Commercial Relations in Music (S) (1.5,0,.5) T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U , U B C a n d U . V i c Music 270 Song Writing (F) (1.5,0,.5) Music 230 Ensemble III (F) (3,0,1) A n investigation of the t e c h n i q u e s a n d roles of lyrics a n d lyric writing for popular s o n g styles A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 131. S e e a l s o M u s i c 130 Music 231 Ensemble IV (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 230. S e e also M u s i c 130. Music 240 Private Music Instruction (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 141. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. Music 241 Private Music Instruction (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 240. Transferable to U B C a n d U.Vic. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 254. A c o u r s e involving aspects of the m u s i c industry i n c l u d i n g stage presentation, copyright, contracts, p e r f o r m i n g rights organizations a n d the r e c o r d i n g industry. Music 280 Improvisation (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 181 S t u d e n t s must audition. Music 281 Improvisation (S) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 280. Music 284 Sightsinging/Ear Training (F) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 185. Music 285 Sightsinging/Ear Training (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 284. 107 M u s i c 288 M u s i c T h e r a p y 161 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (F) (1.5,0,.5) M u s i c T h e r a p y II (S) (3,0,1) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 189 S t u d e n t s must audition for this c o u r s e . T h i s c o u r s e presents an overview of c o n t e m p o r a r y styles of m u s i c therapy used in a variety of settings. S t u d e n t s will be e n c o u r a g e d to e x p l o r e their r e s o u r c e s a n d values in order to d e v e l o p their o w n style. • M u s i c 189 Improvisation E n s e m b l e (S) (1.5,0,.5) M u s i c T h e r a p y 170 A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 288 M u s i c Intervention in C h i l d (F) M u s i c 290 Private Music Instruction - S e c o n d a r y Instrument (F) (1.5,0,.5) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 191. S e e a l s o M u s i c 190. Development (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will survey therapeutic intervention in c h i l d development, stressing the role of the e x p r e s s i v e arts a s a therapeutic medium. C o n n e c t i o n s will be sought between music a n d current studies in language, motor, cognitive a n d social development. M u s i c 291 Private Music Instruction - S e c o n d a r y Instrument M u s i c T h e r a p y 180 (S) Interpersonal Skills for M u s i c (1.5,0,.5) (F) A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 290. S e e a l s o M u s i c 190. M u s i c 294 Repertoire (F) (3,0,1) A continuation of M u s i c 195 M u s i c 295 Therapists (1.5,0,0) T h i s c o u r s e will acquaint students with several skill areas w h i c h are relevant to M u s i c Therapy, particularly c o m m u n i c a tion skills a n d observation skills. C o m m u n i c a t i o n skills will i n c l u d e behaviour d e s c r i p t i o n , p e r c e p t i o n c h e c k i n g , p a r a phrasing a n d d e s c r i p t i o n of feeling. O b s e r v a t i o n skills will include g r o u p interaction, interviewing a n d s m a l l g r o u p e x e r c i s e s Both theory a n d practice will b e i n c l u d e d Repertoire (S) (3,0,1) M u s i c T h e r a p y 190 A c o n t i n u a t i o n of M u s i c 294. MUSIC THERAPY COURSES M u s i c T h e r a p y 150 T h e Influence of M u s i c (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide an i n t r o d u c t i o n to the world's major m u s i c a l cultures, with c o n c e n t r a t i o n o n the healing a n d therapeutic a s p e c t s of these m u s i c s . S p e c i a l attention will be paid to the p s y c h o p h y s i c s of aural p e r c e p t i o n a n d to the a s s e s s m e n t of the evocative powers of m u s i c . Extensive use will b e made of m u s i c recorded throughout the world along with film and video tape illustrations of these approaches to m u s i c . Practicum I (F) (6,0,2) T h i s is the first of a four part p r a c t i c u m s e q u e n c e . T h e student will attend one c l i n i c a l , s c h o o l or c o m m u n i t y setting; a n d will observe clients a n d staff there, as well as d e s i g n i n g , leading a n d d o c u m e n t i n g m u s i c therapy s e s s i o n s , in c o n s u l tation with a staff supervisor. W e e k l y s e m i n a r s are provided to clarify a n d e x p a n d r e s o u r c e s available out in the field. M u s i c T h e r a p y 191 Practicum II (S) (6,0,2) T h e student participates a s a student therapist in o n e centre 80 hours. W e e k l y s e m i n a r s throughout the term. Refer to M u s i c T h e r a p y 190. M u s i c T h e r a p y 151 The Influence of M u s i c (S) (3,0,1) This c o u r s e will concentrate o n a more detailed a n a l y s i s and e x p a n s i o n of material c o v e r e d in M u s i c T h e r a p y 150. S o u n d r e c o r d i n g s , film a n d video tapes will provide c o l o u r f u l illustrations of the subject matter under study. M u s i c T h e r a p y 160 M u s i c T h e r a p y 250 M u s i c T h r o u g h the Creative Arts (F) (1.5,0,.5) T h i s c o u r s e will acquaint students with creative arts w h i c h c a n be used therapeutically in c o n j u n c t i o n with m u s i c , with an e m p h a s i s o n movement for various age groups T h e c o u r s e will be experiential. D i s c u s s i o n s will e x p l o r e p o s s i b l e g o a l s a n d e x t e n s i o n s of the activities presented in class. M u s i c T h e r a p y I (F) (3,0,0) T h i s c o u r s e will introduce students to the c o n c e p t a n d e x p e r i e n c e of m u s i c therapy and its relationship to movement therapy, art therapy, p s y c h o d r a m a , a n d other therapies in general A brief history of m u s i c therapy will be studied. Brain functions a n d the creative p r o c e s s will be e x p l o r e d a l o n g with a n experiential study of the specific opportunities m u s i c brings to the therapeutic environment. 108 M u s i c T h e r a p y 260 Music Therapy Techniques (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide e x p e r i e n c e a n d a n a l y s i s of m u s i c therapy techniques appropriate to a range of clincial settings. T h e a n a l y s i s will develop the e x p o s u r e to basic therapeutic m o d e l s . Students will be o b s e r v i n g t e c h n i q u e s used b y the instructor a n d by e a c h other in the class setting. Music Therapy 261 Professional Development (S) (3,0,1) Music Therapy 290 Practicum III (F) (6,0,2) This course will develop the professional skills of observing, recording a n d reporting music therapy activities. It will also examine the p o s s i b l e relationships of a m u s i c therapist to staff o r g a n i z a t i o n in existing treatment centres a n d to local r e s o u r c e s in the c o m m u n i t y T h e student participates as a student therapist in one centre. 80 hours. W e e k l y s e m i n a r s throughout the term. Music Therapy 264 Clinical Orientations (S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide the students with practical skills and k n o w l e d g e of the p h y s i c a l aspects of therapy required to function effectively in a variety of hospital and clinical settings. C o u r s e content will include basic k n o w l e d g e in anatomy and p h y s i o l o g y related to specific h a n d i c a p s : a c q u a i n t a n c e with b a s i c terms c o m m o n l y in use in p s y c h i a t r i c a n d m e d i c a l facilities: and a review of drugs a n d their effects. Refer to M u s i c T h e r a p y 190. Music Therapy 291 Practicum IV (S) (6,0,2) T h e student participates as a student therapist in o n e centre, 80 hours. W e e k l y s e m i n a r s throughout the term. Refer to M u s i c T h e r a p y 190. Music Therapy 270 Designing Music Therapy Activities (S) (1.5,0,.5) In d e s i g n i n g m u s i c therapy activities, the student will learn to identify the nature of s p e c i f i c g r o u p s a n d their individual m e m b e r s , to c h o o s e suitable c h a l l e n g e s , structure and materials, a n d the degree of therapist intervention, and then to observe a n d analyze g r o u p r e s p o n s e s , to evaluate both the d.esign a n d e x e c u t i o n of their activities, a n d to identify c o r r e c t i o n s a n d indications for s u b s e q u e n t activities. 1 I 109 Outdoor Recreation Programs Instructional Faculty General Information B a s h a m , D . F , Coordinator, Wilderness and Fitness P r o g r a m s Berta. J . L , D i p l o m a , O u t d o o r R e c . Mgt. & W i l d e r n e s s Leadership (Capilano College) C a n o e Sport, B.C. Instructor B r o w n , T , B . S c . (Bristol) B o y d e . J . E . , B.A. ( S i m o n Fraser), C . A . N . S . I . , C a n o e Sport B . C . Instructor's Certificate B o y d e . P., R . N , C . P . R . Instructor, Wilderness First Aid Instructor B o w e r i n g , L , B . E d . (Brit. Col.) Braaksma, T , Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Capilano C o l l e g e ) , C a n o e Sport Instructor C e r t , C . A . N . S . I . C a n n i n g , Janet. B S c . (Brit. Col.) Carter, S , B . S c B i o l o g y & K i n e s i o l o g y ( S F U ) , M . E d . Adult E d u c a t i o n (Brit. Col.) Chester, N e i l , B . E d . (Sask.) B.A. (P.E.) (Sask.) M . P . E . (Brit. Col.) Christensen, A , C . P . R . Instructor, R . L . S . S . Examiner, Wilderness First A i d Instructor. B . C . R . C . A . Instructor, Wilderness L e a d e r s h i p Cert. O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n Mgmt. Dipl. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) Creer, B , B . E d . (Brit. Col.) C a n o e S p o r t B . C . Instructor's Cert D e S c a l l y , F , Instructor M o u n t a i n e e r i n g Griffiths, R , O . N . C . (England). C . A . N . S . I , A s s o c . Mount. G u i d e Cert. H a t c h a r d , J , D i p l o m a , O u t d o o r Rec. Mgt. ( C a p i l a n o College) Wilderness L e a d e r s h i p Cert. ( C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) C a n o e Sport (British C o l u m b i a ) Instructor C e r t , C A . N . S . I . Hills, S , R . N . E x e r c i s e M a n a g e m e n t C e r t , B.C.I.T. Hobbs, E , Diploma, Outdoor Recreation Management (Capilano College) C a n o e Sport B.C. Instructor's Certificate J e l e n s k y , M , St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e Instructor, Wilderness First A i d Instructor, C . P . R . Instructor M a c i n t o s h , B , B . E d , S e c o n d a r y Major P . E , National Level Four Off Track Official C e r t , National Track a n d Field C o a c h Level 3 Cert. M a c K a y . J , B . H e c , M . S c . (Brit. Col.) M u n s h a w . Eric, B . S c , (Brit. Col.) C a n o e Sport B . C . Instructor Cert. S c h m i d t , L , B . E d , M . E d , P h . D . (Alta.) S m i t h , C , B . S c . ( O r e g o n State University), M . C . P . A . Cert. Canadian Athletic Therapist. Cert. Canadian Physiotherapy Association Stevens, D , Dipl. O u t d o o r Recreation M g t , W i l d e r n e s s Leadership Cert. ( C a p i l a n o College) C a n o e Sport Instruc- • tors C e r t , St. J o h n ' s A m b u l a n c e I n s t r u c t o r s C e r t . C A N S I , C . S . A . T o u r Leaders Cert Stewart. G , B . S c . K i n e s i o l o g y , M . S c . K i n e s i o l o g y ( S F U ) Taunton. C , B.Sc. Kinesiology, M.Sc. Kinesiology (SFU) Urquhart, T., Dipl. Outdoor Recreation Management (Capilano College) C A . N . S . I . C a n o e Sport B . C . Instructor's C e r t , W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p Cert. V a j d a - J a n y k , A , B . S c . K i n e s i o l o g y ( S F U ) . M S c . Recreation (U. of Brussels) Webster, W , B.A. (Central Washington) M . S c . (Oregon) W e s m a n , S , Cert. Ballet for C h i l d r e n , Cert. G y m n a s t i c s for C h i l d r e n , H e a d C o a c h G y m n a s t i c s T e a m s , W o r k s h o p s in related fields at Brit. C o l . a n d I.W.C.A. White, B P , B . A , M.A. ( S i m o n Fraser), C o o r d i n a t o r Wright. R , W i l d e r n e s s P h o t o g r a p h y O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n is p l a y i n g an increasingly important role in the s o c i a l and e c o n o m i c life of British C o l u m b i a . A n increase in available leisure time a n d p u b l i c interest in the preservation of natural areas have i n c r e a s e d the need for qualified, well-trained graduates c a p a b l e of p l a n n i n g and directing recreation programs, facilities and teaching outdoor activity skills. 110 T h e O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n department offers a full-time career training d i p l o m a p r o g r a m , plus four s p e c i a l i z e d upgrading certificate p r o g r a m s for w o r k i n g p r o f e s s i o n a l s and volunteers. T h e department also has an a d v a n c e d expedition program available for graduates a n d for those with high levels of e x p e r i e n c e a n d skills c o m p e t e n c e Upgrading programs are divided into two streams: O u t d o o r Pursuits (Wilderness Leadership and Adventure and C h a l l e n g e Training) and Leisure L e a d e r s h i p (Fitness L e a d e r s h i p a n d Leisure Lifestyling). Outdoor Recreation Management Program The Capilano College Recreation Management Program trains P a r a - P r o f e s s i o n a l s to work effectively in a variety of outdoor recreation e m p l o y m e n t situations. R e s o u r c e a n d facility m a n a g e m e n t job opportunities exist in P r o v i n c i a l and M u n i c i p a l Park a n d R e c r e a t i o n a g e n c i e s a n d in ski areas. L e a d e r s h i p , instructional a n d p r o g r a m m i n g job o p p o r t u n i t i e s exist in a variety of c o m m u n i t y , c o m m e r c i a l a n d g o v e r n m e n t agencies. The program will provide the graduate with skills required to plan and operate g o o d o u t d o o r recreation p r o g r a m s a n d to manage facilities and recreational land and water resources. Skills in summer, winter, a n d aquatic w i l d e r n e s s leadership will be developed in the skills development c o u r s e s . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on e x p e r i e n c e in the field situation T h e program c o m m e n c e s with a seven day b a c k p a c k i n g e x p e d i t i o n w h i c h serves as a lab for c l a s s r o o m work. O t h e r trips are p l a c e d throughout the province. E a c h student's particular program c o n c e n t r a t i o n will be d e c i d e d in consultation with the c o o r d i n a t o r . Flexibility in the s e c o n d year of the program enables students to specialize in their areas of interest. Students will be required to take first aid as part of their skills development program a n d will be required to pay an additional levy to cover partial c o s t s of equipment, field trips, and skills development c o u r s e s . In the fieldwork courses, student attitude a n d leadership c a p a c i t y will be taken into a c c o u n t in the instructor's evaluation profile. S p e c i a l i z e d interest areas in the program i n c l u d e parks a n d recreation area management, ski area management, leadership a n d prog r a m m i n g , a n d environmental e d u c a t i o n . S t u d e n t s a c q u i r e w o r k i n g skills in s p e c i a l i z e d areas during their p r a c t i c u m placements. A c c e s s to the other departmental programs is a v a i l a b l e to q u a l i f i e d O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t students. A p p l i c a n t s for the O u t d o o r R e c r e a t i o n M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m s h o u l d familiarize themselves with the following a d m i s s i o n requirements: Third Term 1. A r r a n g e an interview with the C o o r d i n a t o r of the program. (Interviews are held throughout the year.) R e c r e a t i o n 180 2 In o r d e r to be c o n s i d e r e d for the p r o g r a m , applicants must be at least nineteen years of age at the date of entry into the program. 3. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have g o o d reading a n d writing skills a n d must be p h y s i c a l l y fit. 4. After the interview, the C o o r d i n a t o r of the O u t d o o r Recreation Management Program will request the following documentation: R e c r e a t i o n 178 R e c r e a t i o n 190 R e c r e a t i o n 250 R e c r e a t i o n 254 R e c r e a t i o n 259 R e c r e a t i o n 263 a. At least two letters of reference b. H i g h s c h o o l or P o s t - S e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n transcripts R e c r e a t i o n 167 R e c r e a t i o n 171 c. A letter of a p p l i c a t i o n , i n c l u d i n g a resume of past experiences Note: A doctor's certification of health will be required of all a c c e p t e d c a n d i d a t e s prior to a d m i s s i o n . 3 3 3 3 2 4.5 1.5 3 3 3 3 3 15 8 Fourth Term R e c r e a t i o n 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum 9 9 Associates in Arts and Science Diploma Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements H u m a n R e l a t i o n s in Recreation Fitness L e a d e r s h i p (Optional) Leisure Counselling (Optional) Outdoor Recreation Ecology Outdoor Recreation Program Planning Residential C a m p s Management Lab Skills Development Wilderness First A i d II (Optional) K a y a k i n g I (Optional) . . . Mountaineering I (Optional) Credit Hours Lab Hours 58.5 6 15 Note: S t u d e n t s will enrol for R e c r e a t i o n 178, 250, 254 a n d 259 a n d at least one of the above options. Other options outside the department may be arranged in consultation with the C o o r d i n a t o r . 64.5 15 Outdoor Pursuits Programs Wilderness Leadership Program First T e r m C m n s 150 R e c r e a t i o n 152 R e c r e a t i o n 154 R e c r e a t i o n 160 R e c r e a t i o n 161 R e c r e a t i o n 166 Basic C o m m u n i c a t i o n s . . Introduction to O u t d o o r Recreation Outdoor Recreation Facilities P h y s i c a l Fitness in Theory and Practice . . . . Wilderness • Backpacking I Environmental Education T h e W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to meet the p h y s i c a l , s o c i a l a n d a e s t h e t i c n e e d s for p e r s o n a l development. T h i s development will be a c h i e v e d through involvement with low-impact, environmentally sensitive outdoor activities. A strong commitment to these outdoor activities will be e x p e c t e d . T h e program thus e n c o u r a g e s the integration of lifestyle and recreational activities in a manner w h i c h promotes environmental integrity and realistic h u m a n needs. 3 3 3 3 3 6 2 21 2 Second Term C m n s 154 R e c r e a * i o n 151 R e c r e a t i o n 153 R e c r e a t i o n 157 R e c r e a t i o n 159 R e c r e a t i o n 163 R e c r e a t i o n 164 C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Recreation Outdoor Recreation Environments Work, L e i s u r e a n d Society Skills Development Outdoor Recreation Administration Wilderness First A i d I . . . Nordic Skiing I 3 3 2 3 1.5 3 3 3 3 19.5 5 T h e program seeks to educate those w h o wish to serve as skilled leaders in w i l d e r n e s s a n d s e m i - w i l d e r n e s s recreation. C a n o e i n g , b a c k p a c k i n g a n d n o r d i c s k i i n g are the major activities taught Field e x p e r i e n c e is given priority. O u t d o o r safety is e m p h a s i z e d with instruction in management of e m e r g e n c i e s , in safe a n d r e s p o n s i b l e activity program d e v e l o p m e n t , a n d in preventative safety. A s e c o n d major e m p h a s i s is on the e n c o u r a g e m e n t of wise, ethical behaviour in natural environments, with the a d d e d responsibility for students to pass these attitudes on to other w i l d e r n e s s users. T h e g o a l of the W i l d e r n e s s L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m is to provide a means by w h i c h individuals realize wilderness leadership roles with c o n f i d e n c e a n d a s e n s e of responsibility a n d safety. T h r o u g h activity-oriented c o u r s e s that d e m a n d a high level of fitness, the p r o g r a m promotes the development of well-trained instructors w h o are willing a n d c a p a b l e of s h a r i n g information a n d of d e m o n s t r a t i n g s o u n d leadership in the outdoors. S k i l l s c a n only be obtained through practice; the program therefore e n c o u r a g e s the a c q u i s i t i o n of o u t d o o r skills through practical e x p e r i e n c e . 111 S t u d e n t s will enrol in one c o u r s e per term, a n d must s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e e a c h c o u r s e in order to c o n t i n u e in the program. S t i r must also obtain a " B " grade or better in order to progress o the next c o u r s e . It is n e c e s s a r y that activity skills ar.d leadership qualities be high in o u t d o o r activities where leaders are responsible for people's lives. A student receiving a " C " grade may repeat the c o u r s e or show p r o f i c i e n c y in that activity during the following appropriate term before continuing in the program. This must be arranged with the consent of the program C o o r d i n a t o r a n d the C o u r s e Instructor. Students must be adult (19 years of age and older). First T e r m R e c r e a t i o n 161 R e c r e a t i o n 162 R e c r e a t i o n 163 Wilderness Backpacking I Wilderness C a n o e i n g I W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I 3 3 3 W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g II W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II 3 3 Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 262 R e c r e a t i o n 263 Wilderness Backpacking Option A n additional fee is c h a r g e d for e a c h c o u r s e to cover field trips a n d equipment costs. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s 12 Nordic Skiing 12 T h e W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c P r o g r a m is s p e c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d to deal with the winter wilderness environment and activity skills required d u r i n g this s e a s o n . C o m f o r t a n d safety is dependent not only u p o n the individual's ability to c o p e with the winter environment but also with skill efficiency. Wilderness Backpacking Option First T e r m R e c r e a t i o n 161 R e c r e a t i o n 163 Canoeing T h e W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g P r o g r a m is s u m m e r oriented, d e a l i n g specifically with wilderness skills of c a n o e i n g o n lakes a n d rivers. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d u p o n the a c q u i s i t i o n of risk management t e c h n i q u e s and the evolution of e n v i r o n mentally s o u n d c a n o e i n g ethics. S k i l l s a n d t e c h n i q u e s t a u g h t are b a s e d u p o n p r o g r e s s i o n s d e s i g n e d by the Recreational C a n o e i n g Association (R.C.A.) and the C a n a d i a n Recreational C a n o e i n g A s s o c i a t i o n ( C . R . C . A . ) . Backpacking T h e W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g program is d e s i g n e d to train wilderness leaders for the recreational g r o u p activities of s u m m e r hiking and b a c k p a c k i n g . E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on the s k i l l s in p r e - t r i p o r g a n i z a t i o n , p r e v e n t a t i v e s a f e t y , a n d w o r k i n g with g r o u p s . S p e c i a l topic areas will include legal liability and moral responsibility. Wilderness Leadership Wilderness Nordic Skiing Option Credit C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate Major R e q u i r e m e n t s Hours 15 15 Wilderness Nordic Skiing Option Wilderness Backpacking I W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I 3 3 W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g II W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II 3 3 Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 261 R e c r e a t i o n 263 Adventure and Challenge Training Program T h e Adventure and C h a l l e n g e T r a i n i n g P r o g r a m provides training in M o u n t a i n e e r i n g a n d K a y a k i n g for individuals w h o w i s h to d e v e l o p their t e c h n i c a l skills, leadership c o m p e t e n c y , a n d e m e r g e n c y r e s p o n s e capabilities towards an instructional level. T h e goal of the program is to provide thorough skills instruction to permit graduates to lead intermediate level mountaineering or k a y a k i n g e x p e r i e n c e s in a safe and confident manner. Field trips are s c h e d u l e d on w e e k e n d s and lectures are in the evening. T h e A C T . program focuses on two technically c o m p l e x c h a l l e n g e activities requiring significant personal c o m m i t ment for initial p a r t i c i p a t i o n . W h i l e e m p h a s i z i n g s k i l l s development, the program provides strong environmental a n d personal awareness c o m p o n e n t s . M o u n t a i n touring and c l i m b i n g expeditions, and o c e a n , river, a n d lake touring by kayak provide a context for environmental interpretation. Students e n r o l i n g in the s e c o n d year mountaineering c o u r s e s h o u l d expect to c o m m i t up to two weeks in the s u m m e r term for an expedition. First T e r m R e c r e a t i o n 161 R e c r e a t i o n 163 Wilderness Backpacking I W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I 3 3 R e c r e a t i o n 164 Wilderness Nordic Skiing I 3 W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g II 3 3 Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 263 R e c r e a t i o n 264 Wilderness Canoeing Option C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Certificate Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s Students must be adult (19 years of age and older). 15 Is 112 Students will enrol in one c o u r s e per term, a n d must s u c c e s s f u l l y c o m p l e t e e a c h c o u r s e in order to c o n t i n u e in the program. A high level of proficiency is required in outdoor pursuits where leaders are responsible for people's lives. Students must obtain at least a " B - " grade to progress to the next course. A student receiving a " C " grade may repeat the course or show proficiency in that activity during the following appropriate term, before c o n t i n u i n g in the program. This must be arranged with the c o n s e n t of the P r o g r a m C o o r d i n a t o r a n d the c o u r s e instructor. A n additional fee is c h a r g e d for e a c h c o u r s e to c o v e r equipment c o s t s and field trips. Fitness Adventure and Challenge Training ( A . C . T . ) Kayaking Option Credit Hours Capilano College Certificate Major Requirements Leadership Capilano College Certificate Credit Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s 15 15 12 12 First Semester R e c r e a t i o n 180 Kayaking Option First Term R e c r e a t i o n 181 R e c r e a t i o n 163 W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I 3 R e c r e a t i o n 167 Kayaking I 3 First A i d II K a y a k i n g II 3 3 Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 263 R e c r e a t i o n 267 Mountaineering Option R e c r e a t i o n 182 R e c r e a t i o n 183 R e c r e a t i o n 184 R e c r e a t i o n 185 Major Requirements 12 R e c r e a t i o n 187 R e c r e a t i o n 188 R e c r e a t i o n 189 12 Mountaineering Option First Term W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I Mountaineering I 3 3 E n d u r a n c e Activities (Running) E x e r c i s e to M u s i c Strength Fitness Athletic Injuries Fitness for C h i l d r e n 1 1 1 1 1 (3) Aquatic Fitness P r o g r a m s Fitness for S e n i o r s Nutrition Pre- & Post-Natal Exercises 1 1 1 1 (3) Note: Students will c h o o s e six (6) of the above nine (9) activity c o u r s e s over the 2nd a n d 3rd semesters. E a c h activity c o u r s e will consist of 10 - 15 h o u r s of instruction and will be offered on a weekly basis for six w e e k s or as a weekend workshop. Fourth Semester Second Term R e c r e a t i o n 263 R e c r e a t i o n 271 3 Third Semester R e c r e a t i o n 186 Credit Hours Capilano College Certificate R e c r e a t i o n 163 R e c r e a t i o n 171 Fitness L e a d e r s h i p Second Semester W i l d e r n e s s First A i d II M o u n t a i n e e r i n g II 3 3 Expedition Program T h e O u t d o o r Recreation Department provides the o p p o r tunity for graduates to participate in major e x p e d i t i o n s . Details are available from t h e ' c o o r d i n a t o r . Leisure Leadership 1. Fitness Leadership Programs Program T h e F i t n e s s L e a d e r s h i p P r o g r a m is an u p g r a d i n g p r o g r a m to train Fitness Instructors for p r o f e s s i o n a l a n d volunteer work in e x e r c i s e m a n a g e m e n t or fitness p r o g r a m s . It is d e s i g n e d for the individual w h o s e aims have been or will be in the p r o m o t i o n a n d / o r e x e c u t i o n of "exercise m a n a g e m e n t " or " f i t n e s s " p r o g r a m s , c o m i n g from c o m m u n i t y g r o u p s or the schools. T h e c o u r s e format provides the n e c e s s a r y theoretical and practical information n e c e s s a r y for the practitioner to a d m i n ister a health oriented fitness p r o g r a m . A n e m p h a s i s will be placed on the practical application of the theoretical knowledge required. T h e p r o g r a m is offered evenings a n d w e e k e n d s over four (4) c o l l e g e semesters a n d must be taken in sequential order. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d be in g o o d health a n d in g o o d p h y s i c a l c o n d i t i o n as most c o u r s e s involve p h y s i c a l activity. A p p l i c a n t s must be adult (19 years a n d older) C l a s s size will be limited. Individual c o u r s e s may be taken, but priority must be given to those students enroled in the full Fitness L e a d e r s h i p Program. R e c r e a t i o n 280 Fitness L e a d e r s h i p 6 O n e e v e n i n g a week, 1.5 h o u r s lab, 1.5 h o u r s lecture for 13 weeks M i n i m u m of 25 h o u r s p r a c t i c u m e x p e r i e n c e . Students may challenge c o u r s e s in this program or receive credit for c o u r s e s of a like nature at other institutions or agencies. T h e s e c o u r s e s will be reviewed by the program c o o r d i n a t o r before a d v a n c e credit is issued. 2. T h e Leisure Lifestyling Certificate Program A Lifestyle C o u n s e l l i n g S k i l l s P r o g r a m for field w o r k i n g professionals c o n c e r n e d with healthful management of leisure time. The program seeks to provide training in Leisure Counselling techniques for practitioners in R e c r e a t i o n , S c h o o l s , industrial and commercial programs, and social and neighbourhood services. T h e p r o g r a m provides both a theoretical base a n d an e x p e r i e n t i a l o p p o r t u n i t y to d e v e l o p a n d a p p l y L e i s u r e C o u n s e l l i n g skills for particular client needs. E a c h student will have the opportunity to apply L e i s u r e C o u n s e l l i n g skills to the particular d e m a n d s of their w o r k i n g environment. T h e p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d as an u p g r a d i n g certificate program for w o r k i n g professionals. C o u r s e s are offered at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e L y n n m o u r C a m p u s one e v e n i n g per week, 1 5 hours lecture, 1.5 hours lab. Additional special one-day seminars will also be held on w e e k e n d s where appropriate. There will be a strong e m p h a s i s on participation a n d personal skills development. T h e p r o g r a m c o m m e n c e s in S e p t e m b e r a n d c o n c l u d e s the following M a y / J u n e with a field program development p r a c t i c u m . 113 A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have a proven ability to act in a leadership capacity in the particular vocational or avocational field in which they wish to apply leisure counselling techniques. A limited number of seats will be available to applicants from C o l l e g e a n d University R e c r e a t i o n programs. Leisure Lifestyling Recreation 157 Skills Development (S) (1.5,3,.5) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to b r o a d e n students' existing p r o f i c i e n c i e s in o u t d o o r recreation skills, to d e v e l o p leadership capabilities, safety c o n s c i o u s n e s s in wilderness settings, a n d e c o l o g i c a l a p p r e c i a t i o n of winter w i l d e r n e s s . Credit Capilano College Certificate Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s 12 12 First Semester R e c r e a t i o n 190 Leisure C o u n s e l l i n g 3 Recreation 153 Work, Leisure, a n d S o c i e t y 3 Leisure C o u n s e l l i n g S k i l l s 3 Second Semester Recreation 290 Third Semester R e c r e a t i o n 291 Leisure A p p l i c a t i o n s 3 Recreation 151 T h e O u t d o o r Environment (S) (3,2,1) A c o n c e n t r a t i o n o n the b a s i c s of weather a n d climate, and how weather affects,outdoor recreation activities. M o u n t a i n Weather and personal forecasting will be dealt with in detail. T h e c o u r s e will also f o c u s o n the interpretation of the e n v i ronment from t o p o g r a p h i c maps a n d aerial p h o t o g r a p h s , e m p h a s i z i n g recreation m a p d e s i g n . Recreation 152 Introduction to O u t d o o r Recreation (F) (3,0,1) A brief historical overview of the development of recreation. Nature and s c o p e of o u t d o o r recreation in relation to m o d e r n leisure, nature of s u p p l y and d e m a n d , d e m a n d analysis as a p l a n n i n g tool, c o n c e p t s a n d p h i l o s o p h i e s of parks management, outdoor recreation resource perception, p s y c h o l o g i c a l nature of outdoor recreation, e x p e r i e n c e a n d behaviour, outdoor recreation legislation, carrying c a p a c i t i e s of w i l d lands, land use conflict, multiple u s e policies, inventory techniques. Recreation 153 Leisure Issues (S) (3,0,1) Overview of the functional roles of work a n d leisure in various cultural contexts. Evolution of leisure behaviour in western society, the protestant work ethic, utilitarianism, lifestyle-based variation in work a n d leisure, m o d e r n concepts of work a n d leisure, nature of stress, s o c i o l o g i c a l a n d p s y c h o l o g i c a l perspectives in work a n d leisure, current trends in leisure, p r o g n o s t i c a t i o n s for the future. Recreation 154 O u t d o o r Recreation Facilities (F) (3,0,1) T h e c o u r s e will deal with the structure of delivery systems and the physical facilities w h i c h operate to deal with these delivery systems. A l t h o u g h the c o u r s e will include a general overview in these topics, there will be an e m p h a s i s p l a c e d o n outdoor systems a n d facilities. 114 Recreation 159 O u t d o o r Recreation Administration (S) (3,0,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is o p e n to recreation practitioners in the field. A study of general b u s i n e s s p r a c t i c e s in the o p e r a t i o n of various o u t d o o r recreation facilities, s u c h a s record k e e p i n g , bugeting, accounting, purchasing, advertising a n d c o n c e s s i o n agreements, liabilities, laws a n d statutes g o v e r n i n g parks a n d recreation a g e n c i e s . Recreation 160 Physical Fitness in Theory a n d Practice (F) (3,0,1) A n overview of the constituents of p h y s i c a l fitness in w h i c h the following topics are dealt with. What is p h y s i c a l fitness? What are its p h y s i o l o g i c a l determinants? H o w c a n p h y s i c a l fitness b e a c h i e v e d a n d m a i n t a i n e d ? W e i g h t c o n t r o l , p h y s i o logical c h a n g e s resulting from training a n d exercise, tests for p h y s i c a l fitness, d e s i g n i n g fitness programs. Transferable to S F U . Recreation 161 Wilderness B a c k p a c k i n g I ( S U , F ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the skills of s u m m e r h i k i n g a n d c a m p crafts in wilderness areas. E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d o n leadership d e v e l o p m e n t in o r g a n i z a t i o n , safety a n d g r o u p a s s e s s m e n t . T o p i c s will i n c l u d e a c c e s s to w i l d e r n e s s areas, equipment, survival skills, trip p l a n n i n g a n d o r g a n i z a t i o n , navigation, c a m p crafts, h i k i n g o n difficult terrain, a n d wilderness e c o l o g y C o n s i d e r a t i o n will be given to the p r o b lems of w o r k i n g with g r o u p s , particularly in terms of budget limitations a n d i m p r o v i s i n g e q u i p m e n t . Recreation 162 Wilderness C a n o e i n g I ( S U ) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the skills, t e c h n i q u e s a n d k n o w l e d g e of basic p a d d l i n g in o p e n c a n o e s . T h i s c o u r s e i n c l u d e s instruction in proper h a n d l i n g of equipment: p a d d l i n g skills in g r a d e s of water up to a n d i n c l u d i n g grade 2, practice a n d rescue, t r a c k i n g , lining, portaging, river reading, c a n o e c a m p i n g a n d t e a c h i n g . L e a d e r s h i p t e c h n i q u e s and c a n o e i n g skills will be stressed throughout the course. U p o n completion of C a n o e I students will be given the opportunity to take the Flat Water instructors e x a m from B . C . R . C . A . Recreation 163 Wilderness First A i d I (F,S) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e incorporates the b a s i c p r i n c i p l e s of First A i d with the s p e c i a l i z e d needs of the o u t d o o r leader. T h e c o u r s e i n c l u d e s C . P . R , i m p r o v e d t e c h n i q u e s , a n d the use of metallic splints in addition to the content of a standard first aid c o u r s e . S p e c i a l attention will also be given to the topics of hypothermia a n d hyperthermia. S k i l l levels d e v e l o p e d will reflect St. J o h n A m b u l a n c e c o u r s e content. Recreation 164 Wilderness Nordic Skiing I (S) (3,0,1) Recreation 178 Human Relations in Recreation (F) (3,0,1) T h i s is an introductory c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to give students an initial e x p o s u r e to winter environments o n c r o s s - c o u n t r y skis. T h e c o u r s e i n c l u d e s both a lecture a n d a field trip series with e m p h a s i s on outdoor activity. L e c t u r e t o p i c s are on equipment, w a x i n g , c l o t h i n g , g e o g r a p h i c features, fitness, nutrition a n d safety S k i l l levels will reflect C . A . N . S . I . and C . S A material content. T h i s c o u r s e provides students with the opportunity to understand the process of h u m a n relations within the R e c r e a tion a n d L e i s u r e S e r v i c e s P r o f e s s i o n . T o p i c areas include T i m e M a n a g e m e n t , P o l i c y Development, P e r s o n n e l M a n a g e ment, L e a d e r s h i p , P u b l i c R e l a t o n s , P r o m o t i o n , P l a n n i n g evaluation a n d research. Recreation 166 Environmental Education (F) (6,4,3) Recreation 180 Fitness Leadership (F,S) (3,0,1) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the p h i l o s o p h i e s a n d c o n c e p t s of environmental education and experiential education. Students are e n c o u r a g e d to develop a questioning attitude in reviewing individual and group response to contemporary environmental p h e n o m e n a . B a s e l i n e interpretive skills are promoted w h i c h include s u c h features of the British C o l u m b i a l a n d s c a p e as flora and fauna, geology, geomorphology and urban conditions. Students will be expected to learn to interpret l a n d s c a p e s and identify main l a n d s c a p e c o m p o n e n t s This c o u r s e is designed to c o m b i n e technical and practical information necessary to run a fitness p r o g r a m . T h e accent will be on practical a p p l i c a t i o n of the t e c h n i c a l k n o w l e d g e acquired. Recreation 167 Kayaking I (SU.F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the skills, techniques, and basic principles of e q u i p m e n t a n d safety used w h e n p a d d l i n g in k a y a k s on o c e a n s , lakes and rivers. M o s t of the c o u r s e time is spent in kayaks in water up to grade three Overnight trip(s) are also i n c l u d e d . Students will be e x p e c t e d to s w i m in turbulent waters with clothes on C a n o e Sport B . C . instructors a n d instructional format will be used for the c o u r s e . Recreation 170 Wilderness Recreation (F) (3,0,1) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is open to the p u b l i c A n introductory c o u r s e in w i l d e r n e s s recreation, d e s i g n e d as an overview of the c o m p o n e n t s w h i c h make for a safe and c o m f o r t a b l e e x p e r i e n c e in a w i l d e r n e s s area at different s e a s o n s of the year for different activities. T h e c o u r s e d i s c u s s e s the inter-relationship of p e o p l e ' s needs a n d the environment. G e n e r a l t o p i c s will i n c l u d e leadership, navigation, general g e o g r a p h y , first aid a n d ethics W i l d e r n e s s activities will include b a c k p a c k i n g , c a m p i n g , c a n o e i n g and c r o s s - c o u n t r y s k i i n g . P r e v i o u s e x p e r i e n c e in the activities is not n e c e s s a r y . Recreation 171 Mountaineering I (SU) (3,0,1) T h e c o u r s e will cover basic principles of equipment, safety, glacier travel and c l i m b i n g on rock, ice and snow. A l t h o u g h the c o u r s e is primarily d e s i g n e d for the beginner, it is flexible e n o u g h to cater to people w i s h i n g to improve their skills b e y o n d the novice level. L e c t u r e s are in the e v e n i n g , a n d field e x p e r i e n c e s on w e e k e n d s . ; T r a n s f e r a b l e to S F U Recreation 181 Endurance Activities (Running) (F) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide fitness instructors with information pertaining to the o r g a n i z a t i o n and m a n a g e m e n t of r u n n i n g p r o g r a m s . T h r o u g h t e c h n i c a l , practical and d i s c u s s i o n s e s s i o n s , students s h o u l d gain the information a n d c o n f i d e n c e to motivate a n d c o u n s e l others w h o are involved in or about to begin a running p r o g r a m . Recreation 182 Exercise to Music (F) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for fitness instructors w h o wish to incorporate the use of m u s i c into their fitness p r o g r a m s . T h i s will be a c h i e v e d by p h y s i c a l involvement in a fitness c l a s s where m u s i c is used and by presentation a n d d i s c u s s i o n in the c l a s s r o o m . Recreation 183 Strength Fitness (F) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide fitness instructors, teachers and c o a c h e s with the knowledge and skills necessary to d e s i g n safe a n d effective strength training p r o g r a m s . T h e c o u r s e will f o c u s on strength training programs for general fitness a n d for preparation for sports a n d recreational activities. Recreation 184 Athletic Injuries (F) (1,0..33) This course is designed to give fitness instructors knowledge a n d information on prevention, identification a n d treatment of injuries c o m m o n to extra c u r r i c u l a r activities. T h e c o u r s e will contain both theoretical and practical material. Recreation 185 Fitness for Children (F) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give the fitness instructor the k n o w l e d g e a n d skills n e c e s s a r y to administer a safe and motivating fitness p r o g r a m for c h i l d r e n . E m p h a s i s will be given to practical skills a c q u i s i t i o n . 115 Recreation 186 Aquatic Fitness Program (S) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to provide fitness instructors a n d others w o r k i n g in a q u a t i c s with the k n o w l e d g e a n d skills necessary to develop a variety of safe a n d effective fitness programs in the aquatic setting. The course deals with exercise programs both in the water a n d on the pool deck. Recreation 187 Fitness for Seniors (S) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d for fitness instructors w h o wish to gain knowledge and experience in designing and implementing fitness programs for senior citizens. T h e c o u r s e will c o n t a i n both theoretical a n d practical material. Recreation 188 Nutrition (S) (1,0,.33) This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give fitness instructors basic knowledge of nutrition. Emphasis will be placed on the relationship between nutrition principles a n d p h y s i c a l activity. Recreation 189 Pre & Post Natal Exercises (S) (1,0,.33) T h i s c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to give the fitness Instructor k n o w l e d g e a n d skills in c o n d u c t i n g e x e r c i s e p r o g r a m s for w o m e n in both the pre and post natal c o n d i t i o n . E m p h a s i s will be on theory. It is strongly r e c o m m e n d e d that students have taken R e c r e a t i o n 182 — E x e r c i s e to M u s i c , prior to this course. Recreation 190 Leisure Counselling (F) (3,0,1) T h i s c o u r s e will provide training in leisure c o u n s e l l i n g for practitioners in the area of recreation, c l a s s r o o m t e a c h i n g , s o c i a l and n e i g h b o u r h o o d services, s c h o o l c o u n s e l l i n g and retirement and pre-retirement p l a n n i n g . T h e e m p h a s i s will be u p o n the a p p l i c a t i o n of c o u n s e l l i n g strategies in the leisure a n d recreation field. Recreation 250 Outdoor Recreation Ecology (F) (3,2,1) A study of plant a n d animal e c o l o g y , l a n d - m a n relationships, c o n s e r v a t i o n theories a n d e c o l o g i c a l principles as a basis to recreation land management. Recreation 254 Outdoor Recreation Program Planning (F) (4.5,3,2) T h i s c o u r s e will e x p l o r e the program planning function in o u t d o o r recreation T o p i c s will include: the p r o b l e m s of p l a n n i n g p r o g r a m s in existing delivery s y s t e m s , s e e k i n g w a y s to solve these present p r o b l e m s , new p h i l o s o p h i e s to c o n s i d e r in p r o g r a m m i n g , and s e e k i n g alternative and new methods of program p l a n n i n g in o u t d o o r recreation. Recreation 254 Skills Development Residential Camp Management Lab (F) S t u d e n t s will be required to attend a residential c a m p e x p e r i e n c e . B u d g e t i n g , p l a n n i n g facility operations a n d m a i n t e n a n c e of residential c a m p u s a n d o u t d o o r e d u c a t i o n centre, f i n a n c i n g and b o o k k e e p i n g p r o b l e m s , a s s o c i a t i o n s , regulations, legal liability, programming, public relations, crisis management, b r o c h u r e design a n d marketing a p p r o a c h e s . Recreation 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum (S) (9,0,3) T h e p r a c t i c u m is d e s i g n e d to integrate c l a s s r o o m theory with w o r k i n g e x p e r i e n c e in the field. S t u d e n t s will arrange with the faculty S u p e r v i s o r to s p e n d three months in a n a c c e p t a b l e a g e n c y placement a n d will be r e s p o n s i b l e to a s p e c i f i c a g e n c y supervisor. S t u d e n t s will be provided with terms of reference for the p r a c t i c u m e x p e r i e n c e . S t u d e n t work p e r f o r m a n c e a n d potential will be evaluated by the faculty and a g e n c y supervisor. Recreation 259 Skills Development (F) (1.5,3,5) T o develop s p e c i a l i z e d skills related to the student's e m p l o y m e n t goals. Students will u p g r a d e skills in w i l d e r n e s s p h o t o g r a p h y , d i s p l a y d e s i g n , b r o c h u r e d e s i g n , layout, and g r a p h i c arts. Recreation 261 Wilderness Backpacking II (SU) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s B a c k p a c k i n g I. T h e c o u r s e objective is to further involve students with wilderness b a c k p a c k i n g skills in an a t m o s p h e r e of safety, enjoyment and environmental u n d e r s t a n d i n g . E m p h a s i s will be directed towards the development of leadership experience as it applies to individual and group requirements in wilderness settings. S p e c i a l attention will be f o c u s e d on mountaineering skills, interpretive studies, a n d g e o l o g y . Other topics will include first aid a n d survival skills. Recreation 262 Wilderness Canoeing II (SU) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s C a n o e i n g I. T h i s c o u r s e is a review a n d a d d i t i o n to the C a n o e i n g I material. T h e additions include: c a n o e c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d repair, c a n o e history a n d evolution of the aboriginal c a n o e s , tandem and s o l o m o v i n g water skills, a n d c a n o e p o l i n g . T h e c o u r s e is designed to further develop paddling skills, personal e x p e r i e n c e , teaching ability a n d leadership t e c h n i q u e s . W h e r e a p p l i c a b l e the standards and instruction will be f r o m R . C . A . and the C a n a d i a n R e c r e a t i o n a l C a n o e i n g A s s o c i a t i o n . Recreation 263 Wilderness First Aid II (F.S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I. T h i s c o u r s e reviews the material presented in W i l d e r n e s s First A i d I, with e m p h a s i s o n i n c r e a s e d p r o f i c i e n c y u n d e r c o n d i t i o n s of isolation, where m e d i c a l a s s i s t a n c e is distant a n d where there are e v a c u a t i o n p r o b l e m s . A heavy e m p h a s i s is p l a c e d on practical p r o b l e m solving w h i c h relates to both s u m m e r a n d winter o u t d o o r activities and settings. 116 Recreation 264 Wilderness Nordic Skiing II (S) (3,0,1) Recreation 280 Fitness Leadership (S) (6,0,1) Prerequisite: W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g I or equivalent. This course is designed to explain in detail the physiological, p h y s i c a l a n d s o c i a l factors involved in the preparation of p e r s o n s interested in the area of fitness leadership. T h e howto-do-it aspect of being a fitness instructor will be emphasized. This c o u r s e is d e s i g n e d to further e x p e r i e n c e , a w a r e n e s s , k n o w l e d g e a n d activity skills initiated in W i l d e r n e s s N o r d i c S k i i n g I E m p h a s i s will be p l a c e d u p o n the a c q u i s i t i o n of t e c h n i q u e s for teaching the skills of c r o s s - c o u n t r y s k i i n g in a g r o u p situation a n d ski t o u r i n g t e c h n i q u e s for multi-day trips. T h i s c o u r s e will also deal with safe winter travel and winter survival. This c o u r s e will a l s o i n c l u d e a 25 hour p r a c t i c u m over three months. T h e p r a c t i c u m will be in a n activity of the student's c h o i c e a n d under the s u p e r v i s o n of the c o u r s e instructor. Recreation 267 Kayaking II (SU) (3,0,1) Recreation 290 Leisure Counselling Skills (S) (3,0,1) Intermediate to a d v a n c e d white water technique, kayak touring on rivers, lakes, and on the o c e a n . Major trip planning. C a n o e S p o r t B . C . instructors a n d instructional format will be used t h r o u g h o u t the c o u r s e . T h i s c o u r s e will provide the student with interpersonal skills, self-evaluation t e c h n i q u e s , a n d leisure c o u n s e l l i n g p r o c e d u r e s n e e d e d to do leisure lifestyling s e s s i o n s . Note: A n additional fee will be levied to cover field trip expenses. Recreation 271 Mountaineering II (SU) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: M o u n t a i n e e r i n g I, Federation of M o u n t a i n C l u b s B a s i c M o u n t a i n e e r i n g c o u r s e , equivalent training and e x p e r i e n c e a c c e p t a b l e to Instructor. S t u d e n t s s h o u l d expect to take a skills test prior to c o u r s e c o m m e n c e m e n t . Recreation 291 Leisure Applications (SU) (3,0,1) U n d e r the g u i d a n c e of the c o u r s e instructor a n d a g e n c y supervisor, students will be e x p e c t e d to d e s i g n a n d implement a leisure lifestyling program in an appropriate a g e n c y . T h e p r a c t i c u m will serve to establish student c o m p e t e n c y in realigning c o u r s e c o n c e p t s a n d t e c h n i q u e s to meet the s p e c i a l needs of particular client g r o u p s . T h e c o u r s e will deal with the p r i n c i p l e s a n d t e c h n i q u e s of M o u n t a i n e e r i n g leadership up to a n d i n c l u d i n g an intermediate level on both s n o w a n d ice, a n d o n rock. Note: A n additional fee will be levied to cover field e x p e n s e s . 117 Retail Fashion Merchandising Program Instructional Faculty Second Term Best, E „ B . S c , M . S c . (Man.) Clark, H , B.H.E. (Brit. C o l ) , T.T. Dipl. (B.C.) Hall, E , D i p l . A . D . (St. Martin's S c h o o l of Art), Art T e a c h e r s ' Cert. ( G o l d s m i t h ' s C o l l e g e Univ. of L o n d o n ) K e r s h a w , P , F . C . I , (Hollin's C o l l e g e , Manchester) P o d o l a k , P , Cert. (Mark F o y s , S y d n e y , Australia) Taylor, M , B . S c , (Alta.) W i l s o n , Ft, B . C o m m . (B.C.) F a s h i o n 153 F a s h i o n 172 F a s h i o n 178 F a s h i o n 177 B u s . Mgt. 164 F a s h i o n 150 F a s h i o n Illustration Textiles II C o s t u m e a n d C i v i l i z a t i o n II D e s i g n & Pattern Drafting II Retail M a t h e m a t i c s Consumerism , 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 Third Term General Information T h e Retail F a s h i o n M e r c h a n d i s i n g P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e gives the student the opportunity for c o n c e n t r a t e d study in all facets of retailing in the field of fashion T h e c o u r s e is a two year p r o g r a m with students required to take seven c o u r s e s per semester. First year provides a basic b a c k g r o u n d in fashion a n d i n c l u d e s c o u r s e s in p r o m o tion, history of f a s h i o n , pattern drafting, pattern d e s i g n , principles of c o l o u r a n d d e s i g n , f a s h i o n illustration, textiles, c o n s u m e r i s m and c o m m u n i c a t i o n s . In s e c o n d year, study i n c l u d e s marketing, m e r c h a n d i s i n g , career readiness, visual display, interior d e s i g n , a c c o u n t i n g , s a l e s m a n s h i p , retail s u p e r v i s i o n , a n d advertising. B u s . Mgt. 230 F a s h i o n 266 B u s . Mgt. 271 B u s Mgt. 169 F a s h i o n 272 B u s Mgt. 273 Salesmanship Fashion Marketing Merchandising Accounting Fundamentals Boutique Management L a b I P r i n c i p l e s of A d v e r t i s i n g 16.5 Fourth Term F a s h i o n 259 F a s h i o n 265 F a s h i o n 273 B u s . Mgt. 163 F a s h i o n 257 F a s h i o n 264 F a s h i o n M e r c h a n d i s i n g II Career Readiness B o u t i q u e M a n a g e m e n t L a b II P r i n c i p l e s of L e a d e r s h i p & Supervision Merchandise Display F a s h i o n Interiors E a c h semester the student s u p p l e m e n t s the c l a s s r o o m teaching with industry e x p e r i e n c e . In this way the student is able to observe and put the p r i n c i p l e s learned into practice. L e a r n i n g b e c o m e s a reality t h r o u g h e x p e r i e n c e . Retail Fashion Merchandising Courses S t u d e n t s w h o have had p o s t - s e c o n d a r y c o u r s e s may make arrangements with the Program Coordinator to substitute electives in lieu of prescribed c o u r s e s . Fashion 150 Consumerism (S) (3,0,1) T h e optional fourth hour m e n t i o n e d in the following outline of c o u r s e s indicates an hour over a n d above an office hour where student a n d instructor have contact c o n v e r s a t i o n . T h e two year program provides the students with a foundation on w h i c h to build a career in the d y n a m i c fashion industry. P r a c t i c a l a n d theoretical skills are d e v e l o p e d . A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have s o m e retail or retail-related e x p e r i e n c e . A more detailed d e s c r i p t i o n of the p r o g r a m and a p p l i c a t i o n s c a n be obtained from the C a r e e r s office, Retail F a s h i o n M e r c h a n d i s i n g Department, 986-1911, local 390. Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Credit Hours Major P r o g r a m R e q u i r e m e n t s General Education Requirements 66 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 3 3 3 1.5 3 3 3 16.5 A s t u d y of the c o n s u m e r ' s d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g p r o c e s s ; d e v e l o p m e n t s in the b a s i c s of c o n s u m e r credit, a n d the art of successful buymanship S t u d e n t s will undertake group research and presentations a n d individual c o n s u m e r research projects. Fashion 151 Textiles I (F) (3,0,1) A n introductory study of textile fabrics a n d the textile industry. A survey of the d e v e l o p m e n t a n d use of f a s h i o n fabrics i n c l u d i n g fibre identification a n d characteristics, p r o d u c t i o n a n d testing methods. Fashion 153 Fashion Illustration (S) (3,0,1) S k e t c h i n g garments for the f a s h i o n figure; utilization of d e s i g n c o n c e p t s for illustrations w h i c h c o u l d be u s e d in s h o w r o o m or advertising situations. S h o r t h a n d s k e t c h i n g . 69 First Term C m n s 150 F a s h i o n 151 F a s h i o n 156 F a s h i o n 158 F a s h i o n 174 F a s h i o n 176 Communications Textiles I Fashion Promotion P r i n c i p l e s of C o l o u r & D e s i g n Costume & Civilization I D e s i g n & Pattern Drafting I 3 3 3 3 3 3 18~~ 118 Fashion 156 Fashion Promotion (F) (3,0,1) A f a s h i o n overview on p r o m o t i o n from a study of p e r s o n a l s e l f - p r o m o t i o n to the larger w o r l d of p r o m o t i n g f a s h i o n . T h e e m p h a s i s in c l a s s will be o n d e v e l o p i n g c o n f i d e n c e a n d expertise on promoting products a n d ideas for industry w h i c h will include aspects of f a s h i o n s h o w c o o r d i n a t i o n , a n d b a s i c s of advertising, media, a n d writing skills Fashion 158 Principles of C o l o u r & Design (F) (3,0,1) Fashion 259 Fashion Merchandising II (S) (3,0,1) A n i n t r o d u c t i o n to the c o n c e p t s of c o l o u r a n d d e s i g n as they are u s e d in F a s h i o n Illustration. A p p l i c a t i o n of the principles of g r a p h i c c o m p o s i t i o n , b a s i c form a n d shape, c o l o u r theory a n d visual c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , impact o n fashion related t h e m e s a n d subjects t h r o u g h instruction, field trips, individual d e s i g n a n d analysis. A study of the p r i n c i p l e s of retail b u y i n g a n d selling of f a s h i o n s , study of m e r c h a n d i s i n g f u n c t i o n s s u c h as inventory c o n t r o l , w o r k i n g with suppliers, d e v e l o p i n g assortments, a n d buyer responsibilities. Fashion 174 C o s t u m e & Civilization I (F) (3,0,1) C o s t u m e & C i v i l i z a t i o n I a n d II is a survey c o u r s e in two semesters of the relationship of garments to their c o n t e m porary world. G a r m e n t styles are traced from the ancient E g y p t i a n s to the present a n d set in their framework of a r c h i tecture a n d interior d e s i g n . S i r K e n n e t h C l a r k ' s " C i v i l i z a t i o n " film series is used as a b a c k g r o u n d for this study. Fashion 176 Design a n d Pattern Drafting (F) (3,0,1) B a s i c p r i n c i p l e s a n d t e c h n i q u e s of garment d e s i g n a n d p r o d u c t i o n , involvement with original d e s i g n , pattern-making and garment instruction, d e v e l o p m e n t of skill in solving fitting p r o b l e m s . Market survey of d e s i g n a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n standards. Fashion 172 Textiles II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Textiles I or written p e r m i s s i o n of instructor T o d e v e l o p a more s o p h i s t i c a t e d body of k n o w l e d g e on textiles S t u d e n t s will a c c u m u l a t e c o m p l e t e sets of g l o s s a r y and information files, .and will more t h o r o u g h l y test, d e m o n strate a n d research fabrics. C a s e studies a n d d i s c u s s i o n g r o u p s will form an important part of e d u c a t i o n a l e x p e r i e n c e . Fashion 178 C o s t u m e & Civilization II (S) (3,0,1) S e e " C o s t u m e & C i v i l i z a t i o n I" d e s c r i p t i o n . C o s t u m e I is a prerequisite. Fashion 177 Design & Pattern Drafting II (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: Retail F a s h i o n 176 o r written p e r m i s s i o n of instructor. A c o n t i n u a t i o n of individual d e s i g n i n g a n d development of g a r m e n t s , c o m p a r i s o n of c o n s t r u c t i o n t e c h n i q u e s a n d design in relation to retail value; d i s c u s s i o n of current design and designers. Fashion 257 Merchandise Display (S) (3,0,1) T e c h n i q u e s a n d theory of m e r c h a n d i s e d i s p l a y ; practical application in class oriented to retail in-store display activities and w i n d o w d i s p l a y s Fashion 264 F a s h i o n Interiors (S) (3,0,1) F a s h i o n Interiors teaches the fundamentals of interior design as they relate to the m e r c h a n d i s i n g of fashion. Students d e s i g n a boutique using the floor plan, renderings, c h o i c e of fabric, s e l e c t i o n of c o l o u r s a n d texture to s h o w c a s e the fashion m e r c h a n d i s e . A l l interior d e s i g n c o m p o n e n t s are d i s c u s s e d a s a n e x t e n s i o n of the f a s h i o n w o r l d Fashion 265 Career Readiness (S) (3,0,1) T h e objective of the c o u r s e will be to provide the student with practical skills for s u c c e s s f u l career s e a r c h . T h e student will r e s e a r c h several p r o f e s s i o n a l s in the f a s h i o n industry a n d will e x p e r i e n c e a brief practical e x p e r i e n c e with a fashion p r o f e s s i o n a l . G u e s t lecturers will present their views on resume writing, p r o f e s s i o n a l career research, interview skill development a n d other career-related skill development. F a s h i o n 266 F a s h i o n Marketing (F) (3,0,1) T h e objective of this c o u r s e is to e x a m i n e the role of marketing in the fashion industry. E m p h a s i s is p l a c e d o n the marketing p r o b l e m - s o l v i n g and d e c i s i o n - m a k i n g required by a firm's executives. It f o c u s e s o n the a c c e p t a n c e of the marketing c o n c e p t — a p h i l o s o p h y stressing the need for a marketing rather than p r o d u c t i o n orientation. It e x a m i n e s four elements of management — its product, price s y s t e m , c h a n n e l s of distribution structure a n d p r o m o t i o n a l activities. O u t s i d e field work will be required in order to acquaint the student with practical b u s i n e s s a p p l i c a t i o n s of the theoretical teaching. B S M G 271 Fashion M e r c h a n d i s i n g (F) (3,0,1) S t u d e n t s will achieve a basic u n d e r s t a n d i n g of types of retail outlets a n d their o r g a n i z a t i o n R o l e s of store m a n a g e ment will be studied a n d the c a s e study m e t h o d will be frequently utilized. P r i c i n g strategies, location, store layouts, competitive strategies a n d s h o p p i n g centres will be e x a m i n e d a n d the visual m e r c h a n d i s i n g t e c h n i q u e s of the s u c c e s s f u l merchandiser. Fashion 272/3 Boutique Management L a b I, II (F.S) (1.5,0,3) T h i s c o u r s e is a practical a p p l i c a t i o n a n d f o l l o w u p from the F a s h i o n M e r c h a n d i s i n g c o u r s e s I a n d II T h e instructor will provide the basic management structure of the Retail F a s h i o n " D o w n S o u t h Gift S h o p " store activities weekly. T h e students will act as store managers in: C o n t r o l , Staff T r a i n i n g , B u y i n g and Display a n d P r o m o t i o n Students will be entirely responsible for operating the store a n d all those activities a n d managerial responsibilities in operating a s u c c e s s f u l retail store. 119 Vocational Pre-Employment and Upgrading Program T h e following p r o g r a m s may be offered in 1981/82, subject to funding. F o r further information t e l e p h o n e the C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l Office (986-1911 L o c a l 390). A p p l i c a n t s to these p r o g r a m s may wish to c o n t a c t their local C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t and Immigration C e n t r e for c o u n s e l l i n g a n d financial a s s i s t a n c e . 1. Building Material and Supply Worker It is the aim of this program to provide individuals with the basic skills a n d k n o w l e d g e prerequisite to o b t a i n i n g a b e g i n n i n g career position in the b u i l d i n g industry. General Information There are five main areas of study: material handling skills, building material fundamentals, c u s t o m e r service skills, basic e m p l o y m e n t skills, and job safety skills. A " B a s i c Lift Truck O p e r a t o r " Certificate c o u l d be obtained by s u c c e s s f u l l y completing that s e c t i o n of the c o u r s e . Metric s i z i n g a n d Imperial/metric c o n v e r s i o n s will be basic to the c o u r s e . Requirements for Admission A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have an interest a n d desire for a career in the B u i l d i n g S u p p l y Industry. T h e r e is a m i n i m u m e d u c a t i o n a l prerequisite of G r a d e 10. with G r a d e 12 b e i n g preferred. Classes Five d a y s per week for one term (4 months). General Information T h e r e are eight main areas of study: lawns, s o i l s , plant nutrition, plant materials, bed preparation for planting, equipment m a i n t e n a n c e , b u s i n e s s p r a c t i c e s a n d l i c e n s i n g for pesticides and i n s e c t i c i d e s A v o c a t i o n a l certificate will be issued a n d students will be given c o a c h i n g to aid in s u c c e s s fully p a s s i n g the e x a m i n a t i o n for the pesticide l i c e n s e s . Admission Requirements Applicants should have an interest and a desire for a career in the l a n d s c a p e and g r o u n d s m a i n t e n a n c e b u s i n e s s , a n d also an interest in w o r k i n g o u t d o o r s . T h e r e is a m i n i m u m education prerequisite of G r a d e 10, with G r a d e 12 preferred. C l a s s e s 9:00 to 4:00, five d a y s per week 5. Retail Sales Training — 2 weeks T h e Program is designed as a primary course for individuals w h o look forward to selling careers with large or small established firms — or on their o w n . T h e participants will learn a c o m b i n a t i o n of principles, t e c h n i q u e s a n d skills. T h e principles that receive e m p h a s i s are basic a n d lasting; they are principles that participants will apply in b u s i n e s s . T e c h niques and skills include practices to adopt and p r a c t i c e s to a v o i d . 6. Small Engine Repair — 5 months T h i s p r o g r a m provides p r e - e m p l o y m e n t training that equips the graduate with the n e c e s s a r y theory a n d skills to s u c c e s s f u l l y work at the repair a n d m a i n t e n a n c e of s m a l l engines. 2. Carpentry — Pre-Apprentice — 5 months General Information With the Department of L a b o u r a p r o g r a m is offered to provide pre-entry level skills for a p p r e n t i c e s h i p training. T h i s full-time p r o g r a m is offered over 5 m o n t h s D u r i n g this period safety, use of tools, o x y - a c e t l y n e w e l d i n g , e n g i n e theory a n d d i a g n o s i s , b a s i c trade m a t h e m a t i c s a n d metrics a n d b u s i n e s s m a n a g e m e n t are taught. General Information: Basic instruction in tools and materials, trade mathematics, concrete fittings and frames, rough framing, blueprint reading, roof framing and stair planning is offered. C l a s s e s are held o n a full-time basis. Requirements for Admission A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have an interest a n d desire for a career in the B u i l d i n g S u p p l y Industry. Requirements for Admission A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d have an interest a n d desire for a career in the B u i l d i n g S u p p l y Industry. 7. Waiter/Waitress Training — 2-3 weeks 3. Heavy Equipment Operator — 1 month T h i s p r o g r a m is d e s i g n e d to provide short term training for individuals to be e m p l o y e d in the hospitality industry. T h e p r o g r a m incfudes s u c h t o p i c s as sanitation, safety, preparation, selling a n d o r d e r i n g , s e r v i n g of f o o d a n d beverages, c a s h p r o c e d u r e s . S p e c i a l i z e d p r o g r a m s are offered p r o v i d i n g instruction in the operation of various pieces of heavy e q u i p m e n t ( L o g L o a d e r , B u l l d o z e r s . G r a d e r s , etc.). T h e particular c o u r s e s offered vary from year to year, d e p e n d i n g u p o n the needs of local industry. P l e a s e p h o n e for current details. 4. Landscape & Grounds Maintenance Worker 6 months Objective T h e aim of this p r o g r a m is to provide individuals with the basic skills a n d k n o w l e d g e prerequisite to o b t a i n i n g a b e g i n n i n g career position in the L a n d s c a p e and G r o u n d s M a i n t e n a n c e Industry. 120 Programs and Courses for Special Needs T h e r e are m a n y adults in the c o l l e g e r e g i o n w h o s e e d u c a t i o n a l n e e d s are not met by the credit or credit free p r o g r a m s or c o u r s e s leading to c o l l e g e certification. A c c o r d ingly the C o l l e g e offers a n u m b e r of other c o u r s e s a n d p r o g r a m s w h i c h meet these s p e c i a l n e e d s . S u c h p r o g r a m s and c o u r s e s c a n be organized in r e s p o n s e to c o m m u n i t y request to b e g i n at any time of the year. T h o s e offered in 1981-82 i n c l u d e : R a m s a y , Frank, B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) R a w s t h o r n e , M., B . H . E c . (Brit. Col.) S c h m i d t , K.A., O n t a r i o T e a c h e r ' s Certificate, S o c i a l S e r v i c e s D i p l o m a (Ryerson) Southerst, J . , B.A., B . E d . (Brit. C o l ) , B . C . Teacher's Certificate S p e n c e r , L.A., B.A. ( S F U ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate T h o m l i n s o n , A G . B A , M . S c (Brit. C o l ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Preparatory and Special N e e d Programs Certificate Y o u n g , D.E., B.A. ( S F U ) , S . R . N . ( L o n d o n ) , S C M . (Scotland), D i p l o m a T . N . (London) C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e offers the f o l l o w i n g s p e c i a l programs to help meet the varied needs of all students in its region: General Information 1. B a s i c E m p l o y m e n t S k i l l s — see page 121 2. B a s i c S k i l l s in M a t h / E n g l i s h / S c i e n c e — see page 121 3. C o l l e g e Preparatory c o u r s e s in M a t h e m a t i c s (Math 009012) see page 43 4. C o l l e g e Preparatory C o u r s e s in E n g l i s h ( E n g l i s h 010) see page 29 5. C o l l e g e Preparatory c o u r s e s in C h e m i s t r y (Chemistry 030) see page 26 6. E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e — see p a g e 122 7. L e a r n i n g A s s i s t a n c e P r o g r a m s — see page 123 8. Alternative R o u t e P r o g r a m for the Mentally D i s a b l e d — see p a g e ' 1 2 2 9. C a r e e r Alternatives for W o m e n — see page 121 BASIC EMPLOYMENT SKILLS TRAINING This program is designed to help people w h o have difficulty getting a n d keeping a job. First, students a s s e s s themselves, their skills and interests as well as any jobs they've had in the past. Then students have the opportunity to have two work w e e k s in jobs they think they w o u l d like. At the s a m e students learn about job requirements, training programs and c o m m u n i t y resources T h e y a l s o learn h o w to apply for a job. C o u r s e Content 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Self A s s e s s m e n t a n d C a r e e r E x p l o r a t i o n , Keeping a Job J o b Search Skills Work E x p e r i e n c e J o b Search For further information, contact the B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g a n d C a r e e r Development Department. BASIC TRAINING FOR SKILLS DEVELOPMENT Instructional Faculty A t h a i d e , D.J.A., B . S c , H o n o u r s ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( B r i t . C o l ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate B a n k s , J . L . , B . S c . (Hons.) ( S F U ) Bannister, J . , B.A., B.S.W. (Brit. C o l ) , D i p l . of E d . (Oxford) M . E d . (Toronto), B . C . Teacher's Certificate, Nfld. Teacher's Certificate B r o w n , Shirley, B . E d . (Brit. C o l . ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate C a i r n s , M . C . , B . S c . (Mathematics), (Calgary), Alta. T e a c h e r ' s Cert. C h a m b e r l i n , R., S t a n d a r d Certificate (B.C.) Duvall, J . E . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , D i p l . E d . (Sask.) F u t t e r m a n , E., B . S c . ( C a l i f o r n i a , Berkley) H i n d , J . , B.A. (1st C l a s s H o n o u r s ) ( S F U ) , M.A. (Brit. Col.) H o d g s o n , P., B.A. ( H o n o u r s ) , B . E d . (Queen's) Irvine, R.F., T e a c h e r ' s Certificate, S a s k a t c h e w a n P a s s , J . , B . A . (Brit. C o l ) , B . C . T e a c h e r ' s Certificate T h e B.T.S.D. program provides an opportunity for students to gain the equivalent of grades 6, 8, 10 or 12 in E n g l i s h , M a t h e m a t i c s and the S c i e n c e s . C o m p l e t i o n of the program increases e m p l o y m e n t opportunities a n d qualifies for entry into further e d u c a t i o n a n d / o r training programs. T h e c o m pletion of B . T . S . D . does not entitle students to a formal high s c h o o l d i p l o m a . T h e p r o g r a m may be f o l l o w e d full-time or part-time, d a y or evening. T h e average time required for c o m p l e t i o n of a level is six months, but students are e n c o u r a g e d to c o m p l e t e their work in as short a time as p o s s i b l e . D u r i n g the first month, the student's abilities, interests, goals a n d previous educational e x p e r i e n c e s are a s s e s s e d to determine w h i c h of the four levels is attainable by the student. All applicants are interviewed before entering the program to determine their e d u c a t i o n a l needs a n d current a c a d e m i c abilities. A p p l i c a n t s must be 17 years of a g e or over, a n d out of s c h o o l for at least one year. A p p l i c a n t s are normally admitted at the b e g i n n i n g of e a c h month and are advised to apply at least three months before they w i s h to enter the p r o g r a m In s o m e cases, C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t and Immigration offers financial support for full-time students. A p p l i c a n t s are advised to contact their l o c a l C E I C office. Regular attendance is c r u c i a l a n d students are e x p e c t e d attend all classes in which they are enroled P o o r attendance may be g r o u n d s for d i s c o n t i n u a t i o n in the program. CAREER ALTERNATIVES PROGRAM General Information T h e C a r e e r Alternatives P r o g r a m is a four month part-time p r o g r a m w h i c h provides a n o p p o r t u n i t y to a s s e s s current life styles a n d to set g o a l s based o n individual skills a n d interests. Participants will get information about training programs; employment options; community resources and other agencies w h i c h may assist them in making vocational d e c i s i o n s . Program Outline Career Development Seminar — increased confidence and self-awareness; job a n d training information, resume a n d interview t e c h n i q u e s . C o m m u n i c a t i o n s — d e v e l o p m e n t of skills in oral a n d written E n g l i s h . D i r e c t e d Work E x p e r i e n c e — c l a s s e s c a n c e l l e d students work at a job for one week and 121 Information meetings for S e p t e m b e r a n d J a n u a r y terms are held throughout the year. F o r further information contact the B u s i n e s s T r a i n i n g a n d C a r e e r Development Department 986-1911 local 235. ENGLISH AS A S E C O N D English. T h e c o u r s e will p r o c e e d with t h e patterns set b y t h e students' needs, generally b e g i n n i n g with a review of b a s i c s . Included in the c o u r s e of study are: reading a n d oral c o m p r e h e n s i o n , s e n t e n c e structure, p a r a g r a p h s a n d short e s s a y s , c o m p o s i t i o n , v o c a b u l a r y , dictations, s p e l l i n g a n d verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n . This c o u r s e i n c l u d e s conversation c l a s s e s and l a n g u a g e lab e x e r c i s e s . LANGUAGE Instructional Faculty Acosta, Joan, B.A. (California), E.S.L. Certificate (San Francisco State) A i t k e n . K e n n e t h , B . A . (Brit. C o l . ) Bannister, Elizabeth, B . E d . (Brit. C o l ) , T e a c h i n g D i p l o m a (Birmingham) B o r d e w i c k , J o l e n e , B . S c . E d . (Idaho), P r o f e s s i o n a l T e a c h i n g Certificate ( S F U ) Collins, Nicholas, B.A. (London), M . A , A d v a n c e d Professional T e a c h i n g Certificate (Brit. C o l . ) , C o o r d i n a t o r Fry, Marlene, B . E d . (Brit. C o l . ) G l a s s . R i c h a r d , B . A (California), M . A . (Southern California), P h . D . (Washington) K u b i c e k , R a m o n , B . A . (Sir G e o r g e Williams), M . A . ( S F U ) Renes, Laura, B . A , M.A. (Toronto), T . E . S . L . Certificate ( G e o r g e Brown) T o o r , Baljeet, B . A . ( S F U ) For students with a first l a n g u a g e other than E n g l i s h , the C o l l e g e offers a variety of c o u r s e s to help them achieve the level of c o m p e t e n c y in E n g l i s h that they desire. T o qualify for these c o u r s e s a potential student M U S T be either a L a n d e d Immigrant o r a C a n a d i a n citizen A l l a s p e c t s of the language are c o v e r e d — s p e a k i n g , reading and writing at the Beginner, Intermediate a n d A d v a n c e d levels. T h e c o u r s e s are presented in three categories — part-time e v e n i n g , full-time d a y a n d A c a d e m i c Preparatory. A n E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test result or the Instructor's permission is required to enrol in the A c a d e m i c Preparatory course. C o u r s e s are not transferable to university. E n g l i s h a s a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e may b e studied o n a fullfor individual c o u r s e s is also possible. In s o m e cases, C a n a d a E m p l o y m e n t a n d Immigration offers financial support for full-time students. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d contact their local C E I C office for m o r e information. For further information, call 986-1911 local 282. E . S . L . 020 English as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e (F.S) Note: T h i s c o u r s e is not transferable to university. T h i s is a n e v e n i n g c o u r s e , offered o n two evenings a week. A l t h o u g h these c l a s s e s c o n c e n t r a t e o n s p e a k i n g E n g l i s h , they have a reading a n d writing c o m p o n e n t . Instruction is offered on four different levels from B a s i c B e g i n n e r s to Advanced. P l e a s e contact (local 282). Note: T h i s c o u r s e is not transferable to university. Prerequisite: English 090 or written permission of the instructor. This course is similar to E n g l i s h 090 except that the student s h o u l d have a higher level of ability in the E n g l i s h l a n g u a g e , and the stress of study will be o n writing, d i s c u s s i o n a n d e x p r e s s i o n of ideas. E . S . L . 092 English a s a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e N o t e : T h i s c o u r s e is not transferable t o "university. Prerequisite: English 091 or written permission of the instructor This c o u r s e includes essay writing, dictation, punctuation a n d the study of various p r i n c i p l e s of E n g l i s h syntax. General Information time basis, but registration E . S . L . 091 English as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e (F.S) (3,0,1) the Department for more information E . S . L . 090 English as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e (F,S) (3,0,1) Note: This c o u r s e is not transferable to university. A c o u r s e d e s i g n e d to provide the student, w h o s e first language is not E n g l i s h , with verbal a n d written skills in ALTERNATIVE ROUTE - EDUCATION FOR T H E MENTALLY DISABLED Instructional Faculty Bordewick, Jolene, B.S.(Ed), P . D P . (SFU) S c h m i d t , Katharine, T e a c h e r ' s C e r t , S o c i a l S e r v i c e s Cert. Ryerson Polytechnical Spencer, Linda, B.A. (SFU), Teaching Cert. G e n e r a l Information T h i s p r o g r a m w a s d e v e l o p e d in c o n s u l t a t i o n with the North S h o r e A s s o c i a t i o n for the Mentally H a n d i c a p p e d in order to serve the needs of mentally d i s a b l e d adults in the C o l l e g e region. T h e program consists of seven m o d u l e s of two weeks each (10 hours/week). T h e s e modules deal with the development of basic c o m m u n i c a t i o n skills. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Developing expressive non-verbal language A p p l i c a t i o n of verbal l a n g u a g e skills C l e a r language e x p r e s s i o n B u i l d i n g simple sentences D e v e l o p i n g listening skills Writing simple s e n t e n c e s a n d filling in f o r m s D e v e l o p i n g a basic o n e - w o r d vocabulary For further information contact (986-1911, L o c a l 258 or 259) Capilano College LEARNING ASSISTANCE C O U R S E S In addition to its services as a resource centre (see p. 13), the Learning A s s i s t a n c e C e n t r e offers daytime, w e e k e n d , and evening w o r k s h o p s and courses. For specific times and dates, contact the C e n t r e at the L y n n m o u r C a m p u s or in S q u a m i s h . Courses in Lynnmour Learning Assistance Program 010 Learning and Study Skills Workshops (F,S,SU) (0,0,2) Each w o r k s h o p series c o n s i s t s of six hours of instruction and d i s c u s s i o n . L e a r n i n g a n d S t u d y S k i l l s W o r k s h o p topics include time management, note-taking, d i s c u s s i o n skills, c o n c e n t r a t i o n building, e x a m i n a t i o n t e c h n i q u e s a n d essay writing. Learning Assistance Program 011 Reading Workshops (F,S,SU) (0,0,2) T h r o u g h a series of intensive reading w o r k s h o p s , students learn a n d practice essential reading t e c h n i q u e s . T h e s e w o r k s h o p s are d e s i g n e d to increase reading s p e e d a n d comprehension. Learning Assistance Program 012 Vocabulary Development (F,S,SU) (0,0,2) In the V o c a b u l a r y Development w o r k s h o p , students will acquire a m e t h o d o l o g y for systematically d e v e l o p i n g an effective v o c a b u l a r y . A s well, efforts will be made to provide students with s o m e of the terminology appropriate to their fields of study. Learning Assistance Program 013 Spelling Improvement (F,S,SU) (0,0,1.5) T h e S p e l l i n g Improvement w o r k s h o p series will assist students in a n a l y z i n g the strengths a n d w e a k n e s s e s of their s p e l l i n g ability T h e r e will be s o m e d i s c u s s i o n of c o m m o n error patterns, m n e m o n i c strategies a n d traditional spelling rules. S t u d e n t s will receive a high degree of individual attention a n d will have a c c e s s to a taped s p e l l i n g p r o g r a m . Learning Assistance Program 014 Conceptual Blockbusting (F.S.SU) (0,0,2) In these w o r k s h o p s , students will practice the strategies of defining and solving problems. Participants will " b l o c k bust" ideas a n d solve p r o b l e m s in g r o u p s to help define a n d clarify the thinking p r o c e s s e s . Creative thinking will be encouraged. Learning Assistance Program 015 Writing the College Essay (F,S,SU) (0,0,2) In this w o r k s h o p series, students will receive a brief introduction to the a p p r o a c h , format a n d method of the research paper. A library orientation, a note-taking method, and topic d e v e l o p m e n t will be d i s c u s s e d . Learning Assistance 016 Communication Skills (F,S,SU) (0,0,2) T h e aim of this w o r k s h o p will be to e n h a n c e d i s c u s s i o n skills through attention to s u c h factors as c o n c i s e expression, non-verbal c o m m u n i c a t i o n , a n d self image. Learning Assistance Program 017 Thinking with Clarity (F.S.SU) (0,0,2) T h e main e m p h a s i s of this w o r k s h o p will be on providing an introduction to logical thinking Learning Assistance Program 090 Reading Skills (F.S.SU) (0,0,2) T h e aim of this preparatory c o u r s e is to improve reading c o m p r e h e n s i o n s o that students will be better able to participate in other c o l l e g e c o u r s e s . Learning Assistance Program 201 Reading Dynamics (F,S,SU) (1.5,0,.5) T h i s c o u r s e aims to i m p r o v e reading s p e e d a n d c o m p r e h e n s i o n . T h e learning a n d p r a c t i s i n g of b a s i c reading t e c h n i q u e s assists students in b e c o m i n g versatile, effective readers. General Awards T h e following a w a r d s are not a d m i n i s t e r e d through the College. Information is provided to assist students who wish to make application to the granting agency(ies). For more detailed information of these awards, contact the Financial A i d office. British C o l u m b i a Athletic Awards Fifteen B . C . A t h l e t i c A w a r d s , valued at $750 e a c h , are awarded annually to B . C . students w h o s h o w e v i d e n c e of: 1. 2. 3. 4. Athletic ability a n d p e r f o r m a n c e ; L e a d e r s h i p a n d character; S c h o l a s t i c achievement; B e i n g e n r o l e d full-time a n d c o m p l e t e d full-time credits (12 units/year or 24 semester hours) at a p o s t - s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n a l institution in B . C ; 5. A m i n i m u m of C+ average or equivalent. Qualifying Guidelines: All student athletes, resident in B.C. w h o attend a designated B . C . c o l l e g e are eligible. A n d , all B . C . university student athletes, resident in B . C . at least three years w h o c o m p e t e in those sports not i n c l u d e d in the University S p o r t s A w a r d P r o g r a m are eligible. That is, university athletes c o m p e t i n g in the following sports are ineligible: basketball, c r o s s - c o u n t r y , diving, field h o c k e y (women), football (men), golf (men), g y m n a s t i c s , ice h o c k e y (men), r o w i n g , sailing, s k i i n g , s o c c e r (men), s w i m m i n g , track and field, volleyball a n d wrestling (men). B . C . G . E . U . Student Scholarship British C o l u m b i a G o v e r n m e n t E m p l o y e e s U n i o n offers a n n u a l s c h o l a r s h i p s c o n s i s t i n g of 10 a w a r d s w o r t h $500.00 e a c h for students related to B . C . G . E . U . m e m b e r s . All a p p l i c a n t s must be relatives of B . C . G . E . U . m e m b e r s in g o o d s t a n d i n g or relatives of d e c e a s e d or retired m e m b e r s . A p p l i c a n t must be registering in a B . C institution for p o s t s e c o n d a r y or post-graduate studies for c o u r s e s of 8 m o n t h s or longer. R e q u i r e m e n t s : S t u d e n t s must have an a c a d e m i c s t a n d i n g of C+ or better. F o r mature students this requirement w o u l d be waived. A s s i g n m e n t : A typewritten essay of 1,500 to 2,000 w o r d s about the "role of p u b l i c service u n i o n s in y o u r c o m m u n i t y a n d h o w they affect y o u . " A c c o m p a n y i n g this e s s a y must be a list of the unions in y o u r c o m m u n i t y , all reference material noted, a n d personal c o n t a c t s s h o u l d a l s o be noted. Deadline: F e b r u a r y 28 T h e British C o l u m b i a Scholarships Hotels Association Six s c h o l a r s h i p s of $300.00 e a c h , are offered to residents of B . C . a n d w h o are b e g i n n i n g or c o n t i n u i n g studies in the s e c o n d , third, or higher year of University work. S e l e c t i o n of the winners will be made by the U n i v e r s i t y o n the basis of s c h o l a s t i c standing, p e r s o n a l qualities, a n d interest a n d participation in student a n d c o m m u n i t y affairs. A p p l i c a t i o n deadline: J u l y 1 British C o l u m b i a Cultural F u n d Awards J u n i o r T u i t i o n A w a r d : to a m a x i m u m of $500.00 e a c h . A r e tenable for a m a x i m u m of four years of full-time study, up to and i n c l u d i n g 2 n d year of a university or c o m m u n i t y c o l l e g e program. A p p l i c a t i o n s are evaluated on the basis of: 1. P e r f o r m a n c e a n d a c h i e v e m e n t s in the individual, past and present. 2. F i n a n c i a l need. 3. P e r s o n a l objectives of the a p p l i c a n t . 4. Nature a n d length of p r o p o s e d program of study. T h e B . C . Indian Arts and Welfare Society Memorial Bursary A m o u n t : $150.00. Available to: B . C Native Indians w h o are p l a n n i n g to enter o n e of the established c o l l e g e s , universities, technical s c h o o l s or training centres in B . C . If no a p p l i c a t i o n is received from a student entering the first year of c o l l e g e , then the bursary may be awarded to a student e n r o l e d in 'another year. Deadline: J u n e 30 B.C. Telephone Company British C o l u m b i a Forest Products Regional College Scholarships Limited S c h o l a r s h i p s of $250 are offered by B . C . Forest P r o d u c t s Limited to legal d e p e n d e n t s of e m p l o y e e s of the C o m p a n y w h o , by J u n e 30th of the year in w h i c h the a w a r d s are made, have or will have served with the C o m p a n y for at least one year. T h e y are o p e n to students p r o c e e d i n g in the fall from G r a d e 12 to a full p r o g r a m of studies at a regional c o l l e g e . T h e r e will be one s c h o l a r s h i p allotted every year to C a p i l a n o College. T h e s c h o l a r s h i p will be awarded to the candidate with the highest record of s c h o l a s t i c achievement in h i s / h e r final two years of high s c h o o l . N o award will be made, however, to an applicant with an overall average of less than 70%. Deadline: S e p t e m b e r 1 Scholarships B.C. Telephone C o m p a n y provides four annual scholarships for d e p e n d e n t s of B . C . T e l e m p l o y e e s w h o are e n r o l e d in first y e a r p o s t - s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n . S c h o l a r s h i p s are awarded on the basis of scholastic achievement and community participation. C a l C a l l a h a n Memorial Bursary A m o u n t : $2,000.00 Available to: C h i l d r e n or legal wards of persons w h o derive their principal i n c o m e from the P i p e l i n e Industry a n d w h o s e e m p l o y e r s are m e m b e r s of the P i p e L i n e C o n t r a c t o r s A s s o c i ation of C a n a d a , a n d w h o are b e g i n n i n g undergraduate studies in a full program leading to a degree or certificate in any field at a r e c o g n i z e d university or c o l l e g e in C a n a d a . Deadline: S e p t e m b e r 30 C a n a d i a n A r m y Welfare F u n d Bursary P a y m e n t of tuition fees a n d the c o s t of text b o o k s will be provided to the recipient. A p p l i c a n t s must be d e p e n d e n t s of former m e m b e r s of the C a n a d i a n A r m y (Regular) w h o served between O c t o b e r 1, 1946 a n d J a n u a r y 31, 1968. D e p e n d e n t s include natural, step, or legally a d o p t e d c h i l d r e n S t u d e n t s must be registered in a full-time program requiring not less than two years to complete. A m o u n t : $500.00 ( 2 s c h o l a r s h i p s available). A v a i l a b l e to: S o n s and d a u g h t e r s of m e m b e r s (or of d e c e a s e d members) p r o c e e d i n g in fall from G r a d e XII to a full p r o g r a m of studies at a n y o n e of the p u b l i c universities or a c c r e d i t e d regional c o l l e g e s . First Citizens F u n d Deadline: July 31 Carling O'Keefe T h e Federation of T e l e p h o n e Workers of British C o l u m b i a Plant Division Scholarship B u r s a r i e s in the a m o u n t of $500.00 are available to Native Indian students in p o s t - s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n A p p l i c a t i o n s are judged on the basis of financial need and the c o m p l e t e d application form. Bursaries A m o u n t : $500.00 A v a i l a b l e to: S o n s a n d daughters of m e m b e r s in g o o d s t a n d i n g in any u n i o n affiliated to, or chartered by, the C a n a d i a n L a b o u r C o n g r e s s , w h o will be attending their first year of p o s t - s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n in a n y a p p r o v e d institution of h i g h e r e d u c a t i o n . D e a d l i n e : July 1 H u g h Christie Memorial Bursary - $500 A w a r d e d to students p u r s u i n g a c a r e e r in C o r r e c t i o n s , International D e v e l o p m e n t , S o c i a l W o r k or Y M - Y W C A — must be registered in the Faculty of P h y s i c a l E d u c a t i o n , R e c r e a t i o n , S o c i a l Work, C r i m i n o l o g y or related fields Deadline: November 19 C o m m u n i t y Music S c h o o l of Greater Vancouver Free A s s i s t a n c e A w a r d s : T h e s e a w a r d s are available to British C o l u m b i a students s t u d y i n g m u s i c (normally for interim a n d a d v a n c e d programs). S p e c i a l a s s i s t a n c e is available for students p u r s u i n g professional studies in m u s i c and other arts o u t s i d e the P r o v i n c e . R a y m o n d Crepault Memorial Scholarship A $2,500 annual S c h o l a r s h i p o p e n to F r e n c h - s p e a k i n g C a n a d i a n citizens to help improve their radio a n d T V skills in a C a n a d i a n institution. T h e G r a n d L o d g e Masonic Bursaries A m o u n t : $200-$500 (several available) A v a i l a b l e to: A l l deserving students, with preference to sons, d a u g h t e r s or legal wards of active m e m b e r s of M a s o n i c L o d g e s in B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a b e g i n n i n g or c o n t i n u i n g studies (2nd year) at any British C o l u m b i a University or regional c o l l e g e or at B . C . l . T . , in a p r o g r a m leading to a degree or certificate in any field. Hockey Canada Scholarships A m o u n t : $2,000.00. A v a i l a b l e to: Students with o u t s t a n d i n g h o c k e y ability w h o are C a n a d i a n citizens or have held landed immigrant status for at least one year, a n d w h o are attending a n y p o s t - s e c o n d a r y institution w h i c h is a n affiliated m e m b e r of the A s s o c i a t i o n of Universities a n d C o l l e g e s of C a n a d a , and w h i c h has a viable h o c k e y p r o g r a m . Stipulations: 70% or higher average. Imperial O i l Higher Education Awards T h i s p r o g r a m offers free tuition a n d other c o m p u l s o r y fees to the children of e m p l o y e e s and annuitants w h o p r o c e e d to higher e d u c a t i o n c o u r s e s . A w a r d s are restricted to students under 25 years of age. T o qualify, a student must attain an average mark of 7 0 % or higher. T h e L e o n and T h e a K o e r n e r Foundation Department of Indian Affairs F i n a n c i a l a s s i s t a n c e is available to Indian students. C o n t a c t y o u r b a n d office or Department of Indian Affairs, 700 West G e o r g i a Street, V a n c o u v e r , B . C . Department of Veteran Affairs Available to children of d e c e a s e d veterans w h o were * eligible for p e n s i o n under the P e n s i o n A c t . A p p l i c a t i o n s s h o u l d be m a d e within 15 m o n t h s of S e c o n d a r y S c h o o l g r a d u a t i o n . A p p l i c a n t must maintain a c c e p t a b l e a c a d e m i c standards to ensure c o n t i n u a t i o n of benefits. A w a r d s are available for B . C . students at the prep r o f e s s i o n a l level p u r s u i n g n o n - a c a d e m i c p r o g r a m s , a i m i n g at a professional career in the arts, w h o are in need of financial a s s i s t a n c e . A p p l i c a t i o n s will be c o n s i d e r e d from students taking training of a r e c o g n i z e d standard in any arts d i s c i p l i n e i n c l u d i n g m u s i c , theatre, d a n c e , the visual arts a n d d e s i g n a s s o c i a t e d with one of the art forms. O c c a s i o n a l l y a w a r d s are given for S u m m e r studies a n d s p e c i a l program studies. T h e grants range from $200 to $600 and are a w a r d e d semi-annually. Deadline: Spring April 1, Fall September 15. T h e Fairbridge Society Bursaries A m o u n t : U p to $500.00. A v a i l a b l e to: C h i l d r e n of former m e m b e r s of the P r i n c e of W a l e s Fairbridge Farm S c h o o l , D u n c a n , B . C . , p u r s u i n g a full-time c o u r s e of a c a d e m i c or vocational studies at a r e c o g n i z e d institution of learning. J o h n B. M a c D o n a l d A l u m n i Bursary B u r s a r i e s of $350.00 are available to students w h o will be entering U B C from a regional c o l l e g e . T h e bursaries are available to students with a d e m o n s t r a t e d a c a d e m i c ability and financial n e e d D e a d l i n e : July 1. 125 MacMillan Bloedel Special Scholarships Twelve s c h o l a r s h i p s of $100 to $500 e a c h are available annually to sons a n d daughters (or legal dependents) of e m p l o y e e s of the C o m p a n y serving in any M a c M i l l a n B l o e d e l Division in N o r t h A m e r i c a . T h e s e s c h o l a r s h i p s are o p e n to students graduating from S e c o n d a r y s c h o o l s and p r o c e e d i n g to studies at r e c o g n i z e d institutes of higher learning. A w a r d s will be made o n the basis of a c a d e m i c ability. N o r m a n A . M . M a c k e n z i e A l u m n i Regional C o l l e g e Scholarships Eight s c h o l a r s h i p s of $600.00 e a c h are offered to students p r o c e e d i n g from a regional c o l l e g e to U B C . T h e y are offered only to students with high s c h o l a s t i c s t a n d i n g ( m i n i m u m 75% average) w h o s e ordinary h o m e s are in B . C . Deadline: July 1 Deadline: May 31 M u n g o Martin Memorial Awards A w a r d s normally e x p e c t e d to be from $100 to $300.00. The p u r p o s e of the awards is to assist people of Indian racial b a c k g r o u n d to further their e d u c a t i o n , v o c a t i o n a l training, skills a n d c o m p e t e n c e in arts, handicrafts, and other worthy e n d e a v o u r s . Preference will be given to y o u n g people. C a n d i d a t e s for awards must be of Indian racial backg r o u n d and must live in the P r o v i n c e of B . C . at the time of application. National Scholarship Program of the Printing and Publishing Industry Eligible students for s c h o l a r s h i p s ranging from $100 to $500 are those w h o are involved in studies relating to s o m e aspect of g r a p h i c c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , s u c h as management, design, technology, engineering or science. A g o o d a c a d e m i c record is a basic requirement. North Vancouver Education Society (Dollars for Scholars) L o a n F u n d A m o u n t : variable, usually tuition fees. Available to: A n y student who has spent at least one year in a n y N o r t h V a n c o u v e r s c h o o l . A v a i l a b l e any time d u r i n g the year. L o a n s are interest free a n d financial n e e d is the m a i n requirement. R e p a y m e n t is e x p e c t e d w h e n the student g o e s to work. Pacific Association for C o n t i n u i n g E d u c a t i o n ( P A C E ) Bursaries T h e a m o u n t s vary between $50-$200 T h e s e bursaries are available to part-time students w h o have financial need. A p p l i c a t i o n s s h o u l d provide e v i d e n c e of intent to p u r s u e a c o n t i n u i n g e d u c a t i o n plan or job u p g r a d i n g goal. A p p l y o n e month prior to the start of c l a s s e s . Deadline: January 31 Navy League of C a n a d a C o m m u n i t y College Entrance Scholarships A m o u n t $100.00 (several available) Available to: R o y a l C a n a d i a n S e a C a d e t s , former C a d e t s , Navy L e a g u e Wrenettes, or former Wrenettes who are entering a c o m m u n i t y c o l l e g e program of one or more years leading to a d i p l o m a . T h e s e s c h o l a r s h i p s are not available to students w h o have received G o v e r n m e n t S c h o l a r s h i p s or awards. Deadline: August 15 Parks C a n a d a Undergraduate Scholarships Registered Indians a n d Inuit P e o p l e for A m o u n t : $1,000.00 (10 available). Available to: R e g i s t e r e d Indian or Inuit p e o p l e for study in the areas of resource c o n s e r v a t i o n , natural s c i e n c e s , o u t d o o r recreation, environmental studies, interpretation a n d extens i o n , C a n a d i a n historical a r c h a e o l o g y a n d restoration a r c h i tecture, who are attending a C a n a d i a n university or community college. Adele Peet Memorial Bursary — $250.00 S e l e c t i o n criteria: Naval Officers' Association C o l u m b i a Scholarships of British A m o u n t : $250.00 (several available) A v a i l a b l e to: S t u d e n t s b e g i n n i n g or c o n t i n u i n g studies at a B . C . University, regional c o l l e g e or B.C.I.T. with preference to present or former members of a cadet force, of a reserve force of the permanent force, or the s o n s a n d d a u g h t e r s of a n y o n e who has served or is now serving in the British C o m m o n w e a l t h naval forces or M e r c h a n t Navies. Deadline: October 15 T h e New Artists Society T h o s e p e r s o n s w h o are striving to b e c o m e m u s i c i a n s are eligible to enter a c o m p e t i t i o n in w h i c h they perform and play. T h e winner of the c o m p e t i t i o n will receive $2,000. - A p p l i c a n t must be a resident of the lower m a i n l a n d . - Must be registered in the Faculty of N u r s i n g , P h y s i c a l E d u c a t i o n or R e c r e a t i o n . Deadline: October 15 P . E . O . Sisterhood Educational L o a n A m o u n t : $900.00 Funds (renewable). Available to: W o m e n students in any year of a university course, a n d may be requested at a n y time, t h o u g h freshmen must c o m p l e t e o n e term of work satisfactorily before m a k i n g application. L o a n s are made for p e r i o d s up to five years. Interest at the rate of 4% is to be paid annually, a n d the student is e x p e c t e d to begin payment of the principal as s o o n as she is out of university or e m p l o y e d . Regular Officer Training Program Student is s u b s i d i z e d for tuition fees a n d b o o k s and is paid a salary as an Officer cadet. A v a i l a b l e to students interested in a military career. A student graduating in this program will be c o m m i s s i o n e d a lieutenant in the C a n a d i a n Forces. Merrill C . R o b i n s o n Bursary F u n d A m o u n t : V a r i e s (several awards available). A v a i l a b l e to: B l i n d students attending any university or c o l l e g e w i t h i n the B . C . - Y u k o n D i v i s i o n (other than U B C ) w h o show e v i d e n c e of promise a n d ability. Students are eligible if they meet the following conditions: a. are C a n a d i a n c i t i z e n s or l a n d e d immigrants. b. have c o m p l e t e d G r a d e 12 by J u n e 30. c. were e n r o l e d in full-time studies d u r i n g the a c a d e m i c year d. were at least 16 years o l d by D e c e m b e r 31. T h e bursary is valued at $800 a n d c o v e r s s u c h c o s t s as tuition, a c c o m m o d a t i o n , meals and instructional materials. S u n s h i n e Coast Scholarship, Bursary and L o a n Committee Deadline: June 30 Rotary Foundation S u m m e r L a n g u a g e Bursary P r o g r a m Scholarships These awards are made to outstanding students, technicians, journalists or teachers for o n e a c a d e m i c year of study in another country. A $500 bursary is available to a student from the S u n s h i n e C o a s t S c h o o l District w h o is in p o s t - s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n b e y o n d the first year. Deadline: June 15th i Deadline: March 1 University of Victoria T h e Royal C a n a d i a n L e g i o n (Pacific C o m m a n d ) T h e R o y a l C a n a d i a n L e g i o n (Pacific C o m m a n d ) offers annual awards ranging in value from $200 — $800 for students p r o c e e d i n g from s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l , c o l l e g e or university, as well as for students entering s e c o n d , third, or fourth years S c h o l a r s h i p s and bursaries are awarded on the basis of a c a d e m i c standing and financial need. P r e f e r e n c e is given to sons a n d daughters of deceased, disabled or other veterans, although applications from other w o r t h y students are also considered. Vancouver Foundation: T h e H.R. MacMillan Family D e a d l i n e : May 31 Ruth H a n c o c k F o u r s c h o l a r s h i p s of five h u n d r e d (500) are a w a r d e d annually w i t h i n e a c h c o l l e g e r e g i o n in B . C . to students w h o are entering the University of V i c t o r i a directly from B . C . s e c o n d a r y s c h o o l s or regional c o l l e g e s . T h e a s s e s s m e n t of regional c o l l e g e students will be based o n c o l l e g e c o u r s e results. Scholarships S c h o l a r s h i p s of $1,000 00 are available to students enroled in a M e d i a C o m m u n i c a t i o n c o u r s e w h o plan a career in radio/T.V. broadcasting. Deadline: January 31st Fund Eligible applicants are matriculating students resident in communities where M a c M i l l a n B l o e d e l has operations, w h o are p r o c e e d i n g to p o s t - s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n . F i n a n c i a l need a n d g o o d s c h o l a s t i c . s t a n d i n g in high s c h o o l are criteria of eligibility. Deadline: May 1 S i m o n Fraser University Regional C o l l e g e Entrance Scholarships A n u m b e r of s c h o l a r s h i p s ranging in value up to $500.00 will be available to students entering S F U f r o m regional junior or c o m m u n i t y c o l l e g e s . S t u d e n t s who have c o m p l e t e d one or two years of study at s u c h institutions a n d have maintained a high a c a d e m i c average on a full c o u r s e load, and who have been r e c o m m e n d e d for the s c h o l a r s h i p by the c o l l e g e f r o m w h i c h they are transferring, will be c o n s i d e r e d . O n l y students who are p r o c e e d i n g with further university studies within one year of c o m p l e t i o n of one or two years of study at the regional c o l l e g e level and are e n r o l e d in a full c o u r s e load will be eligible. Bill a n d Elsie Moore Indian Bursary Fund B u r s a r i e s are made available t h r o u g h the B i l l a n d Elsie M o o r e Indian B u r s a r y F u n d of the V a n c o u v e r F o u n d a t i o n to assist Native Indian students in British C o l u m b i a . Deadline: September 1 William E. & Emily R o s s Fund T h i s fund of the V a n c o u v e r F o u n d a t i o n provides bursaries of approximately $300.00 for physically handicapped students. Deadline: first day of classes in September at S F U L o r d Strathcona F u n d S o n s of Norway Foundation Scholarships A m o u n t : $600.00 (3 available). A v a i l a b l e to: S t u d e n t s who have s h o w n interest in N o r w e g i a n culture, history or l a n g u a g e who will study at any junior college, vocational institute or university in B . C . Deadline: July 30 Eligible a p p l i c a n t s are w o m e n who were born in Great Britain w h o are p u r s u i n g studies at the p o s t - s e c o n d a r y level in B . C . A w a r d s are b a s e d on financial need and a c a d e m i c ability. U p to 10 awards in a m o u n t s ranging from $200-$600 are available annually. A p p l i c a t i o n s are a c c e p t e d at any time. 127 Vancouver Municipal and Regional Employees' Union A bursary of $300 00 is available a n n u a l l y to m e m b e r s of the U n i o n , or to the s o n s , daughters, or legal d e p e n d e n t s of members who. at the time of application, are current members in the U n i o n a n d have,held m e m b e r s h i p in the U n i o n for the past two years. T h e award will be made to a qualified a p p l i cant w h o is b e g i n n i n g or c o n t i n u i n g full-time enrolment at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e T h e a w a r d is b a s e d on financial need and a c a d e m i c standing in previous studies. Van-Tel Credit Union Bursaries: The Leo Morris Memorial Bursary A Bursary of $500 00 will be awarded to the sons, daughters and legal d e p e n d e n t s of members of V a n - T e l Credit U n i o n residing in B . C It is o p e n to c o m p e t i t i o n to students p r o c e e d i n g from G r a d e 12 into a full program of posts e c o n d a r y studies in B . C A candidate must have an average of at least 70% and a major factor will be the financial c i r c u m s t a n c e s of the applicants a n d their families. Deadline J u l y 1 Vancouver Sun Regional College Entrance Scholarship The Les King Memorial Bursary T h r e e s c h o l a r s h i p s of $250 e a c h are offered to students proceeding in the fall of that year to a public regional college. T o be eligible, an applicant must have been a carrier of the V a n c o u v e r S u n for at least two c o n s e c u t i v e years, have received a V a n c o u v e r S u n S c h o l a r s h i p Certificate, and write the s c h o l a r s h i p e x a m i n a t i o n s c o n d u c t e d in J u n e by the Department of E d u c a t i o n A B u r s a r y of $500 will be a w a r d e d to the sons, daughters and legal dependents residing in B . C . of m e m b e r s of V a n - T e l Credit U n i o n . It is open to competition to students proceeding from G r a d e 12 into a full program of p o s t - s e c o n d a r y studies C a n d i d a t e s must have an average of at least 70% and a major factor will be the financial c i r c u m s t a n c e s of the applicants and their families. Deadline: M a y 15 Deadline: J u l y 1 Veterans Adminstration (U.S.) For citizens of the U n i t e d States. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is an eligible institution for V A F u n d i n g F o r more detailed information o n these awards, c o n t a c t the F i n a n c i a l A i d office 128 Transfer Guide This transfer guide is provided as a c o n v e n i e n c e to the student a n d is correct at the time of printing. Information on a n y c o u r s e s not listed c a n be o b t a i n e d from the department c o n c e r n e d . C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e a s s u m e s no responsibility for articulation c h a n g e s made at the universities w h i c h invalidate this guide. Students s h o u l d be aware when using the guide that C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e a n d S i m o n Fraser University" are on a semester s y s t e m . T h e University of British C o l u m b i a a n d the University of V i c t o r i a are on a yearly s y s t e m . T h i s will a c c o u n t for the apparent d i s c r e p a n c y in transfer credits. N O T E : VA units at the University of British C o l u m b i a or the University of V i c t o r i a is equal to 3 or 4 5 C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e credit h o u r s (see C o l l e g e C a l e n d a r under c o u r s e d e s c r i p t i o n for correct credits). S i m i l a r l y , if t w o C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e c o u r s e s are required, 3 units at the University of British C o l u m b i a or the University of Victoria c o u l d equal 6 or 9 credit h o u r s at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . For e x a m p l e , P s y c h o l o g y 100 and 101 (three credit h o u r s each) would equal 3 units at the University of British C o l u m b i a . T h i s transfer guide is a c c u r a t e as of F e b r u a r y 17th, 1981. If further or updated information is required, please contact one of C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ' s c o u n s e l l o r s (986-1911. local 298) or the institution that y o u wish to transfer to. S I M O N F R A S E R U N I V E R S I T Y , A d m i s s i o n s Office UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH C O L U M B I A . Registrar's O f f i c e UNIVERSITY OF VICTORIA VANCOUVER COMMUNITY COLLEGE ( L A N G A R A ) Registrar's Office BRITISH C O L U M B I A INSTITUTE O F TECHNOLOGY CERTIFIED G E N E R A L A C C O U N T A N T S (or see the C o - O r d i n a t o r of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) SOCIETY OF MANAGEMENT A C C O U N T A N T S (or see the C o - O r d i n a t o r of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) INSTITUTE OF C H A R T E R E D A C C O U N T A N T S (or see the C o - O r d i n a t o r of the B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t P r o g r a m at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e ) 291-3224 228-2844 477-6911 324-5294 434-5734 732-1211 687-5891 681-3264 FOOTNOTES: #1 - S I M O N F R A S E R U N I V E R S I T Y : ANTHROPOLOGY & SOCIOLOGY A student who has completed 60 semester hours of c o l l e g e transferable credit, and elects a major in the Department of S o c i o l o g y and A n t h r o p o l o g y at S i m o n Fraser University, will receive the following exemptions: a. C o m p l e t i o n of five T y p e 1 transfer credit c o u r s e s in S . A . (15 hours) will be judged as satisfying the S o c i o l o g y and A n t h r o p o l o g y Department lower division requirement of five c o u r s e s (20 hours), providing that program prerequisites are being fulfilled. b. C o m p l e t i o n of four T y p e 1 transfer credit c o u r s e s in S . A . (12 hours) will be judged as c o m p l e t i o n of four S o c i o l o g y a n d A n t h r o p o l o g y lower division c o u r s e s (16 hours), providing that program pre-requisites are b e i n g fulfilled. S u c h students will be required to take one additional S.A. lower division c o u r s e at S F U in order to c o m p l e t e lower division requirements. c. C o m p l e t i o n of three or fewer T y p e 1 transfer credit c o u r s e s in S . A . (9 hours or less) will warrant a department e x e m p t i o n of one semester hour per c o u r s e . For further information please c o n s u l t the Department of S o c i o l o g y a n d A n t h r o p o l o g y or the Director of A d m i s s i o n s at S F U . #2 - U N I V E R S I T Y O F BRITISH C O L U M B I A : A R T Students p l a n n i n g to enter the p r o g r a m leading to a B.A. degree with a major In Fine Arts s h o u l d normally a p p l y after four semesters. W h e r e Art (History a n d / o r Studio) c o u r s e s are not available at the C o l l e g e attended, transfer following only two s e m e s t e r s w o u l d be a d v i s a b l e . S t u d e n t s p l a n n i n g to enter the Studio program leading to the B.F.A. degree s h o u l d n o r m a l l y a p p l y to the university f o l l o w i n g two semesters. A p p l i c a n t s with four semesters will be c o n s i d e r e d . T h e m a x i m u m credit p o s s i b l e for studio c o u r s e s for a student w h o has c o m p l e t e d First Year will be three units Fine Arts 181. A student who has c o m p l e t e d S e c o n d Year ( B . F . A . only) will be a l l o w e d a further six units of credit in studio c o u r s e s to c o r r e s p o n d to a selection from Fine A r t s 281-290. Students applying for the B.F.A. are r e m i n d e d that a d m i s s i o n to the p r o g r a m is lay s e l e c t i o n b a s e d on standing a n d c o u r s e s a n d an a s s e s s m e n t of a folio of art work. T h e year of a d m i s s i o n whether s e c o n d or third year will be at the d i s c r e t i o n of the Department. T h e s e l e c t i o n committee to screen a p p l i c a n t s will meet early in A p r i l prior to the s e s s i o n to w h i c h a p p l i c a t i o n will be made. A p p l i c a n t s s h o u l d c o n t a c t the Department of F i n e Arts by mid M a r c h to obtain the n e c e s s a r y information on a p p l i cation p r o c e d u r e . Late a p p l i c a n t s for the B.F.A. p r o g r a m will be c o n s i d e r e d at registration time if p l a c e s are still available. #3 - S I M O N F R A S E R U N I V E R S I T Y : FRENCH, G E R M A N AND SPANISH a. E x e m p t i o n from Department of L a n g u a g e s , Literatures a n d L i n g u i s t i c s ( D L L L ) c o u r s e s will n o r m a l l y be given d e p e n d i n g u p o n the results of a placement test or qther assessment procedure prior to registration in the student's first D L L L c o u r s e . For further information c o n s u l t the language division c o n c e r n e d . b. O n l y those c o u r s e s w h i c h qualify a student for e x e m p t i o n from an S F U c o u r s e as a result of the placement test will count as T y p e 2 credit a n d be allowed to c o u n t toward major requirements in D L L L . O t h e r c o u r s e s will be given T y p e 3 credit and may only be used for elective credit. c. S t u d e n t s with prior k n o w l e d g e of the l a n g u a g e are required to consult with the Division c o n c e r n e d for p l a c e ment prior to or at registration. Native speakers or students w h o received their s e c o n d a r y e d u c a t i o n in a C h i n e s e , F r e n c h , G e r m a n , H i n d i , R u s s i a n , S p a n i s h , or S w a h i l i s p e a k i n g country will not n o r m a l l y be admitted to a l a n g u a g e c o u r s e in that particular l a n g u a g e between 100 and 300 inclusive. d. Total transfer a n d c o u r s e c h a l l e n g e credit in basic language c o u r s e s may not e x c e e d the limits given below: French language - 13 semester h o u r s G e r m a n language - 14 semester h o u r s Russian language - 12 semester hours Spanish language - 1 4 semester h o u r s Literature c o u r s e s may be taken in addition to these limits. S t u d e n t s interested in c o u r s e c h a l l e n g e s h o u l d c o n s u l t the Department of L a n g u a g e s , Literatures and Linguistics. #4 - S I M O N F R A S E R U N I V E R S I T Y : MATHEMATICS a S t u d e n t s w h o intend to register in C o m p u t i n g S c i e n c e may be required to write a p l a c e m e n t e x a m i n a t i o n prior to registration. T h e results of the e x a m i n a t i o n w o u l d determine in w h i c h level of the p r o g r a m the student s h o u l d c o m m e n c e studies. For further information c o n s u l t the C o m p u t i n g S c i e n c e P r o g r a m t h r o u g h the F a c u l t y of Interdisciplinary Studies. b. S t u d e n t s w h o have c o m p l e t e d work w h i c h transfer a s C M P T 103 (3) may receive credit for an additional c o u r s e w h i c h w o u l d n o r m a l l y also transfer as C M P T 103 (3) if the c o u r s e is in a different l a n g u a g e . Credit in s u c h cases will be C M P T 104 (1). If there are any questions, please consult the C o m p u t i n g S c i e n c e P r o g r a m . 129 Transfer Guide 1981-1982 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University ol Victoria S.A. (3) (100 division) S.A. (3) (100 division) S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) S.A. 170 (3). S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 (3), Women's Studies 200 (3) S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 (3). Women's Studies 200 (3) Archaeology 101 (3) Archaeology 131 (3) S.A. (3) (200 division) S.A. (3) (200 division) S.A. 203 (3) S.A. (3) Anthropology (1V?) (1st or 2nd year) Anthropology (1%) (1st or 2nd year) Anthropology 200 (3)' These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers Anthropology (1'/?) (1st or 2nd year) Anthropology 240 (Vh) Anthropology (Vk) Anthropology (lli) Anthropology (114) (2nd year) Anthropology (Vh) Transfers with 121 Transfers with 120 Anthropology 100 (3) Anthropology 100 (3) ANTHROPOLOGY Anthropology 120 Anthropology 121 Anthropology 120 & 121 Anthropology 120 & Women's Studies'122 Anthropology 12.1 & Women's Studies 122 Anthropology 123 Anthropology 124 Anthropology 200 Anthropology 202 Anthropology 204 Anthropology 249 Anthropology 100 (3) Anthropology 240 (1V?) Anthropology 100 (1V?) part credit Anthropology (200 level) (1' ) Anthropology (200 level) (Vk) Anthropology (200 level) (1%) Anthropology (200 level) (1V?) FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON ANTHROPOLOGY SEE 1. PAGE 137 ART Art 100 Art 101 Art 100 & 101 • Art 152, 154, 158, 164, 166. 167. 171, 172. 174. 178. 182. 183, 184, 188 Art 163. 165. 204 . 206. 216. 217 Art 250. 255. 257. 262. 263. 265. 273, 274. 282. 283 Art 260 . 261 Art 260 & 261 Art History (3) Art History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Any one course is equivalent to Visual Art (Studio) (3) Any one course is equivalent to Visual Art (Studio) (3) Any one course is equivalent to Visual Art (Studio) (3) Any one course is equivalent to Art History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Fine Arts 1114) Fine Arts (1%) Fine Arts 171 (3) To be determined individually on presentation of portfolio Any two courses are equivalent to Fine Arts 181 (3) Any four of these courses may correspond to the required selection from Fine Arts 281-290 (6) (credit only in 2nd year B.F.A. Program) Fine Arts 339 (3) (not for credit toward major) FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON ART SEE 2. PAGE 137 BIOLOGY Biology 104 Biology 105 Biology 104 & 105 Biology 110 Biology 111 Biology 110 & 111 Biology 200 Biology 204 Biology 205 Biology 204 & 205 130 Bioscience 101 (3)' Bioscience 102 (3)" These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Bioscience 101 (3)" Bioscience 102 (3)" Transfers with 105 Biology (100 level) (Vh) Transfers with 104 Biology (100 level) (114) Biology (3) (no credit in Life Science These courses transfer separately. Departments) See individual numbers. Transfers with 111 Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Transfers with 110 "Students contemplating further work in Biology should endeavour to take Biology 110 & 111. Credit will not be allowed for both Biology 104 & 110, or Biology 105 & 111. These courses transfer separately. Biology 101 (3) or 102 (3) Biology 150 (3) See individual numbers. Bioscience 202 (3) Biology (1%) (2nd year) (but may not Biology 300 (1 i take Biol. 334 for credit) Bioscience 204 (3) Biology (114) (2nd year) (but may not Biology 306 (114) take Biol. 321 for credit) Bioscience (3) Biology (1%) (2nd year) (but may not Biology (200 level) (IV?) take Biol. 322 for credit) These courses transfer separately. Biology (3) (2nd year) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. (see notes above) See individual numbers. University of Victoria Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia Biology 209 Biology 210 Biology 212 Biology 213 Biology 214 Biology 215 Bioscience 326 (3) Bioscience 337 (3) Bioscience 306 (3) Bioscience 316 (3) Bioscience 201 (3) Bioscience 301 (3) Biology 220 Biology 221 Biology 220 & 221 Bioscience (3) Bioscience (3) Bioscience 303 (3). Bioscience (3) Biology 203 (Vh) Botany 209 (1V) Biology 204 (Vh) Botany 210 (Vh) Biology 206 (1%) Zoology 205 (Vh) Biology 207 (Vh) Zoology 203 (Vh) Biology 200 (Vh) Biology 200 (1%) Biology201 (1%) (when accompanied Biochemistry 200 (Vh) by Organic Chemistry) Transfers with 221 Transfers with 221 Transfers with 220 Transfers with 220 Microbiology 200 (3) Microbiology 200 (3) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT Formally Commerce Capilano College BIOLOGY (cont.) Business Management 17.1 Business Management 172 Business Management 172 & 176 Business Management 180 Business Management 184 Business Management 184 & 185 Business Management 255 Business Management 256 Business Management 257 Business Management 292 Transfers with 176 Business (3) 2 Commerce (IV2) Commerce (Vh) Business 222 (3) Business (2) Business (3) Business (3) Statistics (100 level) (IV2) Transfers with 176 Commerce 190 (Vh) Computer Science 170 (Vh) Commerce 151 (Vh) To Be Determined Computer Science 275 (Vh) CHEMISTRY ' Chemistry 104 Chemistry 105 Chemistry 104 & 105 Chemistry 108 Chemistry 108 & 111 Chemistry 110 Chemistry 111 Chemistry 110 & 111 Chemistry 200 Chemistry 201 Chemistry 200 & 201 Chemistry 204 Chemistry 205 Chemistry 204 & 205 Chemistry 210 Chemistry 211 Chemistry 210 & 211 Chemistry (3) Chemistry (3) Completion of both 104 & 105 exempts students from SFU 104, 105, 115. Transfers with 105 Transfers with 104 Chemistry 103 (3) Chemistry 104 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 115) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses. Chemistry 104 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 115) Chemistry 105 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses. Chemistry 251 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 256. Will be required to take SFU 251 if "D" obtained in 200.) Chemistry 252 (3) (Will be required to take SFU 252 if "D" obtained in 201.) These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. Chemistry 261 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 117) Chemistry (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 105 Transfers with 104 Chemistry 120 (3) ("A" required for entry to 224, "C" required for 230, consult department for entry to 233.) Transfers with 111 Chemistry 120 (3) Chemistry 124 (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Chemistry 120 (3) Transfers with 110 Chemistry 124 (3) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Transfers with 200 Chemistry 230 (3) Chemistry 230 (3) Transfers with 205 Chemistry (200 level) (Vh) Transfers with 204 Chemistry 205 (3) Chemistry (200 level) (1%) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry (200 level) (Vh) Chemistry (200 level) (IV2) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. See Chemistry 210 Transfers with 211 Transfers with 210 Chemistry 210 (3) COMMUNICATIONS Communications 150 & 156 Communications (3) > 131 Capilano College Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Economics {Vh) Economics (1V?) These courses transfer separately See individual numbers These courses transfer separately See individual numbers Economics (1V?) Economics (1%) Economics (1V?) (transfer students taking Economics 100 at UBC may not also obtain transfer credit for one of Economics 200 & 201.) Economics {Vh) (transfer students taking Economics 100 at UBC may not also obtain transfer credit for one of Economics 200 & 201 ) Economics 100 (3) Economics (100 level) (1'/ ) Economics (100 level) (1V?) Economics (3) ECONOMICS Economics 100 Economics 101 Economics 100 & 101 Economics 120 Economics 121 Economics 200 Economics 100 (3) Economics 101 (3) These courses transfer separately See individual numbers These courses transfer separately See individual numbers Economics 150 (3) Economics 152 (3) Economics 205 (3) Economics 201 Economics 200 (3) Economics 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. Economics 100, 120, 121 2 Any two: Economics 100 (3) (maximum: 3 units of credit) Economics (100 level) (1%) Economics (100 level) (1V ) Economics 202 (1V?) 2 Economics 201 (Vh) These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. ENGLISH English 010 English (3) English 100 English (3) English 100 or 102, and one of the These courses transfer separately. following: 104, 105, 106, 108 See individual numbers. English 102 English 212 (3) English 104 English 101 (3) English 105 English 102 (3) English 106 'English 103 (3) English 105 & 106 [These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 108 English 101 or 102 or 103 or English (3) English 110 & 111 Linguistics Credits English 190 English (3) English 191 English (3) English 190 & 191 These courses transfer separately See individual courses. English 200 English 201 English 200 & 201 English 202 English 203 English 202 & 203 English 204 English 205 English 204 & 205 English 206 English 212 English 213 English 212 & 213 English 215 English 216 English 290 English 291 132 English (3) (exempts from English 204 or 205) English 206 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses. English 221 (3) English 221 (3) or English (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses. English 222 (3) English 222 (3) or English (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses English (3) English (3) English (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses. English (3) English 102 (3) or English (3) English (3) English (3) See English 100 or 102 listing English 100 (3) See English 100 or 102 listing See English 100 or 102 listing See English 100 or 102 listing See English 100 or 102 listing See English 100 or 102 listing English 115 (1%) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 115 (11*) English 121 (1%) English 122 {Vh) English 122 (IVi) English (100 level) (1%) See English 100 or 102 listing. English (100 level) {Vh) Linguistics 100 (3) Transfers with 191 Transfers with 190 Creative Writing 202 (3) (permission to enter senior courses in Creative Writing subject to assessment of recent writing by UBC department. Transfers with 201 Linguistics 100 (3) Transfers with 191 Transfers with 190 Creative Writing 100 (3) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 English 201 (3) Transfers with 200 English 200 (3) Transfers with 203 Transfers with 202 English 202 (3) English (200 level) (1%) English (200 level) {Vh) nglish 238 (3) Transfers with 205 Transfers with 204 English (3) (second year literature) Transfers with 205 Transfers with 204 English 203 (3) English 206 (1%) Transfers with 213 Transfers with 212 English (3) (second year literature) English (200 level) (1%) English (200 level) (1%) English (200 level) (1%) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers English (200 level) (1%) English (200 level) (1%) Creative Writing 201 {Vh) (part credit) Creative Writing 202 {Vh) (part credit) English (1%) (2nd year) English (1%) (2nd year) Arts (1%) Arts (114) » Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Transfers with 101 Transfers with 100 Fine Arts 125 (3) Transfers with 101 Transfers with 100 History in Art 120 (3) Fine Arts 210 Art History (3) Art History (3) These courses transfer separately., See individual numbers. TO BE DETERMINED TO BE DETERMINED TO BE DETERMINED Art History (3) Art History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Art History (3) TO BE DETERMINED TO BE DETERMINED TO BE DETERMINED History in Art (200 level) (1%) History in Art (200 level) (114.) These courses transfer separately. See individual courses. Transfers with 211 Fine Arts 211 Art History (3) Fine Arts 210 & 211 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Visual Art (3) Visual Art (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. TO BE DETERMINED TO BE DETERMINED TO BE DETERMINED Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Fine Arts (3) (students may not take Fine Arts 365 for credit.) Fine Arts (1%) (Not to be counted toward the major) Fine Arts (Vk) (Not to be counted toward the major) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Capilano College FINE ARTS Fine Arts 100 Fine Arts 101 Fine Arts 100 & 101 Fine Arts 104 Fine Arts 105 Fine Arts 104 & 105 Fine Arts 200 Fine Arts 201 Fine Arts 200 & 201 Fine Arts 250 Fine Arts 251 Fine Arts 250 & 251 Transfers with 210 History in Art 260 (3) Transfers with 251 Transfers with 250 History in Art (200 level) (1V?) FRENCH French 100 French 101 French 100 & 101 French 102 & 103 French 104 & 105 French 106 French 108 French 110 & 111 French 160 & 161 French 202 & 203 French 210 & 211 French 260 & 261 French 290 & 291 French (1%) French (Vk) French 105 (3) For information on the transferability French 110 (3) of any one of the following French Arts (3) (1st year) courses see footnote 3 (pagel37) French 110 (3) French 120 (3) French (3) (1st year) French 120 (3) French 202 (3) French 115 (3) French 215 (3) Transfers with 101 Transfers with 100 French 100 (3) French 160 (3) Geography (3) Geography (3) Geography 263 (3) Geography 262 (3) Geography (3) Geography 141 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 111 (3) Physical Geography (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 121 (3) Geography (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physical Geography (3) Geography 250 (3) Geography (3) Geography (100 level) (154) Geography (100 level) (Vk) Geography (100 level) (1V?) Geography (200 level) (154) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Geography 101 (3) • : French 180 (3) French 100 (3) French 180 (3) French 290 (3) French 160 (3) French 180 (3) GEOGRAPHY Geography 101 Geography 102 Geography 106 Geography 108 Geography 110 Geography 111 Geography 110 & 111 Geography 111 & 200 Geography 112 Geography 114 Geography 112 & 114 Geography 200 Geography 201 Geography 200 & 201 Geography 216 Geography 221 Geography 249 Geography 102 (Vk) Geography (1%) Geography (VA) Geography 103 (IV2) Geography (Vk) Geography 200 (Vh) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 200 & 201 (3) Transfers with 114 Transfers with 112 Geography 101 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 203A (Vk) Geography 203B (154J Geography 203 (3) t Geography 201 (1%) Geography (Vk) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 212 [Vk) Geography (Vh) Geography (Vk) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Geography 201 (3) Geography (200 level) (154) Geography (200 level) (154) Geography 205 (Vh) (part credit) 133 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Geology (3) Geology (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Geology 105 (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Geology 200 (3) GEOLOGY Geology 110 Geology 111 Geology 110 & 111 ** GERMAN German 100 & 101 German 108 German 200 & 201 For information on the transferability German 100 (3) of any one of the following German courses see footnote 3 pagel37 German 100 (3) German 200 (3) German 100 (3) (must complete survey of German grammar) History 105 (3) History 220 (3) History 223 (3) Transfers with 101 Transfers with 100 Transfers with 103 History 236 (3) German 200 (3) (grade of " C " or above required.) HISTORY History 100 History 101 History 102 History 100 & 101 History 102 & 103 History 103 History 106 History 107 History 106 & 107 History 108 History 109 History 108 & 109 History 110 History 111 History 110 & 111 History 200 History 201 History 205 History 224 (3) History (3) History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History 212 (3) History 213 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History 101 (3) History 102 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History (3) (200 division) History (3) (200 division) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History (1'/2) History (1'/!) History {Vh) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History {Vh) History (1Vz) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History (1%) History (1%) History 135 (3) History (1%) History {Vh) History (1%) History 240 (3) History (100 level) {Vh) Canadian History (100 level) (1%) European History (100 level) (1%) European History 240 (3) Transfers with 109 Transfers with 108 History 210 (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 History 230 (3) History (200 level) (1%) History (200 level) {Vh) History (200 level) (1%) (students should not be permitted to take 355.) LEGAL STUDIES Legal Studies 150 Legal Studies 151 Legal Studies 258 Legal Studies 268 Political Science 151 (3) Criminology (3) Legal Studies (3) Legal Studies (3) .— . MATHEMATICS Mathematics 009 , 010 , 011, 012 Mathematics 010, 011, 012 Mathematics 100 Mathematics 101 Mathematics 100 & 101 Mathematics 100 & 108 Mathematics 100 & 110 Mathematics 101 & 102 134 . All three must be taken - Mathematics 100 (3) Mathematics (3) Mathematics 101 (3) Mathematics 203' {Vh) "see below These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 1.30 (3) or 203* {Vh) plus {Vh) "see below Mathematics 100 (1%), plus 1%" "see below Mathematics 100 (1'/?), plus Vh' 'see below These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. No equivalent. No credit. Mathematics 012 (0) Mathematics (100 level) (Vh) Statistics (100 level) {Vh) with Algebra 12; without Algebra 12 (0) credits. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Statistics (100 level) (3) with Algebra 12; without Algebra 12 Statistics (100 level) (1%) Capilano College University of Victoria Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 302 (3) Computing Science 103 (3) 'See page 137 These separately. See courses individualtransfer numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 204 (1%) Computer Science (1V?) Computing Science 105 (3) See page 137 Computer Science 118 {Vh) Fall '81. Spring '82 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 104 Computer Science 115 (3) MATHEMATICS (cont.) Mathematics 101, 102 & 205 Mathematics 101 & 205 Mathematics 102 Mathematics 103 Mathematics 104 J Mathematics 103 & 104 Mathematics 105 Mathematics 105 & 108 Mathematics 105 & 110 Mathematics 106 Mathematics 106 8 104 Mathematics 108 Mathematics 110 Mathematics 111 Mathematics 110 8 111 104 transfers separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 157 (3) Mathematics 151 (3) Mathematics 152 (3) & Mathematics (1) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. , • Statistics 250 8, 251 (3) Statistics 250 i. ••; Transfers wth 108 or 110 Mathematics 111 (3) (1.5 units in faculty of Science) Mathematics 111 (3) (1.5 units in faculty of Science) Computer Science 101 (1V?) Fall '81, Spring '82 Computer Science 115 (3) Fall '81, Spring '82 Mathematics 100 (1%)* "see below Mathematics 100 (IVi) Mathematics 101 (IVi) Statistics 250 (t'A) Computer Science 170 {Vh) [Effective May 81: Computer Science 110 (1Vi)| Computer Science 272 (1%) (Effective May '81: Computer Science 110 (1%)j Computer Science 110 & 115 (3) (Effective May '81) Mathematics 012 (0) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Computer Science 110 (1%) (Effective May '81) Computer Science 110 & 115 (3) (Effective May 81) Mathematics 102 {Vh) Mathematics 100 (1Vi) Mathematics 101 {Vh) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 100 (1 /?), Mathematics 101 (1'/?) & Mathematics (100 level) Mathematics 221 {Vh) Mathematics 205 (1V?) Mathematics 220 (IVi) Mathematics 200 (IVi) Mathematics 201 {Vh) Mathematics 315 (IVi) \ 11 Mathematics 210 {Vh) Statistics (200 level) (1%) Mathematics (200 level) (1J4j Mathematics 200 (1V?) Mathematics (200 level) (1Vi) Mathematics 201 (1%) 1 fill Mathematics 200 Mathematics 205 Mathematics 215 Mathematics 230 Mathematics 231 Mathematics 235 Mathematics 232 (3) Mathematics 272 (3) Mathematics 242 (3) Mathematics 251 (3) Mathematics 252 (3) Mathematics 310 (3) •Not lor faculty of Science or Mathematics students. MEDIA Media 171 & 271 Media 181 & 182 Communications 257 (3) Communications 258 (3) ,— MUSIC Music 010 Music 100 Music 101 Music 100 & 101 Music 110 & 111 Music 114 & 115 Music 120 Music 121 Music 120 & 121 Music 130 & 131 Music 140 & 141 Music (3) Music (3) Music (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music History (3) Music History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 101 Transfers with 100 Music 100 (3) or Music 101 (3)"see below Music 140 (2) Music 143 (1) Transfers with 121 Transfers with 120 Music 120 (3) or Music Education 102 (3) Music 154 (1) Applied Music (credit to be confirmed) by examination for B.Mus.) Transfers with 101 Transfers with 100 Music 100 (3) Music 330 (1%) Music (100 level) (1) Transfers with 121 Transfers with 120 Music (100 level) (3) Music 180 (1)' Music 140 (2) •Applicants must have at least 65% i (or equivalent) in Music Education 101 | 8. in Music Education 201 (or equiva| lent courses) to pursue a Music Education concentration major. 135 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Music (Vh) Music (100 level) (3) Music (100 level) (1) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Music 100 (3) MUSIC (cant.) Music 154 Music 184 S 85 Music 200 Music 201 Music 200 & 201 Music 210 & 211 Music 214 & 215 Music 220 Music 221 Music 220 & 221 Music (3) Music (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music History (3) Music History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music 230 & 231 Music 240 & 241 Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Music 200 (3) or Music Education 201 (3)' 'see below Music 142 (2) Music 243 (1) Transfers with 221 Transfers with 220 Music 320 (3) or Music Education 102 (3) Music 332 (1%) Music 100 (3) Music 100 (3) Music (100 level) (3) if taken separately or Music 110 if taken following Music 120 & 121 Music 154 (1) Music 280 (1) Applied Music (credit to be confirmed Music 240 (2) by examination for B.Mus.) 'Applicants must have at least 65% (or equivalent) in Music Education 101 & in Music Education 201 (or equivalent courses) to pursue a Music Education concentration major. PHILOSOPHY Philosophy 101 Philosophy 101 & 210 Philosophy 101, 210 & 211 Philosophy 102 Philosophy 101 & 102 Philosophy 110 Philosophy 111 Philosophy 200 Philosophy 201 Philosophy 200 & 201 Philosophy 210 Philosophy 211 Philosophy 210 & 211 Philosophy 220 Philosophy 221 136 Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy 100 (3), Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vh) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 100 (3), Philosophy 203 (3). These courses transfer separately. Philosophy (3) See individual numbers. Philosophy 120 (3) Philosophy (Vh) These courses transfer separately. Philosophy 100 (3) See individual numbers. Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vh) (a student cannot receive credit for both Capilano Philosophy 110 & UBC Philosophy 102) Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vh) Philosophy (3) Philosophy (114) Philosophy 210 (3) Philosophy (1%) These courses transfer separately. Philosophy 201 (3) See individual numbers. Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy (Vh) Philosophy 203 (3) Philosophy (Vh) These courses transfer separately Philosophy 250 (3) See individual numbers. Philosophy 241 (3) Philosophy (Vh) Philosophy (3) Philosophy (Vh) Transfers with 102 Transfers with 101 Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy (100 level) (Vh) Philosophy (100 level) (Vh) Philosophy 232 (1%) Philosophy 326 (Vh) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy (200 level) (1%) Philosophy (200 level) (1%) Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Physics 104 Physics 100 (3) Transfers with 105 Physics 105 Physics (3) Physics 104 & 105 Students will be exempted from Physics 131 (2) Physics 101 (3), Physics (1) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately See individual numbers Physics 101 (3) Physics 102 (3) Students will be exempted from Physics 131 (2) These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. Physics 120 (3) Physics 121 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers Physics 233 (2) Physics (3)Physics 221 (3)' These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics (1)' Physics (1)' Physics 235 (2Y Physics (3K Physics 211 (3)These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers Physics 0''.') not for credit in the Science Faculty Physics (1%) not for credit in the Science Faculty These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 111 or 115 Physics 110 (3) Physics 110 (3) 108 transfers separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Physics 102 (3) Capilano College PHYSICS Physics 108 Physics 108 & 111 Physics 108 & 115 Physics 110 Physics 111 Physics 110 & 111 Physics 110 & 115 Physics 114 Physics 115 Physics 114 & 111 Physics 114 & 115 Physics 200 Physics 201 Physics 200 & 210 Physics 201 & 211 Physics 210 Physics 211 Physics 210 & 211 Physics 220 Physics 221 Physics 220 & 221 Transfers with 111 Transfers with 110 Physics 110 (3) Physics 110 (3) Transfers with 104 Physics 103 (3) Physics (100 level) (IV2) Physics 102 (3) Transfers with 111 & 115 Transfers with 108 & 110 & 114 111 transfers with 108 & 110 114 transfers with 115 Physics 115 (3) Transfers with 210 Transfers with 211 Physics 213 (2) 110 transfers with 111 115 transfers with 114 Transfers with 115 Transfers with 114 111 transfers with 108 & 110 114 transfers with 115 Physics 101 (3) Transfers with 210 Transfers with 211 Physics 217 {Vh) Physics 215 (2) Physics 214 (Vh) Transfers with 200 & 211 Transfers with 201 & 210 Physics 239 (1) Transfers with 221 Transfers with 220 Physics 216 (2). Physics (1) Transfers with 200 Transfers with 201 , Transfers with 200 & 201 Physics 211 A (Vh) Physics 211 B (IV2) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Science {Vh) Political Science 202 {Vh) Political Science 201 (1%) Political Science 200 (1%) Arts (1'?) (may not take Political Science 302 for credit) Political Science (IV?) Political Science (1%) Political Science 204 (3) Political Science 201 (Vh) Political Science 201 (1V?) Political Science 210 (IV2) Political Science (200 level) (1%) 'Students who have completed Physics 200, 201.210, 211,220. 221. at Capilano CollegB will be prepared to enter third year Physics courses at SFU, POLITICAL SCIENCE Political Science 100 Political Science 101 Political Science 102 Political Science 104 Political Science 120 Political Science 111 (3) Political Science 212 (3) Political Science 131 (3) Political Science 221 (3) Political Science 251 (3) Political Science 201 Political Science 203 Political Science 201 & 203 Political Science 241 (3) Political Science 141 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Science 211 (3) Political Science 206 Political Science 203 (1Vz) Political Science (200 level) (1%) Political Science 240 (1W) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Science (200 level) (IV2) i 137 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia University of Victoria Psychology [Vk) Psychology [Vk) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology (100 level) (Vk) Psychology (100 level) [Vk) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 200 Psychology (3) Psychology (3) Psychology 101 (3). Psychology (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 360 13) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology (100 level) (1%) Psychology 201 Psychology (3) Psychology 204 Psychology 351 (3) Psychology 205 Psychology 206 Psychology 220 Psychology 222 Psychology 220 & 222 Psychology (3) Psychology 355 (3) Psychology 370 (3) Psychology 340 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. PSYCHOLOGY Psychology 100 Psychology 101 Psychology 100 & 101 Psychology 100 & 201 Psychology 100 & 204 Psychology 100 & 200 or 205 Psychology (1%) (may not take Psychology 308 for credit) Psychology (Vh) (may not take Psychology 308 for credit) Psychology (1%) (may not take Psychology 301 for credit) Psychology (Vk) Psychology (Vk) Psychology (1%)* Psychology (1'/;>)' Psychology 206 (3)" Psychology (200 level) (Vk) Psychology (100 level) (Vk) Psychology (200 level) (Vk) Psychology (200 level) (Vh) Psychology (200 level) (Vh) Psychology (200 level) (1%) Psychology 220 (3) "Students granted credit for Capilano Psychology'220 and/or 222 will not receive credit for UBC Psychology 300 and/or 305 respectively. NOTE: Maximum advance credit permitted in Psychology is 9 units. QUEBEC STUDIES Quebec Studies 100 Quebec Studies 101 Quebec Studies 100 & 101 French 140 (3) French 140 (3) French 140 (3), CN.S. 200 (3) French (2nd year) [Vh) French (2nd year) (Vk) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. RECREATION Recreation 160 Recreation 180 Kinesiology 143 (3) Kinesiology 143 (3) RELIGIOUS STUDIES Religious Studies 100 Religious Studies 101 Religious Studies 100 & 101 Religious Studies 102 Religious Studies 103 Religious Studies 102 & 103 Religious Studies 210 Religious Studies 211 138 Religious Studies (3) Religious Studies (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Religious Studies (3) Religious Studies (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Religious Studies (3) Religious Studies (3) Religious Studies [Vk) Religious Studies (1%) Religious Studies 100 (3) Transfers with 103 Transfers with 102 Religious Studies 100 (3) Humanities (100 level) [Vh) Humanities (100 level) (Vh) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Transfers with 103 Transfers with 102 Humanities (100 level) (Vk) Religious Studies [Vk) Religious Studies (Vk) Humanities (200 level) (1%) Humanities (200 level) [11) Capilano College University of Victoria Simon Fraser University University of British Columbia S.A. 150 (3) S.A. 250 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. S.A. (3) S.A. (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. S.A. 260 (3) S.A. 280 (3) S.A. (3) Communications 230 (3) Transfers with 101 Sociology (Vk) Transfers with 100 Sociology (1%) Sociology 200 (3) (1st or 2nd year) Sociology 100 (3) SOCIOLOGY Sociology 100 Sociology 101 Sociology 100 & 101 Sociology 200 Sociology 201 Sociology 200 & 201 Sociology 210 Sociology 211 Sociology 222 Sociology 223 \ Sociology (Vk) Sociology (Vk) Sociology 210 (3) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 200 Sociology 200 (3) Sociology (Vk) Sociology (Vk) (2nd year) Sociology (Vk) Sociology (Vk) (2nd year) Sociology (100 level) (1%) Sociology (200 level) (Vk) Sociology (100 level) (Vk) Sociology (200 level) (114) FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON SOCIOLOGY SEE 1 PAGE 137 SPANISH Spanish 100 & 101 Spanish 108 Spanish 200 & 201 For information on the transferability Spanish 100 (3) of any one of the following Spanish courses see footnote 3 Page 137 Spanish 100 (3) Spanish 200 (3) Spanish 100 (3) Spanish 260 (3) (grade of "C+" required, oral test if continuing in Spanish) THEATRE Theatre 100 Theatre 101 Theatre 100 & 101 Theatre 120 Theatre 121 Theatre 120 & 121 Theatre 200 Theatre 201 Theatre (Studio) (3) Theatre (Studio) (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Theatre History (3) Theatre History (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Theatre (Studio) (3) Theatre (Studio) (3) Theatre (Vk) Theatre (Vk) Theatre 120 (3) Theatre (100 level) (Vk) Theatre (100 level) (Vk) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers Transfers with 121 Transfers with 120 Theatre 100 (3) Theatre (1%) Theatre (1V?) Theatre (200 level) (Vk) Theatre (200 level) (134) Arts (Vh) English (100 level) (114) Theatre (1%) Theatre (Vk) Theatre 200 (3) WOMEN'S STUDIES Women's Studies 100 Women's Studies 101 Women's Studies 104 Women's Studies 105 Women's Studies 106 Women's Studies 107 Women's Studies 110 Women's Studies 112 Women's Studies 120 Women's Studies 121 Women's Studies 122 Women's Studies 122 & Anthropology 120 Women's Studies 122 & Anthropology 121 Women's Studies 150 Women's Studies 151 Women's Studies 192 Women's Studies 202 (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 200 (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 200 (3) S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 (3), Women's Studies 200 (3) S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170 (3) Women's Studies 200 (3) Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies (3) Theatre (Studio) (2) Women's Studies (100 level) (1J4) History (200 level) (Vk) Anthropology (Vk) (1st or 2nd year These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Anthropology 100 (1V;) (part credit) Anthropology 100 (3) Anthropology 100 (3) 139 How to Get There 140 Parking Map < CD 141 Index A. A C A D E M I C DIFFICULTIES 9 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER . . . . ADDRESSES OF CAMPUSES 19 inside front cover ADMISSION - LYNNMOUR. HOWE SOUND AND SUNSHINE COAST W h o is Eligible P e r s o n s f r o m Other C o u n t r i e s W h e n to A p p l y H o w to A p p l y L a n g u a g e Requirement 3 3 3 3 3 3 ADMINISTRATION 144 ART P R O G R A M C o m m e r c i a l Art Crafts P r o g r a m S t u d i o Art P r o g r a m F o u n d a t i o n s of V i s u a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s 59 61 60 59 62 ATHLETICS 11 ATTENDANCE 7 AUDIT S T A T U S " B. B A S I C T R A I N I N G A N D S K I L L S D E V E L O P M E N T 7 . . . 121 BOOKSTORE 11 BOUTIQUE 11 B U R S A R I E S - Internal 15 External 124 BUS PASSES.'. 10 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS Accounting/Financial Management Marketing Management Computei Systems Management Administrative M a n a g e m e n t ' Business Administration Administrative M a n a g e m e n t - evenings S m a l l B u s i n e s s M a n a g e m e n t - evenings BUSINESS TRAINING AND CAREER DEVELOPMENT 69 69 70 70 70 70 70 71 79 B u s i n e s s Office Training 79 Career Alternatives P r o g r a m Legal Assistant S t u d i e s Legal Stenographer Program M e d i c a l Office Assistant Secretarial P r o g r a m Administrative S e c r e t a r y 80 80 84 86 87 89 Word Processing Programs 90 C . C A L E N D A R F O R 1981-82 "2 CANADIAN STUDIES PROGRAM 21 CAMPUS SERVICES 10 CAREER DEVELOPMENT RESOURCE CENTRE .... 11 CAREER PROGRAMS Student C o u r s e and Work L o a d s E m p l o y m e n t O p p o r t u n i t i e s for G r a d u a t e s Exemption Standing Transfer to a n d f r o m Other Institutions A d m i s s i o n C r i t e r i a & Dates 56 56 56 56 56 56 CERTIFICATE AND DIPLOMA REQUIREMENTS CHANGING REGISTRATION STATUS Limitations of S p a c e Course Verification A d d i n g or C h a n g i n g a c o u r s e Withdrawing from a course C h a n g i n g from credit to audit status ... 8 5 5 5 5 5 5 C h a n g e of N a m e or A d d r e s s Right to Register 5 5 CHEMICAL AND METALLURGICAL TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM CHILDMINDING 58 • 5 COLLEGE BOARD 144 COLLEGE FOUNDATION 15 C O M M U N I T Y E D U C A T I O N . . . see C r e d i t Free p r o g r a m s CORRESPONDENCE EDUCATION 9 COUNSELLING 11 COURSE CHALLENGE PROCEDURE 7 COURSE CREDITS 7 COURSE DESCRIPTION C O D E 9 C O U R S E DESCRIPTIONS Anthropology Art Biology Business Management B u s i n e s s Office T r a i n i n g Chemistry Commerce Communications Counselling Group Programs Economics Education English E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e Fine Arts French Geography Geology German History L a b o u r Studies Learning Assistance L e g a l Assistant S t u d i e s <• Legal Stenographer Linguistics Mathematics Media M e d i c a l Office Assistant Music Music Therapy Office T r a i n i n g Philosophy Physics Political Science Psychology Recreation Religious Studies Retail F a s h i o n Sociology Spanish Theatre Arts V i s u a l Literacy Women's Studies » Word Processing 23 62 24 73 79 26 28 91 28 28 94 29 122 33 34 36 38 39 40 41 123 82 84 42 43 97 86 104 1° 87 46 47 49 50 114 61 116 52 53 8 5 4 55 55 9 0 COURSE OVERLOAD 4 COURSEVERIFICATION 5 CREDIT FREE STATUS 7 CREDIT FREE P R O G R A M S 14 CREDIT STATUS 7 D. D I P L O M A A N D C E R T I F I C A T E R E Q U I R E M E N T S ... 8 MEDIA P R O D U C T I O NC E N T R E 12 "DOWN SOUTH" BOUTIQUE 11 MEDIA R E S O U R C E P R O G R A M 97 DOWNTOWN EDUCATIONCENTRE 14 MUSIC PROGRAMS Commercial Music M u s i c Transfer Music Therapy 101 101 102 103 E. E N G L I S H P L A C E M E N T T E S T 19 E N G L I S H T U T O R I A L R O O M ..." 19 F. F A C U L T Y — Refer to S p e c i f i c P r o g r a m s and C o u r s e A r e a s FEES Tuition C o m m u n i t y E d u c a t i o n a n d C r e d i t Free c o u r s e s C o n d i t i o n s of Registration Income tax receipts Fee waivers for senior citizens Deferred fees Refunds Non-registration De-registration ... 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 21 O. O P E N L E A R N I N G INSTITUTE 9 OUTDOOR RECREATION PROGRAMS Outdoor Recreation Management Wilderness Leadership Fitness L e a d e r s h i p Leisure Lifestyling Adventure a n d C h a l l e n g e T r a i n i n g 110 110 111 113 113 112 OVERLOAD OF COURSES 4 P. P A R K I N G 10 F I N A N C I A L AID A N D A W A R D S 15 FINANCIAL INFORMATION 6 F I R S T AID A N D H E A L T H S E R V I C E S 12 PLAGIARISM FITNESS C E N T R E 11 PREPARATORY AND SPECIAL NEEDS PROGRAMS Basic Employment Skills B a s i c S k i l l s in M a t h / E n g l i s h / S c i e n c e C o l l e g e Preparatory c o u r s e s in Math C o l l e g e Preparatory c o u r s e s in E n g l i s h C o l l e g e Preparatory c o u r s e s in C h e m i s t r y E n g l i s h as a S e c o n d L a n g u a g e Learning Assistance Programs Alternative Route for the Mentally D i s a b l e d C a r e e r Alternatives for W o m e n 121 121 43 29 26 122 123 122 121 PUBLIC A N D PRIVATE U S E OF C O L L E G E FACILITIES 14 . FOOD AND BEVERAGESERVICES 10 FOURTH INSTRUCTIONAL HOUR 7 G. GENERAL AWARDS 124 GENERAL COURSE INFORMATION 7 GRADING "I" G r a d e s A p p e a l of Final grades Statement of grades G r a d e Point A v e r a g e 7 8 8 8 8 GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 8 H. H A N D I C A P P E D S T U D E N T S E R V I C E S 10 I. N . N E P A L — Interdisciplinary P r o g r a m to H E A L T H A N D F I R S T AID S E R V I C E S 12 HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES PROGRAMS .... Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n Early C h i l d h o o d E d u c a t i o n U p g r a d i n g W o r k i n g with the Developmentally H a n d i c a p p e d . . Homemaker Program Long Term Care Worker 92 92 93 93 96 96 IDENTIFICATION C A R D 3 INFOCENTRE 10 INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR 7 INTERNAL AWARDS AND BURSARIES INTRODUCTION L. L A B O U R S T U D I E S P R O G R A M LEARNING ASSISTANCE CENTRE-Lynnmour .... Squamish Learning Assistance Programs L I B R A R Y / M E D I A S E R V I C E S , Lynnmour, Squamish . LIMIT O F R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y .' 12 9 R. R E C O R D S , S T U D E N T 9 R E G I S T R A T I O N - Lynnmour, Howe Sound and Sunshine Coast H o w to Register Childminding '. Academic, Career, Vocational C r e d i t Free c o u r s e s 4 4 5 4 6 REGISTRATION SCHEDULE 5 REPEATING A COURSE 7 RETAIL FASHION P R O G R A M 118 S. S C H O L A R S H I P S 17 15 SCHOLASTIC AWARDS 9 1 S C I E N C E S - G e n e r a l Information 21 20 SECHELT CAMPUSAddress & Telephone 13 13 123 12 9 LIMITATIONS OF S P A C E 5 LOST AND FOUND 10 M. M A P S - P a r k i n g H o w to Get There MATH LEARNING CENTRE PLACEMENT CENTRE 141 140 20 inside front cover S E L F P A C E L E A R N I N G (SPL) SQUAMISH C A M P U S Address & Telephone 20 .- inside front cover S T U D E N T ACTIVITY FEES 6' STUDENT LOAN 15 STUDENT NEWSPAPER 10 STUDENT NUMBER STUDENT RECORDS 3 , S T U D E N T SOCIETY & S T U D E N T ACTIVITIES 9 10 T. T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S inside front cover T E L E P H O N E N U M B E R O F C A M P U S E S inside front,cover TESTING SERVICES 12 TRAINING FOR BUSINESS & INDUSTRY 58 TRANSCRIPT/STATEMENT OF GRADES 8 TRANSFER GUIDE 129 TRANSFER TO A N D FROM OTHER INSTITUTIONS Academic 20 Career 57 TUTORIALS 13 V. V I S I T O R S 7 VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS 58 VOCATIONAL. PRE-EMPLOYMENT AND UPGRADING PROGRAMS 120 B u i l d i n g Material S u p p l y W o r k e r Carpentry - Pre-Apprenticeship Heavy E q u i p m e n t O p e r a t o r Landscape and Grounds Maintenance Worker Retail S a l e s T r a i n i n g S m a l l E n g i n e Repair Waiter/Waitress T r a i n i n g Welding and Fabrication Program Automotive and Small Engine Repair Carpentry and Household Repair W. W H Y C O M E T O C A P I L A N O ? 13 WOMEN'S STUDIES PROGRAM 20 WORK STUDY PROGRAM 15 College Board M e m b e r s G e n e r a l Administration Lynne Connell, Government Appointee David C r a i g , G o v e r n m e n t A p p o i n t e e Ian Edgar, S c h o o l Dist. 45 B r i a n H o d g i n s , S c h o o l Dist. 46 C a r l Hunter, S c h o o l Dist, 45 T J . M a c D o n a l d , S c h o o l Dist. 48 Norris Martin, Government Appointee Marion Reeves, Government Appointee Hilda Rizun, Government Appointee Verna S m e l o v s k y , S c h o o l Dist. 44 Dr. Lalit M . Srivastava, G o v e r n m e n t A p p o i n t e e Frank W a r b u r t o n , S c h o o l Dist. 44 P a u l G a l l a g h e r , B.A., M . E d . , D . C . L . Principal K.H. Thiel, Grad. Eng., M.B.A. Bursar A l a n P.D S m i t h , B.A., M.A. Director of P l a n n i n g David W o o l l e y , B S c Registrar M. J e s s u p , C G . A . Director F i n a n c i a l S e r v i c e s R u b e n B e n m e r g u i . B.A. Director of P e r s o n n e l David Brewer, P.P. Director of S u p p l i e s a n d S e r v i c e s Ken Hughes Facilities S u p e r v i s o r K a r e n E w i n g , Faculty A s s n . ( C C F A ) Karl K o b y l a n s k i , Faculty A s s n . ( C C F A ) Bill Little, Staff U n i o n ( A U C E 4) Ethel Sviatko, Staff U n i o n ( A U C E 4) P l u s 2 representatives to be n a m e d by Student S o c i e t y 144 1 WOMEN'S RESOURCE CENTRE College Board and Administration B o a r d Representatives 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 Instructional Administration D o u g l a s K. J a r d i n e , B . A . S c , P h . D . D e a n of Instructional S e r v i c e s Franklin C . G e l i n , B.A., M.A., P h . D . D e a n of A c a d e m i c S t u d i e s H a r o l d B. K i r c h n e r . B . E d . , M . S c . Dean of C a r e e r / V o c a t i o n a l P r o g r a m s G . F . Lee, B . S c , M . S c , P h . D . Associate Dean, Career/Vocational Studies D R . Dolphin, B . A . S c , M.B.A., M.Sc. Director of T r a i n i n g for B u s i n e s s a n d Industry